Standard Plans Manual 2011-2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2
M 21-01
Design Office
August 1, 2011
Standard Plans
Environmental and Engineering Programs
JUMP TO A SECTION IN THE TABLE OF CONTENTS: ABCDEFGHIJKLM
EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, AUGUST 2008 TO3, AUGUST 3, 2008 EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO 2008
EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008
EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8 VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8TO AUGUST 3 EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8 EFFECTI EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 , 2 0 0 8
EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012
EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Information

Materials can be provided in alternative formats by calling the ADA Compliance Manager at 360705-7097. Persons who are deaf or hard of hearing may contact that number via the Washington Relay Service at 7-1-1.
Title VI Notice to Public

It is the Washington State Department of Transportations (WSDOT) policy to assure that noperson shall, on the grounds of race, color, national origin, or sex, as provided by Title VI ofthe Civil Rights Act of 1964, be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, orbe otherwise discriminated against under any of its federally funded programs and activities. Anyperson who believes his/her Title VI protection has been violated, may file a complaint with WSDOTs Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO). For Title VI complaint forms and advice, pleasecontact OEOs Title VI Coordinator at 360-705-7098 or 509-324-6018.
To get the latest information for WSDOT administrative and engineering manuals, sign up forindividual manual email updates at www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/manuals. Washington State Department of Transportation Administrative and Engineering Publications PO Box 47304 Olympia, WA 98504-7304
This manual contains standard engineering drawings used for road, bridge, and municipal construction. These drawings have been prepared under the direct supervision of a Washington State licensed professional engineer, who is knowledgeable in the specialized field of civil engineering depicted in each drawing. This manual standardizes fabrication, installation, and construction methods for specific items of work, and complements the contract documents and the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. Updating the manual is a continual process and revisions are issued periodically. Questions, comments, and recommendations for changes are welcome. Contact the Design Standards Team at: (360) 705-7256 (phone) designstandards@wsdot.wa.gov (e-mail) For contact via conventional mail, the Comment Request Form on the reverse side of this page is provided to facilitate routing and prompt delivery. Making a copy will preserve the original form for future use. Attach a copy of the form as a cover sheet when sending comments or sketches made on other documents, such as marked copies of specific Standard Plans. Your questions, comments, and/or recommendations should be sent to: Design Standards Transportation Building Olympia, WA 98504-7329.
http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/eesc/design/designstandards Contact the Engineering Publications Office at (360) 705-7430 if you require additional copies of this manual.
_____________________________ Pasco Bakotich III State Design Engineer
Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction
Page 1
Further information, as well as Bentley MicroStation (.dgn) CAD files, Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) files, and some AutoCAD (.dwg) CAD files, can be found on the Design Standards website at:
Foreword
From: ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________
Date: ____________________ Phone: ____________________
To: Design Standards Washington State Department of Transportation Transportation Building PO Box 47329 Olympia, WA 98504-7329
Subject: Standard Plans Manual Comment
Comment:
See attached
Preserve this original for future use Submit copies only

Page 2 Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction
Comments
Plan No.
Plan Title
Publication Approval Date
Section A
Roadway Construction
Survey Stakes Survey Monument Types 1 and 2 Monument and Cover Slope Treatment Concrete Slope Protection Semi-open Concrete Masonry Slope Protection Wire Mesh Slope Protection Slope Protection Anchors Dowel Bar Baskets Cement Concrete Pavement Joints PCC Pavement Isolation Joints Bridge Transverse Joint Seals for HMA Bridge Approach Slab Embankment Widening at Bridge End with Wing Wall Embankment Widening at Bridge End with Curtain Wall Embankment Widening at Bridge End with "L" Shaped Abutment Embankment Widening at Bridge End with Sidewalk Cement Concrete Pavement Repair Dowel Bar Retrofit for Cement Concrete Pavement Bridge Deck Transition for HMA Overlay HMA Overlay: Further Deck Preparation 8/7/07 10/5/07 10/5/07 8/31/07 11/8/07 11/8/07 6/16/11 10/12/07 8/11/09 6/2/11 8/11/09 9/20/07 6/2/11 11/17/08 9/22/09 11/17/08 11/17/08 10/14/09 6/2/11 11/8/07 8/31/07 2 Sheets
A-10.10-00 A-10.20-00 A-10.30-00 A-20.10-00 A-30.10-00 A-30.15-00 A-30.30-01 A-30.35-00 A-40.00-00 A-40.10-02 A-40.15-00 A-40.20-00 A-40.50-01 A-50.10-00 A-50.20-01 A-50.30-00 A-50.40-00 A-60.10-01 A-60.20-02 A-60.30-00 A-60.40-00
2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Section B
Drainage Structures and Hydraulics

Catch Basin Type 1 Catch Basin Type 1L Catch Basin Type 1P (for Parking Lot) Catch Basin Type 2 Catch Basin Type 2 with Flow Restrictor Catch Basin Type 2 with Baffle Type Flow Restrictor Manhole Type 1 Manhole Type 2 Manhole Type 3 Drywell Type 1 (for Swale) Drywell Type 2 (with Pipe Inlet) Drywell Type 3 (with At-Grade Inlet) Combination Inlet Concrete Inlet Rectangular Frame (Reversible) Rectangular Solid Metal Cover Rectangular Vaned Grate Rectangular Bi-Directional Vaned Grate Rectangular Herringbone Grate Circular Frame (Ring) and Cover Circular Grate Miscellaneous Details for Drainage Structures 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/8/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 11/21/06 6/10/08 6/10/08 6/8/06 6/1/06 6/8/06 11/21/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/16/11 6/8/06 9/20/07
Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction Effective August 1, 2011
Page 3
B-5.20-01 B-5.40-01 B-5.60-01 B-10.20-00 B-10.40-00 B-10.60-00 B-15.20-00 B-15.40-00 B-15.60-00 B-20.20-01 B-20.40-02 B-20.60-02 B-25.20-00 B-25.60-00 B-30.10-00 B-30.20-01 B-30.30-00 B-30.40-00 B-30.50-00 B-30.70-02 B-30.80-00 B-30.90-01
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
B-35.20-00 B-35.40-00 B-40.20-00 B-40.40-01 B-45.20-00 B-45.40-00 B-50.20-00 B-55.20-00 B-60.20-00 B-60.40-00 B-65.20-00 B-65.40-00 B-70.20-00 B-70.60-00 B-75.20-01 B-75.50-01 B-75.60-00 B-80.20-00 B-80.40-00 B-82.20-00 B-85.10-01 B-85.20-00 B-85.30-00 B-85.40-00 B-85.50-01 B-90.10-00 B-90.20-00 B-90.30-00 B-90.40-00 B-90.50-00 B-95.20-01 B-95.40-00
Section C
C-1 C-1a C-1b C-1c C-1d C-2 C-2a C-2b C-2c C-2d
Traffic Barrier
Beam Guardrail Types 1 ~ 4 (W-Beam) Beam Guardrail (Thrie Beam) Beam Guardrail Posts and Blocks Beam Guardrail Thrie Beam Guardrail Reducer Section Guardrail Placement (Cases 1, 2 & 3) Guardrail Placement (Cases 4, 5 & 6) Guardrail Placement (Cases 7 & 8) Guardrail Placement, Median Bull Nose (Cases 9A, 9B & 9C) Guardrail Placement (Cases 10A, 10B & 10C) 6/16/11 10/14/09 6/16/11 5/30/97 10/31/03 1/6/00 6/21/06 6/21/06 6/21/06 6/21/06 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Page 4
Grate Inlet Type 1 (Cast-In-Place) Grate Inlet Type 2 Welded Grates for Grate Inlet Frame and Dual Vaned Grates for Grate Inlet Drop Inlet Type 1 Drop Inlet Type 2 Grates for Drop Inlet Pipe Zone Bedding and Backfill Connection Details for Dissimilar Culvert Pipe Coupling Bands for Corrugated Metal Pipe Animal/Pedestrian Underpass Equipment Underpass Beveled End Sections (for Culverts 30 Diameter or Less) Flared End Sections Headwalls for Culvert Pipe and Underpass Type 1 Safety Bars for Stepped Culvert Pipe or Pipe Arch Type 2 Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe or Pipe Arch (On Cross Road) Tapered End Section with Type 3 Safety Bars Tapered End Section with Type 4 Safety Bars (On Cross Road) Residential Storm Drain, Under Sidewalk Vertical Connection (for Sanitary Sewer Use) Side Sewer Connection (for Sanitary Sewer Use) Standing Side Sewer Connection (for Sanitary Sewer Use) 8 Inch Sewer Clean-Out (for Sanitary Sewer Use) Drop Connections (for Sanitary Sewer Use) Hydrant Setting Types A and B 2 Inch Blowoff Assembly Combination Air Release / Air Vacuum Valve Assembly Concrete Thrust Block Concrete Thrust Block for Convex Vertical Bends Median Barrier Drainage Installation Inlet Placement at Bridge End
6/8/06 6/8/06 6/1/06 6/16/10 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/8/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/10/08 6/10/08 6/8/06 6/8/06 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/10/08 6/1/06 6/1/06 6/8/06 6/10/08 6/8/06 6/8/06 6/8/06 6/8/06 6/8/06 2/3/09 6/8/06
2 Sheets
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
C-2e C-2f C-2g C-2h C-2i C-2j C-2k C-2n C-2o C-2p C-3 C-3a C-3b C-3c C-4b C-4e C-4f C-5 C-6 C-6a C-6c C-6d C-6f C-7 C-7a C-8 C-8a C-8b C-8e C-8f C-10 C-13 C-13a C-13b C-13c C-14a C-14b C-14c C-14d C-14e C-15a
Guardrail Placement (Cases 11A, 11B & 11C) Guardrail Placement, Weak Post Intersection Design (8' - 6" Max. Radius) (Cases 12AC, 12AD, 12BC & 12BD) Guardrail Placement, Weak Post Intersection Design (35' Max. Radius) (Cases 13AC, 13AD, 13BC & 13BD) Guardrail Placement (Case 14) Guardrail Placement (Case 15) Guardrail Placement (Cases 16, 17 & 18) Guardrail Placement 12 - 6 Span (Cases 19A & 19B) Guardrail Placement 18 - 9 Span (Case 20) Guardrail Placement 25 Span (Case 21) Guardrail Placement, Strong Post Intersection Design (Cases 22AC, 22AD, 22BC & 22BD) Beam Guardrail Transition Sections (Types 1, 1A, & 1B) Beam Guardrail Transition Sections (Types 2, 4, 5, & 6) Beam Guardrail Transition Sections (Types 10 ~ 15) Beam Guardrail Transition Sections (Types 16, 17, & 18) Beam Guardrail Flared Terminal Beam Guardrail Non-Flared Terminal Beam Guardrail Bull Nose Terminal Guardrail Connection to Bridge Rail or Concrete Barrier Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 1 Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 2 Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 4 Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 5 Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 7 Beam Guardrail End Sections Thrie Beam End Sections Concrete Barrier Type 2 Concrete Barrier Type 4 and Transition Section Concrete Barrier Light Standard Section Precast Concrete Barrier Anchor ~ Type 3 (Permanent) Concrete Barrier Transition, Type 2 to Bridge F-Shape Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Post Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Pre-Cast) Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Pre-Cast)Transition Section Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Pre-Cast) Vertical Back Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Pre-Cast) Terminal Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Cast-in-Place) Dual Faced Concrete Barrier Transition, Type 2 to Single Slope Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Cast-in-Place) Terminal Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Cast-in-Place) Trans. Section Single Slope Concrete Barrier (Cast-in-Place) Vertical Back Single Slope Concrete Barrier Placement (Split)
6/21/06 3/14/97 7/27/01 3/28/97 3/28/97 6/12/98 7/27/01 7/27/01 7/13/01 10/31/03 6/27/11 10/4/05 6/27/11 6/27/11 6/8/06 2/20/03 6/16/11 6/16/11 5/30/97 10/14/09 1/6/00 5/30/97 7/25/97 6/16/11 6/16/11 2/10/09 7/25/97 6/27/11 2/21/07 6/30/04 6/3/10 7/3/08 7/3/08 7/3/08 7/3/08 7/3/08 7/26/02 7/3/08 7/3/08 7/3/08 7/3/08
2 Sheets
4 Sheets 2 Sheets
2 Sheets 2 Sheets
2 Sheets 3 Sheets
3 Sheets
Page 5
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
C-15b C-16a C-16b C-20.14-01 C-20.15-00 C-20.18-00 C-20.19-00 C-20.40-02 C-20.42-02 C-20.45-00 C-22.14-02 C-22.16-02 C-22.40-02 C-22.45-00 C-23.60-01 C-25.18-02 C-25.20-04 C-25.22-03 C-25.26-01 C-25.80-01
C-40.16-01 C-40.18-01 C-85.14-00 C-85.15-00 C-85.16-00 C-85.18-00 C-85.20-00 C-90.10-00
6/3/10 10/14/09 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 7/3/08 2 Sheets
2 Sheets
Page 6
C-28.40-01 C-40.14-01
Single Slope Concrete Barrier Placement (Wrap) Traffic Barrier Shoulder Widening ~ for Shoulders 8.0' and Wider Traffic Barrier Shoulder Widening ~ for Shoulders Less Than 8.0' Wide Beam Guardrail Type 31: Placement (Cases 1-31, 2-31, & 3-31) Beam Guardrail Type 31: Placement (Cases 4-31 & 5-31) Beam Guardrail Type 31 Placement (Cases 10A-31, 10B31 and 10C-31) Beam Guardrail Type 31 Placement (Cases 11A-31, 11B31 and 11C-31) Beam Guardrail Type 31: Placement ~ 12'-6", 18'-9", or 25'-0" Span Guardrail Placement Strong Post ~ Type 31 Intersection Design Beam Guardrail Type 31 - DS (W-Beam) Beam Guardrail Type 1 Buried Terminal Type 2 Beam Guardrail Type 31 Buried Terminal Type 2 Beam Guardrail Type 31: Non-Flared Terminal Beam Guardrail Type 31 Non-Flared Terminal Steel Posts (40 mph/Below) Beam Guardrail (Type 31) Anchor Type 10 Beam Guardrail (Type 31) Transition Section Type 20 Beam Guardrail (Type 31) Transition Section Type 21 Beam Guardrail (Type 31) Transition Section Type 22 Beam Guardrail (Type 31) Transition Section Type 23 Beam Guardrail Type 31 to Beam Guardrail Type 1 Adapter Beam Guardrail Type 31 Barrier Placement Cable to Thrie Beam Bull Nose Connection Barrier Placement ~ Cable to W-Beam Shielding for Redirectional Landform Barrier Placement ~ Cable Barrier Shielding for Redirectional Landform Single Slope Concrete Barrier Light Standard Foundation Single Slope Concrete Barrier (42") Light Standard Foundation Single Slope Concrete Barrier Sign Bridge Foundation Single Slope Concrete Barrier Transition for Monotube Support Single Slope Concrete Barrier Truss-Type Sign Foundation Impact Attenuator Inertial Barrier Configurations
7/3/08 6/3/10 6/3/10 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/10 6/16/11 10/14/09 6/16/11 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 7/3/08 6/16/11 6/3/10
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
Section D
D-2.04-00 D-2.06-01 D-2.08-00 D-2.14-00 D-2.16-00
Retaining, Noise Barrier, and Geosynthetic Walls

Noise Barrier Wall Type 2 (CIP Conc. on Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 3 ( on Offset Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 4 (CIP Conc. on Shaft Foundation) Noise Barrier Wall Type 6 (CIP Conc. with Traffic Barrier on Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 6SS (CIP Conc. w/ Single Slope Traffic Barrier on Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 7 (CIP Conc. with Traffic Barrier on Shaft Foundation) Noise Barrier Wall Type 7SS (CIP Conc. w/ Single Slope Traffic Barrier on Shaft Fdn.) Noise Barrier Wall Type 9 (Precast Conc. on Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 10 ( on Offset Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 11 (... on Shaft Foundation) Noise Barrier Wall Type 13 (Precast Conc. with Traffic Barrier on Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 13SS (Precast w/ Single Slope Traffic Barrier on Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 14 (Precast Conc. w/ Traffic Barrier on Shaft Foundation) Noise Barrier Wall Type 14SS (Precast Conc. w/ Single Slope Traffic Barrier on Shaft Fdn.) Noise Barrier Wall Type 16 (Masonry on Trench Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 17 (Masonry on Spread Footing) Noise Barrier Wall Type 18 (Masonry on Offset Spread Ftg.) Noise Barrier Wall Type 19 (Masonry on Shaft with Grade Beam Foundation) Noise Barrier Wall Type 20 (Masonry on Shaft Foundation) Noise Barrier Wall Access Door Type 1 (Cast-In-Place) Noise Barrier Wall Access Door Type 2 (Cast-In-Place) Noise Barrier Wall Access Door Type 3 (Precast) Noise Barrier Wall Access Door Type 4 (Precast) Noise Barrier Wall Access Door Type 5 (Masonry) Noise Barrier Wall Access Door & Frame Permanent Geosynthetic Wall Cast-In-Place Permanent Geosynthetic Wall Fascia and Facing Precast Permanent Geosynthetic Wall Fascia Permanent Geosynthetic Wall: Single Slope Barrier Permanent Geosynthetic Wall: F-Shape Barrier Permanent Geosynthetic Wall Expansion Joint Details Backfill and Drainage for Retaining Walls Gabions 11/10/05 1/6/09 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
D-2.18-00 D-2.20-00 D-2.32-00 D-2.34-01 D-2.36-02 D-2.42-00 D-2.44-00 D-2.46-00 D-2.48-00
11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 1/6/09 1/6/09 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 3 Sheets
D-2.60-00 D-2-62-00 D-2.64-01

11/10/05 11/10/05 1/6/09 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 11/10/05 6/2/11 6/16/10 6/16/10 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 12/11/98 6/19/98
2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 4 Sheets

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8 VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8TO AUGUST 3 EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8 EFFECTI EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 , 2 0 0 8 EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8 EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8
D-2.66-00 D-2.68-00 D-2.80-00 D-2.82-00 D-2.84-00 D-2.86-00 D-2.88-00 D-2.92-00 D-3 D-3.10-00 D-3.11-00 D-3.15-00 D-3.16-00 D-3.17-00 D-4 D-6
2 Sheets
Page 7
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
D-10.10-01 D-10.15-01 D-10.20-00 D-10.25-00 D-10.30-00 D-10.35-00 D-10.40-01 D-10.45-01 D-15.10-01 D-15.20-02 D-15.30-01
Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 1 and 1 SW Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 2 and 2 SW Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 3 and 3 SW Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 4 and 4 SW Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 5 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 6 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 7 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Type 8
Traffic Barrier Details for Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls Traffic Barrier Details for Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls Traffic Barrier Details for Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls
12/2/08 12/2/08 7/8/08 7/8/08 7/8/08 7/8/08 12/2/08 12/2/08 12/2/08 6/2/11 12/2/08
2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Section E
E-1 E-2 E-4 E-4a
Bridges and Trestles

Date Numeral Placement on Bridge Traffic Barrier Pile or Frame Detour Bridge with Asphalt Overlay Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles: Handling & Capping 2/21/07 5/29/98 8/27/03 8/27/03 2 Sheets
Section F
F-10.12-02 F-10.16-00 F-10.18-00 F-10.40-01 F-10.42-00 F-10.62-01 F-10.64-02 F-30.10-01 F-40.12-01 F-40.14-01 F-40.15-01 F-40.16-01 F-45.10-00 F-80.10-01
Curbs, Sidewalks, and Driveways

Cement Concrete Curbs Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter Pan Roundabout Cement Concrete Curbs Extruded Curb Placement Extruded Curb Precast Concrete Sloped Mountable Curb Precast Concrete Dual Faced Sloped Mountable Curb Cement Concrete Sidewalk Parallel Curb Ramp Combination Curb Ramps Perpendicular Curb Ramps Single Direction Curb Ramps Detectable Warning Surface Cement Concrete Driveway Entrance: Types 1, 2, 3, & 4 6/16/11 12/20/06 6/27/11 7/3/08 1/23/07 9/5/07 7/3/08 6/3/10 6/3/10 6/3/10 6/3/10 6/3/10 6/3/10 6/3/10
2 Sheets
2 Sheets
Section G
Signs and Sign Supports

Milepost Ground Mounted Sign Placement Timber Sign Support Steel Sign Support Type AP, Installation Details Steel Sign Support Type AS, Installation Details Steel Sign Support, Types PL, PL-T, & PL-U, Inst. Det. Steel Sign Support, Types SB-1, SB-2 & SB-3 Installation Details Steel Sign Support, Types ST-1 ~ ST-4, Installation Details 9/20/07 9/20/07 7/3/08 11/8/07 11/8/07 11/8/07 12/2/08 11/8/07
G-10.10-00 G-20.10-00 G-22.10-01 G-24.10-00 G-24.20-00 G-24.30-00 G-24.40-01 G-24.50-00
3 Sheets
2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Page 8
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
G-24.60-01 G-25.10-02 G-30.10-01 G-50.10-00 G-60.10-01 G-60.20-01 G-60.30-01 G-70.10-01 G-70.20-01 G-70.30-01 G-90.10-01 G-90.20-01 G-90.30-01 G-90.40-01 G-95.10-01 G-95.20-02 G-95.30-02
Steel Sign Support, Types TP-A & TP-B, Installation Details Steel Sign Support Foundation Details Sign Installation on Signal and Light Standards Sign Bracing Cantilever Sign Structure (Truss-Type) Cantilever Sign Structure (Truss-Type) Foundation Type 1 Cantilever Sign Structure (Truss-Type) Fdn., Types 2 & 3 Sign Bridge (Truss-Type) Sign Bridge (Truss-Type) Foundation Type1 Sign Bridge (Truss-Type) Foundation Types 2 & 3 Overhead Sign Bracing and Lighting Placement Overhead Sign Mounting (Monotube Structure) Overhead Sign Mounting (Truss Structure) Overhead Sign Lighting Details Maintenance Walkway for Sign Bridges Maintenance Walkway Mounting for Monotube Sign Bridge Maintenance Walkway Mounting for Truss-Type Sign Bridge Tree and Shrub Planting Details Live Stake Installations Crest Gage Automated Ground Water Monitoring Well Bollard Type 1 Bollard Type 2 Mailbox Support Type 1 Mailbox Support Type 2 Mailbox Support Type 3 High Visibility Fence Silt Fence with Backup Support Silt Fence Erosion Control At Culvert Ends Wattle Installation On Slope Compost Sock Straw Bale Barrier Temporary Silt Fence for Inlet Protection In Unpaved Areas Storm Drain Inlet Protection Geotextile Encased Check Dam Installation Check Dams Erosion Control Blanket Placement On Slope Erosion Control Blanket Placement In Channel Miscellaneous Erosion Control Details
6/16/11 6/27/11 6/16/11 11/8/07 6/27/11 6/27/11 6/27/11 6/27/11 6/27/11 6/27/11 5/11/11 6/27/11 6/2/11 10/14/09 6/2/11 6/2/11 6/2/11
2 Sheets
2 Sheets 2 Sheets 4 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 4 Sheets
3 Sheets 3 Sheets 2 Sheets
Section H
Roadside and Site Development

7/3/08 7/3/08 10/12/07 9/20/07 7/3/08 7/3/08 9/5/07 9/5/07 11/17/08 8/11/09 8/11/09 8/11/09 9/20/07 9/20/07 10/12/07 11/14/07 9/20/07 9/20/07 9/20/07 8/31/07 8/31/07 8/31/07 8/11/09
Section I
I-10.10-01 I-30.10-01 I-30.15-00 I-30.20-00 I-30.30-00 I-30.40-00 I-30.50-00 I-40.10-00 I-40.20-00 I-50.10-00 I-50.20-00 I-60.10-00 I-60.20-00 I-80.10-01
Site Preservation and Erosion Control
Page 9
H-10.10-00 H-10.15-00 H-30.10-00 H-32.10-00 H-60.10-01 H-60.20-01 H-70.10-00 H-70.20-00 H-70.30-01
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
Section J
J-1f J-3 J-3b J-3c J-3d J-7c J-10 J-10.10-01 J-12 J-15.15-00 J-16b J-16c J-20.10-00 J-20.15-00 J-20.16-00 J-20.20-00 J-20.26-00 J-21.10-02 J-21.15-00 J-21.16-00 J-21.17-00 J-21.20-00 J-22.15-00 J-22.16-01 J-26.10-01 J-26.15-00 J-28.10-01 J-28.22-00 J-28.24-00 J-28.26-01 J-28.30-02 J-28.40-01 J-28.42-00 J-28.45-01 J-28.50-02 J-28.60-01 J-28.70-01 J-29.10-00 J-29.15-00 J-29.16-00 J-40.10-02 J-40.20-00 J-40.30-02 J-40.36-00 J-40.37-00
Illumination, Signals, and ITS

Timber Light Standards Type A, B, and C Service Lighting Details Service Cabinet Type B Modified (0 - 200 Amp Type, 120/240 Single Phase) Service Cabinet Type D (0 - 200 Amp Type, 120/240 Single Phase) Service Cabinet Type E (0 - 200 Amp Type, 240/480 Single Phase) Strain Pole Standards Type IV and V Electrical Conduit Placement Cabinet Orientation, Conduit Layout and Foundation Detail Sign Post-Mounted Junction Box Span Wire Installation Conduit Installation in Traffic Barrier on Retaining Wall Conduit Installation in Single Slope Conc. Barrier (Dual Face) Pedestrian Push Button Post and Foundation Breakaway Pedestrian Push Button Post (PPB) Pedestrian Signal Standard Details Pedestrian Signal Standard Electrical Details Pedestrian Push Button (PPB) Details Type PS, Type 1 RM and FB Signal Standard Foundation Details Type 1 Signal Standard Details Flashing Beacon Type 1 Signal Standard Details Flashing Beacon Type 1 Signal Standard Electrical Details Type 1 Signal Standard Electrical Details Ramp Meter Signal Standard Details Ramp Meter Signal Standard Electrical Details Signal Standard Foundation Plan Signal Standard Foundation Placements Steel Light Standard Steel Light Standard: Placement (Slip Base) Steel Light Standard: Placement (Fixed Base) Steel Light Standard: Placement ~ Miscellaneous Steel Light Standard: Foundation Types A & B Steel Light Standard: Base Mounting Steel Light Standard: Anchor/Slip Plate for Slip Base Steel Light Std.: Elbow Mounting on Bridge & Retaining Wall Steel Light Standard: Pole Base and Hand Hole Details Steel Light Standard: Barrier Mounted Base Steel Light Standard: Wiring Details Camera Pole Foundation Details Camera Pole Standard Details Camera Pole Details Locking Lid Standard Junction Box Types 1 & 2 Heavy Duty Junction Box, Types 4, 5 & 6 Locking Lid Standard Duty Junction Box Type 8 Nema 4X Non-Adjustable Junction Box Nema 3R Adjustable Junction Box 6/23/00 8/1/97 3/4/05 6/24/02 11/5/03 6/19/98 7/18/97 5/11/11 2/10/09 6/16/10 2/10/09 2/10/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 6/27/11 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 10/14/09 6/3/10 6/27/11 6/16/10 5/11/11 8/7/07 8/7/07 12/2/08 6/27/11 10/14/09 8/7/07 6/27/11 6/2/11 6/2/11 5/11/11 6/27/11 6/27/11 6/27/11 5/11/11 5/11/11 5/11/11 6/3/10 6/3/10 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
5 Sheets 2 Sheets
2 Sheets
2 Sheets
2 Sheets
2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Page 10
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
J-40.38-00 J-50.10-00 J-50.11-00 J-50.12-00 J-50.15-00 J-50.16-00 J-50.20-00 J-50.25-00 J-50.30-00 J-60.05-00 J-60.13-00 J-60.14-00 J-75.10-01 J-75.20-00 J-75.30-01 J-75.40-00 J-75.45-00 J-90.10-01 J-90.20-01
Surface Mounted Junction Box Type 1 Induction Loop Type 2 Induction Loop Type 3 Induction Loop Induction Loop Details Preformed Loop Detail Permanent Traffic Rcorder Site Installations Weigh-In Motion Site Installation Permanent Traffic Recorder & Weigh-In Motion Details Typical Grounding Details Stainless Steel Channel Stainless Steel Channel Mounting Details on Column or Pole Signal Head Mounting Details Pole and Post Top Mountings Signal Head Mounting Details Mast Arm and Span Wire Mountings Miscellaneous Signal Details Overhead Sign Electrical Details (Monotube Structure) Overhead Sign Electrical Details (Truss Structure) Pull Box Cable Vault
6/16/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/16/11 6/16/10 6/16/10 5/11/11 2/10/09 5/11/11 10/14/09 10/14/09 6/27/11 6/27/11
2 Sheets 3 Sheets 3 Sheets 3 Sheets 2 Sheets 3 Sheets 4 Sheets
2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Section K
Work Zone Traffic Control

K-10.20-01 K-10.40-00 K-20.20-01 K-20.40-00 K-20.60-00 K-22.20-01 K-24.20-00 K-24.40-01 K-24.60-00 K-24.80-01 K-26.20-00 K-26.40-01 K-30.20-00 K-30.40-01 K-32.20-00 K-32.40-00 K-32.60-00 K-32.80-00
Road Closure, with Diversion Road Closure, with Off-Site Detour Lane Closure, without Flaggers ~ Low Volume Road Lane Closure, with Flagger Control Lane Closure, with Pilot Car Lane Shift, onto Passing Lane Single Lane Closure, with Encroachment Double Lane Closure, on Multilane Roadway Single Lane Closure, on Multilane Roadway Single Lane Closure, with Temporary Concrete Barrier Lane Shift, onto Two-way Left Turn Lane Left and Center Lane Closure ~ Two-Way Left Turn Lane Intersection ~ Lane Shift on 3 Lane Two-Way Left Turn Lane Intersection ~ Lane Shift on 5 Lane Two-Way Left Turn Lane Intersection ~ Right Lane Closure, Far Side Intersection ~ Left Lane Closure, Far Side Intersection ~ Multiple Lane Closure Intersection ~ Half Road Closure with Lane Shift
10/12/07 2/15/07 10/12/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 10/12/07 2/15/07 10/12/07 2/15/07 10/12/07 2/15/07 10/12/07 2/15/07 10/12/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 2/15/07
Page 11
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
K-34.20-00 K-36.20-00 K-40.20-00 K-40.40-00 K-40.60-00 K-40.80-00 K-55.20-00 K-60.20-02 K-60.40-00 K-70.20-00 K-80.10-00 K-80.20-00 K-80.30-00 K-80.35-00 K-80.37-00
Intersection ~ Pedestrian Detour Intersection ~ Shoulder Work Shoulder Closure ~ High Speed Roadway (45 MPH or Higher) Shoulder Closure ~ Low Speed Roadway (40 MPH or Lower) Shoulder Closure ~ Short Duration Work Beyond the Shoulder Emergency ~ Passable Hazard Speed Zone, Supplemental Signing ~ Chip Seal Project Motorcycle, Supplemental Signing Temporary Channelization Class A Construction Signing Installation Type 3 Barricade Alternative Temporary Conc. Barrier (F-Shape) Temporary Conc. Barrier Anchoring Temporary Conc. Barrier Anchoring ~ Narrow
2/15/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 2/15/07 7/3/08 2/15/07 2/15/07 2/21/07 12/20/06 2/21/07 2/21/07 2/21/07
2 Sheets
Section L
L-10.10-01 L-20.10-01 L-30.10-01 L-40.10-01 L-40.15-01 L-40.20-01 L-70.10-01 L-70.20-01
Fence and Glare Screen

Wire Fence Types 1 & 2, and Wire Gates Chain Link Fence, Types 3 and 4 Chain Link Gate Glare Screen Type 1, Design A Glare Screen Type 1, Design B Glare Screen Type 2 (Chain Link with Slats) Access Control Gate Access Control Double Gate 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 6/16/11 5/21/08 5/21/08 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Section M
M-1.20-02 M-1.40-02 M-1.60-02 M-1.80-03 M-2.20-02 M-3.10-03 M-3.20-02 M-3.30-03 M-3.40-03 M-3.50-02 M-5.10-02 M-7.50-01 M-9.50-01 M-9.60-00 M-11.10-01 M-15.10-01
Roadway Delineation
Ramp Channelization: Single Lane Ramp Channelization: Two Lane Ramp Channelization: Collector Distributor Road Ramp Channelization: Parallel On & Weaving Section Gore Area Marking Layouts Left Turn Channelization Left Turn Channelization: Reduced Tapers Left Turn Channelization: Tee Intersection and Back-to-back Turn Lanes Two-way Left-Turn and Median Channelization Double Left Turn Channelization Right Turn Channelization High Occupancy Vehicle (HOV) Lane Symbol Layout Bicycle Lane Symbol Layout Shared - Use Path Markings Railroad Crossing Layout Crosswalk Layout 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 6/3/11 1/30/07 1/30/07 2/10/09 1/30/07 2/6/07
Page 12
Contents
Plan No.
Plan Title
M-17.10-02 M-20.10-02 M-20.20-01 M-20.30-02 M-20.40-02 M-20.50-02 M-24.20-01 M-24.40-01 M-24.50-00 M-24.60-03 M-40.10-02 M-40.20-00 M-40.30-00 M-40.40-00 M-40.50-00 M-40.60-00 M-60.10-01 M-60.20-02 M-65.10-02 M-80.10-01 M-80.20-00 M-80.30-00
Parking Space Layouts Longitudinal Marking Patterns Profiled and Embossed Plastic Lines Longitudinal Marking Supplement with Raised Pavement Markers (RPM's) Longitudinal Marking Supplement with RPM's ~ Turn Lanes Longitudinal Marking Substitution with RPM's Symbol Markings: Traffic Arrows for High Speed Roadways Symbol Markings: Traffic Arrows for Low Speed Roadways Roundabout Traffic Arrows Symbol Markings: Miscellaneous Guide Posts and Barrier Delineators Guide Post Placement: Interchanges Guide Post Placement: Grade Intersections Guide Post Placement: Horizontal Curves Guide Post Placement: Bridges Guide Post Placement: Miscellaneous Shoulder Rumble Strip Type 1, for Divided Highways Shoulder Rumble Strip, Types 2, 3, and 4, for Undivided Highways Center Line Rumble Strip Traffic Letter and Numeral Applications Traffic Letters and Numerals (High Speed Roadways) Traffic Letters and Numerals (Low Speed Roadways)
7/3/08 6/3/11 1/30/07 10/14/09 6/3/11 6/3/11 5/31/06 5/31/06 6/16/11 5/11/11 5/11/11 10/12/07 9/20/07 9/20/07 9/20/07 9/20/07 6/3/11 6/27/11 5/11/11 6/3/11 6/10/08 6/10/08 2 Sheets
3 Sheets 2 Sheets
2 Sheets
4 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets
Page 13
Contents
This page left blank intentionally.

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN
LINE DESIGNATION
DISTANCE FROM C L (40.2 FEET)
LINE DESIGNATION
LINE DESIGNATION
L 23+45 PC
98
40
C 2
CUT TO BACK OF DITCH (2.2 FEET) DISTANCE FROM C L TO CATCH (BACK OF DITCH) (25.7 FEET) SIDE SLOPE RATIO (4H:1V) BACK OF DITCH
25 4:1 / BKD / /
LINE STATIONING
68+20
101+52
HUNDRED FOOT INCREMENTS
LINE STATIONING HUNDRED FOOT INCREMENTS
C&G
CONTROL POINT
FRONT
BACK
ALIGNMENT STAKE
STAKE EVERY 100 FEET ON TANGENTS, EVERY 25 FEET ON CURVES FRONT BACK
SLOPE STAKE
CLEARING/GRUBBING (C&G) LATH

STAKE AT EACH FULL STATION, 100 FEET ON TANGENTS, EVERY 25 FEET ON CURVES. NO HUB NECESSARY.
10 F1
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY
S T A
FILL AT RP STAKE (1.2 FEET) CUT AT CATCH POINT (BACK OF DITCH) DISTANCE FROM C L TO CATCH POINT SIDE SLOPE RATIO (4H:1V) BACK OF DITCH
CUT AT ST STAKE (2.9 FEET)
DISTANCE FROM C L TO CATCH (BACK OF DITCH) (23.5 FEET) SIDE SLOPE RATIO (3H:1V) LINE STATIONING HUNDRED FOOT INCREMENTS
E T
FILL (0.1 FEET) SIDE SLOPE TO A 2% ROADWAY SLOPE (50H:1V) DISTANCE FROM C L (16.2 FEET)
SURVEY STAKES
FRONT BACK
DAYLIGHT (D/L) STAKE SLOPE TREATMENT (ST) STAKE FOR CUT SECTIONS
FRONT BACK
STANDARD PLAN A-10.10-00

SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
LATH FOR SLOPE REFERENCES
Pasco Bakotich III

STATE DESIGN ENGINEER
08-07-07
DATE
Washington State Department of Transportation
PORTATION.
R I E S T O U S N A D LL N A
24787 R E G
NOTE:
A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
ST
2 7
FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANS-
. M U YR M L L A W F S H O I N
T
THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON
THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT
OFFSET FROM SLOPE STAKE CATCH (10 FEET)
LINE DESIGNATION
OFFSET FROM SLOPE STAKE CATCH (7 FEET)
CUT AT CATCH POINT (2.2 FEET)

2
DAYLIGHT CATCH (CUT 0.0 FEET)
R V E Y O R
C 2
B I
L 68+20
0
0
D/L 0
23 / 3:1 68+20 / /
C2 / 25 4:1 / BKD / /
A M N O
C2
50:1/ 16 / /
27 /
I S S E F O R P

FILL FROM CATCH POINT TO BEGINNING OF SECOND SLOPE (3.8 FEET)
DITCH CUT TO BOTTOM OF DITCH (0.60 FEET) DISTANCE FROM CATCH POINT TO BOTTOM OF DITCH (2.4 FEET) SIDE SLOPE RATIO (4H:1V)
STRUCTURE NOTE REFERENCE
10 F 1
OFFSET TO CENTER OF BASE (10 FEET) FILL TO TOP OF CONCRETE BASE (1.1 FEET TO TOP OF FOUNDATION)
F 3
8
DC 0
KB
# 23 LUM
LUMINAIRE NUMBER (23)
60
2:1 F / / 2 4:1 28 / /
4-15
SLOPE RATIO (2H:1V)
PLAN SHEET NUMBER (4) STRUCTURE NOTE NUMBER (15)
TOP FNDN
CE 1+04 /
/4:1
1+47
FILL TO SUBGRADE SHOULDER (2.25 FEET)
DITCH SECTION ALIGNMENT STATIONING

35
LINE DESIGNATION AND STATIONING HUNDRED FOOT INCREMENTS
25
SLOPE RATIO (4H:1V) DISTANCE FROM C LTO CATCH POINT (28.7 FEET)
76
FRONT
BACK
FRONT
BACK
STAKE FOR DITCH CONSTRUCTION
STAKE FOR FOUNDATION OF LUMINAIRES, SIGNALS OR SIGN STRUCTURES
COMPOUND SLOPE LATH
FILL TO SUBGRADE (0.35 FEET)

35 73
10 C 1
OFFSET (10 FEET)
STRUCTURE NOTE REFERENCE
3 F 0
OFFSET (3 FEET) FILL TO TOP AND BACK EDGE OF CURB (0.90 FEET)
LINE DESIGNATION
B I
PLAN SHEET NUMBER (6) STRUCTURE NOTE NUMBER (3)
S T A
E T
SLOPE RATIO (2H:1V)
FRONT
BACK
FRONT
BACK
SURVEY STAKES STANDARD PLAN A-10.10-00

STAKE FOR DRAINAGE
STAKE FOR CURB/GUTTER
SLOPE LATH FOR CURB SECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

08-07-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25 INCREMENTS
24787 R E G
R V E Y O R
FILL TO FINISH GRADE (CURB ELEVATION) (0.73 FEET)
DRAINAGE ALIGNMENT STATIONING
NOTE:
CUT TO FLOW LINE (1.26 FEET)
T
KB
F 0 SG F0 FG 14
B 2 468+50
6-3
26
90
A M N O
/
2:1 / /
3
FL
BKC
0+32
I S S E F O R P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA

NOTES
1/32" 3/64"
S D O
W
1/4 "
1/ 2"
T
3/16"
S D O
1. 2.
The Brass Disc will be furnished by the State. The text in the shaded area (see TOP VIEW) shall be 3/16" high and will be stamped by WSDOT personnel prior to setting the cap. Only the assigned identification letters and numbers are to be placed on the Brass Disc. The hole shall be 32" minimum in depth or 6" below the deepest recorded frost line. All loose material shall be removed from the bottom of the hole so that the concrete is placed on firm undisturbed earth. The top of the concrete shall be troweled smooth and the Brass Disc set in the center with top flush and level. The top of the monument may be recessed or protruding, depending on conditions. The Brass Disc shall be rotated so it can be read while the observer is facing north. When the concrete is set, cover the entire monument with moist earth and leave for three days.
W
1/4 "
1/4"
1/8" DIAM. PUNCH MARK OR CHISELED "X" (TO BE PLACED AT ACTUAL POINT)
T
3/16"
SECTION OF GROOVE FOR 1/4" LETTERS

1/4"
1/32" 1/32"
3.
1/8" DIAM.
4.
NT
NT
SU
SU
1/2" 1/2"
1/2"
5. 6. SECTION OF GROOVE FOR 3/16" LETTERS
7.
MO
TYPE 1
NU
3" 1/4"
MO
TYPE 2
NU
10" MIN. 1" MAX.
TOP VIEW
GROUND LINE
BRASS DISC
5/8" 3"
6" R
1/8" 5/8" 3/16" 3/32" INSTALL FERROUS MATERIAL SEGMENT ~ I.E., #4 IRON ROD OR EQUIVALENT, 6" LONG MIN.
1 1/2"
SECTION VIEW
1/8" 1/8" 1/8" 1/8" 1/8" 3/4" 3/16" 1/8" 12" MIN.
LEDGE ROCK, CONCRETE, OR ASPHALT INSTALLATION
SECTION
A
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANS-
32" MIN.
3/4"
S T A
E T
1/8" 3" 3/4"
1/8"
SECTION
SURVEY MONUMENT TYPES 1 AND 2

3/8"

C
SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET 3/8" APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION 14" MIN.
SIDE VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

10-05-07
DATE
SECTION VIEW
SECTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION
NOTE:
PORTATION.
24787 R E G
T
R V E Y O R
To replace a Public Land Survey System (PLSS) corner, consult a licensed Professional Land Surveyor (PLS).
B I
A M N O
I S S E F O R P

RISER RING DIMENSIONS
A (SIZE) 1 1/2" 2"

NOTES
3"
1. 2. 3.
3/4"
Dimensions may vary according to manufacturer. Base to be placed on a well compacted foundation. Monument case to be installed by contractor. See Standard Plan A-10.20 for Monument (brass disc) type to place in 2" O.D. galvanized pipe.
10 1/2" DIAM. CONCRETE BASE 9 1/2" DIAM.
4.
1 - 8" DIAM.
S DO
A A
3/4"
A
1"
APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS
CASE 60 LBS
8" DIAM.
DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL
SECTION
COVER
19 LBS
RISER RING
3/16" 4 5/8" R.
TOTAL
79 LBS
3/8" DIAM.
1/8"
2 3/8"
PLAN VIEW
1" DIAM.
1/4"
10" R. 1/4"
3 1/8" R.
3 1/4" R.
SECTION OF LETTER
3 7/8" R.
3 3/4" R.
SECTION
COVER
1 1/4" MIN.
4" MAX.
B I
5 1/4" R. 12 3/4"
4 3/4" R. 1 1/2"
1/2" 3/4"
S T A
E T
2 - 6" MIN.
1 3/4" 9"
CONCRETE BASE SOIL GROUT 2" O.D. GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE ~ NOTE 4
6"
4"
4" R.
MONUMENT CASE AND COVER STANDARD PLAN A-10.30-00

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
1"
3/4"
5 3/4" R.
3/4"
ISOMETRIC
Pasco Bakotich III

SECTION A SECTION
10-05-07
DATE
INSTALLATION
CASE
PORTATION.
24787 R E G
5"
NOTE:
T
R V E Y O R
O N
9" DIAM.
5/8"
A M N O
I S S E F O R P

L

NOTES 1. Slope treatment shall be constructed simultaneously with the roadway excavation. Hand trimming will not be required if satisfactory results are obtained with mechanical equipment. Slope treatment is used to provide a transition between the existing ground and the cut slope. The intended purpose is to eliminate the abrupt edge and give the area a more natural appearance. The dimensions shown are approximate and can vary to achieve this purpose.
EXISTING GROUND LINE (APPROXIMATELY LEVEL)
D CATCH POINT ROADWAY EXCAVATION
2.
CUT SLOPE
TYPICAL SECTION
LEVEL GROUND LINE CLASS A CLASS B
CUT SLOPE
( H : V) ASCENDING GROUND LINE
GROUND LINE
( H : V)
L = 10.0
L = 5.0
D
+2 : 1
STIN G + SL OPE EXI
D
1 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1 1 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.0
NOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCU-
0.5 1.0 1.0 1.2 2.0 2.2 2.0 3.0 0.5 0.5 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.0 3.0 0.5 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 0.5 1.0 1.2 1.5 0.5 1.0 1.2 1.5
+3 : 1 +4 : 1
CATCH POINT D 1.5 : 1
+6 : 1
~ ~
ROADWAY EXCAVATION
LEVEL 6:1 4:1 3:1
+3 : 1 CUT SLOPE +4 : 1
TYPICAL SECTION
+6 : 1
ASCENDING GROUND LINE
2:1
~ ~
LEVEL 6:1 4:1 3:1
+6 : 1
STATE OF WASHINGTON REGISTERED LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
~ ~
L L
3:1
LEVEL 6:1 4:1
MARK W. MAURER
CERTIFICATE NO. 000598
CATCH POINT DESCENDING GROUND LINE
3:1
D
ROADWAY EXCAVATION
~ ~
4:1
LEVEL 6:1
1 0.5 0.5
MENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
G IN IST PE EX O L -S
4:1 3:1
SLOPE TREATMENT
0.8 1 0.5 0.5 0.8
~ ~
CUT SLOPE 5:1
LEVEL 6:1 4:1 3:1

TYPICAL SECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

08-31-07
DATE
DESCENDING GROUND LINE

1 SLOPE TREATMENT NOT REQUIRED

EQUAL SPACING 6 CENTERS MIN. 8 CENTERS MAX. OUTER EXTREMITY OF BRIDGE 1/8" 3 1/4" 1/8" 1/2"
EXTEND SLOPE PROTECTION 6" BEYOND OUTER EXTREMITY OF BRIDGE
A
SLOPE PROTECTION EXISTING SOIL
SECTION
PNEUMATICALLY PLACED OR CAST-IN-PLACE CEMENT CONCRETE
PNEUMATICALLY PLACED OR CAST-IN-PLACE CEMENT CONCRETE DUMMY JOINT (TYP.) FOOTING
EMBANKMENT SLOPE
PLAN
EXISTING SOIL
SECTION
PNEUMATICALLY PLACED OR CAST-IN-PLACE CEMENT CONCRETE
10 GAGE 6" 6" WIRE MESH REINFORCEMENT CENTERED IN CONCRETE. (SEE STD. SPEC. 9-07.7)
2 1/2"
BOTTOM EDGE OF SLOPE PROTECTION FOLLOWS BOTTOM OF DITCH EDGE OF SHOULDER
SANDRA L. SALISBURY
MENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND
1 - 6"
APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
FOOTING 6"
CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION STANDARD PLAN A-30.10-00

TYPICAL SECTION
(SHOWN ON LOWER ROADWAY)
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE

LATERAL EXTREMITY OF BRIDGE TOP OF SLOPE UNDER BRIDGE

5 1/2" 1"
NOTES 1.
6" TOP OF ROADWAY
6"
The design and shape of the semi-open concrete masonry unit shown is only one example of the products that may be used. The Curb Section shall be used only when the lower roadway cross section requires a curb.
1 - 4"
2.
CURB FOOTING
8 1/4"
(SEE NOTE 2) MASONRY UNIT (TYP.)
FOOTING
PLAN
2 - 6" OR DEPTH OF FOOTING PLUS LENGTH OF ONE MASONRY UNIT
MASONRY UNIT PLACEMENT ON SKEWED BRIDGE

EDGE OF SHOULDER MATCH SHOULDER CROSS SLOPE 5 - 0" MIN. TOP OF ROADWAY
ISOMETRIC VIEW
MASONRY UNIT FOOTING
EMBANKMENT SLOPE
6"
TYPICAL SECTION
VOID (TYP.) EXISTING SOIL
SECTION
19 5/8"
2 - 6" OR DEPTH OF FOOTING PLUS LENGTH OF ONE MASONRY UNIT
SANDRA L. SALISBURY
MATCH SIDEWALK CROSS SLOPE
SIDEWALK 6 0" MIN.

(SEE CONTRACT)
TOP OF ROADWAY 3 1/8" 1 - 6"
SEMI-OPEN CONCRETE MASONRY SLOPE PROTECTION STANDARD PLAN A-30.15-00

23 5/8"
FOOTING
MASONRY UNIT DETAIL

6" (SEE NOTE 1)
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE
SECTION WITH SIDEWALK
CURB SECTION
1 - 9" 1 - 6"

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL MAXIMUM LENGTH OF TOP HORIZONTAL SUPPORT ROPE = B

4" GALVANIZED, WELDLESS STEEL RING WITH A MINIMUM SINGLE PULL WORKING LIMIT OF 10,000 LBS. (TYP.) ~ AT ALL ENDS OF HORIZONTAL SUPPORT ROPES
MAXIMUM ANCHOR SPACING = A (SEE NOTE 1)
TO BE DETERMINED BY ENGINEER
ANCHOR
3/4" DIAM. 619 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE
LENGTH VARIES 4" GALVANIZED, WELDLESS STEEL RING WITH A MINIMUM SINGLE PULL WORKING LIMIT OF 10,000 LBS. (TYP.) ~ AT ALL ENDS OF HORIZONTAL SUPPORT ROPES SLOPE PROTECTION ANCHOR ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN A-30.35.
WIRE ROPE CLIPS
3/4" DIAM. 619 IWRC GALVANIZED TOP HORIZONTAL SUPPORT ROPE 12" FOLD
NOTES
AS SHOWN IN THE PLANS
Maximum anchor spacing (A) for debris and impact loads required as per table for a minimum allowable anchor capacity of 20,000 lbs. Systems subjected to snow loads may require narrower maximum spacing. Hexagonal mesh must meet minimum requirements of ASTM A975 for gabions. U-Section of wire rope clip must be applied to the dead end, and saddle of wire rope clip must be applied to the live end of the rope as shown. All wire rope loops shall include a standard weight thimble.
H 2 8 10 TYPE DOUBLE TWISTED HEXAGONAL WIRE MESH FABRIC. (SEE NOTE 2)
LENGTH ~ AS SHOWN IN THE PLANS SEAM SEAM
MAXIMUM ANCHOR SPACING (A) H

0 ~ 100
A
50 35 20
ELEVATION
SECTION VIEW
100 ~ 200 200 ~ 300
H
50 100 200 300
400 200 100 75
S T A
3" SPACING
THIMBLE (SEE NOTE 4) WIRE ROPE CLIP (TYP.)

Y
DEAD END (SEE NOTE 3)
SEAM
11 GAGE HIGH TENSILE STEEL FASTENERS
SEAM
WIRE MESH SLOPE PROTECTION STANDARD PLAN A-30.30-01

X Z Z Z LIVE END (SEE NOTE 3) SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
OVERLAPPED SEAM WITH FASTENERS
OVERLAPPED SEAM WITH LACING
SEAM ALTERNATIVES WIRE ROPE DETAIL

DISTANCES X,Y,Z AND TORQUE TO COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
PORTATION.
9 GAGE (MIN.) GALVANIZED LACING WIRE, WOVEN THROUGH EACH CELL
E GI R ES E E S T I G S N I E O N L A
35630
NOTE:
3" FABRIC OVERLAP
3" FABRIC OVERLAP
T H O M
A R L KB C S A W S F H A EO I N G
T
MAXIMUM LENGTH ~ TOP HORIZONTAL SUPPORT ROPE (B)
NE E R
9 GAGE (MIN.) GALVANIZED LACING WIRE OR 11 GAGE HIGH TENSILE STEEL FASTENERS EVERY CELL ( ~ ~3" SPACING)
R E G D A N O
F O R P

GROUND LINE DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL 3/4" DIAM. 6 19 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE 30^ MAX

NOTES
3/4" DIAM. 6 19 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE 1 SUGGESTED MINIMUM DEPTH
2 FERRULE
IN
NATIVE BACKFILL
MINIMUM ALLOWABLE ANCHOR CAPACITY SHALL BE 20,000 LBS.
#3 BAR (TYP.) ~ FOUR REQUIRED 4 - 0"
THIMBLE 3/4" DIAM. 6 19 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE
1
WIRE ROPE CLIP (TYP.) REINFORCED CONCRETE POST ~ 8" SQUARE OR 9" DIAM. 60" MIN., PLACE WIRE ROPE AT CENTER OF POST
D 2 IA M 1/
10" MIN. R.
WIRE ROPE CLIP (TYP.) CEMENT GROUT

2" O M L
REINFORCED CONCRETE POST ~ 12" 12" 66", PLACE WIRE ROPE AT CENTER OF POST
.H
IN
FERRULE
#3 BAR (TYP.) ~ FOUR REQUIRED
14" MIN.
TYPE 4 TYPE 1
3/4" WIRE ROPE DEADMAN
(FOR USE IN SOIL)
(FOR USE IN ROCK OR SOIL)
GROUND LINE
E
3/4" DIAM. 6 19 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE
4 - 0"
WIRE ROPE CLIP (TYP.)
MANTA RAY
NATIVE BACKFILL
FERRULE
THIMBLE 3/4" DIAM. 6 19 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE 10" MIN. R. CEMENT GROUT
TYPE 5
#3 BAR (TYP.) ~ FOUR REQUIRED 14" MIN. 10 - 0" MIN. REINFORCED CONCRETE POST (TYP.) ~ 12" 12" 66", PLACE WIRE ROPE AT CENTER OF POST
MECHANICAL ANCHOR
(FOR USE IN SOIL)
TYPE 2
DEADMAN
(FOR USE IN SOIL)
S T A
HEX NUT STEEL BEARING PLATES 3/4" DIAM. 6 19 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE
THIMBLE
IN
FERRULE
M IN .
THIMBLE 10" MIN. R. 3/4" DIAM. 6 19 IWRC GALVANIZED WIRE ROPE
EXPIRES NOVEMBER 8, 2007
COUPLER
D 2 IA M 1/ 2" O
IA
2" M .H
M O
IN E
.H
M L
IN
HOLLOW CORE THREADED BAR

.
CEMENT GROUT
SLOPE PROTECTION ANCHORS STANDARD PLAN A-30.35-00
SACRIFICIAL DRILL BIT CEMENT GROUT
NO.8 GRADE 60 DEFORMED STEEL THREADED BAR
TYPE 3
DRILLABLE - GROUTABLE
(FOR USE IN ROCK)
TYPE 6
DEFORMED STEEL THREADED BAR
(FOR USE IN ROCK)
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
PORTATION.
35630
NOTE:
T H O M
A R L KB C S A W S F H A EO I N G
T
NE E R
R U T A C
1
R T IO N S
R E G D A N O
F O R P

SEE NOTE 2 DRAWN BY: ELENA BRUNSTEIN SEE NOTE 2

SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 2
3" SAWCUT DEPTH
3" SAWCUT DEPTH
3" SAWCUT DEPTH
BRIDGE DECK HMA OVERLAY
NEW HMA
EXISTING MODIFIED CONCRETE OVERLAY
NEW HMA
NEW HMA
EXISTING JOINT HEADER
NEW HMA
EXISTING BRIDGE DECK OR EXISTING L TYPE ABUTMENT EXISTING ROADWAY
EXISTING BRIDGE DECK 1/2"
EXISTING ROADWAY
EXISTING BRIDGE DECK 1/2"
EXISTING ROADWAY
EXISTING L TYPE ABUTMENT 1/2"
EXISTING ROADWAY
1/2"
1/4" ~ SEE NOTE 3
3" SAWCUT DEPTH
DETAIL 1
1/2" JOINT SEAL
BRIDGE DECK WITH HMA OVERLAY
DETAIL 2
1/2" JOINT SEAL
BRIDGE DECK WITH CONCRETE OVERLAY
DETAIL 3
1/2" JOINT SEAL
BRIDGE DECK OR L TYPE ABUTMENT
DETAIL 4
1/2" JOINT SEAL
L TYPE ABUTMENT WITH HEADER
SEE NOTE 2
SEE NOTE 2
SEE NOTE 2
NOTES 1. Use the 1/2" joint details for bridges with a length less than 100 and for bridges with L type abutments. Use the 1" joint details for other applications. Use DETAIL 8 on steel trusses and timber bridges with concrete deck panels. Sawcut shall be filled with hot-poured compound in accordance with Standard Specification 9-04.2(1) and sealed in accordance with Standard Specification 5-05.3(8)B. The contractor shall avoid sawing existing concrete. The construction tolerance to locate the saw cut is 35/64 1/4" (0 min. to 1/2" max.) from the existing concrete (DETAILs 1 and 5).
BRIDGE DECK HMA OVERLAY
NEW HMA
EXISTING MODIFIED CONCRETE OVERLAY
NEW HMA
NEW HMA
2.
EXISTING BRIDGE DECK EXISTING ROADWAY
EXISTING BRIDGE DECK 1"
EXISTING ROADWAY
EXISTING BRIDGE DECK 1"
EXISTING ROADWAY
3.
1"
1/4" ~ SEE NOTE 3
B I
BRIDGE DECK WITH HMA OVERLAY
BRIDGE DECK WITH CONCRETE OVERLAY
BRIDGE DECK
S T A
E T
SEE NOTE 2
1/2" NEW HMA REMOVE AND REPLACE EQUAL AMOUNT OF HMA 1/4" EXISTING HMA
EXPIRES AUGUST 23, 2008
BRIDGE TRANSVERSE JOINT SEALS FOR HMA

EXISTING DECK PANEL EXISTING DECK PANEL

Pasco Bakotich III
09-20-07
DATE
DETAIL 8
1/2" JOINT SEAL
BRIDGE DECK PANELS WITH HMA OVERLAY
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
1" JOINT SEAL
1" JOINT SEAL
1" JOINT SEAL
H A L E NK G A A J W S F H O I N
O T
DETAIL 5
DETAIL 6
DETAIL 7
NE E R
3" SAWCUT DEPTH
3" SAWCUT DEPTH
3" SAWCUT DEPTH
I H N
F O R P


NOTES 1. A typical bridge overlay will remove 0.07 feet of Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (ACP) and place 0.15 feet of new Hot Mixed Asphalt (HMA). Depth of removal and placement will vary for each bridge. Total depth of HMA on the bridge shall not exceed 0.25 feet, unless shown otherwise in the plans. If the existing depth of asphalt on the bridge deck is 0.25 feet, then the overlay will remove 0.15 feet of ACP and place 0.15 feet of new HMA. The existing bridge grade will remain unchanged. FINAL GRADE TRANSITION: The maximum longitudinal taper slope to transition an increase in roadway grade to the new or existing bridge grade will be at most 1 inch rise to 40 feet run (1V:480H or flatter) (0.2% maximum). If several overlays are present, extended taper lengths shall be required to maintain the transition slope (1V:480H or flatter) (0.2% maximum). If the ACP and membrane is to be removed from the bridge deck, see GSP 023106 for deck preparation before placing new membrane. In accordance with Standard Specification 5-05.3(12), when pavement abuts bridges, the finished pavement parallel to centerline shall be uniform to a degree that no variations greater than 1/8-inch are present when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
BRIDGE DECK
0.2% MAX. FINAL GRADE TRANSITION SEE NOTE 3
2.
BACK OF PAVEMENT SEAT 0.25 HMA ~ MAX DEPTH NEW HMA SEE BRIDGE PLANS FOR JOINT DETAILS, OR STD. PLAN A-40.20, JOINT DETAIL 8. FINAL ROADWAY GRADE EXISTING ROADWAY GRADE
3.
EXISTING 0.15 HMA W/ MEMBRANE EXISTING BRIDGE GRADE

0.2% MAX.
4.
5.
PLANED DEPTH 1" MIN. EXISTING ACP
HMA PAVEMENT
ELEVATION VIEW
HMA OVERLAY WITHOUT BRIDGE APPROACH SLAB
BRIDGE DECK
BRIDGE APPROACH SLAB
0.2% MAX. FINAL GRADE TRANSITION SEE NOTE 3
BACK OF PAVEMENT SEAT

BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PORTATION.
0.25 HMA ~ MAX DEPTH NEW HMA EXISTING 0.15 HMA W/ MEMBRANE EXISTING BRIDGE GRADE
0.2% MAX.
S T A
SEE BRIDGE PLANS FOR JOINT DETAILS, OR STD. PLAN A-40.20, JOINT DETAIL 8.
FOR HMA PAVEMENT, SEE STD. PLAN A-40.20, JOINT DETAIL 1.
FINAL ROADWAY GRADE EXISTING ROADWAY GRADE
E T
27695
PLANED DEPTH 1" MIN. EXISTING ACP
HMA PAVEMENT
BRIDGE DECK TRANSITION FOR HMA OVERLAY STANDARD PLAN A-60.30-00

ELEVATION VIEW
HMA OVERLAY WITH BRIDGE APPROACH SLAB
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE
B I
O T
NOTE:
NE E R
I H N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL 2" MIN. (TYP.)

1/2" DEEP SAWCUT (TYP.)
NOTES 1. If a zone has rebar section loss or full depth repairs, then the concrete deck repair in each zone shall achieve 3,000 PSI before progressing to the adjacent zone. Remove all concrete 3/4" minimum clearance around all exposed reinforcement bars in accordance with Standard Specification 6-09.3(6). For tension zones of continuous structures, when a longitudinal reinforcement bar has greater than 20% section loss (or damage), remove concrete a minimum of 3 - 6" on each side of section loss and place 2 supplemental reinforcement bars, adjacent and parallel to the deficient bar, extending 3 - 0" beyond each side having 20% section loss. Mechanical splices may be used to facilitate placement of #4 reinforcement bars. For typical rebar repairs, when the reinforcement has greater than 20% section loss (or damage), remove concrete a minimum of 2 - 6" on each side of section loss, and replace with new supplemental reinforcement, same diameter as original, adjacent and parallel to the deficient bar, extending 2 - 3" beyond each end of section having 20% section loss.
EXISTING DELAMINATION
TOP OF EXISTING BRIDGE DECK
2" MIN. (TYP.)
LONGITUDINAL REBAR (TYP.)
CONCRETE REMOVAL AREA TRANSVERSE REBAR (TYP.)
2.
EXISTING DELAMINATION
DELAMINATION SECTION A B
2" MIN. (TYP.)
2" MIN. (TYP.) EXISTING DELAMINATION TOP OF EXISTING BRIDGE DECK 1/2" DEEP SAWCUT (TYP.)
3. A
4. PLAN VIEW
FOR DELAMINATION AND FULL DEPTH REPAIR
TOP TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)
FULL DEPTH REPAIR SECTION B
DELAMINATION AND FULL DEPTH REPAIR

LEGEND D
LONGITUDINAL REBAR (TYP.) LONGITUDINAL REBAR (TYP.)
CONCRETE REMOVAL AREA
TRANSVERSE REBAR (TYP.) SUPPLEMENTAL TOP TRANSVERSE REBAR
CONCRETE REMOVAL AREA TRANSVERSE REBAR (TYP.)
EXISTING DELAMINATION EXISTING DELAMINATION CONCRETE REMOVAL AREA SUPPLEMENTAL TOP LONGITUDAL REBAR
DEFICIENT TOP LONGITUDINAL REBAR

S T A
DEFICIENT TOP TRANSVERSE REBAR
E T
7 - 0" MIN.
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
2" MIN. (TYP.) EXISTING DELAMINATION TOP OF EXISTING BRIDGE DECK EXISTING DELAMINATION
2" MIN. (TYP.) TOP OF EXISTING BRIDGE DECK
3/4"
MIN.
HMA OVERLAY FURTHER DECK PREPARATION STANDARD PLAN A-60.40.00
3/4"
MIN.
SECTION
SECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

08-31-07
DATE
TRANSVERSE REBAR REPAIR
LONGITUDINAL REBAR REPAIR

(FOR CONTINUOUS STRUCTURES)
NOTE:
PORTATION.
27695
B I
O T
NE E R
6 - 0" MIN.
I H N
F O R P

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD

NOTES
PIPE ALLOWANCES
1. As acceptable alternatives to the rebar shown in the PRECAST BASE SECTION, fibers (placed according to the Standard Specifications), or
MAXIMUM PIPE MATERIAL INSIDE DIAMETER
wire mesh having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot shall be used with the minimum required rebar shown in the ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION. Wire mesh shall not be placed in the knockouts.
REINFORCED OR PLAIN CONCRETE
12"
2. The knockout diameter shall not be greater than 20". Knockouts shall FRAME AND VANED GRATE
ALL METAL PIPE 15"
have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum. Provide a 1.5" minimum gap between the knockout wall and the outside of the pipe. After the pipe is installed, fill the gap with joint mortar in accordance
CPSSP (STD. SPEC. 9-05.20)
withStandard Specification 9-04.3 .

12"
3. The maximum depth from the finished grade to the lowest pipe invert
15"
" 4 2
2 0 "
4. The frame and grate may be installed with the flange down, or integrally
5 "
PROFILE WALL PVC (STD. SPEC. 9-05.12(2)) 15"
cast into the adjustment section with flange up. 5. The Precast Base Section may have a rounded floor, and the walls may be sloped at a rate of 1:24 or steeper. 6. The opening shall be measured at the top of the Precast Base Section. 7. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the basin has been placed.
" 5
*
2", 4", 6", 12", OR 24"
CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE STORM SEWER PIPE
ONE #3 BAR FOR 6" HEIGHT INCREMENT (SPACED EQUALLY)
RECTANGULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION
THE ENGI NEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBL I CATI ON, I S KEPT ON
FI L E AT THE W ASHI NGTON STATE DEPARTM ENT OF TRANS-
BUT AN EL ECTRONI C DUPL I CATE. THE ORI GI NAL , SI GNED BY
6 )
) . P Y T ( . N I "M 4
T A
E T
#3 BAR EACH CORNER 2 1 "M I N.
#3 BAR EACH CORNER 18" MIN.
44535
CATCH BASIN TYPE 1

#3 BAR HOOP EACH SIDE #3 BAR HOOP
STANDARD PLAN B-5.20-01

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION 4 "
#3 BAR EACH WAY
Pasco Bakotich III

(SEE NOTE 1)
06-16-11
DATE
PRECAST BASE SECTION
ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION
NOTE: THI S PL AN I S NOT A L EGAL ENGI NEERI NG
C A S S
.K M R A Y W M E S FA H O I N
N O T
PORTATI ON. A COPY M AY BE OBTAI NED UPON REQUEST.
) " E 6 6 2 T O N E E S (
3 "
NE E R
4 4 "
DOCUM ENT
( S E E 2 2 NO" T E
" 4 3
3 0 "
SOLID WALL PVC (STD. SPEC. 9-05.12(1))
shall be 5.
R E
F O R P


NOTES PIPE ALLOWANCES 1. As acceptable alternatives to the rebar shown in the PRECAST BASE SECTION, fibers (placed according to the Standard Specifications), or
MAXIMUM
wire mesh having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot, shall be used with the minimum required rebar shown in the ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION. Wire mesh shall not be placed in the knockouts.
PIPE MATERIAL
INSIDE DIAMETER
18"
2. The knockout shall not be greater than 26", in any direction. Knockouts FRAME AND VANED GRATE
ALL METAL PIPE 21"
shall have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum. Provide a 1.5" minimum gap between the knockout wall and the outside of the pipe. After the pipe is installed, fill the gap with joint mortar in accordance
withStandard Specification 9-04.3 .

18"
" 4 3
3 0 "
" 4 2
3. The maximum depth from the finished grade to the lowest pipe invert
21"
4. The frame and grate may be installed with the flange down or integrally
" 5
5 "
PROFILE WALL PVC (STD. SPEC. 9-05.12(2))
21"
cast into the adjustment section with flange up. 5. The Precast Base Section may have a rounded floor, and the walls may be sloped at a rate of 1:24 or steeper. 6. The opening shall be measured at the top of the Precast Base Section. 7. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the basin has been placed.
*
2", 4", 6", 12", OR 24"
CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE STORM SEWER PIPE
ONE #3 BAR FOR EACH 6" HEIGHT INCREMENT, SPACED EQUALLY
) . P Y T ( . N MI 4
#3 BAR EACH CORNER
" 8
2 "
T A
E T
44535
#3 BAR TWO #3 BAR HOOPS EACH CORNER
REDUCING SECTION
#3 BAR EACH SIDE
CATCH BASIN TYPE 1L

1 6 "M I N.

4 " #3 BAR EACH WAY APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
Pasco Bakotich III

(SEE NOTE 1)
06-16-11
DATE
C A S S
8 "
N O T
" 4 2
6 "
" 4 4
NE E R
DOCUM ENT
2 0 "
" 0 4
3 6 "
) " E 6 2 3 T O N E E S (
( S E E
#3 BAR HOOP
18" MIN.
2 NO 8 " T E
6 )
2 0 "
shall be 5.
R E
F O R P


NOTES 1. As acceptable alternatives to the rebar shown in the PRECAST BASE SECTION, fibers (placed according to the Standard Specifications), or wire mesh having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot, shall be used with the minimum required rebar shown in the ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION. Wire mesh shall not be placed in the knockouts. 2. The knockout diameter shall not be greater than 18". Knockouts shall
FRAME AND VANED GRATE
have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum. Provide a 1.5" minimum gap between the knockout wall and the outside of the pipe. After the pipe is installed, fill the gap with joint mortar in accordance withStandard Specification 9-04.3 .
" 4 3
3 0 "
" 5
5 "
4. The frame and grate may be installed with the flange down, or integrally cast into the adjustment section with flange up. 5. The Precast Base Section may have a rounded floor, and the walls may be sloped at a rate of 1:24 or steeper.
2", 4", 6", 12", OR 24"
6. The opening shall be measured at the top of the Precast Base Section. 7. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the basin has been placed.
ONE #3 BAR FOR EACH 6" HEIGHT INCREMENT, SPACED EQUALLY
) " E 6 6 2 T O N E E S ( N. I "M 4
( S E E
2 NO 2 " T E
6 ) 4 "M I N.
) " E 6 6 2 T O N E E S ( N. I "M 4
( S E E
2 NO 2 " T E
6 ) 4 "M I N.
T A
E T
#3 BAR EACH CORNER
#3 BAR EACH CORNER
18" MIN. 5 6 " " 5 6
44535
#3 BAR HOOP N. 3 2 "M I N. 3 2 "M I #3 BAR HOOP
CATCH BASIN TYPE 1P (FOR PARKING LOT)

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET #3 BAR EACH SIDE APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION 4 " 4 " #3 BAR EACH WAY
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
(SEE NOTE 1)
C A S S
N O T
NE E R
" 4 2
2 0 "
3. The maximum depth from the finished grade to the lowest pipe invert shall be 5.
DOCUM ENT
R E
F O R P


NOTES 1. 2. No steps are required when height is 4 or less. The bottom of the precast catch basin may be sloped to facilitate cleaning. The rectangular frame and grate may be installed with the flange up or down. The frame may be cast into the adjustment section. Knockouts shall have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum. Provide a 1.5" minimum gap between the knockout wall and the outside of the pipe. After the pipe is installed, fill the gap with joint mortar in accordance with Standard Specification 9-04.3.
CATCH BASIN FRAME AND VANED GRATE OR MANHOLE RING AND COVER 28" MAX.
3.
HANDHOLD
4.
16" MAX.
4" MIN.
RECTANGULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION OR CIRCULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION
15 - 0" MAX. (FOR MAINTENANCE)
FLAT SLAB TOP
CATCH BASIN DIMENSIONS

CATCH BASIN DIAMETER
48", 54", 60", 72", 84" OR 96"
WALL
BASE
MAXIMUM KNOCKOUT SIZE 36" 42" 48" 60" 72" 84"
MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN KNOCKOUTS 8" 8" 8" 12" 12" 12"
BASE REINFORCING STEEL in2/ft. IN EACH DIRECTION SEPARATE BASE 0.23 0.19 0.25 0.35 0.39 0.39 INTEGRAL BASE 0.15 0.19 0.25 0.24 0.29 0.29
THICKNESS THICKNESS
48"
MORTAR (TYP.)
4" 4.5" 5" 6" 8" 8"
6" 8" 8" 8" 12" 12"
54" 60"
STEPS OR LADDER
72" 84" 96"

(TYP.)
PIPE ALLOWANCES
CATCH
12" MAX.
PIPE MATERIAL WITH MAXIMUM INSIDE DIAMETER ALL METAL 30" 36" 42" 54" 60" 72" SOLID WALL PVC 2 27" 27" 36" 36" 36" 36" PROFILE WALL PVC 3
1" MIN.
BASIN
REINFORCING STEEL (TYP.) GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING
MORTAR FILLET
12"
M A T
48" 54" 60"
24" 30" 36" 42" 54" 60"
24" 30" 36" 42" 54" 60"
30" 36" 42"
S T A
E T
6"
6"
SEPARATE BASE
CAST-IN-PLACE
INTEGRAL BASE
PRECAST WITH RISER
84"
"O" RING 12" GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING 1 2 3
48" 48"
EXPIRES JULY 1, 2007
Corrugated Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe (Std. Spec. 9-05.20) (Std. Spec. 9-05.12(1)) (Std. Spec. 9-05.12(2))
6"
CATCH BASIN TYPE 2
SEPARATE BASE
PRECAST

Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
NOTE:
96"
PORTATION.
15588
72"
48"
. WJ W E I H T T A W S F H O I N
O T
DIAMETER
CONCRETE
CPSSP
NE E R
24" MIN.
2.5" MAX.
12"
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES 1. The pipe supports and the flow restrictor shall be constructed of the same material and be anchored at a maximum spacing of 36". Attach the pipe supports to the manhole with 5/8" stainless steel expansion bolts or embed the supports into the manhole wall 2". The vertical riser stem of the flow restrictor shall be the same diameter as the horizontal outlet pipe with a minimum diameter of 8". The flow restrictor shall be fabricated from one of the following materials: 0.060" Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Drain Pipe 0.064" Corrugated Galvanized Steel Drain Pipe with Treatment 1 0.064" Corrugated Aluminized Steel Drain Pipe 0.060" Aluminum alloy flat sheet, in accordance with ASTM B 209, 5052 H32 or EPS High Density Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe 4. The frame and ladder or steps are to be offset so that: the shear gate is visible from the top; the climb-down space is clear of the riser and gate; the frame is clear of the curb. The multi-orifice elbows may be located as shown, or all placed on one side of the riser to assure ladder clearance. The size of the elbows and their placement shall be specified in the Contract. Restrictor plate with orifice as specified in the Contract. The opening is to be cut round and smooth. The shear gate shall be made of aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 26 and ASTM B 275, designation ZG32A; or cast iron in accordance with ASTM A 48, Class 30B. The lift handle shall be made of a similar metal to the gate (to prevent galvanic corrosion), it may be of solid rod or hollow tubing, with adjustable hook as required. A neoprene rubber gasket is required between the riser mounting flange and the gate flange. Install the gate so that the level-line mark is level when the gate is closed. The mating surfaces of the lid and the body shall be machined for proper fit.
24 "
A R
M IN . A N C E
REMOVABLE WATERTIGHT COUPLING
2.
3.
PLATE WITH ORIFICE
ELBOW DETAIL A
5.
6.
PLAN VIEW
7.
ADJUSTABLE LOCK HOOK WITH LOCK SCREW
1" DIAM. ROD OR TUBING MANHOLE RING AND COVER WITH LOCKING BOLTS, MARKED "DRAIN"
4" MIN. 16" MAX. 6" MIN.
All shear gate bolts shall be stainless steel.

HANDHOLD LIFT HANDLE ATTACHMENT
8.
The shear gate maximum opening shall be controlled by limited hinge movement, a stop tab, or some other device. Alternative shear gate designs are acceptable if material specifications are met and flange bolt pattern matches.
SET OVERFLOW ELEVATION TO PROVIDE DETENTION AS SHOWN IN THE CONTRACT
9.
STEPS OR LADDER
LIFT HANDLE
PIPE SUPPORT ~ 3" x 0.075" ALUMINUM OR 3" x 0.079" STEEL (SEE NOTE 1)
12" MIN.
SHEAR GATE 8" MIN. DIAM.
S T A
E T
OUTLET
. . . . .. . . . . .
INLET
. . .. . . .. . .
MAXIMUM OPENING 1/2" HOLES ON 10 3/8" BOLT CIRCLE
24"
MORTAR (TYP.)
FLOW RESTRICTOR RESTRICTOR PLATE WITH ORIFICE (SEE NOTE 6)
54" DIAM. MIN.
CATCH BASIN TYPE 2 WITH FLOW RESTRICTOR

LEVEL LINE (SEE NOTE 7)
24"

CLOSED SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
FRONT
SIDE
VIEW
A SHEAR GATE DETAILS
APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
LIFT HANDLE
NE E R
. . . . . . .. . .. .
. IN CE "M N 24 RA EA CL
. . . .. . . . . . .
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES
6" MIN.
1. 2.
See Contract for size and location of all pipes and orifices. Baffle wall shall have #4 Bar at 12" spacing each way. Precast baffle shall be keyed and grouted in place. Bottom orifice plate shall be galvanized steel with a minimum thickness of 1/4". Attach orifice with 1/2" stainless steel bolts. Upper flow orifice plates and elbows shall be aluminum, aluminized steel or galvanized steel. Galvanized steel shall have Treatment 1.
ELBOW ~ SEE DETAIL GROUTED BAFFLE WALL
REMOVABLE, WATERTIGHT COUPLING
3. 4.
5. A
BAFFLE WALL PLATE WITH ORIFICE
ELBOW DETAIL
PLAN
MANHOLE RING ~ COVER REMOVED FOR CLARITY
ACCESS ~ MANHOLE RING, COVER, AND ADJUSTMENT SECTIONS REMOVED FOR CLARITY
MANHOLE RING AND COVER WITH LOCKING BOLTS, MARKED "DRAIN"
CIRCULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTIONS
TOP OF BAFFLE WALL
6" MIN.
4" MIN. 16" MAX. ELBOW ~ SEE DETAIL ELBOW ~ SEE DETAIL
S T A
STEPS OR LADDER BAFFLE WALL GROUT BOTTOM ORIFICE PLATE
E T
UPPER FLOW ORIFICES
24" MIN.
24" MIN.
A/2
BOTTOM FLOW ORIFICE
CATCH BASIN TYPE 2 WITH BAFFLE TYPE FLOW RESTRICTOR STANDARD PLAN B-10.60-00
SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET BOTTOM ORIFICE PLATE APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
A (72" MIN.)
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
SECTION
ISOMETRIC CUTAWAY
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P

MANHOLE RING AND COVER DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN 28" MAX.
16" MAX. 4" MIN. CIRCULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION (TYP.)
NOTE Knockouts shall have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum.
ECCENTRIC CONE SECTION
MANHOLE DIMENSION TABLE

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN KNOCKOUTS 8" 8" 8" SEPARATE BASE 0.23 0.19 0.25 INTEGRAL BASE 0.15 0.19 0.25
DIAM.
12" (TYP.)
WALL THICKNESS
BASE THICKNESS
MAXIMUM KNOCKOUT SIZE
BASE REINFORCING STEEL in2/ft. IN EACH DIRECTION
48", 54" OR 60"
48" 54" 60"
4" 4.5" 5"
6" 8" 8"
36" 42" 48"
PRECAST RISER SECTIONS
STEPS OR LADDER
M A T
24:1 SLOPE
CHANNEL AND SHELF
S T A
E T
REINFORCING STEEL (TYP.) MORTAR FILLET
. .. . .. . .. .
12"
2.5" MAX.
1" MIN.
6"
6"
SEPARATE BASE
CAST-IN-PLACE
INTEGRAL BASE
PRECAST WITH RISER
MANHOLE TYPE 1
"O" RING GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING 12"

6"
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
SEPARATE BASE
PRECAST
PORTATION.
GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING
15588
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
25 - 0" MAX.
8 - 0" MIN.
12" MAX.
I K C E N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN MANHOLE RING AND COVER 28" MAX.
NOTE
16" MAX. 4" MIN. CIRCULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION (TYP.)
Knockouts shall have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum.
12" (TYP.)
48" OR 54"
PRECAST RISER SECTION

25 - 0" MAX.
FLAT SLAB TOP
DIAM.
WALL THICKNESS
BASE THICKNESS
MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN KNOCKOUTS 12" 12" 12"
SEPARATE BASE 0.35 0.39 0.39
INTEGRAL BASE 0.24 0.29 0.29
72", 84" OR 96"
72" 84" 96"
6" 8" 8"
8" 12" 12"
60" 72" 84"
STEPS OR LADDER
M A T
24:1 SLOPE
CHANNEL AND SHELF
S T A
12" MAX.
E T
MORTAR FILLET
. .. . .. . .. .
REINFORCING STEEL (TYP.)
2.5" MAX.
1" MIN.
6"
6"
SEPARATE BASE
CAST-IN-PLACE
"O" RING
INTEGRAL BASE
PRECAST WITH RISER
MANHOLE TYPE 2

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET 12" APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
6"
SEPARATE BASE
PRECAST
NOTE:
12"
PORTATION.
15588
O T
NE E R
72" MIN.
I K C E N
F O R P

NOTE Knockouts shall have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum.
MANHOLE RING AND COVER
28" MAX.
CIRCULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION 16" MAX. 4" MIN.
FLAT SLAB TOP
48", 54", 60", 72", 84" OR 96"
DIAM.
WALL THICKNESS
BASE THICKNESS
MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN KNOCKOUTS 8" 8" 8" 12" 12" 12"
SEPARATE BASE 0.23 0.19 0.25 0.35 0.39 0.39
INTEGRAL BASE 0.15 0.19 0.25 0.24 0.29 0.29
STEPS OR LADDER 25 - 0" MAX.
48" 54" 60" 72"

PRECAST RISER SECTIONS
4" 4.5" 5" 6" 8" 8"
6" 8" 8" 8" 12" 12"
36" 42" 48" 60" 72" 84"
84"
12" (TYP.)
96"
24:1 SLOPE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12" MAX.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL AND SHELF
. . .
. .
. . .
REINFORCING STEEL (TYP.)
. . . .
. .. .. . . . ..
S T A
E T
12" 2.5" MAX.
6"
SEPARATE BASE
CAST-IN-PLACE
INTEGRAL BASE
PRECAST WITH RISER
"O" RING 12" GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING
MANHOLE TYPE 3
6"

SEPARATE BASE
PRECAST
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
6"
NOTE:
. .
MORTAR FILLET
M A T
O T
1" MIN.
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P

CIRCULAR GRATE ~ SEE STD. PLAN B-30.80

NOTES
TOE OF DRYWELL SLOPE / BOTTOM OF SWALE (TYP.)
CIRCULAR FRAME (RING) ~ SEE STD. PLAN B-30.70
TOE OF SWALE SLOPE / BOTTOM OF SWALE (TYP.)
GROUND LINE
1. 2.
Precast cone sections may be eccentric or concentric. Seepage port orientation varies among manufacturers.
ADJUSTMENT SECTION (TYP.)
VARIES
4" ~ 16"
6H:1V
6H:1V
CONE SECTION ~ SEE NOTE 1
UNDISTURBED SOIL TOE OF SWALE SLOPE / BOTTOM OF SWALE
24" MIN.
NATIVE BACKFILL
DISTANCE VARIES SEE CONTRACT UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE, MODERATE SURVIVABILITY, CLASS A
6H S L
:1
V E (T Y
.)
TOE OF DRYWELL SLOPE / BOTTOM OF SWALE
TOE OF SWALE SLOPE / BOTTOM OF SWALE
GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRYWELL LIMIT OF EXCAVATION 1H:2V SLOPE (MAX.) 10" (TYP.) 5" (TYP.) 6" DIAM. DRAIN HOLE (TYP.) 10" (TYP.)
PLAN VIEW
#4 BARS SEEPAGE PORT (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 2 10"
S T A
E T
5" (TYP.)
12"
48" 6" DIAM. DRAIN HOLE (TYP.) 48" I.D. PRECAST FOOTING WITH DRAIN HOLES 1/2"
DRYWELL TYPE 1 (FOR SWALE) STANDARD PLAN B-20.20-01

2"
6"
Kevin J. Dayton
11-21-06
DATE
CUTAWAY ELEVATION VIEW
PRECAST FOOTING DETAIL
PORTATION.
15588
(TYP.)
10"
NOTE:
M A T
O T
(TYP.)
NE E R
VARIES
I K C E N
F O R P

~ ~ 5 1/2"

NOTES
1" R LEVEL HOOD 1 1" MIN. 1/2" MIN. 6
1.
The asymmetry of the Combination Inlet shall be considered when calculating the offset distance for the catch basin. See SECTION A. The dimensions of the Frame and Hood may vary slightly among different manufacturers. The Frame may have cast features intended to support a grate guard. Hood units shall mount outside of the Frame. The methods for fastening the Safety Bar / Debris Guard Rod to the Hood may vary. The Hood may include casting lugs. The top of the Hood may be cast with a pattern. Attach the Hood to the frame with two 3/4" 2" hex head bolts, nuts, and oversize washers. The washers shall have diameters adequate to assure full bearing across the slots. When bolt-down grates are specified in the contract, provide two holes in the frame that are vertically aligned with the grate slots. Tap each hole to accept a 5/8" - 11 NC 2" allen head cap screw. Location of bolt-down holes varies among different manufacturers. See BOLT- DOWN DETAIL , Standard Plan B-30.10. Only ductile iron Vaned Grates shall be used. See Standard Plans B-30.30 and B-30.40 for grate details. Refer to Standard Specification 9-05.15(2) for additional requirements. This plan is intended to show the installation details of a manufactured product. It is not the intent of this plan to show the specific details necessary to fabricate the castings shown on this drawing.
2.
~ ~ 1/2 OPENING
0 TO 1" CLR. HEIGHT
OPENING HEIGHT 4" MIN.
TOP OF GRATE SEE NOTE 3 FRAME
3.
4.
SAFETY BAR / DEBRIS GUARD 5/8" MIN. DIAM. STEEL ROD SEE NOTE 2
DETAIL SECTION
5.
6.
CATCH BASIN
~ ~7" (~ ~ 0.58)
29" MIN. 1" MIN. TYP. 20 1/4" FACE OF CURB
~ ~3" (~ ~ 0.25)
GRATE CURB OR CURB AND GUTTER
MATCH TOP OF HOOD TO TOP OF CURB (TYP.)

HOOD
1 1/2" MIN.
S T A
E T
29" MIN.
24 1/4"
SEE NOTE 2 (TYP.)
CATCH BASIN TYPE 1 FRAME
HOLE OR SLOT FOR ATTACHING HOOD (TYP.)
CATCH BASIN TYPE 1L
COMBINATION INLET

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
SEE NOTE 1 TOP VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW
FRAME DETAIL
SECTION
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
COMBINATION INLET
FRAME, HOOD, AND VANED GRATE
NOTE:
~ ~40" (WIDE SIDE)
PORTATION.
15588
~ ~34" (WIDE SIDE)
20" 24" VANED GRATE
NE E R
SEE NOTE 4 (TYP.)
SAFETY BAR / DEBRIS GUARD
M A T
O T
I K C E N
TYP.
F O R P


NOTES
PIPE ALLOWANCES 1.
MAXIMUM INSIDE DIAMETER
PIPE MATERIAL
12"
As acceptable alternatives to the rebar shown in the PRECAST BASE SECTION, fibers (placed according to the Standard Specifications), or wire mesh having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot shall be used with the minimum required rebar shown in the ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION. Wire mesh shall not be placed in the knockouts. The knockout diameter shall not be greater than 18". Knockouts shall have a wall thickness of 2" minimum to 2.5" maximum. Provide a 1.5" minimum gap between the knockout wall and the outside of the pipe. After the pipe is installed, fill the gap with joint mortar in accordance with Standard Specification 9-04.3. The maximum depth from the finished grade to the lowest pipe invert shall be 5. The frame and grate may be installed with the flange up or down. The frame may be cast into the adjustment section. The Precast Base Section may have a rounded floor, and the walls may be sloped at a rate of 1:24 or steeper. The opening shall be measured at the top of the precast base section. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the inlet has been placed.
2.
ALL METAL PIPE 15"
FRAME AND VANED GRATE
12"
15"
3.
15"
34
" 2 4" 20 "
30
"
PROFILE WALL PVC (STD. SPEC. 9-05.12(2))
4.
5"
* STORM SEWER PIPE
CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE
5"
5.
6" OR 12"
6. 7.
ONE #3 BAR HOOP FOR 6" HEIGHT TWO #3 BAR HOOPS FOR 12" HEIGHT
(S
" 26 TE O N EE
6)
EE
M A T
(S
22 " N O TE
S T A
E T
6)
25"
#3 BAR EACH CORNER #3 BAR EACH SIDE TOP AND BOTTOM 4"
#3 BAR EACH CORNER 18" MIN.
CONCRETE INLET

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
ONE #3 BAR ACROSS BOTTOM
#3 BAR HOOP SEE NOTE 1
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
"M
IN
T .(
15588
YP
.)
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P

29 1/4" DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA

NOTES 1. This frame is designed to accommodate 20" 24" grates or covers as shown on Standard Plans B-30.20, B-30.30, B-30.40 and B-30.50. When bolt-down grates or covers are specified in the Contract, provide two holes in the frame that are vertically aligned with the grate or cover slots. Tap each hole to accept a 5/8" - 11 NC 2" allen head cap screw. Location of bolt down holes varies among different manufacturers. Refer to Standard Specification 9-05.15(2) for additional requirements.
2.
3.
BOLT-DOWN HOLE (TYP.) ~ 5/8" - 11 NC, SEE DETAIL & NOTE 2
RECESSED ALLEN HEAD CAP SCREW 5/8" - 11 NC x 2" 7/8" 1/8"
3/4" 25 1/4"
GRATE
1 5/8"
FRAME 1 5/8"
2 1/2"
SECTION
BOLT-DOWN DETAIL DETAIL B

SEE NOTE 2
TOP
FRAME CAST INTO PRECAST ADJUSTMENT SECTION ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN B-30.90 FOR ADJUSTMENT SECTION DETAILS
S T A
E T
24 1/4"
RECTANGULAR FRAME (REVERSIBLE) STANDARD PLAN B-30.10-00

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
SECTION
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SHOWING THE VARIATIONS
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
FLANGE UPWARD
NE E R
4 1/2"
3/4"
1 1/4"
I K C E N
F O R P

24" DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA 3"

NOTES 1.
26" R ~ SEE NOTE 2
When bolt-down covers are specified in the Contract, provide two slots in the cover that are vertically aligned with the holes in the frame. Location of bolt-down slots varies among different manufacturers. Alternative reinforcing designs are acceptable in lieu of the rib design. Refer to Standard Specification 9-05.15(2) for additional requirements. For frame details, see Standard Plan B-30.10.
2. 3. 4.
BOLT-DOWN SLOT ~ SEE DETAIL AND NOTE 1
2 1/2" DIAM. HOLE
20"
1 1/2"
3 1/2" 1/2"
3/4" 5/8" 4"
3/4"
1 1/4" 3/4" DIAM. HOLE 1 1/2" 1/2" DIAM. HANDLE
SECTION B
TOP
SECTION
BOLT-DOWN SLOT DETAIL

SEE NOTE 1
1 5/8" MAX.
4 3/4"
1 1/2"
S T A
E T
39" R ~ SEE NOTE 2

SECTION
RECTANGULAR SOLID METAL COVER

Kevin J. Dayton
ISOMETRIC
11-21-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
3"
5"
5/8"
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES 1. When bolt-down grates are specified in the Contract, provide two slots in the grate that are vertically aligned with the holes in the frame. Location of bolt-down slots varies among different manufacturers. Refer to Standard Specification 9-05.15(2) for additional requirements. For Frame details, see Standard Plan B-30.10.
1"
3"
SLOT ~ SEE DETAIL AND NOTE 1
DI
A
5"
20"
5"
5"
3/4"
1 1/4" 5"
FLOW
TOP
SECTION

SEE NOTE 1
24"
1 5/8" MAX.
S T A
7 OR 8 EQUAL SPACES
E T
SECTION
RECTANGULAR VANED GRATE

Harold J. Peterfeso
ISOMETRIC
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NE E R
DIRECTION OF FLOW
NOTE:
M A T
O T
5"
FOUNDRY NAME
3"
5"
5/8"
1/2"
FLOW
2. 3.
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES 1. When bolt-down grates are specified in the Contract, provide two slots in the grate that are vertically aligned with the holes in the frame. Location of bolt-down slots varies among different manufacturers. Refer to Standard Specification 9-05.15(2) for additional requirements. For Frame details, see Standard Plan B-30.10.
1"
2.
3" 5"
3.
DI
A
5"
20"
5"
3/4"
1 1/4" 5"
TOP
SECTION

SEE NOTE 1
1 5/8" MAX.
S T A
4 EQUAL SPACES
4 EQUAL SPACES
E T
SECTION
RECTANGULAR BI-DIRECTIONAL VANED GRATE

Harold J. Peterfeso
ISOMETRIC
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
24"
M A T
O T
NE E R
5"
FOUNDRY NAME
3"
5"
5/8"
1/2"
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES 1. When bolt-down grates are specified in the Contract, provide two slots in the grate that are vertically aligned with the holes in the frame. Location of bolt-down slots varies among different manufacturers. Refer to Standard Specification 9-05.15(2) for additional requirements. For Frame details, see Standard Plan B-30.10. The thickness of the grate shall not exceed 1 5/8".
24"
2. 3. 4.
THIS SIDE TOWARD CURB
1" OPENING (TYP.)
3/4"
1 1/4"

SEE NOTE 1
S T A
E T
TOP
RECTANGULAR HERRINGBONE GRATE

Harold J. Peterfeso
ISOMETRIC
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
DI
20"
FOUNDRY NAME
5/8"
1/2"
I K C E N
F O R P

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD DRILL AND TAP 5/8" - 11NC HOLE FOR 1 1/2" x 5/8" STAINLESS STEEL SOCKET

1 3/8" 1 7/16" WASHER 5 / 8 " 1 " 1 5/16" (SEE NOTES)
NOTES 1. The gasket and groove may be in the seat (frame) or in the underside of the cover. The gasket may be "T" shaped in section. The groove may be cast or machined. 2. For bolt-down manhole ring and covers that are not designated "Watertight," the neoprene gasket, groove, and washer are not required. 3. Washer shall be neoprene (Detail "B"). 4. In lieu of blind pick notch for storm sewer manhole covers, a single 1" pick hole is acceptable. Hole location and number of holes may vary by manufacturer. 5. Proprietary manhole covers without bottom ribs are acceptable. 6. For clarity, the vertical scale of the Cover Section has been exaggerated, it is 1.5 times the horizontal scale (1H:1.5V).
HEAD CAP SCREW (TYP.)
3 1/8" 3 / 8 " 5 / 8 " 1 3/8" 5 / 8 "
3 / 4 "
A
1 19 / 1 6 " ( R T Y P . )
A
1 1 / 4 " 1 1 / 2 "
1/2" (MIN.)
1/4" DOVETAIL GROOVE 4" WITH NEOPRENE GASKET (SEE NOTES) BLIND PICK NOTCH 1/2" (TYP.) SEE DETAIL " B" 1/2" (TYP.) BOLT-DOWN / WATERTIGHT
DETAIL "A" RING PLAN RING PLAN

3 13/16" 27 5/8" 26 3/8" 1 " 1 " 1" 1" 27 5/8" 26 3/8" 1 " 1 "
DETAIL "B"
1 / 4 "
3 / 8 "
6 5/16" 3" 1" 2" 3 / 4 " 3 / 4 "
5/8" 3 / 4 "
5/8" 3 / 4 " 1 1/4" 24" 26 3/4" 34 1/8" BOLT ON CAM TYPE LOCKING DEVICE 3 1/4" 5/8" THICK
2 1 / 4 "
26 3/4" 34 1/8"
~1/4" ~
~ 1/2" ~
5/8" THICK 1 1/4"
RING SECTION
RING SECTION
SECTION
61 / 8 "
SKID GROOVE PATTERN

BOLT ON CAM TYPE LOCKING DEVICE
DETAIL
SKID GROOVE PATTERN ~ SEE DETAIL SEE DETAIL " A" SEE DETAIL " A"
DETAIL "C"
C
~ 3/ 1 6 " ~
24"
TOP BOTTOM
TOP BOTTOM
T A
E T
SEE DETAIL " A"
COVER PLAN
SEE DETAIL " B" 5 / 8 " 1 " SEE DETAIL " A"
COVER PLAN
COVER PLAN
44535
2 7 / 8 "
2 7 / 8 "
2 7 / 8 "
5 / 8 "
1 "
5 / 8 "
SEE DETAIL " A"
SEE DETAIL " A"
1 "
2 1 / 8 "
2 1 / 8 "
1/4"
5/8"
1/4"
5/8"
5/8" SEE DETAIL " C"
2 1 / 8 "
CIRCULAR FRAME (RING) AND COVER

COVER SECTION
(SEE NOTE 6)
COVER SECTION
(SEE NOTE 6)
COVER SECTION
(SEE NOTE 6)
Pasco Bakotich III

LIFT HOLE
06-16-11
DATE
STANDARD
BOLT-DOWN/WATERTIGHT
CAMLOCK
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ISOMETRIC VIEW
C A S S
N O T
SPECIFY LETTERING
NE E R
2 "
1 / 2 "
1 " 1 "
6 "
6 "
DOCUM ENT
R E
F O R P


NOTES 1. 2. For use with Circular Frames (rings) detailed in Standard Plan B-30.70. Slotted Manhole Covers are intended for use with Drywells only. See Standard Plans B-20.20 and B-20.60.
ISOMETRIC VIEW
S T A
E T
2 7/32"
1"
1"
3/4"
1"
CIRCULAR GRATE
1"

1/2"
1/2"
3/8"
1"
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
SECTION
NOTE:
26 3/16"
PORTATION.
15588
SECTION
1 7/8"
M A T
O T
NE E R
1"
1"
I K C E N
F O R P

NOTE Ladder rungs for manholes and catch basins shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 199.
#6 BARS @ 7" SPACING
12" MIN. 12" (TYP.) 6" 9 1/2" MIN.
2" (TYP.)
STEP
IN M .
48" MAX.
20" x 24", 24" DIAM., 48" DIAM. OR 54" DIAM. HOLE

24 "
12" 6" 1" MIN. 2 1/2" MAX. 9"
84" or 96" FLAT SLAB TOP
12"
34
" 2 4" 20 "
30
"
TYPICAL ORIENTATION FOR ACCESS AND STEPS

#5 BARS @ 6" SPACING
PREFABRICATED LADDER
5"
5"
6" OR 12"
20" x 24", 24" DIAM., 48" DIAM. OR 54" DIAM. HOLE 2" (TYP.)
24" MIN.
ONE #3 BAR HOOP FOR 6" TWO #3 BAR HOOPS FOR 12" 8" 1" MIN. 2 1/2" MAX. 42" MAX. 18" MIN.
72" FLAT SLAB TOP
S T A
E T
#4 BARS @ 6" SPACING 34"
20" x 24" OR 24" DIAM. HOLE 2" (TYP.)
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET 1 ONE #3 BAR HOOP 4" APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
5"
8"
1" MIN. 2 1/2" MAX.
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
48", 54", or 60" FLAT SLAB TOP
CIRCULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION
NOTE:
PORTATION.
15588
48" MIN.
NE E R
As an acceptable alternative to rebar, wire mesh having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot may be used for adjustment sections.
M A T
O T
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES
A
54" 42" 6 1/4"
1.
The Steel Angles shall be set so that each bearing bar of prefabricated grate shall have full bearing on both ends. The finished top of concrete shall be even with the grate surface. All exposed concrete shall be finished with a 1/2" radius. The grade line of the top inside of any pipe shall enter no lower than the grade line of the top inside of the outlet pipe. Pipes may enter through the knockouts on any side at any reasonable angle, provided the outside of the pipe can be contained between two opposite walls. See contract for type of grate specified. See Standard Plan B-40.20 and B-40.40 for grate details.
2. 3.
4.
8"
24 1/2"
37"
6" 3"
5.
7" (TYP.)
1/2" 4" STUDS OR 5 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/4" STEEL ANCHORS (3 BOTH ENDS)
8"
1/4 1 1/2"
6 1/4" GRATE
6 1/4"
GRATE
3 3/8"
47 1/4"
3 3/8"
TOP VIEW
STEEL ANGLE
1/2" 4" STUDS OR 5 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/4" STEEL ANCHORS (3 BOTH ENDS) GRATE ~ SEE NOTE 5 7" 1" 7"
4"
4" 3" 3/8"
SECTION DETAIL B
S T A
E T
INVERT OF 18" OUTLET PIPE
GRATE INLET TYPE 1 (CAST-IN-PLACE)

6"

SILTING BASIN
SIDE VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
VARIABLE ~ 12 - 0" MAX.
NE E R
12" MIN.
6 1/4"
I K C E N
F O R P

B
UNIT "H"
UNITS "J" & "K" AS REQUIRED 5
4" MIN.
4" MIN. 1/2"
4" MIN. 5 6
4" MIN. 1/2"
A
10 - 6" MAX. 2"
PICKUP HOLE (TYP.)
2"
10 - 6" MAX.
2"
26"
26"
2 1/2"
3 2 1/2"
TOP VIEW
5 1/2" MIN. 9" 1 54" 37" 2 2 1/2" 6 5 1/2" MIN.
UNIT "H" 2 1/2"
4" MIN. 13
1/2"
1/2"
UNITS "J" & "K" AS REQUIRED
4" MIN.
4" MIN. 13
4" MIN.
5 1/2" MIN. 4 SPACES @ APPROX. 12 1/2" 5 54"
5 1/2" MIN.
5 1/2" MIN. 3 SPACES @ APPROX. 11" 37"
5 1/2" MIN.
2" 2"
36"
10
10
36"
26"
26" 10 10
SECTION
ONE PIECE BASE
SECTION
ONE PIECE BASE
M A T
MIN.
MIN.
MIN.
MIN.
PIPE ALLOWANCES
S T A
E T
4" MIN. 12
4" MIN.
4" MIN. 13
4" MIN.
5 1/2" MIN.
13 24" 11 2 1/2"
ALL METAL PIPE
21"
10"
18"
GRATE INLET TYPE 2
5 1/2" MIN. 2" 4 SPACES @ APPROX. 12 1/2" 54"
5 1/2" MIN. 2"
5 1/2" MIN. 2"
26" 3 SPACES @ APPROX. 11" 37"
5 1/2" MIN. 2"
SOLID WALL PVC (STD. SPEC. 9-05.12(1)) PROFILE WALL PVC (STD. SPEC. 9-05.12(2))
21"

21"
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
SECTION
TWO PIECE BASE
SECTION
TWO PIECE BASE
CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE * STORM SEWER PIPE
PORTATION.
11
5 1/2" MIN.
18"
15588
2"
NE E R
PIPE MATERIAL
MAXIMUM INSIDE DIAMETER
NOTE:
5"
13
5"
5"
13
5"
O T
54"
2"
1/2"
2"
10 - 6" MAX.
10 - 6" MAX.
2"
2"
1/2"
9"
I K C E N
F O R P

54" 54" 2" 42" 2" 6 1/4"

NOTES 1. The Steel Angles shall be set so that each bearing bar of prefabricated grate shall have full bearing on both ends. The finished top of concrete shall be even with the grate surface. Top of inlet grate shall be placed at ground level to present an unobstructed ditch or median section. All exposed concrete edges shall be finished with a 1/2" radius. Pipes may enter through the knockouts on any side at any reasonable angle, provided the outside of the pipe can be contained between two opposite walls. The flow line of the outlet pipe shall be 18" minimum above the inside bottom of the inlet structure. The grade line of the top inside of any inlet pipe shall enter no lower than the grade line of the top inside of the outlet pipe. Unit "H" and optional extension units "J" and "K" shall be grouted in place to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.
5"
3. 4.
8" 24 1/2"
C
37" 37" 2 1/2" (TYP.) 7" (TYP.)
D 5. 6.
E
1/4" x 5 1/2" x 1 1/2" STEEL ANGLES (3 BOTH ENDS) 5"
8"
7.
6 1/4"
5"
5"
3 3/8"
47 1/4"
3 3/8"
9.
See contract for type of grate specified. See Standard Plan B-40.20 and B-40.40 for grate details.
UNITS "J" & "K"

6 1/4"
UNIT "H"
2" 8
GRATE
GRATE ~ SEE NOTE 9
2 1/2" 12" 12"
SECTION
UNIT "J"
F SECTION D UNIT "H"

7" 7 2"
1 1/2"
12"
2"
SECTION
UNIT "K"
SECTION
UNIT "H"
M A T
BAR LIST
BENDING DIAGRAM
(ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT)
S T A
3"
E T
4 - 1 1/2"
1 - 7 1/2"
1 - 7 1/2"
MARK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 13
LOCATION BOTTOM SLAB AND SIDE WALL BOTTOM SLAB AND SIDE WALL BOTTOM SLAB AND SIDE WALL BOTTOM SLAB AND SIDE WALL WALL SIDE WALL UNIT H UNIT J UNIT K UNIT K SIDE WALL BOTTOM SLAB AND SIDE WALL BOTTOM SLAB AND SIDE WALL SIDE WALL
QTY. 3 2 2 2 4 3 2 2 3 4 8 4 3 4
SIZE
LENGTH 5 - 9" 12 - 5" 7 - 2" 2 - 9" 9 - 1" 14 - 6"
DESCRIPTION
1 2 3 11
1/4 1 1/2"
10"
GRATE
STRAIGHT
4"
HOOP HOOP HOOP
2 - 7 1/2"
1 2 3
2 - 9" 4 - 2" 4 - 2" 4 - 2" 2 - 9"

6 7 8 13
4" 3" 3/8" STEEL ANGLE
4 - 2" 4 - 2" 4 - 1" 4 - 2"

5
11
14 - 2" 14 - 2" 0 - 9" 2 - 8" 7 - 5" 6 - 0" 14 - 6"
HOOP HOOP STRAIGHT
12
2"
2"
14 - 2"
GRATE INLET TYPE 2
4"
5 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/4" STEEL ANGLES (3 BOTH ENDS)

2 - 9"
2 - 7"
2 - 8"
2 - 9"
STRAIGHT
4"
7 8 13
1"
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
13
HOOP
DETAIL
PORTATION.
12
15588
12
11
NOTE:
6"
O T
NE E R
1 - 6"
1- 6"
8.
All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the basin has been placed.
1 1/2"
2"
6"
I K C E N
F O R P

46 3/4"

46 3/4"
1 3/8" 3/16"
ELEVEN EQUAL SPACES
1 3/8"
3 1/2" 3/8" STEEL PLATE (TYP.) 3/16"
1 3/8"
ELEVEN EQUAL SPACES
1 3/8"
3 1/2" 3/8" STEEL PLATE (BOTH SIDES)
FIVE EQUAL SPACES
TEN EQUAL SPACES
24 1/8"
24 1/8"
3 1/2" 3/4" STEEL PLATES
TOP
CROSS BARS ~ 3/8" ROUND, OR RECTANGULAR OR HEXAGONAL BAR OF EQUIVALENT AREA.
END
TOP
CROSS BARS ~ 3/8" ROUND, OR RECTANGULAR OR HEXAGONAL BAR OF EQUIVALENT AREA.
END
SIDE
SIDE
GRATE "A"
(APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 215 LBS)
GRATE "B"
(APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 215 LBS)
S T A
E T
WELDED GRATES FOR GRATE INLET

Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
ISOMETRIC
ISOMETRIC
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
3/16"
3/16"
I K C E N
F O R P

12" MIN. DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA SEE CONTRACT FOR BACKSLOPE DETAILS 24" MIN.

NOTES
TYPE 3 GRATE SHOWN 10 1 DITCH LINE
1.
The top of the inlet shall be placed at ground level to present an unobstructed ditch or median section. Bevel or round exposed concrete edges 1/2". Pipes may enter through the knockouts at any reasonable angle provided the outside of the pipe can be contained within the knockout provided. The grade line of the lowest inlet pipe shall enter the structure at an elevation equal to or higher than the grade line of the outlet pipe. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the inlet has been placed. The steel angles shall be set so that each bearing bar of the grate shall have full seating on both ends. The finished top of concrete shall be even with the grate surface. For grates, see Standard Plan B-50-20. The amount, type, and grade of reinforcing steel is the responsibility of the manufacturer. The inside wall taper for form removal shall not result in any wall section thinner than 6" except in pipe knockout areas. Precast inlets shall be marked with the manufacturers identification on the inside of the structure in some readily accessible location.
2. 3.
4.
5.
SECTION ON DITCH LINE
DIKE INSTALLATION FOR PREFERRED SLOPE
6.
36"
7.
18" 1/4 12" 84" TYP. 1/4
8.
3"
9.
TOP
DITCH 30" 42" 4" x 3" x 1/2" x 35 1/4" STEEL ANGLE 4" x 3" x 3/8" STEEL PLATE ~ TACK WELD TO ANGLE
1/2" DIAM. x 4" STEEL STUD ~ PLACE ALONG SUPPORT AS SHOWN FOR ANGLES 1/4
1 1/2"
5 1/2" x 1" x 1/4" STEEL ANGLE
ANCHOR STUD OPTION
SIDE
END
END
B PLAN GRATE SUPPORT DETAIL

(FOUR SUPPORTS REQUIRED)
~ ~42"
M A T
GRATE SUPPORT (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL 4"
S T A
E T
6" MIN.
. 34" DIAM KNOCKO UT
2" MIN.
DROP INLET TYPE 1

6" MIN. 39" SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
SECTION
SECTION
B ISOMETRIC
(SHOWN WITH TYPE 1 GRATE)
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
48"
15588
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
12"
4"
4"
I K C E N
F O R P
6" M IN .

10 - 0" DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA

NOTES 1. The top of the inlet shall be placed at ground level to present an unobstructed ditch or median section. Bevel or round exposed concrete edges 1/2". Pipes may enter through the knockouts at any reasonable angle provided the outside of the pipe can be contained within the knockout provided. The grade line of the lowest inlet pipe shall enter the structure at an elevation equal to or higher than the grade line of the outlet pipe. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the inlet has been placed. The steel angles shall be set so that each bearing bar of the grate shall have full seating on both ends. The finished top of concrete shall be even with the grate surface. For grates, see Standard Plan B-50.20. The amount, type, and grade of reinforcing steel is the responsibility of the manufacturer. The inside wall taper for form removal shall not result in any wall section thinner than 6" except in pipe knockout areas. Precast inlets shall be marked with the manufacturers identification on the inside of the structure in some readily accessible location.
2.
DITCH 30"
3.
42"
4.
5. 6. B
7. PLAN
GRATE SUPPORT (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL 4"
8.
9.
12"
. 34" DIAM KNOCKO UT

2" MIN.
30"
M A T
18" 1/4 12" TYP. 1/4
S T A
E T
4" x 3" x 3/8" STEEL PLATE ~ TACK WELD TO ANGLE
4"
DROP INLET TYPE 2

1/2" DIAM. x 4" STEEL STUD ~ PLACE ALONG SUPPORT AS SHOWN FOR ANGLES 1/4
4"

1 1/2"
5 1/2" x 1" x 1/4" STEEL ANGLE
ANCHOR STUD OPTION
SIDE
END
END
Harold J. Peterfeso
GRATE SUPPORT DETAIL
(SIX SUPPORTS REQUIRED)
06-01-06
DATE
ISOMETRIC
(SHOWN WITH TYPE 2 GRATE)
NOTE:
4" x 3" x 1/2" x 35 1/4" STEEL ANGLE
PORTATION.
TOP
15588
O T
36"
SECTION
SECTION
NE E R
3"
6" MIN.
48"
6" M IN .
I K C E N
F O R P

OPTIONAL 1" MAX. VENT HOLES ON BOTTOM FOR GALVANIZING
3 1/2" x 1/2" x 34 1/2" STEEL PLATE (TYP.)
34 1/4"
1 1/2" MAX.
1 1/2" MAX.
OPTIONAL 1" MAX. VENT HOLES ON BOTTOM FOR GALVANIZING
3 1/2"
FIVE SPACES 34 1/2"
3 1/2"
34 1/4"
TYPE 3
A
3 1/2" x 3 1/2" x 5/16" x 33 1/4" STRUCTURAL TUBING (TYP.) 2" (TYP.) 2" (TYP.) 34 1/2" 3 1/2" GRIND TOP AND BOTTOM FLUSH AFTER WELDING
TYPE 2
TYP. 1/4
SECTION
C
3 1/2"
5 1/4"
THREE SPACES 34 1/2"
5 1/4"
S T A
E T
1/4
3 1/2" x 3 1/2" x 5/16" x 33 1/4" STRUCTURAL TUBING (TYP.)
GRIND TOP AND BOTTOM FLUSH AFTER WELDING
3 1/2"
TYPE 3
TYP. 1/4
GRATES FOR DROP INLET
SECTION

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
TYPE 2
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
ISOMETRICS
TYPE 1
PORTATION.
15588
SECTION
NE E R
TYPE 1
TYP.
NOTE:
M A T
O T
34 1/4"
I K C E N
F O R P

TRENCH WIDTH (SEE NOTE 3)

NOTES 1. See Standard Specifications Section 7-08.3(3) for Pipe Zone Backfill. See Standard Specifications Section 9-03.12(3) for Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding. See Standard Specifications Section 2-09.4 for Measurement of Trench Width. For sanitary sewer installation, concrete pipe shall be bedded to spring line.
PIPE ZONE BACKFILL (SEE NOTE 1)
6"
2. 3.
PIPE ZONE
GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING (SEE NOTE 2)
85% O.D. (SEE NOTE 4)
4.
15% O.D. FOUNDATION LEVEL 6"
CONCRETE AND DUCTILE IRON PIPE
TRENCH WIDTH
85% RISE
TRENCH WIDTH (SEE NOTE 3) GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE ZONE BEDDING (SEE NOTE 2) 6"
FOUNDATION LEVEL PIPE ZONE
O.D.
PIPE ARCHES
FOUNDATION LEVEL
S T A
CLEARANCE BETWEEN PIPES FOR MULTIPLE INSTALLATIONS

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN BARRELS
12" DIAM. /2 48" 12" SPAN /3 48"
E T
TRENCH WIDTH (SEE NOTE 3) PIPE ZONE BACKFILL (SEE NOTE 1) 6"
PIPE
SIZE
CIRCULAR PIPE (DIAMETER)

PIPE ZONE
30" to 96" 102" to 180"
50%
O.D.
PIPE ARCH (SPAN) METAL ONLY
18" to 36" 43" to 142" 148" to 200"
PIPE ZONE BEDDING AND BACKFILL
50%
O.D.

FOUNDATION LEVEL
6"
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
METAL PIPE
NOTE:
12" to 24"
PORTATION.
15588
M A T
O T
THERMOPLASTIC PIPE
6"
6"
15% RISE
PIPE ZONE
PIPE ZONE BACKFILL (SEE NOTE 1)
NE E R
(SEE NOTE 3)
6"
I K C E N
F O R P

NOTES 1. The Concrete Collar width shall be one half of the outside pipe diameter of the largest pipe. The minimum Concrete Collar width shall be 12". Concrete Collars may be used with all pipe materials and diameters. The Concrete Collar option shall only be used to extend existing pipes. Steel Welded Wire Fabric shall be in accordance with Standard Specification 9-07.7. Install two wraps for size 6 6 W1.4 W1.4 (10 Gage) Steel Welded Wire Fabric or one wrap for any of the following sizes: 6 6 W2.1 W2.1 (8 Gage) 6 6 W2.9 W2.9 (6 Gage) 4 4 W2.9 W2.9 (6 Gage) 4 4 W4.0 W4.0 (4 Gage) When a Coupling Band connection requires attachment to the bell end of a concrete pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be removed before the connection is installed. Increase the outside diameter of the metal pipe to match the outside diameter of the concrete pipe by installing 12" wide rubber gaskets, thickness as required (Coupling Band only). The rubber gaskets shall be in accordance with Standard Specification 9-04.4(3). Use a flat Type K Coupling Band. Type K Coupling Bands with dimples are not allowed for the installation detail shown. The Coupling Band option shall only be used for extending existing pipes that have an inside diameter of 36" or less.
COLLAR WIDTH SEE NOTE 1
2.
STEEL WELDED WIRE FABRIC ~ SEE NOTE 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE COLLAR
3.
4.
5.
CONCRETE COLLAR OPTION
24" CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
CONCRETE PIPE ~ SEE NOTE 3
S T A
E T
RUBBER GASKETS ~ SEE NOTE 4 TYPE "K" COUPLING BAND ~ SEE NOTE 5
24" WIDE, 1" THICK RUBBER GASKET IN ACCORDANCE WITH STD. SPEC. 9-04.4(3)
CONNECTION DETAILS FOR DISSIMILAR CULVERT PIPE

COUPLING BAND OPTION
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
6" MIN.
I K C E N
F O R P

REFORMED PIPE ENDS W 1/2" 6" BOLT (TYP.)

COUPLING BAND DIMENSION TABLE
(ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES) BAND TYPE CORRUGATION PITCH DEPTH 2 2/3 1/2 OR 3 1 D REFORMED TO 2 2/3 1/2 3 1 PIPE DIAM. MIN. W GASKET TYPE
12 ~ 84
12
SLEEVE
BAND LAP NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY (TYP.)
TYPE D
ANNULAR CORRUGATED BAND
TYPE D
BAND ANGLE CONNECTOR DETAIL STEEL
REFORMED TO 2 2/3 1/2 2 2/3 1/2 OR 3 1 REFORMED TO 2 2/3 1/2 J 2 2/3 1/2 2 2/3 1/2 K 3 1 2 2/3 1/2 D 3 1 REFORMED TO 2 2/3 1/2 F 2 2/3 x 1/2 2 2/3 x 1/2
90 ~ 144
24
SLEEVE
1/2" 6" BOLT (TYP.) W
12 ~ 48 12 ~ 48 54 ~ 84 54 ~ 144 12 ~ 72 36 ~ 60 66 ~ 108 12 ~ 48 12 ~ 48
2 3/4 12 24 24 12 12 24 10 1/2 12 24 24
BUTYL
SLEEVE
TYPE F
SEMI-CORRUGATED BAND
TYPE F
BAND ANGLE CONNECTOR DETAIL
TYPE F
BAR & STRAP CONNECTOR DETAIL
ALUMINUM
SLEEVE
O-RING
REFORMED PIPE ENDS WITH FLANGES W
K 3 1
54 ~ 84 54 ~ 96
SLEEVE
PIPE ARCH ONLY
1/2" 6" BOLT
S T A
E T
TYPE J
FLANGE BAND
COUPLING BANDS FOR CORRUGATED METAL PIPE

Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
TYPE K
FLAT BAND OR DIMPLE BAND
TYPE K
TYPE K
DOUBLE BAR & STRAP CONNECTOR DETAIL
NOTE:
EXISTING PIPE WITH HELICAL END
NEW PIPE EXTENSION WITH REFORMED END OR HELICAL END
1/2" 6" BOLT (TYP.)
PORTATION.
15588
NE E R
TYPE J
M A T
O T
REFORMED PIPE ENDS
12 ~ 84
10 1/2
O-RING
I K C E N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA 6- 8" SPAN R = 35"

NOTES 1. 2. Span and rise dimensions are nominal and are measured to the inside crests of corrugations. Allowable heights of cover shall be within the limits indicated in the table included hereon. Minimums and maximums are shown. Unless indicated otherwise a 10" depth (over the inside crests of corrugatons) of earth shall be placed in the invert of the Structural Plate Underpass, Design 1, for its full width and length. The earth shall consist of naturally occurring materials available in the vicinity of the structural plate underpass installation. See Standard Specification 7-03.3(4). Designed for H-20 live load and maximum allowable soil pressure of 6 Kips per square foot.
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT
3.
R = 59 3/8" RISE 7- 1"
4.
5 5/8"
HEIGHT OF CORNER PLATE R = 26 1/4"
MITER PARALLEL TO EMBANKMENT SLOPE 12 1/2" R = 56 3/8" 19 1/2" HEIGHT OF CORNER PLATE
INVERT TREATMENT
SECTION
6- 10" SPAN R = 35" INVERT TREATMENT ~ SEE NOTE 3 LENGTH IN A MULTPLE OF 2 SYMMETRICAL ABOUT 10"
SIDE VIEW ~ PLACEMENT

BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PORTATION.
M A T
S T A
E T
R = 87" RISE 8- 2"
ALLOWABLE HEIGHTS OF COVER

10 3/4" 39" 12 GAGE THICK
15588
HEIGHT OF CORNER PLATE R = 25"
CORRUGATED METAL SPAN RISE COVER MIN. MAX. 26 25
ANIMAL / PEDESTRIAN UNDERPASS
INVERT TREATMENT R = 64"
14 1/2" 46 1/4"
6 - 8" 6 - 10"
7 - 1" 8 - 2"
4 5

SECTION
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
NOTE:
NE E R
35 1/4"
I K C E N
O T
F O R P


NOTES Span and rise dimensions are measured to the inside crests of corrugations and may vary slightly depending on manufacturer.
HEADWALL ~ BOTH ENDS
AB
AB
EMBANKMENT SLOPE
RS
CORNER PLATE
A = HEIGHT OF
AT
AT
MITER PARALLEL TO EMBANKMENT SLOPE
RISE
R C
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT
INVERT TREATMENT ~ SEE STD. SPEC. 7-03.3(4)

RB
3"
LENGTH IN A MULTIPLE OF 2 SPAN
SIDE VIEW ~ PLACEMENT SECTION

INVERT TREATMENT
ALLOWABLE HEIGHTS OF COVER DIMENSIONS

CORRUGATED METAL THICKNESS ANGLES (DEGREES) SPAN RISE AT 12 - 2" 12 - 11" 13 - 2" 13 - 10" 14 - 1" 14 - 6" 14 - 10" 15 - 6" 15 - 9" 16 - 4" 16 - 5" 16 - 9" 17 - 3" 18 - 4" 19 - 2" 19 - 6" 20 - 4" 11 - 0" 11 - 3" 11 - 11" 12 - 3" 12 - 10" 13 - 6" 14 - 0" 14 - 4" 15 - 1" 15 - 5" 16 - 1" 16 - 3" 17 - 0" 16 - 11" 17 - 2" 17 - 7" 17 - 10" 52 52 52 53 53 56 55 55 56 57 58 58 57 55 54 53 53 AS 42 41 43 41 44 38 41 40 41 39 42 40 38 42 43 46 46 AC 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 AB 21 21 19 20 18 21 19 19 18 19 14 17 19 18 18 16 16 RT 68 73 73 77 77 78 79 84 83 86 88 89 90 99 105 107 113 RS 93 95 103 108 115 131 136 138 150 157 158 167 174 157 156 158 156 RC 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 47 47 47 47 47 RB 134 144 159 164 182 174 192 201 212 215 271 247 215 249 264 297 314 (INCHES) 44 45 43 45 43 46 44 46 45 47 41 43 55 53 53 50 52 MIN. 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 ------------------MAX. 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 11 ------------------MIN. 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ------MAX. 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 15 14 13 ------MIN. 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 MAX. 26
RADII (INCHES)
12 GAGE
10 GAGE
8 GAGE
25
M A T
24 23 23
S T A
E T
22 21 20 20
19 19 19 18 18 17
EQUIPMENT UNDERPASS

Harold J. Peterfeso
17 16
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
AS
I K C E N
F O R P

NOTES
END SECTION LENGTH SHALL BE AT LEAST SIX TIMES THE DIAMETER OF THE PIPE (SEE STD. SPEC. 7-02.3(1))
1.
The culvert ends shall be beveled to match the embankment or ditch slope and shall not be beveled flatter than 4H:1V. When slopes are between 4H:1V and 6H:1V, shape the slope in the vicintiy of the culvert end to ensure that no part of the culvert protrudes more than 4" above the ground line. Field cutting of culvert ends is permitted when approved by the Engineer. All field-cut culvert pipe shall be treated with treatment as shown in the Standard Specifications or General Special Provisions.
4H:
2.
1V OR STE EPE
4" MAX.
THERMOPLASTIC PIPE
4H:
1V
OR
STE
EPE
4" MAX.
FOR CULVERTS 30" DIAMETER OR LESS
CONCRETE PIPE
S T A
E T
END SECTION LENGTH SHALL BE AT LEAST SIX TIMES THE DIAMETER OF THE PIPE (SEE STD. SPEC. 7-02.3(1))
4H:
1V
OR
STE
EPE
BEVELED END SECTIONS

4" MAX.
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
METAL PIPE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P

PIPE ARCH DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA PIPE ARCH DIMENSION (INCHES) SPAN 17 21 24 28 35 42 49 57 64 71 77 83 RISE 13 15 18 20 24 29 33 38 43 47 52 57 DIMENSIONS (INCHES) THICKNESS (INCHES) STEEL 0.064 0.064 0.064 0.064 0.079 0.079 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.138 0.138 0.138 0.138 0.138 ALUM. 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.075 0.075 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.135 --------A TOL. 35/64 1" 7 7 8 9 10 12 13 18 18 18 18 18 PIPE DIMENSIONS (INCHES) PIPE DIAM. (INCHES) 12 15 18 21 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 THICKNESS (INCHES) STEEL 0.064 0.064 0.064 0.064 0.064 0.079 0.079 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.138 0.138 0.138 0.138 0.138 ALUM. 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.075 0.075 0.105 0.105 0.105 ------------------------A TOL. 35/64 1" 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 B MAX. 6 8 10 12 13 16 19 22 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 H TOL. 35/64 1" 6 6 6 6 6 8 9 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 L TOL. 35/64 1 1/2" 21 26 31 36 41 51 60 69 78 84 87 87 87 87 87 W TOL. 35/64 2" 24 30 36 42 48 60 72 84 90 102 114 120 126 132 138 T TOL. 35/64 2" 34 40 46 52 58 70 94 106 112 122 134 142 146 152 158 1 PC. 1 PC. 1 PC. 1 PC. 1 PC. 2 PC. 2 PC. 2 PC. 2 PC. 2 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. SKIRT END SECTION SLOPE (H:V) 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 1 3/4 : 1 1 1/2 : 1 1 1/3 : 1 1 1/4 : 1 1 1/6 : 1 THREADED ROD B MAX. 9 10 12 14 16 18 21 26 30 33 36 39 H TOL. 35/64 1" 6 6 6 6 6 8 9 12 12 12 12 12 L TOL. 35/64 1 1/2" 19 23 28 32 39 46 53 63 70 77 77 77 W TOL. 35/64 2" 30 36 42 48 60 75 85 90 102 114 126 138 T TOL. 35/64 2" 40 46 52 58 70 85 103 114 130 146 152 158 1 PC. 1 PC. 1 PC. 1 PC. 1 PC. 2 PC. 2 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. 3 PC. SKIRT END SECTION SLOPE (H:V) 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 2 1/2 : 1 1 3/4 : 1 1 1/2 : 1
NOTES 1. The diameter of the end section of Design B shall match the inside diameter of the concrete pipe. Skirt sections shall be made in one piece for round pipe with a diameter of 12" to 24" inclusive and for pipe arches with a rise of 13" to 20" inclusive. Skirt sections for larger sizes of pipes may be multiple pieces in conformance with the tabulated values shown. Design A end sections for 42" thru 84" diameter and 49" x 33" thru 83" x 57" arch with annular corrugations and all helically corrugated pipe arch include one foot of pipe length as a connector section. The connector section shall be attached to the end section by welds, rivets or bolts and shall be the same thickness as the end section. Design C may be used in lieu of Design A for all metal pipe sizes except as noted. Coupling bands may be any acceptable type for the pipe specified. Multiple panel skirts shall have 2" lap seams tightly joined by 3/8" stainless steel rivets or galvanized bolts on 6" max. centers.
PIPE PAYMENT PIPE PAYMENT TO THIS POINT TO THIS POINT PIPE
6.
The reinforced edges of the following size End Sections shall be supplemented with galvanized steel stiffener angles: 60" thru 72" diameter pipe ............................... 2" x 2" x 1/4" angle 78" and 84" diameter pipe, and 77" x 52" & 83" x 57" pipe arch ........... 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 1/4" angle The above galvanized angles shall be attached by 3/8" galvanized nuts and bolts.
2.
3.
7.
Galvanized steel angle reinforcement will be placed under the center panel seams on the 72" thru 84" diam. pipe and 77" x 52" & 83" x 57" pipe arch End Sections. As an alternative to the connector lug and threaded rod used on 12" thru 24" culvert pipe, the attachment may be made with a 1" wide strap, 16 gage galvanized steel fastened with a 1/2" diam., 6" long galvanized bolt and one squarehead nut.
8. 4.
5.
PIPE
CONNECTOR LUG (SEE NOTES) END SECTION
THREADED ROD
12"
PIPE
CONNECTOR SECTION
END SECTION
END SECTION
FOR 12" THRU 24" PIPE AND 17" x 13" THRU 28" x 20" PIPE ARCH WITH ANNULAR END CORRUGATIONS
FOR 30" THRU 84" PIPE AND 35" x 24" THRU 83" x 57" PIPE ARCH WITH ANNULAR END CORRUGATIONS
FOR 42" THRU 84" PIPE AND 49" x 33" THRU 83" x 57" PIPE ARCH WITH ANNULAR END CORRUGATIONS, AND ALL HELICAL END CORRUGATED PIPE AND PIPE ARCH
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
DESIGN A
PIPE PAYMENT TO THIS POINT
A
PIPE PAYMENT
CONNECTION TO METAL PIPE
DIAM. OR SPAN PIPE
T SPAN CONCRETE PIPE 1" MINIMUM LAP AFTER EXPANSION
PIPE DIAM. 2" H
LESS THAN 30" DIAM. 7" 5" 30" DIAM. AND OVER, 13"
S T A
REINFORCED EDGE (SEE NOTE 6) B GALVANIZED STEEL OR ALUMINUM SKIRT TOE PLATE EXTENSION A W A L 2"
REINFORCED EDGE (SEE NOTE 6) H
SMOOTH GALVANIZED STEEL OR ALUMINUM PIPE
E T
PIVOT BOLT TOE PLATE EXTENSION
EXPANDER LUG
DESIGN B
CONNECTION TO CONCRETE PIPE INLET END ONLY
PIPE ~ ELEVATION
PIPE & PIPE ARCH ~ PLAN
PIPE ARCH ~ ELEVATION

PIPE PAYMENT TO THIS POINT
FILL SLOPE L SLOPE 1 TOE PLATE EXTENSION ~ WHEN REQUIRED; GALVANIZED STEEL OR ALUMINUM, SAME GAGE AS SKIRT, LAPPED 2", FASTENED W/ 3/8" S.S. OR AL. RIVETS OR GALVANIZED BOLTS ON 12" MAX. CENTERS.
PIPE COUPLING BAND, SHOP BOLTED TO FLARED END SECTION WITH 3/8" BOLTS AT 6" ON CENTER MAXIMUM OR EQUIVALENT RIVETED OR WELDED CONNECTION. FOR USE WITH ALL SIZES OF PIPE AND PIPE ARCH WITH ANNULAR ENDS.
PIPE
FLARED END SECTIONS

END SECTION
8"
PIPE
DESIGN C
CONNECTION TO METAL OR CONCRETE PIPE OUTLET ONLY
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
SECTION
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
RISE
M A T
O T
NE E R
TO THIS POINT
I K C E N
8"
8"
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN FINISHED GROUND D/4 D SEE NOTE 1 D/4 CULVERT CROWN

NOTES 1. D = Inside Diameter of Culvert Pipe, or Pipe Arch Span Width, 36" maximum. 2. The distance between the safety bars, and between the top bar and the culvert crown, shall be equal spaces of no more than 24". The distance may vary 35/64 1" between bars to facilitate placement. 3. Slope shall match Side Slope; 6H:1V preferred, not steeper than 4H:1V.
2 SEE NO TE
FIELD CUT PIPE BEVEL

SEE
8"
NO
TE
2 SEE NO TE
A
B
2
D/4
1 SEE NOTE 3
CULVERT INVERT
6"
SIDE VIEW
(TYP.) 1/4 8" 3
FRONT VIEW
3" 3" 5/16" STRUCTURAL TUBING
10" (TYP.) 1 1/2" (TYP.) 3 1/2" (TYP.) 4" (TYP.)
5 3/4" 3/4" DIAM. THREADED ROD, 4" EMBEDMENT WITH HEX HEAD NUT (TYP.)
HEADWALL ~ SEE STD. PLAN B-75.20 FOR DETAILS
24"
7/8" DIAM. HOLE
3/8" 4" 10" STEEL PLATE
SECTION
SAFETY BAR (TYP.)
C
1" MAX.
1" MAX.
3/4" MAX. (TYP.)
RESIN BONDED ANCHOR (TYP.)

THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT
S T A
INSTALL RESIN BONDED ANCHOR (TYP.)
M A T
SEE NOTE 1
E T
SECTION
10" (TYP.) 1 1/2" (TYP.) 3 1/2" (TYP.) 4" (TYP.)
5 3/4" 3/4" DIAM. THREADED ROD, 4" EMBEDMENT WITH HEX HEAD NUT (TYP.)
CULVERT PIPE OR PIPE ARCH
C
3/4" MAX. (TYP.)
ISOMETRIC VIEW
3 1/2"
TYPE 2 SAFETY BARS FOR CULVERT PIPE OR PIPE ARCH (ON CROSS ROAD) STANDARD PLAN B-75.60-00
8"
D - 2" 1" MAX. SEE NOTE 1 INSTALL RESIN BONDED ANCHOR (TYP.) VARIES 1" MAX.
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
SECTION
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
D - 2"
3 1/2" 3 1/2" BLOCKOUT (TYP.) ~ FIELD- CUT CULVERT TO MATCH BLOCKOUT IN HEADWALL
O T
NE E R
8"
I K C E N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN EDGE OF END SECTION SHEET ROLLED SNUGLY AGAINST STEEL ROD 7/16" DIAM. MIN. GALVANIZED STEEL ROD OR NO. 4 GALVANIZED REINFORCING BAR 4"

NOTES 1. All pipes or pipe arches shall be attached as shown in CONNECTOR DETAIL. 2. When a Toe Plate Extension is required, it shall be the same gage as the End Section. The dimensions shall be 8" high, and 6" less than the overall width. Install centered, and lapped 2"; fasten with 3/8" 3/4" galvanized bolts on 12" maximum centers. 3. Cross Drainage Bar and Safety Bars shall be 3" Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Cross Drainage Bars shall be placed a maximum 30" apart. 4. Slotted holes for safety bar attachment shall be provided on end sections. 5. Number of Safety Bars required will vary depending upon the length of the end section.
~ ~1/8"
5 1/4"
FLATTEN END, THEN BEND OUTSIDE 4" TO MATCH END SECTION SIDES
9/16" 1" SLOTS (TYP.)
REINFORCED EDGE SECTION
SAFETY BAR END TREATMENT DETAIL
4"
48" MAX. (TYP.) REINFORCED EDGE ~ FULL LENGTH OF END SECTION (SEE SECTION)
METAL END SECTIONS FOR CIRCULAR PIPES

PIPE DIAM. (INCHES) 36 42 MINIMUM THICKNESS INCHES 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 GAGE 12 12 12 12 12 A 12 16 16 16 16 H 9 12 12 12 12 W 42 48 54 60 66 DIMENSIONS (INCHES) OVERALL WIDTH 66 80 86 92 98 L SLOPE 4:1 104 128 152 176 200 L SLOPE 6:1 156 192 228 264 300
SLOPE PIPE DIAM.
48" MAX.
CROSS DRAINAGE BAR DETAIL
48 54 60
1/2" DIAM. CARRIAGE HEAD BOLTS (TYP.)
METAL END SECTIONS FOR ARCHED PIPES

EQUIV. DIAM. (INCHES) 30 SAFETY BARS (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 5 36 42 48 PIPE ARCH DIMENSIONS SPAN (IN.) 35 42 49 57 64 71 83 RISE (IN.) 24 29 33 38 43 47 57 MINIMUM THICKNESS INCHES 0.079 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 GAGE 14 12 12 12 12 12 12 A 12 12 16 16 16 16 16 H 9 9 12 12 12 12 12 W 41 48 55 63 70 77 89 DIMENSIONS (INCHES) OVERALL WIDTH 65 72 87 95 102 109 121 L SLOPE 4:1 56 76 92 112 132 148 188 L SLOPE 6:1 84 114 138 168 198 222 282
SIDE VIEW
CROSS DRAINAGE BAR ~ SEE DETAIL
54 60 72
SAFETY BAR END TREATMENT ~ SEE DETAIL
SAFETY BARS ARE INSTALLED ON END SECTION WHEN SPAN IS GREATER THAN 36"
3/8
M A T
(TYP.)
S T A
E T
3/8" DIAM. HEX HEAD BOLTS (TYP.) 30" AND LARGER END SECTIONS MAY BE MULTIPLE PANELS. SEAMS SHALL BE LAPPED 2" AND JOINED W/ 3/8" 3/4" BOLTS ON 6" MAX. CTRS.
A
TAPERED END SECTION WITH TYPE 3 SAFETY BARS
W
TOE PLATE EXTENSION ~ WHEN REQUIRED (SEE NOTE 2)

8" SIDE LUG END SECTION SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Harold J. Peterfeso
ISOMETRIC VIEW
TOP VIEW
06-08-06
DATE
CROSS DRAINAGE STRUCTURE
CONNECTOR DETAIL
NOTE:
REINFORCED EDGE (SEE SECTION)
PORTATION.
1/2" DIAM. THREADED ROD OVER TOP OF END SECTION. SIDE LUGS TO BE BOLTED TO END SECTION
15588
O T
NE E R
6"
6"
8"
I K C E N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN REINFORCED EDGE ~ FULL LENGTH OF END SECTION (SEE SECTION) SLOPE SAFETY BAR (TYP.) SEE NOTE 2 TYP. 4" 24" MAX.

NOTES 1. As an alternative connection on 15" through 24" pipe, a 1" wide strap of 16 gage or 12 gage galvanized steel, fastened with a 1/2" diam., 6" long galvanized bolt and square head nut, may be used. Number of safety bars required will vary depending upon the length of the end section.
PIPE DIAM.
2.
6"
METAL END SECTIONS FOR CIRCULAR PIPES

PIPE DIAM. (INCHES) 15 18 21 MINIMUM THICKNESS INCHES .064 .064 .064 .064 .109 .109 .109 .109 .109 .109 GAGE 16 16 16 16 12 12 12 12 12 12 A 8 8 8 8 12 12 16 16 16 16 H 6 6 6 6 9 9 12 12 12 12 W 21 24 27 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 DIMENSIONS (INCHES) OVERALL WIDTH 37 40 43 46 60 66 80 86 92 98 L SLOPE 4:1 20 32 44 56 80 104 128 152 176 200 L SLOPE 6:1 30 48 66 84 120 156 192 228 264 300
6"
8"
SIDE VIEW
24 30 36 42
EDGE OF END SECTION SHEET ROLLED SNUGLY AGAINST STEEL ROD
7/16" DIAM. MIN. GALVANIZED STEEL ROD OR NO. 4 GALVANIZED REINFORCING BAR
4"
48 54 FLATTEN END, THEN BEND OUTSIDE 4" TO MATCH END SECTION SIDES 60
5 1/4"
9/16" x 1" SLOTS (TYP.)
METAL END SECTIONS FOR ARCHED PIPES

EQUIV. DIAM. (INCHES) 18 21 24 PIPE ARCH DIMENSIONS SPAN (IN.) 21 24 28 35 42 49 57 64 71 83 RISE (IN.) 15 18 20 24 29 33 38 43 47 57 MINIMUM THICKNESS INCHES .064 .064 .064 .079 .109 .109 .109 .109 .109 .109 GAGE 16 16 16 14 12 12 12 12 12 12 A 8 8 8 12 12 16 16 16 16 16 H 6 6 6 9 9 12 12 12 12 12 W 27 30 34 41 48 55 63 70 77 89 DIMENSIONS (INCHES) OVERALL WIDTH 43 46 50 65 72 87 95 102 109 121 L SLOPE 4:1 20 32 40 56 76 92 112 132 148 188 L SLOPE 6:1 30 48 60 84 114 138 168 198 222 282
~ ~1/8" SAFETY BAR END TREATMENT DETAIL REINFORCED EDGE SECTION
SAFETY BAR END TREATMENT ~ SEE DETAIL
30 36
SAFETY BAR (TYP.)
42 48 54
30" AND LARGER END SECTIONS MAY BE MULTIPLE PANELS. SEAMS SHALL BE LAPPED 2" AND JOINED W/ 3/8" x 3/4" BOLTS ON 6" MAX. CTRS.
60 72
S T A
E T
W
8"
SIDE LUG END SECTION
TAPERED END SECTION WITH TYPE 4 SAFETY BARS (ON CROSS ROAD)
TOE PLATE EXTENSION ~ WHEN REQUIRED; SAME GAGE AS END SECTION, 6" LESS THAN OVERALL WIDTH; CENTERED, 2" LAP, FASTEN W/ 3/8" x 3/4" GALV. BOLTS ON 12" MAX. CTRS.

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET TOP VIEW APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
CONNECTOR DETAIL ISOMETRIC VIEW
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
CROSS ROAD DRAINAGE STRUCTURE
NOTE:
REINFORCED EDGE (SEE SECTION)
PORTATION.
15588
1/2" DIAM. THREADED ROD OVER TOP OF END SECTION. SIDE LUGS TO BE BOLTED TO END SECTION
NE E R
3/8" DIAM. HEX HEAD BOLTS (TYP.)
M A T
O T
I K C E N
F O R P


24"
DUMMY JOINT WITH 3/16" x 1 1/2" JOINT MATERIAL WIRE MESH TEMPORARY CAP AT EDGE OF RIGHT OF WAY, UNLESS OTHERWISE DRECTED IN CONTRACT R/W LINE 6" MAX. 4" MIN. 6" (TYP.)
4" DRAIN PIPE 24" 12"
(TYP.)
6"
SECTION
R/W LINE 4" DRAIN PIPE WIRE MESH REINFORCEMENT 6 x 6 W4.0 x W4.0 (4 GAGE) 4 x 4 W2.9 x W2.9 (6 GAGE) (SEE STD. SPEC. 9-07.7) 1/2" MINIMUM COVER
4" DRAIN PIPE CAPPED AT EDGE OF R/W
CONCRETE SIDEWALK CONCRETE SIDEWALK
DUMMY JOINT
PLANTING STRIP
A
CONCRETE CURB ~ TYPE MAY VARY
S T A
VARIES
PLANTING STRIP
E T
ISOMETRIC
CONCRETE CURB ~ TYPE MAY VARY
ROADWAY
RESIDENTIAL STORM DRAIN, UNDER SIDEWALK

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET (REINFORCEMENT NOT SHOWN) APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
PLAN
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NE E R
INVERT OF DRAIN SHALL BE AT OR ABOVE GUTTER LINE
NOTE:
2% MIN. SLOPE
M A T
O T
ROADWAY
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES 1. Install sewer saddle with gasket and stainless steel clamps for connection to existing sewers. Install wye or tee sewer fitting with gaskets for new sewer installations. Mark location of sewer stub in accordance with Contracting Agency requirements.
2.
4" OR 6" DIAM. SEWER PIPE (SEE CONTRACT) LESS THAN 90 33/64 CAP
4" OR 6" DIAM. SEWER PIPE (SEE CONTRACT)
SEE NOTE 1 45 33/64 ELBOW
SEE NOTE 1
WYE BRANCH
PROPERTY LINE TEE BRANCH
SEE NOTE 2
PROPERTY LINE SEWER MAIN
SEWER MAIN
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
FOR SANITARY SEWER USE

45^ MAX. 2% MIN.,
45 33/64
M A T
IN., 2% M
S T A
E T
ELEVATION VIEW
ELEVATION VIEW
WYE CONNECTION
TEE CONNECTION
SIDE SEWER CONNECTION STANDARD PLAN B-85.20-00

Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
AX 45^ M
O T
NE E R
SEE NOTE 2
CAP
I K C E N
F O R P

45^ BEND
4" OR 6" SEWER PIPE (SEE CONTRACT)
24" x 24" x 24" CONCRETE BLOCK OR CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL
S T A
E T
45 33/64 BEND TEE
SEWER MAIN
STANDING SIDE SEWER CONNECTION STANDARD PLAN B-85.30-00

Harold J. Peterfeso
06-01-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P

1/2"
3/4" RAISED SQUARES, 3/4" APART, 1/8" HIGH
24"
12"
12"
A
FIBER JOINT PACKING 8" 4 3/4"
45^ BEND
1/2" WIDE, 1/8" HIGH RAISED BORDER
1"
PLAN
10" 9" 8 3/4"
S T A
2"
E T
PLUG 1/2"
7 3/4"
8" 15"
8 INCH SEWER CLEAN-OUT

SECTION A

CAST IRON RING AND COVER
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
PORTATION.
7"
15588
NOTE:
M A T
O T
1 1/4"
NE E R
1"
1/2"
5/8"
I K C E N
4"
F O R P


NOTES 1. Steel tie rods to be heavily coated with asphalt after installation. 2. Restrained joints may be substituted for tie rods. 3. Surface of ground within 36" of hydrant shall be smooth.
12" VALVE BOX WATER MAIN
12" VALVE BOX
WATER MAIN
TWO 3/4" DIAM. TIE RODS
TWO 3/4" DIAM. TIE RODS
PLAN
PLAN
36" MIN. (UNLESS DIRECTED OTHERWISE)
36" MIN. (UNLESS DIRECTED OTHERWISE)
PROPERTY LINE
PROPERTY LINE
36" MIN.
FACE OF CURB 36" MIN. VALVE BOX AND LID ~ CAST IRON FACE OF CURB
2"
SLOPE
2"
SLOPE
S T A
LENGTH OF LOWER BARREL TO SUIT TRENCH DEPTH
LENGTH OF LOWER BARREL TO SUIT TRENCH DEPTH
E T
VALVE BOX
15 POUND ASPHALTIC FELT
WATER MAIN 6 CUBIC FEET MIN. GRAVEL POCKET 6 CUBIC FEET MIN. GRAVEL POCKET
WATER MAIN
6" PIPE 12" 12" 4" MIN. CONCRETE BLOCK MECHANICAL JOINT WITH TIE ROD LUGS
6" GATE VALVE (FLANGE BY MECHANICAL JOINT)
HUB AND FLANGE CASTING 12" 12" 4" MIN. CONCRETE BLOCK AUXILLARY GATE VALVE
HYDRANT SETTING TYPES A AND B
ELEVATION
ELEVATION

TYPE A
TYPE B
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
VARIES
VARIES
NOTE:
M A T
O T
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P

PROPERTY LINE CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKING 12" VALVE MARKER POST
NOTES 1. 2. 3.
THRUST BLOCKING SHALL CLEAR PIPING 12"
Coat the pipe threads with asphalt after assembly. All piping shall be galvanized steel. Valve and piping to valve shall be 2" unless otherwise noted in the Contract. Locate blowoff outlet near property corner if possible.
4.
STREET ELBOW
BLOCKING SHALL BE CLEAR OF BLOWOFF PIPING BLOWOFF OUTLET TAPPED CAP OR PLUG
PLAN
WATER MAIN
2" FEMALE IP 2 1/2" MALE NST HOSE CONNECTION WITH CAP (BLOWOFF OUTLET)
VARIES
S T A
E T
GRAVEL POCKET
CONCRETE BLOCK 4" 8" 16"
2 INCH BLOWOFF ASSEMBLY

SOLID CONCRETE BEARING BLOCK ~ 4" 8" 16" SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
ELEVATION
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
PORTATION.
GATE VALVE WITH 2" SQUARE OPERATING NUT
15588
NE E R
DRILL 1/8" HOLE
NOTE:
M A T
O T
36" MIN.
METER BOX (LOCATE IN FIELD)
VALVE BOX AND LID ~ CAST IRON
METER BOX (LOCATE IN FIELD)
TWO CONCRETE BLOCKS 4" 8" 16" (TOP BLOCK NOT SHOWN)
I K C E N
F O R P

NOTES 1. The size of the combination air release / air vacuum valve shall be specified in the Contract. The piping and valves shall be the same size as the combination air release / air vacuum valve. Locate at the high point of the main, tap top of main.
GALVANIZED OUTLET PIPE SHALL BE SAME SIZE AS INLET PIPE WITH BEEHIVE STRAINER AND OUTLET
2.
18" MIN.
METER BOX AND COVER MATCH EXISTING GRADE
CAST IRON VALVE BOX UNION
SLOPE
TYPE K COPPER PIPE
SLOPE
M A T
BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS BRONZE GATE VALVE WITH 2" SQUARE OPERATING NUT GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS PIPE SADDLE
S T A
E T
CORPORATION STOP
WATER MAIN
COMBINATION AIR RELEASE / AIR VACUUM VALVE ASSEMBLY

Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
UNION
O T
AIR RELEASE / AIR VACUUM VALVE
NE E R
SPECIFIED MINIMUM DEPTH OF WATER MAIN
I K C E N
F O R P

NOTES 1. 2. Contractor to provide blocking adequate to withstand full test pressure. Divide thrust by safe bearing load to determine required area (in square feet) of concrete to distribute load. Areas to be adjusted for other pressure conditions. Provide two 1" minimum diameter rods on valves up through 10" diameter. Valves larger than 10" require special tie rod design. THRUST AT FITTINGS IN POUNDS
TEST A SIZE PRESSURE
(PSI)
3. 4.
B 90 BEND
4,440 9,995 17,770 27,770 39,985 54,425 71,085
C 45 BEND
2,405 5,410 9,620 15,030 21,640 29,455 38,470
D 22.5 BEND
1,225 2,760 4,905 7,660 11,030 15,015 19,615
E 11.25 BEND
615 1,385 2,465 3,850 5,545 7,545 9,855
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
UNBALANCED CROSS
PLUGGED CROSS
(USE COLUMN B )
PLUGGED CROSS
(USE COLUMN A )
4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
TEE AND DEAD ENDS

3,140 7,070 12,565 19,635 28,275 38,485 50,265
SOIL TYPE
MUCK, PEAT, ETC. SOFT CLAY SAND SAND AND GRAVEL TWO 1" DIAM. RODS (SEE NOTE 4) SAND AND GRAVEL CEMENTED WITH CLAY
SAFE BEARING LOAD

(PSF) 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 10,000
PLAN VIEW
PROFILE VIEW
PLAN VIEW
HARD SHALE
PLUGGED TEE
(USE COLUMN B )
VALVE
(USE COLUMN A )
TEE
M A T
S T A
E T
15588
CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK

PLAN VIEW
DEAD END
OFFSET
(USE COLUMNS B ~ E )
BEND
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
NOTE:
NE E R
(USE COLUMN A )
I K C E N
O T
F O R P

NOTE
Steel tie rods to be heavily coated with asphalt after installation.
TWO TIE RODS WITH TURNBUCKLES
THREAD 6"
8"
DIMENSION TABLE
PIPE DIAM. TEST PRESSURE
(PSI)
BEND ANGLE 11.25^
CONCRETE VOLUME
(Ft 3 )
CUBE SIZE
(Ft)
TIE ROD DIAM.
TIE ROD EMBEDMENT
6 12 22 14 27 50 25 48 89 38 75 139 55 108 200 75 147 272 98 192 355
1.8 2.3 2.8 2.4 3.0 3.7 2.9 3.6 4.5 3.4 4.2 5.2 3.8 4.8 5.8 4.2 5.3 6.5 4.6 5.8 7.1 5/8" 7/8" 5/8" 3/4" 1" 5/8" 7/8" 1 1/8" 17" 24" 17" 20" 27"
4"
250
22.5^ 45^ 11.25^
5/8"
17"
6"
250
22.5^ 45^ 11.25^
5/8"
17"
8"
250
22.5^ 45^
5/8"
17"
BLOCKING FOR 11.25 OR 22.5 VERTICAL BENDS

10" 250
11.25^ 22.5^ 45^ 11.25^ 12" 250 22.5^ 45^ 11.25^ 14" 250 22.5^ 45^
5/8"
17"
16" THREAD 6"

8"
22.5^ 45^
30"
S T A
E T
CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK FOR CONVEX VERTICAL BENDS

BLOCKING FOR 45 VERTICAL BENDS
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
PORTATION.
15588
NOTE:
250
24"
M A T
O T
FOUR TIE RODS WITH TURNBUCKLES
11.25^
17"
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P


NOTES
~ ~ 3
- 1 1/2"
1.
BEAM GUARDRAIL POST (TYP.) CURB
The beam guardrail type, post type, beam guardrail transition section type, connection type, and bridge traffic barrier shape may vary from that shown on this plan. The Catch Basin or Grate Inlet shall be centered between the Beam Guardrail Posts. With Beam Guardrail Transition Section Types 2, 4, and 5, use Extruded Curb Types 1, 2, 4, 4a, 5, or 5a. With Beam Guardrail Transition Section Types 1, 1A, 1B, 10, 11, and 12, use Extruded Curb Type 2 (Extruded Asphalt Concrete Curb). See Contract Plans for length of Curb.
2. 3.
MINIMUM CURB LENGTH ~ SEE NOTE 5
4.
5.
PAVEMENT
10 MIN.
A
BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER
BEAM GUARDRAIL BLOCKS AND RAIL ELEMENTS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY
C SE TI
ON
PLAN
I RA L TR S AN
IT
IO
BE
AM
GU
AR
BACK OF PAVEMENT SEAT
BEAM GUARDRAIL
POST
CURB PAVEMENT 3" 1" MAX. FACE OF CURB SHALL NOT EXCEED THE FACE OF GUARDRAIL
D AR RA IL
S T A
E T
10
PAVEMENT
INLET PLACEMENT AT BRIDGE END

SECTION A
MINIMUM CURB LENGTH ~ SEE NOTE 5 SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
ISOMETRIC VIEW
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
NOTE:
IN
PORTATION.
CATCH BASIN TYPE 1 OR GRATE INLET TYPE 2
15588
A BE
M A T
O T
GU
NE E R
I K C E N
F O R P

FACE OF GUARDRAIL 1" FACE OF GUARDRAIL 1" 1 2"

1" FACE OF GUARDRAIL
NOTES 1. When required by the Contract, a Snow Load Post Washer shall be used on the backside of the post (in lieu of the 1 3/4" Post Bolt Washer) and a Snow Load Rail Washer shall be placed on the face side of Beam Guardrail Types 1 and 2. Snow Load Rail Washers shall not be installed on terminals. Rail Washers, also called "Snow Load Rail Washers" are not required on new installation except as called for in Note 1. Unnecessary Rail washers need not be removed from existing installations, except those on posts 2 through 8 of a BCT installation shall be removed. Beam Guardrail post spacing for Types 1 through 4 shall be 6 - 3" on centers. Timber blocks shall be toe-nailed to the post with a16d galvanized nail to prevent block rotation. For post and block details, see Standard Plan C-1b. When "Beam Guardrail Type - ___ Ft. Long Post" is specified in the Contract, the post length shall be stamped with numbers, 1 1/2" min. high and 3/4" wide at the location where the letter "H" is shown in the ASSEMBLY DETAIL. For wood post applications, the letter shall be stamped to a minimum depth of 1/4". For steel post applications, the letter shall be legible after the post is galvanized. After post installation, it shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the stamped numbers remain visible. Existing posts shall not be raised. Replace posts as necessary to achieve required guardrail height.
2 - 3"
2 - 3"
PRE-DRILLED HOLES FOR FUTURE GUARDRAIL RAISING
2 - 2" MIN.
2"
VARIES
2"
2.
HMA OVERLAY
3.
4.
INITIAL INSTALLATION
RAIL ELEMENT RAISED
TYPE 1 ALTERNATIVE
5. 6.
FACE OF GUARDRAIL 1"
FACE OF GUARDRAIL 1" 1"
FACE OF GUARDRAIL
FACE OF GUARDRAIL 1" 1"
FACE OF GUARDRAIL
2 - 6"
2 - 6"
2 - 6"
2 - 3"
2 - 3"
5/8" CARRIAGE BOLT W/ HEX NUT & POST BOLT WASHER IN 3/4" HOLE
7.
C6 8.2 12 - 5 3/4" MIN. LENGTH
C6 8.2
12 - 5 3/4" MIN. LENGTH
5/8" CARRIAGE BOLT W/ HEX NUT & POST BOLT WASHER IN 3/4" HOLE
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
S T A
SEE NOTE 6 RAISED GUARDRAIL BLOCK 1 3/4" POST BOLT WASHER SEE NOTE 4 FACE OF GUARDRAIL 1" FIELD DRILL NEW 3/4" HOLE FOR 5/8" BUTTON HEAD BOLT ~ FOR TYPES 1 & 2 ONLY TIMBER BLOCK FOR STEEL POST
TYPES 1 & 2
5/8" 18" BUTTON HEAD BOLT W/ 7/32" OVAL GRIP & RECESSED HEX NUT
2 - 2" TO
4" MAX.
2 - 4"
EXISTING GUARDRAIL POST
5/8" 25" BUTTON HEAD BOLT W/ 7/32" OVAL GRIP & RECESSED HEX NUT OR 5/8" ROD THREADED BOTH ENDS W/ HEX NUTS
TYPES 1 & 2
5/8" 10" BUTTON HEAD BOLT W/ 7/32" OVAL GRIP & HEX NUT W/ CUT WASHER
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPES 1 ~ 4 (W-BEAM) STANDARD PLAN C-1

HMA OVERLAY
5/8" 1 1/4" BUTTON HEAD SPLICE BOLT W/ 7/32" OVAL GRIP & RECESSED HEX NUT (EIGHT REQUIRED PER SPLICE)
TIMBER POST
STEEL POST
ALL MOUNTING AND SPLICE HARDWARE SAME AS FOR TIMBER POST EXCEPT AS NOTED
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
BEAM GUARDRAIL RAISING FOR HMA OVERLAYS
ASSEMBLY DETAIL
NOTE:
TYPES 3 & 4
W6 9 OR W6 15
PORTATION.
32350
SEE NOTE 6
. B E YL R R E R A W S E F H O I N E G
O T
NE E R
TYPE 1
1 - 0"
1 - 0"
1 - 0"
S D N N
F O R P

7 7/8" 3/4" SPLICE HOLES IN CHANNEL RAIL AND SPLICE PLATE, FOR 5/8" CARRIAGE BOLTS 1" 1 5/8" 3 3/8" 1/4" C6 8.2 1 7/8"
13 - 6 1/2" 1 1/4" 6 - 3" 2" 4 1/4" 4 1/4" 6 - 3" 4 1/4" 4 1/4" 2" 4 1/2" 2"
SPLICE PLATE ~ 3/8" 4 1/2" 7 7/8" 2"
1 1/4"
1"
1"
2"
3/4" 2" POST BOLT SLOT IN CHANNEL RAIL AND SPLICE PLATE, FOR 5/8" BUTTON HEAD BOLT W/ 7/32" OVAL GRIP AND RECESSED NUT SPLICE BOLT SLOTS (TYP.) ~ 29/32" 1 1/8" POST BOLT SLOT (TYP.) ~ 3/4" 2 1/2" POST CONNECTION 3/4" 2" SPLICE SLOT IN CHANNEL RAIL & SPLICE PLATE, FOR 5/8" CARRIAGE BOLT, HEX NUT & WASHER
CHANNEL RAIL SPLICE
TYPICAL RAIL ELEMENT
4" 2"
11/16" HOLE 13 - 6 1/2" 4" 6 - 2 1/4" 2 3/4" 4 1/4" 4 1/4" 6 - 3" 4 1/4" 4 1/4" 2" 2"
S T A
SNOW LOAD POST WASHER

SEE NOTE 1
3" 1 1/2" SPLICE BOLT SLOTS (TYP.) ~ 29/32" 2" POST BOLT SLOTS ~ 3/4" 3 3/4" POST BOLT SLOT ~ 3/4" 2 1/2" SPLICE BOLT SLOTS (TYP.) ~ 29/32" 1 1/8"
11/16" 31/32" SLOT 1 3/4" 8 GAGE MIN. PLATE 7/8"
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPES 1 ~ 4 (W-BEAM) STANDARD PLAN C-1

EXPANSION SECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

SNOW LOAD RAIL WASHER
SEE NOTES 1 & 2
06-16-11
DATE
PORTATION.
32350
NOTE:
O T
1/4" PLATE
NE E R
S D N N
F O R P

NOTES 1. Wood posts for all guardrail placement plans shall be 6 8 except where noted otherwise. Lower hole is for Rub Rail of Type 2 and Type 3 Beam Guardrail. W69 steel posts and timber blocks are alternates for 6 8 timber posts and blocks. W615 steel posts and timber blocks are alternates for 10 10 timber posts and blocks. Holes shall be located on approaching traffic side of web. When "Beam Guardrail Type - _ _ Ft. Long Post" is specified in the Contract, the post length shall be stamped with numbers, 1 1/2" min. high and 3/4" wide at the location where the letter "H" is shown in the ASSEMBLY DETAIL. For wood post applications, the letter shall be stamped to a minimum depth of 1/4". For steel post applications, the letter shall be legible after the post is galvanized. After post installation, it shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the stamped numbers remain visible. Soil plate may be welded to foundation tube. If so, holes in soil plate and foundation tube may be omitted.
2. 3.
5/8" 5/8" WOOD BREAKAWAY POST 3/8" DIAM. HOLE 6 1/2"
4. 5.
2" (MAX.)
20 3/4"
5/8" 10" BOLT, NUT AND WASHER
13"
5/8" 10" BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS (TWO REQUIRED PER POST) WELDED OPTION FOR STEEL TUBE AND SOIL PLATE CONNECTION (SEE NOTE 6) 5 - 3"
5/8" DIAM. HOLE
S3 5.7
1/4
6.
1/4
SOIL PLATE
1/4" PLATE
FOUNDATION TUBE 2 - 0" 1/4 TYP. 2-11
BOTTOM CORNERS MAY BE CLIPPED 2" 2" TO AID DRIVING 4"
8"
1/4
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
S T A
SEE NOTE 5
SEE NOTE 5
BEAM GUARDRAIL POSTS AND BLOCKS STANDARD PLAN C-1b

SHEETS 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
TIMBER POST
STEEL POST ANCHOR POST G-2 POST
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
PARTIAL ASSEMBLY DETAIL
ISOMETRIC
PORTATION.
32350
NOTE:
ANCHOR POST ASSEMBLY
G-2 POST
O T
NE E R
S D N N
F O R P

8" OR 10" (NOM.) ALTERNATE HOLE 7" 2" 7" 8" OR 10" (NOM.) 3/4" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) 7" 7" 1 1/8" FOR W69

1 3/4" FOR W615 5 1/2" 7 3/16" 7 1/2" 5 1/2" 7 1/2"
7 5/8"
15 3/16"
3/4" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) SEE POST LENGTH TABLE SEE POST LENGTH TABLE SEE POST LENGTH TABLE
SEE POST LENGTH TABLE
2"
6 8 OR 10 10
6 8 OR 10 10
3/4" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) SEE NOTE 2
SEE NOTE 2
THRIE BEAM
W-BEAM
2"
6 8 S4S
3 - 6 1/2"
12"
12"
2 3/8" DIAM. HOLE
18"
3/4" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.)
3 - 11 1/2"
2"
7 5/8"
7"
2 3/8" DIAM. HOLE
6 8 S4S
WOOD BREAKAWAY POST

6" 1" 8" 9" 3" 3/4" DIAM. HOLE 3" 17" 3/4" DIAM. HOLE 1/4" STEEL PLATE 24" 6" 9"
W-BEAM
THRIE BEAM
W-BEAM
THRIE BEAM
5 - 0"
3/4" DIAM. HOLE
WOOD POST
STEEL POST
SEE NOTES 3 AND 4
SOIL PLATE
POST LENGTH TABLE

GUARDRAIL TYPE
1 through 4 & 31 10 or 11
TS 8" 6" 0.1875" (STEEL)
LENGTH
6 - 0" 6 - 6"
FOUNDATION TUBE
3/4" DIAM. HOLE
S T A
7"
POST
W6 9 W6 15
A
6" 8"
B
4 1/4" 6 1/4"
6 - 0"
16"
2 3/8" DIAM. HOLE
NOMINAL (NOM.)
BEAM GUARDRAIL POSTS AND BLOCKS

3/4" DIAM. THRU HOLE (TYP.) 3/4" DIAM. THRU HOLE 3/4" DIAM. THRU HOLE (TYP.) 3/4" DIAM. THRU HOLE 6 8
STANDARD PLAN C-1b

SHEETS 2 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III
06-16-11
DATE
THRIE BEAM WOOD BLOCK FOR WOOD POST
W-BEAM WOOD BLOCK FOR WOOD POSTS
THRIE BEAM WOOD BLOCK FOR STEEL POST
W-BEAM WOOD BLOCK FOR STEEL POST
CONTROLLED RELEASING TERMINAL (CRT) POST
PORTATION.
32350
NOTE:
8" (NOM.)
O T
NE E R
21"
18"
9"
S D N N
F O R P

NOTES
1. For post details see Standard Plan, "Beam Guardrail Posts and Blocks".
1"
See Detail
5/16 " DIA x 1 1/2 " hex head bolt with hex nut and 1 3/4 " square x .135" washer 1/2 " DIA x 1 1/2 " Hex head bolt with hex nut. Guardrail rests on top of bolt.
G-2 Post (See Note 1)
DETAIL A
DETAIL B
TYPE 20
TYPE 21
BEAM GUARDRAIL
S T A
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
STANDARD PLAN C-1c

Donald K. Nelson
5/30/97
DATE
WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON
PORTATION.
15224
NOTE:
C L I F F
. M A N DE R S A W O S F H O I N E G
O T
NE E R
See Detail 2- 3"
2- 8"
1"
D L E I F N
F O R P

NOTES 1. For wood posts, saw top of post and block to 1" above thrie beam guardrail reducer section. For steel posts, drive post down to 1" maximum above the
See Note 1 1"
thrie beam guardrail reducer section.
1"
INTERMEDIATE GUARDRAIL POST CONNECTION DETAILS

(Type A shown)
1/8 (TYP) Cap plate
13- 6 1/2 " 6- 3" 3- 1 1/2 " 3- 1 1/2 " 6- 3" 4 1/4 " 4 1/4 " 2"
2"
4 1/4 " 4 1/4 " 20"
Post bolt slots

R I C H A
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE A

7- 3 1/2 " 3- 1 1/2 " (Left section shown, right section reversed) 3- 1 1/2 " 4 1/4 " 4 1/4 " 2" 4 1/4 " 4 1/4 " 2"
S T A
12 1/4 "
20"
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION
STANDARD PLAN C-1d

Splice bolt slots 29/32 " x 1 1/8 " (TYP) Post bolt slots 3/4 " x 2 1/2 " (TYP) 10 Gage
APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
Harold J. Peterfeso
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B
DATE REVISION BY
10-31-03
DATE

09/2003 ADDED 10 GAGE STEEL DESIGNATION; REV. NOTE 1 RG
PORTATION.
34042
NOTE:
29/32 " x 1 1/8 " (TYP)
S R T A O B W D A W S F H R EO I N G
Splice bolt slots
10 Gage
3/4 " x 2 1/2 " (TYP)
NE E R
12 1/4 "
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

ANCHOR PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1) BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SRT SHOWN) (SEE NOTE 3)
NOTES 1. Type 4 anchor required. For details, see Standard Plan C-6c. 2. Post spacing is 6-3" unless otherwise shown. 3. For Terminal type and details, see Contract Plans and applicable Standard Plan(s). SEE NOTE 4 4. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not exceed 10:1 when the face of the guardrail is less than 12-0" from the edge of the shoulder.
VARIES (SEE CONTRACT)
ONE WAY TRAFFIC
EDGE OF SHOULDER 5. For one-way traffic, use Type 4 anchor. For two-way
CASE 1
traffic, use Type 1 anchor. See applicable Standard Plan(s) for details. 6. When Beam Guardrail Flared Terminals are used on both ends a minimum of 25-0" of Beam Guardrail shall be
BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT TERMINAL (SRT SHOWN) SEE NOTE 3 (SEE NOTE 6) TERMINAL (SRT SHOWN) SEE NOTE 3
installed.
SEE NOTE 4
SEE NOTE 4
VARIES (SEE CONTRACT) TWO WAY TRAFFIC
EDGE OF SHOULDER
CASE 2
ANCHOR
LIMIT (SEE NOTE 5)
C L I F F
GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT TERMINAL (SRT SHOWN) SEE NOTE 3
S T A
E T
SIGNAL SUPPORT 5-0" MIN
SEE NOTE 4
EXPIRES MAY 3, 2000
VARIES (SEE CONTRACT) ONE OR TWO WAY TRAFFIC
EDGE OF SHOULDER
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT STANDARD PLAN C-2

CASE 3
RAILROAD C L
ADDED NOTE 6. MODIFIED THE END SECTIONS TO 12/99 DESIGN "C". DATE REVISION BY TWS
Clifford E. Mansfield
01-06-00
DATE
PORTATION.
15224
CENTER OF RAILROAD
NE E R
12-0" MIN
6-0" MIN
NOTE:
BEAM
. M A DE N R S O A W S F H O I N
O T
PAY
D L E I F N
F O R P

BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION PAY LIMIT ~ SEE NOTE 3 BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT X SPACES @ 6 - 3"

TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SRT SHOWN) SEE NOTE 1
SEE NOTE 2 VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT
SEE FLARE RATE TABLE BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER
BRIDGE
ONE OR TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
EDGE OF SHOULDER
NOTES
CASE 4
1. For terminal type and details, see Contract and applicable Standard Plan(s). 2. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not be steeper than 10H:1V when the guardrail is within 12 - 0" from the edge of the shoulder.
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION PAY LIMIT ~ SEE NOTE 3
BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT X SPACES @ 6 - 3"
3. See Contract for Beam Guardrail Transition Section type and Connection to Bridge Traffic Barrier or Concrete Barrier.
FLARE RATE TABLE

SEE NOTE 2 POSTED SPEED RATE (MPH) BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER ONE OR TWO-WAY TRAFFIC CURB FACE EXTENSION LINE 70 60 15 : 1 14 : 1 12 : 1 11 : 1 10 : 1 9:1
BRIDGE
CASE 5
55 50 45 40 OR LESS
BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER SEE FLARE RATE TABLE
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
S T A
SEE NOTE 2
36 - 0" MIN.
PAY LIMIT ~ SEE NOTE 3
MEDIAN
70 MPH ..................... 200 - 0" 60 MPH ..................... 137 - 6" 55 MPH OR LESS .... 100 - 0"
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT
BRIDGE END
STANDARD PLAN C-2a

BRIDGE
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
Harold J. Peterfeso
05/2006 APPLIED CURRENT DRAFTING STANDARDS MAS
06-21-06
DATE
CASE 6
DATE
REVISION
BY
NOTE:
BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT X SPACES @ 6 - 3"
PORTATION.
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION
34042
BRIDGE
R I C H A
R S T A B O W D A W S F H R EO I N G
NE E R
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 3 OR 4 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1) BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 OR 2 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1) 1 BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 10 PAY LIMIT 12 - 6" MIN. BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 11 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 2) SPACED @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. (TYP.)

BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 16 ~ PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 OR 2 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1) EQUALLY SPACED @ 6 - 3" MAX. BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 3 OR 4 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1) POSTED SPEED RATE (MPH) 70 60 RUB RAIL (CHANNEL RAIL) ~ SEE NOTE 1 55 50 45 40 OR LESS 15 : 1 14 : 1 12 : 1 11 : 1 10 : 1 9:1
FLARE RATE TABLE
STRUCTURE (TYP.) SEE FLARE RATE TABLE MEDIAN
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
SEE FLARE RATE TABLE
NOTES B 1. Varying flare rates and structure widths may require a length of Beam Guardrail Type 1 or 2 between the Beam Guardrail Type 3 or 4 and the Transition on one side, and the Beam Guardrail Type 10 on the other. For Beam Guardrail Type 2 or 3, terminate the rub rail (channel rail) at the first 68 post of the Beam Guardrail Transition Section Type 16, and by lapping it behind the second 68 post on the Beam Guardrail Type 10 side, or as approved by the Engineer. Use the minimum number of nested 12 - 6" thrie beam sections needed to span the structure. This run may extend past the end of the structure, and an excess of 6 - 3" maximum is acceptable. If the last 12 - 6" section extends more than 6 - 3" (but less than 12 - 6"), use a nested 6 - 3" thrie beam section in its place. The Beam Guardrail Transition Section Type 16 on this end shall terminate at a 1010 post. Place nested thrie beam with 1010 posts at 3 - 1 1/2" maximum spacing between the end of the transition and the structure. If full post depth cannot be achieved due to the structure foundation, post length shall be adjusted to the top of foundation. The Beam Guardrail Type 11 post height shall be 2 - 9".
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 16 ~ PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 3)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 11 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 2)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 10 PAY LIMIT
PLAN VIEW
(WOOD POST AND BLOCK SHOWN) DRAWN BY: ELENA BRUNSTEIN
TIMBER POST
ATTACH RAIL & BLOCK TO POST WITH TWO 5/8" 14" LAG BOLTS
STEEL POST
NORMAL RAIL-BLOCK-POST ATTACHMENT
CASE 7
2.
TOP OF ROADWAY
3.
TOP OF FOUNDATION
ATTACH STANDARD BLOCK TO RAIL WITH TWO 5/8" 4" LAG BOLTS (TYP.)
4. DETAIL B
SECTION
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 10 PAY LIMIT 1 12 - 6" MIN.
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 11 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 2) SPACED @ 6 - 3" MAX. (TYP.)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 16 ~ PAY LIMIT
EQUALLY SPACED @ 6 - 3" MAX.
R I C H A
PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1)
S T A
A
STRUCTURE SEE FLARE RATE TABLE MEDIAN
SEE FLARE RATE TABLE ONE-WAY TRAFFIC 12 - 6" MIN. 1
RUB RAIL (CHANNEL RAIL) ~ SEE NOTE 1
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT
STANDARD PLAN C-2b

BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 16 ~ PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 3)
PLAN VIEW
(WOOD POST AND BLOCK SHOWN)
05/2006 OMITTED ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE (NOTE 1) EAB
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-21-06
DATE
CASE 8
DATE
REVISION
BY
PORTATION.
34042
NE E R
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
NOTE:
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 3 OR 4
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
12 - 6" MIN.
SEE NOTE 4
6 - 6" (TYP.)
(TYP.)
2 - 9"
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL (DESIGN 1) PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 10 PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL (DESIGN 1) PAY LIMIT DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC

NOTE 1. CASE 9C: Thrie Beam Guardrail is used when the distance from the end of the Bullnose Terminal to the beginning of the transition of the Bridge Rail is less than 100 feet.
EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY
CLEAR AREA ~ SEE STD. PLAN C-4f
3 - 0" MIN. ~ TO FACE OF GUARDRAIL THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL (DESIGN 2) PAY LIMIT HAZARD
BEAM GUARDRAIL (W-BEAM) PAY LIMIT
DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC
3 - 0" MIN. ~ TO FACE OF GUARDRAIL

15 1
EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 10 PAY LIMIT
CASE 9A
1 15
DIREC
TION O F TRA FF
IC
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL (DESIGN 2) PAY LIMIT 1 EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC BEAM GUARDRAIL (W-BEAM OR THRIE BEAM ~ SEE NOTE 1) PAY LIMIT
BEAM
GUAR
DRAIL (W-BE AM) PAY L IMIT
CASE 9B
R I C H A
END SECTION - DESIGN F
S T A
15 1 BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER
BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER 1 15
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT MEDIAN BULL NOSE
STANDARD PLAN C-2c

1 DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 1 PAY LIMIT
CLARIFIED DIMENSION OF CLEARANCE TO HAZARD 05/2006 IN CASE 9A WJB
BEAM GUARDRAIL (W-BEAM OR THRIE BEAM ~ SEE NOTE 1) 1 THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B ~ REQUIRED WHEN TERMINAL JOINS W-BEAM (SEE NOTE 1) PAY LIMIT
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-21-06
DATE
CASE 9C

REVISION BY
DATE
PORTATION.
34042
NOTE:
NE E R
DRAWN BY: BILL BERENS
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

TERMINAL PAY LIMIT ~ SEE NOTE 1 BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT

NOTES 1. SRT Terminal shown, for terminal type and details, see Contract or applicable Standard Plan(s). Post spacing is 6 - 3" except where noted. Type 4 anchor required. See applicable Standard Plan(s). The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not exceed 10H:1V when the guardrail is within 12 - 0" from the edge of the shoulder.
2.
SEE NOTE 4
3. 4.
EDGE OF SHOULDER TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT
CASE 10A
ANCHOR PAY LIMIT ~ SEE NOTE 3 BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT 1 - 0" MIN. TERMINAL PAY LIMIT ~ SEE NOTE 1
3 - 0" MIN.
3 - 0" MIN.
SEE NOTE 4
EDGE OF SHOULDER ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
EDGE OF SHOULDER
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
CASE 10B
OR
S T A
CASE 10 A, B, or C
ANCHOR PAY LIMIT ~ SEE NOTE 3 BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL EXTENSION LENGTH VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT STANDARD PLAN C-2d

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION EDGE OF SHOULDER ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
05/2006 CLARIFIED DIMENSION OF CLEARANCE FOR HAZARD MAS
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-21-06
DATE
CASE 10C
DATE
REVISION
BY
PORTATION.
34042
NOTE:
R I C H A
TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
NE E R
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

BEAM GUARDRAIL FLARED TERMINAL ~ PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1) BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 17 OR 18 PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 ~ PAY LIMIT X SPACES @ 6 - 3", 0 SPACES MIN. BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 11 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 4)

BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 16 ~ PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 ~ PAY LIMIT X SPACES @ 6 - 3", 0 SPACES MIN. BEAM GUARDRAIL FLARED TERMINAL ~ PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1)
SEE NOTE 3
SEE NOTE 3
SEE NOTE 6 TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
SEE NOTE 6
EDGE OF SHOULDER
NOTES
CASE 11A
2.
Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 4 (W-Beam) or Type 4 (Thrie Beam) required. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not exceed 10H:1V when the guardrail is within 12 - 0" from the edge of the shoulder. If the distance from end of Beam Guardrail Type 11 to the structure exceeds 6 - 3" using 12 - 6" thrie beam sections, add a 6 - 3" nested section of thrie beam with 1010 posts, spaced at 3 - 1 1/2" maximum, and begin transition. Guardrail post spacing for Beam Guardrail Type 11 past the end of the structure shall be spaced at 6 - 3" maximum with 68 post and standard block. Attach the standard wood block to the rail using two 5/8" 4" lag bolts.
3.
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 4 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 2)
BEAM GUARDRAIL FLARED TERMINAL ~ PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 ~ PAY LIMIT X SPACES @ 6 - 3", 0 SPACES MIN.
4.
5.
SEE NOTE 3
VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT SEE NOTE 6 ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
EDGE OF SHOULDER
6.
S T A
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 4 PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 2)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 PAY LIMIT 1
BEAM GUARDRAIL FLARED TERMINAL ~ PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 ~ PAY LIMIT X SPACES @ 6 - 3", 0 SPACES MIN.
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT
SEE NOTE 3
STANDARD PLAN C-2e

VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT SEE NOTE 6 ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
EDGE OF SHOULDER
Harold J. Peterfeso
05/2006 OMITTED ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE (NOTE 2) EAB
06-21-06
DATE
CASE 11C
DATE
REVISION
BY
PORTATION.
34042
NE E R
NOTE:
R I C H A
CASE 11B
1.
DRAWN BY: ELENA BRUNSTEIN
SRT Terminal shown. For terminal type and details see Contract and applicable Standard Plan(s).
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

Point B (CRT post PT with block)

NOTES See Note 2 1. See Contract for guardrail connection to bridge rail and
concrete barrier.
Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 7 X Spaces at 6- 3" (1 space MIN) Terminal pay limit (SRT shown) see Note 4
2.
The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not be steeper than 10:1.
3.
Attach to rail with
5/16 " x 9" long bolt, nut and
1 1/2 " washer on back of post.
CASE 12 _D
Beam Guardrail Rail not bolted to CRT post Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 7 X Spaces at 6- 3" (1 space MIN) Type 5 Transition pay limit See Note 1 5. Radius dimensions shall be etched into plate replacing the letters "HH", shown on the Identification Plate Detail. Digits shall be 1 1/2 " MIN height and 3/4 " MAX width. pay limit
(see Note 7)
4.
For terminal type and details, see Contract and applicable Standard Plan(s).
The plate shall be galvanized after etching.
on the back side of the Rail Element using the lowest splice bolt at the P.C. of the guardrail radius. Point B
PT
Varies
8- 6" MAX radius
(CRT post with block) Width = 15
Bridge end
7.
First letter of case designation placement indicates end treatment on side road. treatment on main road. Second letter indicates end For instance, a Type 5 Anchor
CASE 12 _C
(see Note 7) Point A
on the side road and a bridge connection on the main road would be Case 12 AC.
PC
CRT posts
CLEAR AREA
A A
Length = 25 Point A
X Spaces at 6- 3" (1 space MIN)
8.
For the 8- 6" radius, five CRT posts are required including the CRT post at point B.
9.
For CRT post details, see Standard Plan "Beam Guardrail Posts and Blocks".
6- 3" Post spacing (TYP) 3/4 " Hole with snug fitting insert, 3/8 " ID, 7 1/2 " long
Terminal pay limit (SRT shown) see Note 4
Beam Guardrail Anchor
CRT Post 5/16 "
3/4 " Hole 5" 3/4 " 3/4 "
1 1/2 " Washer
Type 5 pay limit
Bolt
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT
WEAK POST INTERSECTION DESIGN (8- 6" MAX RADIUS)
THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
CASE 12 A_
(see Note 8)
SECTION A-A
1/4 " Steel plate
1 1/8 " 2 3/4 "MIN MIN
C L I F F
S T A
T
O T
Splice bolt
Identification plate
IDENTIFICATION PLATE MOUNTING DETAIL

(see Note 6)
slot
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
STANDARD PLAN C-2f

Post See Note 2
Donald K. Nelson
CASE 12 B_
(see Note 7)
3/14/97
DATE
NOTE:
element
(see Note 5)
PORTATION.
Rail
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
15224
NE E R
6.
The guardrail radius Identification Plate shall be mounted
Beam Guardrail pay limit
18- 9"
(see Note 3)
2"
D L E I F N
F O R P


NOTES
SEE NOTE 2
PT
REQUIREMENTS
1. See Contract Plans for guardrail connection to bridge rail and concrete barrier. 2. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not be steeper than 10:1.
RADIUS
NUMBER OF CRT POSTS (SEE NOTE 3)
CLEAR AREA
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 7 X SPACES AT 6- 3" (1 SPACE MIN.) TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SRT SHOWN) (SEE NOTE 4)
17- 0"
30
15
25- 6"
40
20 POINT B (CRT POST WITH BLOCK)
CASE 13 _D
(SEE NOTE 7)
3. Fewer CRT posts are required for smaller radii; include CRT Post at Point B. Attach guardrail to post with a 5/16" x 9" long bolt, a 3/8" I.D. x 7 1/2" snug fitting insert, and a 1 1/2" washer with nut on back of post. 4. For terminal type and details, see Contract and applicable Standard Plan(s). 5. Radius dimensions shall be etched into plate replacing the letters "HH", shown on the GUARDRAIL RADIUS IDENTIFICATION PLATE DETAIL. Digits shall be 1 1/2" minimum height and 3/4" maximum width. Plate shall be galvanized after etching. 6. The guardrail radius Identification Plate shall be mounted on the back side of the rail element using the lowest splice bolt nearest the PC of the guardrail radius (See View A). 7. The first letter of the Case Designation indicates the end treatment on the side road. The second letter indicates the end treatment on the main road. For example, a Type 5 Anchor on the side road with a bridge connection on the main road would be Case 13 AC, the combination shown. 8. For CRT post details, see Standard Plan C-1b.
35- 0"
11
50
20
PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 7 X SPACES AT 6- 3"
PAY LIMIT
SEE NOTE 1 (1 SPACE MIN.)
8
A
VARIES PT W (SEE TABLE)
3
T
BRIDGE END
CASE 13 _C
(SEE NOTE 7) 5/16" X 9" BOLT
RADIUS = 35 MAX.
S
CLEAR AREA 6- 3" POST SPACING (TYP.)
CR
3/4" HOLE SNUG FITTING INSERT 3/8" I.D., 7 1/2" LONG L (SEE TABLE)
1 1/2" WASHER
NUT X SPACES AT 6- 3" (1 SPACE MIN.) CRT POST GUARDRAIL RADIUS IDENTIFICATION PLATE (SEE DETAIL)
S T A
PC (SEE NOTE 6)
(SEE NOTES 3, 6 & 8)
E T
VIEW
TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SRT SHOWN) POINT A BEAM GUARDRAIL 5"
PAY LIMIT
(SEE NOTE 4)
EXPIRES MAY 3, 2002
1/4" STEEL PLATE 2 3/4" MIN.
1 1/8" MIN.
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT WEAK POST INTERSECTION DESIGN (35 MAX. RADIUS) STANDARD PLAN C-2g
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 5 PAY LIMIT
(SEE NOTE 5)
SEE NOTE 2
GUARDRAIL RADIUS IDENTIFICATION PLATE DETAIL
7/01 CORRECTED NOTES; ADDED "VIEW A" MAS
07-27-01
DATE
CASE 13 A_
(SEE NOTE 7)
CASE 13 B_
(SEE NOTE 7)
DATE
REVISION
BY
NOTE:
2"
PORTATION.
3/4"
15224
18- 9"
3/4"
3/4" HOLE
C L I F F
O T
NE E R
BEAM GUARDRAIL
TYPE 5 TRANSITION
10
D L E I F N
F O R P

NOTES
1. For Service Level 1, Weak Post Bridge Rail System, see Contract.
2. SRT Terminal shown.
For Terminal type and details,
see Contract and applicable Standard Plan(s).
3. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not be steeper than 10:1.
4. See Standard Plan "Beam Guardrail Posts and Blocks".
Type 6 Transition pay limit Type 1 Beam Guardrail pay limit Terminal pay limit (see Note 2) (0 spaces MIN) Type 20 Beam Guardrail pay limit See Note 1 Type 1 Beam Guardrail pay limit (0 spaces MIN) Terminal pay limit (see Note 2)
0 Spaces MIN
0 Spaces MIN
See Note 3
See Note 3
Edge G-2 Post (TYP) (see Note 4) Thrie Beam Guardrail Reducer Section Type B of bridge
Direction of Traffic
CASE 14
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
C L I F F
S T A
T
O T
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
STANDARD PLAN C-2h

Donald K. Nelson
3/28/97
DATE
PORTATION.
15224
NOTE:
NE E R
D L E I F N
F O R P

NOTES 1. SRT Terminal shown. Plan(s). 2. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not be steeper than 10:1 . 3. See Standard Plan for Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Post. 4. For spans up to 18- 9", see Standard Plan for Guardrail Placement Cases 19, 20, and 21. For Terminal type and
details, see Contract and applicable Standard
Beam Guardrail
Terminal pay limit (see Note 1)
pay limit
Terminal Pay Limit (see Note 1)
Modified Beam Guardrail (see Detail and Note 3)
Spaces at 6- 3" 0 Spaces MIN (TYP)
Box culvert
See Note 2
See Note 2
Direction of Traffic
CASE 15
6- 3"
6- 3"
6- 3"
6- 3"
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT
C L I F F
S T A
. M A N DE R S A W O S F H I N EO G
T
O T
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
See Note 3
STANDARD PLAN C-2i

25 (see Note 4)
Donald K. Nelson
3/28/97
DATE
DETAIL
PORTATION.
15224
NOTE:
NE E R
D L E I F N
F O R P

Anchor pay limit (see Note 1)

NOTES
1.
Type 4 anchor required.
For
details, see
Terminal pay limit (SRT shown) (see Note 2) applicable Standard Plan(s).
2.
For terminal type and details, see contract and applicable Standard Plan(s).
See Note 5
3.
Post spacing is 6-3" except where noted.
4.
See Table
For guardrail to bridge rail connection see applicable Standard Plan(s) or Contract.
Varies (see contract)
Edge of shoulder
5.
The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail should not be steeper than
the edge of the shoulder.
Beyond 12-0", the
CASE 16
slope shall not be steeper than 6:1.
FLARE RATE TABLE Terminal pay limit (SRT shown) (see Note 2) Beam Guardrail pay limit (see Note 3) Terminal pay limit (SRT shown) (see Note 2) 15:1 14:1 12:1 11:1 10:1 9:1 See Note 5 See Note 5 Rate Posted Speed (MPH) 70 60 55 50 45 40 or less
See Table
See Table
Two Way Traffic
S T A
CASE 17
Anchor pay limit (See Note 1)

EXPIRES MAY 3, 2000
Bridge end
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT
STANDARD PLAN C-2j
Curb face extension line See Note 4

One Way Traffic
CASE 18
5/98
DATE
6/12/98
DATE
Revise Flair Rate Table.

REVISION
DEPUTY STATE DESIGN ENGINEER
RBA
WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
BY
OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON
PORTATION.
E E GI R E E S T I S G S N I O N LE A
15224
NOTE:
C L I F F
O T
Edge of shoulder
Varies (see contract)
NE E R
One Way Traffic
10:1 when the guardrail is within 12-0" from
D L E I F N
F O R P


BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT
25 NESTED W-BEAM 6-3" TYP. 6-3" TYP.
12-6"
2-3"
GROUND LINE
CASE 19 A
A B
SPLICE IN CENTER
37-6" NESTED W-BEAM 6-3" TYP. 6-3" TYP.
12-6"
2-3"
GROUND LINE
CASE 19 B
A B
SINGLE W-BEAM RAIL ELEMENT SPLICE AT POSTS
S T A
E T
EXPIRES MAY 3, 2002
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT 12-6" SPAN STANDARD PLAN C-2k

SECTION A SECTION B
07-27-01
DATE
PORTATION.
15224
NE E R
NESTED W-BEAM RAIL ELEMENTS
NOTE:
C L I F F
O T
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
D L E I F N
F O R P

37-6" NESTED W-BEAM 6-3" TYP. 6-3" TYP.
18-9"
2-3"
GROUND LINE
ELEVATION A B
CASE 20
C L I F F
S T A
SINGLE W-BEAM RAIL ELEMENT
NESTED W-BEAM RAIL ELEMENTS
E T
EXPIRES MAY 3, 2002
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT 18-9" SPAN STANDARD PLAN C-2n

SECTION A SECTION B
07-27-01
DATE
PORTATION.
15224
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
D L E I F N
F O R P


NOTES 1. See Standard Plan C-1b for additional details. 2. One-way traffic layouts are identical to the two-way layout with the exception that only the posts trailing the span need to be CRTs with double blocks.
6-3" TYP.
25 SPAN
6-3" TYP.
OBSTRUCTION
TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
TYPE 1 W-BEAM
100 OF NESTED W-BEAM RAIL ELEMENTS "BEAM GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT - 25 SPAN" PAY LIMIT
TYPE 1 W-BEAM PAY LIMIT
PAY LIMIT
PLAN
6-3" TYP.
2 MIN.
2 MIN.
6-3" TYP.
OBSTRUCTION
TYPE 1 GUARDRAIL POSTS AND BLOCKS
CONTROLLED RELEASING TERMINAL (CRT) POSTS WITH TWO WOOD BLOCKS
TYPE 1 GUARDRAIL POSTS AND BLOCKS
S T A
E T
CASE 21
6"x8"x14" WOOD BLOCKS NESTED W-BEAM RAIL ELEMENTS
WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP, CUT WASHER, AND HEX NUT
EXPIRES MAY 3, 2002
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
CRT POSTS WITH TWO BLOCKS (SEE NOTE 2)
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT 25 SPAN STANDARD PLAN C-2o
OBSTRUCTION
CRT POST APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
07-13-01
DATE
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC LAYOUT
SECTION
PORTATION.
2 MIN.
5/8" x 25" BUTTON HEAD BOLT
15224
NOTE:
C L I F F
O T
ELEVATION
NE E R
D L E I F N
F O R P

Transition Pay Limit
NOTES
3)
(See Note 1)
1. See Contract for transition and connection type. 2. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the
o
i
t t
Bridge end
face of the guardrail should not be steeper than 10:1.
s y
e
L i
CASE 22 C_
PT
(See Note 4)
3. Guardrail installation shall be Beam Guardrail Type 1 with standard post and block. 4. First letter of case designation indicates end
n
i
g P
a
c a
Point B Radius varies (see Contract)
treatment on side road.
Second letter indicates For instance a
p
s
i a
end treatment on main road.
r
t
terminal on the side road and a bridge connection on the main road would be Case 22 BC. 5. For terminal type and details, see Contract and applicable Standard Plan(s). 6. Radius dimensions shall be etched into plate
See Note 2
s o
3 Be " a m
6 -
replacing the letters "HH" shown on the Identification Plate Detail. Digits shall be
Terminal Pay Limit
1 1/2 " MIN height and 3/4 " MAX width. Plate shall be galvanized after etching. 7. The guardrail Identification Plate shall be mounted at the lower splice bolt on the back side of the rail element at the PC of the
Beam Guardrail Anchor
(see Note 5)
Type 1 Pay Limit
X Spaces at 6- 3" (1 space MIN)
CASE 22 D_
(See Note 4)
guardrail radius.
PC (See Note 7)
Point A
S T A
CASE 22 A_
See Note 2
(See Note 4)
3/4 " DIA hole

3/4 " 3/4 "
5"
(See Note 4) 2"
1/4 " Splice bolt slot

2 3/4 " 1 1/8 "
Rail element
Steel plate
MIN Identification plate (see detail) Post
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT STRONG POST INTERSECTION DESIGN
STANDARD PLAN C-2p

IDENTIFICATION PLATE DETAIL
(See Note 6)

(See Note 7)
09/2003 CORRECTED REFERENCES TO NOTES. MHG
Harold J. Peterfeso
10-31-03
DATE

DATE REVISION BY
PORTATION.
34042
CASE 22 B_
NOTE:
R I C H A
NE E R
Terminal Pay Limit
(see Note 5)
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

NOTE 1. Install Extruded Curb at face of Guardrail. See Standard Plan F-10.40 for details.
FIVE SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR SPECIFIED CONNECTION THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B (10 GAGE)
12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM (12 GAGE)
4" EXTRUDED CURB SEE NOTE 1 6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.) 6 - 6" LONG, 10 10 POSTS WITH 8 8 BLOCKS
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 1B ~ PAY LIMIT
FIVE SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" = 15 - 7 1/2" SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR SPECIFIED CONNECTION
TYPE 1
6 - 6" LONG
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 10
TERMINATE CURB AT BRIDGE RAIL OR BARRIER, MATCH FACE 4" EXTRUDED CURB SEE NOTE 1 6 - 6" LONG, 6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 1A ~ PAY LIMIT
BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT 6 - 6" LONG, 10 10 POSTS WITH 8 8 BLOCKS
TYPE 1B
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B (10 GAGE)
S T A
TERMINATE CURB AT BRIDGE RAIL OR BARRIER, MATCH FACE 4" EXTRUDED CURB SEE NOTE 1 6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.) 6 - 6" LONG 8 - 0" LONG, 10 10 POSTS WITH 8 8 BLOCKS
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTIONS STANDARD PLAN C-3

TYPE 1A
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
PORTATION.
32350
NOTE:
O T
SEE STANDARD PLAN C-5, B OR E CONNECTION
FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX.
NE E R
TERMINATE CURB AT BRIDGE RAIL OR BARRIER, MATCH FACE
S D N N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 2 ~ PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR SPECIFIED CONNECTION FIVE SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX.

BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 4 PAY LIMIT 12 - 6" NESTED W BEAM (12 GAGE) BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT
12 - 6" NESTED W BEAM (12 GAGE)
BEAM GUARDRAIL
2 - 1 1/2"
THREE SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2"
SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR SPECIFIED CONNECTION 68 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
6 - 6" LONG, 1010 POSTS WITH 88 BLOCKS
TYPE 4 TYPE 2
FOR 45 MPH AND BELOW
1 - 3" MAX.
FOUR SPACES @ 1 - 6 3/4" TOTAL LENGTH = 6 - 3"
TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" TOTAL LENGTH = 6 - 3"
SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR SPECIFIED CONNECTION
6 - 0" LONG, 68 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
S T A
BEAM GUARDRAIL
6 - 3" POST SPACING
EIGHT SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. TOTAL LENGTH = 25 - 0"
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTIONS
STANDARD PLAN C-3a

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET G-2 POST (TYP.) SEE STD. PLAN C-1b 6 - 0" LONG, 68 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
TYPE 6
Harold J. Peterfeso
10-04-05
DATE
PORTATION.
34042
PAY LIMIT
NOTE:
R I C H A
TYPE 5
NE E R
6 - 0" LONG, 68 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 10 ~ PAY LIMIT SEE TRAILING END TRANSITION DETAILS (N) SECTIONS OF 12 - 6" THRIE BEAM (10 GAGE) SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR QUANTITY SEE NOTE 1 THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B (10 GAGE) TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT

NOTES 1. If the distance from the end of the bridge to the end of the thrie beam bridge rail section exceeds 6 - 3" using 12 - 6" thrie beam sections, add a 6 - 3" section of thrie beam bridge rail to reduce the length to less than 6 - 3". When thrie beam is installed at the face of the bridge curb, install Extruded Curb at face of Guardrail. See Standard Plan F-10.40 for details. Match the height of existing bridge curb with a 20H : 1V transition. When thrie beam is installed at the face of rigid bridge rail, an HMA ramp is required from the roadway surface to the top of the bridge curb or sidewalk. The slope of the ramp shall be 20H : 1V or flatter.
12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM (12 GAGE) FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. VARIES 3" TO 2 - 5"
2.
3.
BRIDGE
4" EXTRUDED CURB SEE NOTE 2
6 - 6" LONG, 10 10 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
TYPE 10
APPROACH END
THRIE BEAM INSTALLED AT FACE OF BRIDGE CURB
6 - 6" LONG
6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 11 ~ PAY LIMIT THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B (10 GAGE) TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2"
12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM (12 GAGE) FOUR SPACES MIN. @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. 2 - 6" MAX.
BRIDGE 6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)

BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 12 ~ PAY LIMIT 6 - 6" LONG FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B (10 GAGE) 12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM (12 GAGE) THREE SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. 2 - 6" TO 6 - 3"
S T A
TYPE 11
TRAILING END
BRIDGE
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTIONS STANDARD PLAN C-3b

6 - 6" LONG
TYPE 12
TRAILING END
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
PORTATION.
32350
NE E R
BEAM GUARDRAIL
NOTE:
O T
S D N N
F O R P

SEE TRAILING END TRANSITION DETAILS (N) SECTIONS OF 12 - 6" THRIE BEAM (10 GAGE) SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR QUANTITY SEE NOTE 1 BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 13 ~ PAY LIMIT

12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM (12 GAGE) FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. VARIES 3" TO 2 - 5"
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE A (10 GAGE) TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" 6 - 3"
HMA RAMP SEE NOTE 3
6 - 6" LONG
TYPE 13
APPROACH END
THRIE BEAM INSTALLED AT FACE OF BRIDGE RAIL
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE A (10 GAGE) 6 - 3" TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2"
12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM (12 GAGE) FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. 2 - 6" MAX.
HMA RAMP SEE NOTE 3
6 - 6" LONG
TYPE 14
S T A
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE A (10 GAGE) FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2"
12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM (12 GAGE) THREE SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. 2 - 6" TO 6 - 3"
BRIDGE
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTIONS STANDARD PLAN C-3b

HMA RAMP SEE NOTE 3
6 - 6" LONG
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
TYPE 15
TRAILING END
PORTATION.
32350
NOTE:
O T
TRAILING END
NE E R
S D N N
F O R P

BRIDGE COLUMN BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 11 PAY LIMIT SEE NOTE 1

NOTES 1. See Contract for the number of thrie beam sections for Beam Guardrail Type 11. If the distance from the end of the Beam Guardrail Type 11 to the column/structure exceeds 6 - 3" using 12 - 6" thrie beam sections, add a 6 - 3" nested section of thrie beam to reduce the distance to less than 6 - 3". Install Extruded Curb (See Standard Plan F-10.40) at face of Guardrail. Attach the standard block to the rail using two 5/8" 4" lag bolts.
2.
TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX.
12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B 10 GAGE
3. 4.
SEE NOTE 4
BRIDGE COLUMN BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 11 PAY LIMIT SEE NOTES 1 & 2
BEAM GUARDRAIL DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL PAY LIMIT 6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.) 6 - 6" LONG, 10 10 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.) 6 - 6" LONG 4" EXTRUDED CURB SEE NOTE 3
TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B 10 GAGE
12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM
4 - 0" MAX.
SEE NOTE 4
TYPE 16
APPROACH END
6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.) 6 - 6" LONG BRIDGE COLUMN BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 11 PAY LIMIT SEE NOTES 1 & 2 4" EXTRUDED CURB SEE NOTE 3 6 - 6" LONG, 10 10 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
TYPE 17
PAY LIMIT FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX. 12 - 6" NESTED THRIE BEAM
S T A
T
O T
BEAM GUARDRAIL
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL REDUCER SECTION TYPE B 10 GAGE
TWO SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" MAX.
4 - 0" TO 6 - 3"
32350
NE E R
SEE NOTE 4
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTIONS

6 8 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.) 6 - 6" LONG 4" EXTRUDED CURB SEE NOTE 3 6 - 6" LONG, 10 10 POST WITH STANDARD BLOCK (TYP.)
STANDARD PLAN C-3c

Pasco Bakotich III
06-27-11
DATE
TYPE 18
TRAILING END
NOTE:
TRAILING END
BEAM GUARDRAIL
S D N N
F O R P

BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT FLARED TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTES 1 AND 2) 10 - 0" MIN.

NOTES
EDGE OF WIDENED EMBANKMENT 6 1 3 - 0" MIN.
1.
Unless otherwise indicated in the contract, the SRT - 350 (12.5, 8 Post) as manufactured by Trinity Industries, Inc., or a FLEAT 350 as manufactured by Road Systems Inc., shall be installed per manufacturers recommendations. If specified in the Contract, the FLEAT TL2 as manufactured by Road Systems, Inc. shall be installed per manufacturers recommendations. Where terminal is placed on a curve, and post offsets would result in the rail encroaching onto the shoulder (e.g., the inside of a curve), the posts shall be installed so that the faceof the rail is at the edge of the shoulder. When snow load post washers and snow load rail washers are called for in the contract, the snow load rail washers must be omitted within the terminal limits. Offset distances: FLEAT 350 ............................................... 4 - 0" FLEAT TL2 ............................................... 1 - 8" minimum
SEE NOTE 4
20H:1V SLOPE MAX. (RELATIVE TO GRADE)
2.
AT 350) RE (FLE HT FLA STRAIG 6" T TL2) A E 37 RE (FL HT FLA STRAIG 25 - 0"
10H:1V SLOPE MAX. TANGENT LINE
3.
PLAN VIEW
4.
GROUND LINE
ELEVATION VIEW
FLEAT OPTION
FLARED TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTES 1 AND 2)
10 - 0" MIN.
EDGE OF WIDENED EMBANKMENT 6 1

S T A
20H:1V SLOPE MAX. 4 - 0" (RELATIVE TO GRADE)
10H:1V SLOPE MAX. TANGENT LINE
37 - 6"
PLAN VIEW
2 - 3"
BEAM GUARDRAIL FLARED TERMINAL
STANDARD PLAN C-4b

GROUND LINE SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-08-06
DATE
ELEVATION VIEW
04/2006
Revised FLEAT Flare Lengths
AMC
SRT OPTION
DATE
REVISION
BY
PORTATION.
34042
NOTE:
R I C H A
NE E R
2 - 3"
3 - 0"
MIN.
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

NOTES 1. An ET-PLUS (TL3) as manufactured by Trinity Industries, Inc. or an SKT-350 as manufactured by Road Systems Inc. shall be installed according to manufacturers recommendations. When a TL2 terminal is specified in the contract an ET-PLUS (TL2) as manufactured by Trinity Industries, Inc., or an SKT-TL2 as manufactured by Road Systems, Inc. shall be installed according to manufacturers recommendations. 2. A reflectorized object marker shall be installed according to manufacturers recommendations. 3. When snow load post washers and snow load rail washers are required by the contract, the snow load rail washers must not be installed within the terminal limits. 4. Terminal shall be installed at a taper, ensuring that end piece is entirely off shoulder. 5. Length for ET-PLUS (TL3) and SKT-350 is 50. Length for ET-PLUS (TL2) and SKT-TL2 is 25.
NON-FLARED TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1) (SEE NOTES 4 & 5)
10 MIN
EDGE OF WIDENED EMBANKMENT

6:1 T APE
20:1 SLOPE OR FLATTER (RELATIVE TO GRADE) 10:1 SLOPE OR FLATTER
EDGE OF SHOULDER
PLAN
S T A
GROUND LINE
BEAM GUARDRAIL NON-FLARED TERMINAL

ELEVATION
STANDARD PLAN C-4e

Harold J. Peterfeso
01/2003 REVISED NOTES 1 & 5; ADDED SLOPES. RG
02-20-03
DATE

DATE REVISION BY
PORTATION.
34042
27"
NE E R
SEE NOTE 2
NOTE:
R I C H A
4 MIN
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL BID ITEM 3 - 2 3/4" 12 - 2" 3 - 1 1/2" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 10 25 65 37 - 6"
" 1 1/2 3 -
3 - 1 1/2"
7 - 6"
30
RA
4 - 11"
- 0"
DIU
1L
2L
3L
4L 5L
6L
7L
8L
9L
10L
11L
12L
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT THE CENTERLINE CLEAR AREA
5 -
" D IU S
30 - 0" RA DIU S
7 - 6"
RA
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
7R
8R
9R
10R
11R
12R EDGE OF SHOULDER (TYP.)
NORMAL MEDIAN SLOPE
SLOPE NOT STEEPER THAN 10H : 1V (TYP.)
12 - 6" RAIL LENGTH 12 - 6" ARC LENGTH AT FACE OF RAIL (SLOTTED RAIL ELEMENT #1) (SLOTTED RAIL ELEMENT #3 12 - 6" ARC LENGTH AT FACE OF RAIL (SLOTTED RAIL ELEMENT #2)
25 - 0" (TYP.) STANDARD THRIE BEAM RAIL ELEMENTS SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1a
W-BEAM OR THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL (SEE CONTRACT) (SEE NOTE 1) (TYP.)
BULL NOSE GRADING PLAN
PLAN
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL - DESIGN 1

NOTES 1.
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL BID ITEM
3 - 2 3/4"
12 - 1"
37 - 6"
3 - 1 1/2" 3 - 1 1/2"
3 - 1 1/2"
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
1
6 - 3"
15
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
For W-Beam applications extend the rail from the bullnose terminal by using a "Reducer Element Type C" followed by a standard Post and Block, spaced at 3 - 1 1/2". Continue runs with standard 6 - 3" post spacing. For additional Details see Standard Plans C-25.20. and C-28.40.
7 - 11 1/4"
1L 4 - 11 1/2"
2L
- 8" 35 S DIU RA
3L
4L
6L
7L
S T A
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT THE CENTERLINE
35
1R
2R
3R
RA
RA
6R
7R
8R
10R
11R
12R
12 - 6" ARC LENGTH AT FACE OF RAIL (SLOTTED RAIL ELEMENT #1)
12 - 6" RAIL LENGTH (SLOTTED RA IL ELEMENT #3 )

12 - 6" ARC LENGTH AT FACE OF RAIL (SLOTTED RAIL ELEMENT #2)
1 15
STANDARD
25 - 0" (TYP .)
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL

W-BEAM OR TH RIE BEAM GUARDRAIL (SEE CONTRA CT) (SEE NOTE 1) (TYP.)
THRIE BEAM RAIL ELEMEN TS SEE STANDA RD PLAN C1a
STANDARD PLAN C-4f

PLAN
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL - DESIGN 2
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
NOTE:
9R
PORTATION.
4R
5R
STD. POSTS AND BLOCKS (TYP.)
32350
IU
- 8" DIU S
" -5
5L
8L
9L
O T
10L
11L
12L
NE E R
STD. POSTS AND BLOCKS (TYP.)
10 - 4 3/4"
S D N N
F O R P


GUARDRAIL POST HOLE (TYP.)
1L
2L
3L
4L
5L
6L
7L
8L
9L
10L
11L
12L 9L 10L 11L
12L
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT THE CENTERLINE 1L 4 - 5" 4 - 10" 5 - 0" 5 - 5"
2L
3L
4L
5L
6L
7L
8L
5 - 7"
5 - 7"
5 - 7"
5 - 7"
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT THE CENTERLINE 4 - 10"
1R 2R
4 - 5"
5 - 1"
5 - 7"
6 - 0"
8 - 9"
1R
7R 3-5 1/2" 3-0 1/4" 3-0 1/2" 2-11" 2-11" 3-1 1/2" 3-1 1/2" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 2R 3R 4R 5R 6R
8R
9R
10R
12 R
PLAN
GUARDRAIL POST LAYOUT - DESIGN 1

3 - 5" 3 - 0" 3 - 0" 2 - 11" 2 - 11" 3 - 2" 3 - 1" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3"
8" NOMINAL 8" NOMINAL 1" TAPERED BLOCK 1" THRIE BEAM WOOD 6" x 8" BREAKAWAY POST ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1b 2 - 8" THRIE BEAM W-BEAM WOOD BLOCK FOR WOOD POSTS THRIE BEAM THRIE BEAM WOOD 6" x 8" BREAKAWAY POST ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1b 8" NOMINAL 2 - 8" TAPERED BLOCK 1" SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1b
PLAN
GUARDRAIL POST LAYOUT - DESIGN 2
8" NOMINAL
W-BEAM WOOD BLOCK FOR WOOD POSTS SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1b
1"
2"
1"
1" 5/8" x 9" BOLT NUT AND WASHER 8 - 0" 5/8" x 9" BOLT NUT AND WASHER 6 - 0" 1 - 5"
2" THRIE BEAM THRIE BEAM WOOD 6" x 8" CRT POST THRIE BEAM
THRIE BEAM WOOD 6" x 8" POST
1 - 4"
S T A
6 - 0" STEEL FOUNDATION TUBE TS 8" x 0.1875"
POST
3 - 10"
3 1/2" DIAM. HOLES 3 - 10"
NOTE : CABLE BEARING PLATE NOT SHOWN
O (N
.)
OM
2R & 2L
.)
7"
POST
14"
POST 9R TO 12R 9L TO 12L
3R TO 8R 3L TO 8L
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL
STANDARD PLAN C-4f

Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
TAPERED BLOCK
PORTATION.
32350
8"
(N
6"
POST
NE E R
1R & 1L
NOTE:
8 - 0" STEEL FOUNDATION TUBE TS 8" x 0.1875"
O T
11R
2 - 8"
2 - 8"
9 - 2"
5R
6R
8 - 4"
4R
7R
8R
7 - 11"
3R
9R
6 - 5"
10R
11R
12R
6 - 10"
6 - 2"
S D N N
F O R P

12 5/8"
NOSE CABLE ANCHOR PLATE
"COLD TUFF" BUTTONS
1 13/16"
4 1/2"
NOSE CABLES 15 - 0" 14 - 6 1/4" 2 7/8" 2 7/8"
1 - 0" ANCHOR PLATE
"COLD TUFF" BUTTON FOR 5/8" DIAM. WIRE ROPE 4 1/4" 15/16" 1 3/16" 2 1/16" 3/16" 2" (TYP.)
5/8" DIAM. STEEL WIRE ROPE
CABLE BEARING PLATE
ANCHOR CABLE
NOSE CABLE
1 3/16"
POST 1 125^ STEEL PLATE, ASTM A36 12 5/8" x 5 7/8" x 3/16"
POST 2
POST 3
CABLE ANCHOR & BRACKET ASSEMBLY

15/16" x 1 3/16" SLOT (TYP.) 5/8" x 1 1/4" BUTTON HEAD SPLICE BOLT AND NUT (TYP.) FOR ANCHOR PLATE, CABLE END PLATE, AND ANCHOR CABLE ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN C-6f
NOSE CABLE
NOSE CABLE
3/4" CABLE CLAMP
NOSE CABLE ANCHOR PLATE 3L 1/2" DIAM. U-BOLT 2L 1L ANCHOR CABLE AND PLATE, SEE STANDARD PLAN C-6f 1/2" DIAM. HEX NUTS
3 - 1 1/2 " ARC LENGTH AT FACE OF RAIL (TYP.)
POST 1L AND 1R THRIE BEAM
S T A
CABLE BEARING PLATE TWO 1" NUTS AND WASHER
1R 2R 3R STEEL FOUNDATION TUBE
U-BOLT CABLE CLIP ASSEMBLY SECTION B
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL STANDARD PLAN C-4f

SHEET 3 OF 4 SHEETS
NOSE CABLE ASSEMBLY

SECTION PLAN - THRIE BEAM NOSE
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
NOTE:
PORTATION.
32350
O T
NOSE CABLE, 2 REQUIRED
U-BOLT CABLE CLIPS, 6 REQUIRED
NE E R
S D N N
F O R P

3/8"
9 1/4"
3/8" 3/4"
3/8"
26 3/4"
3/8" 3/4"
6 1/4" 10" 2" 10" 2"
6 - 3" 3/8" R. (TYP.) 27 1/2" 1" 13 3/4" POST BOLT SLOT 3/8" R. (TYP.)
SLOT A DETAIL
SLOT B DETAIL
3/8"
8 1/8"
3/8" 3/4"
3/8"
11"
3/8" 3/4"
3/8" R. (TYP.)
3/8" R. (TYP.)
SLOT C DETAIL
SLOT D DETAIL
6 - 3"
6 1/4" 8 7/8" 4" 4"
8 7/8"
8 7/8"
4"
8 7/8"
4"
8 7/8"
4"
4 7/16"
POST BOLT SLOT
SPLICE BOLT SLOT 12 - 6" SLOT A DETAIL (TYP.) SLOT B DETAIL (TYP.)
SLOTTED THRIE BEAM RAIL ELEMENT #1

SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1a FOR RAIL ELEMENT DETAILS (RAIL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE BEFORE BENDING TO RADIUS SHOWN IN PLAN)
SPLICE BOLT SLOT 12 - 6" SLOT C DETAIL (TYP.)

SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1a FOR RAIL ELEMENT DETAILS
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSTHE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON
S T A
POST BOLT SLOT
11 3/4"
9 7/8"
11 3/4"
9 7/8"
11 3/4"
10 1/4"
BEAM GUARDRAIL BULL NOSE TERMINAL STANDARD PLAN C-4f

SPLICE BOLT SLOT 12 - 6" POST BOLT SLOT SHEET 4 OF 4 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION SLOT D DETAIL (TYP.)

SEE STANDARD PLAN C-1a FOR RAIL ELEMENT DETAILS
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
PORTATION.
32350
NOTE:
O T
6 1/4"
6 - 3"
(RAIL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE BEFORE BENDING TO RADIUS SHOWN IN PLAN)
NE E R
S D N N
F O R P

TRANSITION SECTION PAY LIMIT

NOTES 1. Attach guardrail to bridge rail or concrete barrier with 7/8" diameter bolts in accordance with Standard Spec. 9-06.5(4), with thin slab ferrule inserts or resin bonded anchors. See Contract Plans. If the last guardrail post is 3" or less from the end of the bridge barrier, this attachment and blockout is not necessary. This case is also applicable for F-shape and vertical faces with no curbs. When B connection is used with Type 1A Transition, the maximum spacing between bolts is 6 - 3". See bridge plans for additional connection details.
6 - 3" MAX. UNRESTRAINED PRECAST BARRIER
3 - 1 1/2 " MAX.
2.
3. 4.
5.
END SECTION DESIGN F SEE STD. PLAN C-7 & C-7a SEE NOTE 1 FACE OF GUARDRAIL, EDGE OF SHOULDER NEW BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER (SINGLE SLOPE BARRIER SHOWN) TRANSITION SECTION PAY LIMIT 3 - 1 1/2" MAX.
PLAN
A CONNECTION
END SECTION DESIGN F SEE STD. PLAN C-7 & C-7a

PLAN
SEE NOTE 5
FACE OF GUARDRAIL, EDGE OF SHOULDER
TRANSITION SECTION PAY LIMIT BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER
12 - 6" BRIDGE RAIL OR CONCRETE BARRIER
3 - 1 1/2" MAX. SEE NOTE 4
D CONNECTION
(SEE NOTE 3) 6 - 3" MAX.
SEE NOTES 1 & 2
FACE OF GUARDRAIL, EDGE OF SHOULDER
PLAN
E CONNECTION
PLAN CURB WIDTH ~ 9" OR LESS, OR CONCRETE BARRIER
B CONNECTION
6 - 3" MAX.
S T A
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
3 - 1 1/2" MAX. END SECTION DESIGN F SEE STD. PLAN C-7 & C-7a INSIDE FACE OF RAIL BASE ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
PLAN
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTIONS STANDARD PLAN C-5

F CONNECTION
END SECTION DESIGN F SEE STD. PLAN C-7 & C-7a SEE NOTE 1 FACE OF GUARDRAIL, EDGE OF SHOULDER
CURB WIDTH, GREATER THAN 9" ~ 18" MAX.
PLAN
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
C CONNECTION
NOTE:
BRIDGE RAIL OR CONCRETE BARRIER
PORTATION.
32350
O T
NE E R
SEE NOTE 4
S D N N
F O R P

NOTES
1. 6x8 Timber posts to match beam guardrail CRT Post (see Note 3) 3. End section Design G (see Note 2) 2. Anchor cable (see Detail)
Anchor plate may be constructed from
1/4 " plates
welded to equal strength and dimensions as shown.
For end section details see Standard Plan "Beam Guardrail End Sections".
For post details, see Standard Plan "Beam Guardrail Posts and Blocks".
PLAN
4.
Eight
5/8 " x 1 1/2 " machine bolts with hex nut and Place washer on face side of rail.
washer.
5.
Outside nut shall be torqued against inside nut a minimum of 100 ft-lbs.
6.
Toenail bearing plate with 10d nail at corners to prevent turning.
pay limit
Anchor pay limit (see Note 7) 7. Anchor pay limit does not apply when anchor is included in a Beam Guardrail Terminal.
5/8 " x 2" Button head bolt or 5/8 " x 1 1/2 " hex head bolt and hex nut with rail anchor washers under bolt head and nut 6-3" Anchor plate (see details) Two 1" nuts and washers (see Note 5) 12" 16" 18" Anchor rail washer (see Detail)
Bearing plate (see Detail and Note 6) Standard 2" ID pipe sleeve (2 3/8 " OD) Two 1" nuts and washers 2" MAX (see Note 5)
CRT Post (see Note 3)
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 1

THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY
Anchor post assembly
S T A
(See Note 3)
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
TYPE 1 ANCHOR
STANDARD PLAN C-6

Donald K. Nelson
05/30/97
DATE
Sheet 1 of 2 Sheets
PORTATION.
E GI R ES E E S T I G S N I O N LE A
15224
NOTE:
C L I F F
O T
NE E R
Beam Guardrail
2-3"
D L E I F N
F O R P
B
16"
2"
4"
4"
4"
2" 15/16 " R 1 15/16 + See Note 4 3/16 " MIN 3/8 " R
1/4
1/4 "
~
2 1/8 "
2 3/4 "
35^
3"
1 1/2 "
3
1 1/8 "
3/
"
"
B
11/16 " Hole (eight required) 3" x 2 1/4 " x 1/2 " End plate
2 1/4 "
3" 1 1/2 " 7/8 " 7/8 " 1 1/2 " 8 Gage MIN 1 3/4 " 11/16 "
ELEVATION
SECTION B-B
ANCHOR PLATE
(See Note 1)
31/32 "
ANCHOR RAIL WASHER
3/16 " x 1" x 8" plate tack welded to 5/8 " plate 4" 8"
6-6"
~
5 1/16 " 1 15/16 " 3/8 " 3/4 " Cable 1 1/16 " Hole Swage 5/8 " Steel plate

C L I F F
S T A
T
O T
1 1/4 "
1 5/8 "
1" x 7" Stud threaded full
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
length (TYP)
ANCHOR CABLE
STANDARD PLAN C-6

Donald K. Nelson
05/30/97
DATE
Sheet 2 of 2 Sheets
PORTATION.
15224
NE E R
BEARING PLATE
NOTE:
1 5/8 "
5" 8"
D L E I F N
F O R P
NOTES 1. For details, see Standard Plan C-6.

BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT ANCHOR PAY LIMIT
2. For end section details see Standard Plan C-7 or C-7a. 6-3" 12" 16"
ANCHOR PLATE TYP (SEE NOTE 1)
3. For details, see Standard Plan C-1b. 18"

ANCHOR RAIL WASHER (SEE NOTE 1)
4. Outside nut shall be torqued against inside nut a minimum of 100 ft.-lbs. 5. Post and block shall match beam guardrail posts.
END SECTION DESIGN C (SEE NOTE 2)
2-3"
BEARING PLATE (SEE NOTE 1) SEE NOTE 5 TWO 1" NUTS AND WASHERS (SEE NOTE 4)
W BEAM INSTALLATION
ANCHOR POST ASSEMBLY (SEE NOTE 3)
THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL PAY LIMIT
ANCHOR PAY LIMIT 6-3"

12"
16"
18"
(SEE NOTE 1)
S T A
E T
END SECTION DESIGN C (THRIE BEAM) (SEE NOTE 2)
WOOD BREAKAWAY POST (SEE NOTE 3)
STANDARD 2" ID PIPE SLEEVE (2 3/8 " OD) BEARING PLATE (SEE NOTE 1)
15224
EXPIRES MAY 3, 2000
SEE NOTE 5
TWO 1" NUTS AND WASHERS (SEE NOTE 4)
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 4 STANDARD PLAN C-6c
THRIE BEAM INSTALLATION

ANCHOR POST ASSEMBLY (SEE NOTE 3)
MODIFIED "END SECTIONS" TO DESIGN "C", CHANGED 12/99 NOTE 2 AND DETAIL TITLES. DATE REVISION BY TWS
01/06/00
DATE
ANCHOR RAIL WASHER
C L I F F
O T
NOTE:
NE E R
2-8"
TWO 1" NUTS AND WASHERS TYP (SEE NOTE 4) 2" TYP
STANDARD 2" ID PIPE SLEEVE (2 3/8 " OD)
D L E I F N
F O R P

NOTES 1. Attach W-beam to steel pipe with 5/8 " x 1 1/4 " No connection to
3/4 " x 9- 0" Cable with one swaged end
button head bolt with no washer. the post is required.
See Detail B
2.
For end section details see Standard Plan, "Beam Guardrail End Sections".
3/8 " x 4" x 12" Steel plate
3.
For details see Standard Plan, "Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 1".
10" x 13" Standard steel pipe
4.
For details see Standard Plan, "Beam Guardrail Posts".
PLAN
1/4 1/4
5.
Outside nut shall be torqued against inside nut a minimum of 100 ft/lbs.
See Note 1
5/8 " x 2" Button head bolt or 5/8 " x 1 1/2 " hex head bolt
and hex nut with anchor rail washers under bolt head and nut (See Note 3).
Beam guardrail pay limit
Anchor pay limit
6- 3"
Tack weld 2 1/2 " x 2 1/2 " x
1/4 " steel plate
Anchor plate Two 1" Nuts (see Note 3) and washers (see Note 5) 1 " Nut
12" 16" 18"
with 1 1/16 " hole to tubular steel
1" x 4" Stud threaded full length End Section Design G (see Note 2)
2- 3"
DETAIL B
41 (T Y /2 "
3/4 " Cable clips (6 required) torque nuts to 50 ft/lbs.

Bearing plate (see Note 3)
P)
1/4
Standard 2" ID pipe sleeve TS 2 1/2 " x 2 1/2 " x 1/4 " x 8"
2" 1/4
(2 3/8 " OD)
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR

THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANS-
C L I F F
(see Note 5)
S T A
E T
I N G
Anchor Post Assemblies (see Note 4)
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
STANDARD PLAN C-6d

TYPE 5 ANCHOR
Donald K. Nelson
05/30/97
DATE
PORTATION.
15224
NOTE:
Two 1" Nuts and washer
TYPE 5 . M A N DE R S A W O S F H O
O T
NE E R
D L E I F N
F O R P

NOTES
1.
For details, see Standard Plan, "Beam Guardrail Anchor Type 1".
2.
The rail element is to be included in the "Beam Guardrail" pay item. The "Anchor" pay item
includes the anchor post, anchor plate, anchor cable, bearing plate, nuts and washers.
3.
Beam Guardrail pay limit (see Note 2)
For details, see Standard Plan, "Beam Guardrail Posts and Blocks".
4.
Post shall match beam guardrail posts.
Two 1" nuts Anchor plate and washers (see Note 1) (see Note 1)
Bearing plate (see Note 1) Standard 2" ID pipe sleeve (2 3/8 " OD) Two 1" nuts and washers
See Note 4
2"
(see Note 1)
Anchor Post Assembly (See Note 3)
Anchor pay limit (see Note 2)

S T A
TYPE 7 ANCHOR
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
STANDARD PLAN C-6f

Donald K. Nelson
07/25/97
DATE
PORTATION.
15224
NOTE:
C L I F F
O T
NE E R
5- 3"
2- 3"
D L E I F N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL 27 1/2"
R
X
6"
NOTES 1. End Section Design G shall be used except where noted on the plans or contract. Attach guardrail to bridge rail or concrete barrier with 7/8" diameter bolts (five minimum) Standard Spec. 9-06.5(4), with thin slab ferrule inserts or resin bonded anchors. See the Contract Plans. A single piece having similar dimensional shape to Design G and mating with the W-beam guardrail is an alternate. In cases where Design "F" end section is lapped on the outside of the guardrail, a galvanized 1" ID, 2" OD, 0.134" thick, narrow Type A Plain Washer or a anchor rail washer shall be placed under the splice bolt heads.
10"
30 2 1/4" 8 1/2"
2.
3 3/8"
PLAN PLAN
SPLICE BOLT SLOT (TYP.) 29/32" x 1 1/8" 3/4" x 2 1/2" POST BOLT SLOT 12 1/4" 3/8" HOLE (OPTIONAL) 6 1/8"
3.
4.
16"
6 1/8"
F ON GN TI SI EC DE D S EN
SPLICE BOLT SLOT (TYP.) 29/32" x 1 1/8" 2"
O APPR
X
" R = 11 TE XIMA
ELEVATION
4 1/4" 4 1/4" 2"
8 1/2"
ELEVATION
DESIGN C
25^ DESIGN D END SECTION
DESIGN A
PLAN
SPLICE BOLT SLOT (TYP.) 29/32" x 1 1/8"
R
X
14
1/
4"
30"
THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT
3 3/8"
8 1/2"
2"
8 1/2" 30" 3" 7 1/4" 4" 4"
3"
S T A
25^ BEND FOR USE WITH DESIGN G
ELEVATION
2"
12 1/4"
3 1/2" 3/4" x 2 1/2" POST BOLT SLOT (OPTIONAL) 12 1/4" 16" 3 1/2"
SPLICE BOLT SLOT (TYP.) 29/32" x 1 1/8" SPLICE BOLT SLOT (TYP.) 29/32" x 1 1/8"
BEAM GUARDRAIL END SECTIONS

1" HOLES (TYP.) (SEE NOTE 2)
STANDARD PLAN C-7

ELEVATION
ELEVATION
Pasco Bakotich III
06-16-11
DATE
DESIGN D
DESIGN F
(SEE NOTE 4)
PORTATION.
32350
PLAN
(SEE NOTE 3)
NE E R
DESIGN G
NOTE:
O T
S D N N
F O R P
NOTES
DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL 29/32" x 1 1/8" SLOTS (TYP)
R
X
6"
1.
22" 29/32" x 1 1/8" SLOTS (TYP)
X
30^
11
"
Attach guardrail to bridge rail or concrete barrier with 7/8" diameter bolts (five minimum) Standard Spec. 9-06.5(4), with thin slab ferrule inserts or resin bonded anchors. See the Contract Plans.
2"
8 1/2"
2.
2"
8 1/2"
In cases where Design F End Section is lapped on the outside of the guardrail, a galvanized 1" ID, 2" OD, 0.134" thick, narrow Type A Plain Washer or an anchor rail washer will be placed under the splice bolt heads.
12 GAGE PLATE
20"
24"
29/32" x 1 1/8" SLOTS (TYP)
29/32" x 1 1/8" SLOTS (TYP) 20" 24"
2"
8 1/2" 25" MIN
DESIGN F (THRIE BEAM)

2" 8 1/2" 31 1/4"
END SECTION
DESIGN C (THRIE BEAM)

DESIGN D (THRIE BEAM)
X
OX APPR
" R = 11 E IMAT
2" 25^
8 1/2"
29/32" x 1 1/8" SLOTS (TYP)
DESIGN D (THRIE BEAM) END SECTION
2 - 6"
FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PORTATION.
29/32" x 1 1/8" SLOTS (TYP) 25^ BEND FOR USE WITH DESIGN G (THRIE BEAM)
3 3/8" 3" 8 1/2" 3"
S T A
2"
4"
4"
7 1/4" 20" 6 3/16"
20"(+3/16") -
7 5/8"
32350
7 5/8"
7 5/8"
6 3/16"
THRIE BEAM END SECTIONS

DESIGN G (THRIE BEAM)
3/4" HOLES (FOR DESIGN G END SECTION ONLY) SEE NOTE 1
2 3/8"
STANDARD PLAN C-7a

1" HOLES (TYP) 29/32" x 1 1/8" SLOTS (TYP) 3/4" x 2 1/2" SLOTS (TYP) SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III
06-16-11
DATE
DESIGN F (THRIE BEAM)
O T
NOTE:
2 3/8"
NE E R
S D N N
F O R P

Wire rope loop (TYP) 1 1/2 " 3- 8" #5 Bars 3- 8" Bar A 1/4 "
EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012 NOTE

1. For details on wire rope loop, connecting pin and end notches see Standard Plan "Concrete Barrier Type 2."
A
Bar B
1/4 "
3- 8"
Concrete Barrier Type 4

12"
Bar B
Concrete Barrier Type 2 or cast-in-place concrete barrier, light standard section
B
Wire rope loop
2"
18" 1/8 " 1/8 " Face of concrete at C L of barrier 10- 0" or 12- 6" C L Pin 12" 2- 0"
Clearance
3- 0"
12"
C L Pin
A INTERMEDIATE PLAN
3- 8"
6"
10- 0"
TRANSITION PLAN
C L Pin C L Pin 1 1/2 " (TYP) 3/4 " Chamfer 7 1/2 " Wire rope loop or alternate 2 1/2 " Clearance Lifting notches bar loop (TYP) Two #5 Bars (Bar A) 7/8 " R
3" (TYP)
One #5 Bar (Bar B) 2" Clearance
C L Pin
Two #5 Bars (Bar B)
C L Pin
1 1/2 " (TYP) 2" Clearance 3/4 " Chamfer 7 1/2 "
3" (TYP)
1/2 "
Wire rope loop

2 1/2 " Clearance Lifting notches
or alternate bar loop (TYP)

Two #5 Bars (Bar A)
7/8 " R
1/2 " Chamfer

3"
3" 2" R 3" 4 1/2 " Clearance Bevel or round edges ( 3/4 " MAX) 10- 0" or 12- 6" 10- 0" C L Pin C L Pin 6" 2" R 3"
Bevel or round edges ( 3/4 " MAX)
4 1/2 " Clearance

6"
INTERMEDIATE ELEVATION
C L Pin
TRANSITION ELEVATION
C L Pin
CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE 4

Varies 6" to 18" 6" 1" Draft 1- 7" 7 1/2 " Bridge Pier 2" Clearance 7" 1/8 " Draft 10" 2- 0 1/2 " 7" 9"
THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
AND TRANSITION SECTION

. M A N DE R S A W O S F H I N EO G
T
O T
C L I F F
2" Clearance 1- 7"
S T A
2- 8"
10" R 3" 10"
6"
Draft 12" 3"
4 1/2 " Clearance
EXPIRES MAY 3, 1998
4 1/2 " Clearance 2- 2" 12" (TYP) Varies 2- 0" to 3- 0" 2 3/4 " CL 16"
STANDARD PLAN C-8a

3"
Donald K. Nelson
07/25/97
DATE
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
TYPE 4
TRANSITION END VIEW
TRANSITION SECTION
NOTE:
1/8 "
PORTATION.
15224
NE E R
6"
2- 2"
Chamfer
2- 1/2 "
2- 2"
2- 1/2 "
6"
D L E I F N
F O R P

A

NOTES 1. This plan shall be used for 40 and 50 Light Standards with 16 max. length double mast arms.
21 - 6" 10 - 0" 9" 9" 10 - 0"
2. SeeStandard Plan C-8 for details on barrier ends, Wire Rope Loops, and Connecting Pins. 3. Grounding Conductor shall be non-insulated #4 AWG stranded copper, provide 3 - 0" min. slack. Clamp steel reinforcing bar with connnector suitable for use embedded in concrete.
1/4" DRAFT 9 " ALL CORNERS 1/2" CHAMFER (TYP.) 9 " 3 -6 "
4. See the Contract Plans for conduit placement. 5. Concrete shall be Class 4000.
3 - 6" 2 - 0" 2 -0 " 5 -0 " GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD (SEE NOTE 3) 7" STEEL LIGHT STANDARD ~ SEE STD. PLAN J-28.60 ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) WIRE ROPE LOOP (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL GROUT 9"
2 -0 "
9 "
9 "
6 "
11 / 2 "
1/2" DRAIN HOLE ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.)
3/4" CHAMFER
1 1 "
~ SEE DETAIL 4 #4
#4 1 0 "
10" R. PAVEMENT 6 #4 3 "
SEE DETAIL " A" FOR CONDUIT AND ANCHOR BOLT PLACEMENT 9 - 0"
SEE NOTE 4
PLAN
3 "
#4
21 - 6" 2 - 0" 6" 3" CLR. 6 #4 ~ 6 SPACES @ 1 - 0" = 6 - 0" 5 " 6 #4 ~ 17 SPACES @ 6" = 8 - 6" 3 " 6 #4 ~ 6 SPACES @ 1 - 0" = 6 - 0" CL R. 7" SEE NOTE 3 6" 9" 6" 9" SEE NOTE 4 2 " 3 #4 5 - 0" 2 #4 CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE
4 #4 ~ FIELD BEND
#4
SECTION
1 -7 "
2 -8 "
10" R. TOP OF RDWY.
1 0 "
3 "
BASE COURSE
2 -0 "
2 -0 "
S T A
E T
5 #4 ~ FIELD BEND 3 #4 2 #4
PAVEMENT BASE COURSE
1 6" SPACING FOR 1 #4 1- 0"
#4 1- 0" 5 SPACES @ 6" = 2 - 6" 1- 0" 6"
5 - 0"
5 SPACES @ 6" = 2 - 6"
N I G U ES T N R A I LE G S N I E O N L A
25470
U C
END
2 #4 ~ 8 SPACES @ 1 - 0" = 8 - 0" 9 - 0"
CONCRETE BARRIER LIGHT STANDARD SECTION
ELEVATION
STANDARD PLAN C-8b

Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
ISOMETRIC
R I C H A
Z ED . DP A L E N R W S F H O I N
N O T
NE E R
E E R
6 "
2 -1 1 " CL R. 2 "
DOCUM ENT
6 "
3 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

9"
9"
6 3/8"6 3/8"
POLE BASE PLATE ~ SEE STD. PLAN J-28.60
HEAVY HEX NUTS AND WASHERS
POLE BASE PLATE ~ SEE STD. PLAN J-28.60
HEAVY HEX NUTS AND WASHERS
51 / 2 "M I N.
51 / 2 "M I N.
THREADS
THREADS
MI N.
TOP OF BARRIER
MI N.
5 "
5 "
TOP OF BARRIER
1 -0 "
2 3 / 4 "
EM BEDM ENT
EM BEDM ENT
1" DIAM. BOLT ~ ASTM A 449
1" DIAM. THREADED ROD ~ ASTM A 449
ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAILS ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAILS
HEAVY HEX NUT AND WASHER (TYP.)
HEAVY HEX NUT AND WASHER (TYP.)
HEADED BOLT
THREADED ROD
2" CONDUIT ~ SEE NOTE 4 13.89" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE 12" DIAM.
ANCHOR BOLT DETAIL

GALVANIZE EXPOSED ANCHOR ROD END 1 - 0" MIN.
DETAIL "A"
16" DIAM. 1" DIAM.
6 6 . 6 ) . 6 P Y T (
HOLE (TYP.)
DOCUM ENT
1/2" PLATE
S T A
E T
ANCHOR PLATE
25470
U C
BAR LIST
MARK LOCATION QTY. SIZE LENGTH
10 FOOTING - DOWEL 2 3 4 5 6 FOOTING FOOTING BARRIER BARRIER BARRIER 28 18 9 #4 4 4 30 21 - 0" 4 - 3" 2 -3 1 / 2 " 4 - 8" 8 - 8"
BENDING DIAGRAM
(ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT) 7 3" TO
1 9 "
1 - 9"
CONCRETE BARRIER LIGHT STANDARD SECTION
6 -9 "
84^
5 -3 "TO
" 9 9
1 - 6"
9 9 "
STANDARD PLAN C-8b

1 (FIELD BEND)
Pasco Bakotich III

6
06-27-11
DATE
21 - 0" 4" 5 - 3" TO 6 - 9"
R I C H A
N O T
6 6 . 6 6 ( T Y P . )
NE E R
E E R
1 -0 "
2 3 / 4 "
2 -5 "
2 -5 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S


NOTES 1. The intended use of this plan is for the permanent anchoring of Precast Concrete Barrier Type 2 (see Standard Plan C-8) on hot mix asphalt pavement. Remove the Type 3 Anchors by first driving the steel pins down through the barrier further into the pavement to allow lifting the barrier without interference, then remove the pins from the pavement. After removing the Type 3 Anchors, clean the pin holes and fill them with sealant according to Standard Specification 9-04.2.
2.
3.
TRAFFIC SIDE
SHOULDER WIDENING
TRAFFIC SIDE
TRAFFIC SIDE
2 - 0" PRECAST CONC. BARRIER TYPE 2 1 - 0"
PRECAST CONC. BARRIER TYPE 2
2" DIAM. PINNING HOLE (TYP.)
50^ (TYP.)
1 - 0" MIN. (TYP.) 1 - 0" HMA PINNING HOLE (TYP.) ~ ONLY REQUIRED ON TRAFFIC SIDE(S) OF BARRIER 11" 2 - 0"
HMA
PLAN VIEW
TYPE 3 ANCHOR
PIN LOCATIONS
1" DIAM. 30" GALVANIZED STEEL PIN (TYP.)
) 18 " (T Y P.
S T A
SECTION VIEWS
TYPE 3 ANCHOR
PIN LOCATIONS
PRECAST CONC. BARRIER ANCHOR ~ TYPE 3 (PERMANENT)
STANDARD PLAN C-8e

Ken L. Smith
02/2007 REMOVED TEMPORARY ANCHORS MAS
02-21-07
DATE

DATE REVISION BY
PORTATION.
34042
NOTE:
R I C H A
TWO PINS REQUIRED ON THE TRAFFIC SIDE ~ TWO PINS TOTAL, PER BARRIER SECTION
TWO PINS REQUIRED PER TRAFFIC SIDE ~ FOUR PINS TOTAL, PER BARRIER SECTION
NE E R
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

PIN 4 #5 3" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)

3 - 8" (TYP.) 1 #5 2 #5 CROWN WIRE ROPE LOOP LENGTH 5 #5 1/2" CHAMFER PIN 1 1/2" R. 7/8" R.
1 1/2" R. 7/8" R. 1/2" CHAMFER 4 #5
WIRE ROPE LOOP (TYP.) SEE STD. PLAN C-8
3"
5 #5 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
3"
5 1/2"
3"
2 - 0"
1 #5
5 1/2"
3"
WIRE ROPE LOOP (TYP.)
WIRE ROPE LOOP (TYP.)
3"
1 #5 1 - 3 1/2" 1 - 3 1/2"
1 #5
1 #5
C
3 #5
1 - 8"
2" CLR.
3 #5
3 #5
TOP VIEW
2" CLR.
2"
LR
2"
2" CLR.
LR .
A
5"
4 #5
WIRE ROPE LOOP (TYP.) SEE STD. PLAN C-8
5 #5
B
5"
1 #5
7 1/2"
1 - 5"
3" 2 #5 PIN
1 - 0"
2" CLR. (TYP.) 2 - 8"
10 1/4"
3" 2 #5
PIN
CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE 2 (NJ-SHAPE)
BRIDGE F-SHAPE TRAFFIC BARRIER
END VIEW
END VIEW
BARRIER FACE OF CONCRETE
PIN 1/8" 1 1/2"
2" R. ~ BEVEL OR ROUND EDGES 3/4" MAX. (TYP.) PIN
6" TYP.
2 #5 10 - 0" OR 12 - 6"
3 #5
1 1/2" (TYP.) TRANSITION SECTION ~ MIRROR IMAGE OF PLAN PIN
TRAFFIC-SIDE VIEW
TRANSITION SECTION
1 48 CONNECTING PIN ~ SEE STD. PLAN C-8 F-SHAPE CONCRETE TRAFFIC BARRIER ON BRIDGE
PIN
9" 48 1 WIRE ROPE LOOP ~ SEE STD. PLAN C-8 1 3/4" I.D. LOOP 48 1
2 - 0" 6" 9" 5 1/4"
2 - 0" 11 1/2" 7 1/4" CROWN 1
TRANSITION SECTION ~ AS SHOWN IN PLAN

48 FLAT 1
48
S T A
1 - 7"
1 - 10"
DETAIL
7"
4 7/8"
REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAM

9 - 4 3/4" FOR 10 - 0" LONG TRANSITION 11 - 10 3/4" FOR 12 - 6" LONG TRANSITION 10" R.
CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE 2 10" R. 10" 7"
ISOMETRIC VIEW
CONCRETE BARRIER TRANSITION TYPE 2 TO BRIDGE F-SHAPE
1 #5 2 #5 3 #5
1 2 3
2 - 1" 3" 1 - 6 1/2" 1 - 4" 3"
NOTE The vertical locations of the Wire Rope Loops at one end compose a set that shall not vary; however, which set is applied to an end is determined by the end to which it is being connected. A set with loops 1 - 5" apart connects to a set with loops 1 - 8" apart. See Standard Plan C-8, BARRIER CONNECTION DETAIL.
STANDARD PLAN C-8f

CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE 2 (NJ-SHAPE)

4 #5 5 #5 4 5 10" 11 3/4"
BRIDGE F-SHAPE TRAFFIC BARRIER
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-30-04
DATE
SECTION
SECTION
(SHOWN AT LIMIT OF TRANSITION)
(SHOWN AT LIMIT OF TRANSITION)
PORTATION.
2 - 8"
2 - 8"
34042
NE E R
TYPICAL ~ BOTH ENDS
CROWN
NOTE:
R I C H A
4 1/2"
4 1/2"
6"
CLR.
CLR.
3"
3"
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

24 - 0" HEIGHT TRANSITION DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA

NOTE
4" 1- 0"
4"
10 - 0" TRANSITION MULTIPLE SURFACES TO SINGLE SLOPE 3" DUMMY JOINT
1- 0"
This plan is for transitions to Pre-cast Concrete Barrier Type 2 only. See contract for transitions to other barrier shapes and bridge rails.
2- 0"
1- 0" 8"
1 1/2" CLR. MIN.
8"
8"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
1- 0" 3"
12 - 0"
DUMMY JOINT 1 #4 2 - 10" MIN. 4 3 - 6"
PLAN A
CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE 2
B
SINGLE SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER (BID ITEM)
4 #5 (TYP.)
21
6" 5 1/2"
2 # 4 & 6 # 4 ~ 6 SPACES @ 1- 6" = 9- 0"
1- 0"
1 # 4 & 7 # 4 ~ 9 SPACES @ 1- 6" = 13- 6"
1- 6"
1 #4& 3 #4 3" MIN. @ 1- 6" SPACING 2 1/2" CLR. 7 #4 2 - 0"
2" CLR.
WIRE ROPE LOOPS
2 4 # 5
DUMMY JOINT
1- 3 1/2" 2 - 8" 3 - 6" 1 1/2" 3 EQUAL SPACES
3- 6"
SECTION
3" MIN.
TOP OF RDWY.
TOP OF RDWY.
DUMMY JOINT PROVIDE WIRE LOOPS, NOTCHES, AND OTHER DETAILS TO MATCH THE BARRIER CONNECTIONS SHOWN IN STD. PLAN C-8 2 5 # 5 10 - 0"
ELEVATION
3/4"
1/2"
3/4"

5 1/2" 4" VARIES 5^ TO 11^ 1 1/2" CLR. 2 - 6" 2 - 6" 1 79^ (TYP.) SEE NOTE 1 2 1 - 7" 4 #5 (TYP.)
L R .
3/4"
MIN.
S T A
2 #4 4 #5 (TYP.) VARIES
R I C H A
2 #4
7"
3 - 6"
10
10"
"
2 - 6"
1/
2"
TOP OF RDWY.
TOP OF RDWY.
10"
7"
ISOMETRIC VIEW
1 - 8"
1 - 8" 6 #4 79^ (TYP.) SEE NOTE 1 5 #5 2 - 0" 2 1/2" CLR. 6 #4 5 #5 2 - 0" 2 1/2" CLR.
CONCRETE BARRIER TRANSITION TYPE 2 TO SINGLE SLOPE STANDARD PLAN C-14b

2 - 6"
SECTION NOTES 1. Field bend as required in transition.
SECTION
Harold J. Peterfeso
07-26-02
DATE
VARIES 1 - 7" TO 1 - 8"
2. All bends are 2" radius.
NOTE:
3"
79^ (TYP.)
VARIES 10" TO 6"
PORTATION.
34042
3" MIN.
2" 1 1/
CLR
NE E R
VARIES 35^ TO 11^
VARIES 1 - 3" TO 2 - 6"
R.
9"
6"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
1 1/2" CLR. MIN.
8 5/8" 6 3/4"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
DUMMY JOINT
24 - 0" HEIGHT TRANSITION
SEE STANDARD PLAN C-14a
TOP OF RDWY.
" 1 1/2 . R L C
10"
5"
3"
3"
7"
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL CRT POST ~ (SEE DETAIL) (SEE NOTE 2) SPAN = 12 - 6" (OMIT 1 POST) SPAN = 18 - 9" (OMIT 2 POSTS) SPAN = 25 - 0" (OMIT 3 POSTS)

CRT POST ~ (SEE DETAIL) (SEE NOTE 2)
W69 STEEL POST (TYP.)
6 - 3" (TYP.)
BURIED OBSTRUCTION
NOTE 1. For additional details not shown on this plan, refer to Standard Plan C-28.40. CRT post to be wood only.
ONE OR TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
PLAN VIEW
2.
SINGLE W-BEAM RAIL ELEMENT BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 ~ PAY LIMIT W69 STEEL POST (TYP.)
GROUND LINE
OBSTRUCTION
ELEVATION VIEW
0" MIN. OFFSET FROM BACKSIDE OF GUARDRAIL POST AND FACE OF CULVERT HEADWALL PERMITTED
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 (BEYOND CULVERT) 7"
8" NOM.
BACKSIDE OF CRT POST FINISHED GRADE FACE OF HEADWALL
3/4" HOLE
25"
S T A
T
O T
WING WALL (BEYOND) 6 - 0" CULVERT
2 3/8" HOLE
BACKSIDE OF POST (TYP.)
6 8 WOOD POST
W69 STEEL POST (TYP.)
SECTION
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 PLACEMENT 12 - 6", 18 - 9" OR 25 - 0" SPAN STANDARD PLAN C-20.40-02
SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
CONTROLLED RELEASING TERMINAL (CRT) POST DETAIL
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
CULVERT
SPAN WITH HEADWALL DETAIL
NOTE:
FACE OF HEADWALL
32350
16"
NE E R
S D N N
F O R P


TRANSITION PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 1)
NOTES 1.
TE
See Contract for transition and connection type. For additional installation requirements for Non-Flared Terminal placement see Standard Plan C-22.40. Guardrail installation shall be Beam Guardrail Type 31 with standard post and block. See Standard Plan 28.40 for additional details. The first letter of case designation indicates the end treatment on the side road. The second letter indicates the end treatment on the main road. For instance, a terminal on a side road and a bridge connection on the main road would be Case 22BC-31. The radius dimension shall be etched into the plate as shown in the example on the Identification Plate Detail. Numerals shall be 1 1/2" high minimum, and 3/4" wide maximum. Plate shall be galvanized after etching and the letter shall remain permanently legible. The guardrail Identification Plate shall be mounted at the lower splice bolt on the back side of the rail element at the PC of the guardrail radius.
PT
3)
BRIDGE END T I
6 B 3" E A P M O S G T U A S R P D R
E E S ( 31 G E N I P Y C T A L I A
O N
Y A P
M LI
2. CASE 22C-31
(SEE NOTE 4)
POINT B
3.
RADIUS VARIES (SEE CONTRACT)
NON - FLARED TERMINAL PAY LIMIT (SEE NOTE 2)
4.
5.
SHOULDER BREAK
CASE 22D-31
(SEE NOTE 4)
W6X8 STEEL POST (TYP.)
6.
(X) SPACES AT 6 - 3" (1 SPACE MIN.)
POINT A 5" PC 3/4" DIAM. HOLE 3/4"
(SEE NOTE 6)
S T A
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 10 PAY LIMIT
2 3/4"
1 1/8"
(SEE NOTE 5) SHOULDER BREAK
(SEE NOTE 4)
GUARDRAIL PLACEMENT STRONG POST ~ TYPE 31 INTERSECTION DESIGN

CASE 22B-31
(SEE NOTE 4)
SPLICE BOLT SLOT (TYP.) IDENTIFICATION PLATE ~ SEE DETAIL
STANDARD PLAN C-20.42-02

Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE

(SEE NOTE 6)
NOTE:
CASE 22A-31
PORTATION.
32350
IDENTIFICATION PLATE DETAIL
NE E R
MIN.
O T
5O
1/4" STEEL PLATE
NON - FLARED TERMINAL
2"
3/4"
S D N N
F O R P

DIRECTION OF TRAVEL

NOTES
A 1. Beam Guardrail post spacing shall be 6 - 3" on centers.
3 - 1 1/2"
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
6 - 3"
3 - 1 1/2"
ACTUAL
2. Use a single or combination of blocks to achieve the actual 12" offset. SeeStandard Specification 9-16.3(2) . Wood blocks shall be toe-nailed to post (and blocks, if block combinations are used) with 16d galvanized nails to prevent block rotation. 3. Attach blockouts to steel posts using bolt holes on approaching traffic side of post web. 4. For details not shown, see Standard Plan C-28.40. 5. Wood blocks shown. Blocks of alternate material may be used. SeeStandard Specification 9-16.3(2).
1 2 "
SEE NOTE 2
6 14 BLOCKOUT (TYP.) (SEE NOTE 2)
5/8" DIAM. 1 1/4" BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP (TYP.) AND RECESSED HEX NUTS ~ 8 REQUIRED PER SPLICE
MID-SPAN SPLICE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
5/8" DIAM. 14" BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP AND RECESSED HEX NUT WITH CUT WASHER (TYP.)
16d ANTI - ROTATION NAIL (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 2
PLAN
5/8" DIAM. 1 1/4" BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP (TYP.) 3 - 1 1/2" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 6 - 3" 3 - 1 1/2" AND RECESSED HEX NUTS ~ 8 REQUIRED PER SPLICE
MID SPAN SPLICE
GROUND LINE 1/4" DIAM. HOLE FOR ANTI-ROTATION 16d NAIL (TYP.)
" 1
1 "
" 1
W68.5 6 - 0" OR W69 6 - 0" LONG STEEL POST (TYP.) 7 " 7 " 1 "
ANTI-ROTATION NAIL DETAIL
DOCUM ENT
ELEVATION
3/4" DIAM. HOLE FOR BUTTON HEAD BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL AT RIGHT 16d ANTI-ROTATION NAIL (TYP.) 12" ACTUAL W-BEAM GUARDRAIL (TYP.) FACE OF BARRIER 6 6 14 BLOCKOUT (TYP.) 1 " ~ SEE NOTE 2 ( TYP. ) 1 -2 "
S T A
FACE OF BARRIER
2 -7 "
16d ANTI-ROTATION NAIL (TYP.) 5/8" DIAM. 1 1/4" BUTTON HEAD BOLT W/ 7/32" OVAL GRIP (TYP.) AND RECESSED HEX NUTS ~ 8 REQUIRED PER SPLICE
32350
5/8" DIAM. 1 - 2" BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP AND RECESSED HEX NUT WITH CUT WASHER (TYP.)
6 12 BLOCKOUT (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 2 GROUND LINE
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 DS (DOUBLE SIDED) (W-BEAM)

W68.5 6 - 0" OR W69 6 - 0" LONG STEEL POST 5/8" DIAM. 14" BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP AND RECESSED HEX NUT WITH CUT WASHER (TYP.) SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
SECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

NE E R
STEEL POST
06-16-11
DATE
ISOMETRIC
T E R
. B L E R Y A W S F H R EO I N G
T
2 -7 "
S D N E N O
F O R P

5/8" x 2" LONG BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" 4 -0 "M I N. OVAL GRIP, CUT WASHER, AND HEX NUT ROADW AY

1 - 0" MIN. COVER
ABOVE
D OFFSET DISTANCE G
2 - 3"
NO BOLT REQUIRED
3 "
V H NOT STEEPER THAN 10H : 1V
V H NOT STEEPER THAN 4H : 1V 1 - 6" MAX.
V H NOT STEEPER THAN 4H : 1V H
NOT FLATTER THAN 3H : 1V
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SEE NOTE 3
LOCATION OF POST (WITHOUT BLOCK) ~ W6 9 STEEL POST
PERSPECTIVE
C
LOCATION OF POSTS & BLOCKS (TYP.) BURIAL POINT TOP OF CUT
NOTES 1. Posts installed on shoulder slopes steeper than 10H : 1V shall be 8 long. 2. The flare rate of the guardrail may be increased after crossing the ditch bottom to shorten the length of the terminal. 3. Determine the height of the W-Beam at the Anchor G ( ) by first calculating the perpendicular offset distance D ( ) from the edge of shoulder ( S) to the Anchor (on station). Multiply that distance by 0.1, then subtract the product from the elevation of the same point S ( ) on the edge of shoulder used to obtain the offset distance (at the same station). Add Beam Guardrail design height (27") to that remainder for a sum that equals the elevation of the top of the W-Beam at the Anchor. Refer to SECTION "C":
EDGE OF WIDENED EMBANKMENT W-BEAM RUB RAIL
BURIAL POINT
) . P Y T ( " 3 6
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 2 ~ SEE 1 8 MIN. ~ SEE NOTE 2 STANDARD PLAN C-6a
ANGLE POINT ~ SEE NOTE 2 FLARE RATE ~ SEE TABLE FIELD BEND
BOTTOM OF DITCH
Elevation = (Elevation G = S - D (0.1) ) + 27
FLARE RATE TABLE

THE ENGI NEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBL I CATI ON, I S KEPT ON DOCUM ENT PORTATI ON. A COPY M AY BE OBTAI NED UPON REQUEST.
EDGE OF SHOULDER
RATE PLAN
15 : 1 BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 PAY LIMIT W-BEAM RAIL BURIED TERMINAL TYPE 2 ~ PAY LIMIT (TERMINAL LENGTH VARIES) 14 : 1 12 : 1 11 : 1 TOP OF CUT 10 : 1 9 : 1
70 60 55
S T A
50 45 40 OR LESS
32350
BURIAL W-BEAM RUB RAIL BOTTOM OF DITCH POINT BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 2 ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN C-6a
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 1 BURIED TERMINAL TYPE 2

LOCATION OF POST (WITHOUT BLOCK) 6 - 0" LONG (TYP) SEE NOTE 1 (TYP.) 6 - 0" LONG (TYP.) ~ W6 9 STEEL POST LOCATION OF POSTS & BLOCKS
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
ELEVATION
(PROFILE ALONG RAIL)
POSTED SPEED (mph)
T E
. B E R YL E R N A W S F H R EO I N G
N O T
NE E R
S D
F O R P

5/8" x 2" LONG BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP, CUT WASHER, AND HEX NUT 4 -0 "M I N. ROADW AY 7 " ABOVE

1 - 0" MIN. COVER
D OFFSET DISTANCE G
2 - 7"
NO BOLT REQUIRED
V H NOT STEEPER THAN 10H : 1V
V H NOT STEEPER THAN 4H : 1V 1 - 6" MAX. V H NOT STEEPER THAN 4H : 1V H NOT FLATTER THAN 3H : 1V V
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SEE NOTE 3
W6 X 9 STEEL POST WITHOUT BLOCK BURIAL W6 X 9 STEEL POST WITHOUT BLOCK POINT
PERSPECTIVE NOTES
C
TOP OF CUT
LOCATION OF POSTS & BLOCKS (TYP.)
1. Posts installed on shoulder slopes steeper than 10H : 1V shall be 8 long. 2. The flare rate of the guardrail may be increased after crossing the ditch bottom to shorten the length of the terminal. 3. Determine the height of the W-Beam at the Anchor G ( ) by first calculating the perpendicular offset distance D ( ) from the edge of shoulder ( S) to the Anchor (on station). Multiply that distance by 0.1, then subtract the product from the elevation of the same point ( S) on the edge of shoulder used to obtain the offset distance (at the same station). Add Beam Guardrail design height (31") to that remainder for a sum that equals the elevation of the top of the W-Beam at the Anchor. Refer to SECTION "C": Elevation G = (Elevation S - (0.1)) + 27
THE ENGI NEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBL I CATI ON, I S KEPT ON DOCUM ENT
BURIAL POINT
A
W-BEAM RUB RAIL
EDGE OF WIDENED EMBANKMENT
) . P Y T ( " 3 6
BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 2 ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN C-6a 1 8 MIN. ~ SEE NOTE 2
ANGLE POINT ~ SEE NOTE 2 FLARE RATE ~ SEE TABLE FIELD BEND
BOTTOM OF DITCH
FLARE RATE TABLE
PLAN RATE
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 PAY LIMIT W-BEAM RAIL BURIED TERMINAL TYPE 2 ~ PAY LIMIT (TERMINAL LENGTH VARIES) 14 : 1 BURIAL POINT (TYP.) 11 : 1 10 : 1 9 : 1 50 45 40 OR LESS TOP OF CUT 12 : 1 55 60 15 : 1 70
S T A
POSTED SPEED (mph)
32350
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 BURIED TERMINAL TYPE 2

BOTTOM OF DITCH BEAM GUARDRAIL ANCHOR TYPE 2 ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN C-6a 6 - 0" LONG (TYP.) W-BEAM RUB RAIL 6 - 0" LONG (TYP.) LOCATION OF POSTS WITHOUT BLOCKS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
SEE NOTE 1 (TYP.)
LOCATION OF POSTS & BLOCKS ~ W6 9 STEEL POST
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
ELEVATION
(PROFILE ALONG RAIL)
T E
N O T
EDGE OF SHOULDER
NE E R
S D
F O R P


NOTES 1. These Terminals are FHWA accepted at Test Level Two (TL-2)and may be used in applications with speeds of 40 MPH or less. 2. AnET-31 (TL-2)as manufactured by Trinity Industries, Inc. or an SKT-SP-MGS (TL-2)as manufactured by Road Systems Inc. shall be installed according to manufacturers recommendations. 3. A reflectorized object marker shall be installed according to manufacturers recommendations. 4. When snow load post washers and snow load rail washers are required by the Contract, the snow load rail washers shall not be installed within the Terminal limits. 5. Terminal shall be installed at a widening, ensuring the end piece is entirely off the shoulder. While these Terminals do not require an offset at the end, a flare is recommended. A maximum flare of 25 : 1 or flatter over the length of the Terminal is allowed for either the ET-31 (TL-2)or theSKT-SP-MGS (TL-2), with a maximum offset of 24" (in.) over 50 (ft.). 6. For Terminal details, see WSDOT-approved manufacturers drawings.
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 ~ PAY LIMIT
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 NON-FLARED TERMINAL ET-31 (TL-2) SHOWN ~ SEE NOTE 2
10 - 0" MIN. EDGE OF WIDENED EMBANKMENT 4 -0 "M I N. 6 20H : 1V SLOPE OR FLATTER (RELATIVE TO GRADE) 1
10H : 1V SLOPE OR FLATTER SEE NOTE 5
PLAN VIEW
EDGE OF SHOULDER
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 NON-FLARED TERMINAL ~ PAY LIMIT SKT-SP-MGS (TL-2) SYSTEM LENGTH = 28 - 1 1/2" (SEE NOTE 4)
2 -7 "
SEE NOTE 3
S T A
ELEVATION VIEW
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 NON-FLARED TERMINAL ~ PAY LIMIT ET-31 (TL-2) SYSTEM LENGTH = 28 - 1 1/2" (SEE NOTE 4)
32350
2 -7 "
SEE NOTE 3
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 NON-FLARED TERMINAL STEEL POSTS (POSTED SPEED ~ 40 MPH AND BELOW)

Pasco Bakotich III

SKT-SP-MGS (TL-2)
06-16-11
DATE
ELEVATION VIEW
ET-31 (TL-2)
T E
N O T
NE E R
DOCUM ENT
S D
F O R P

12 - 0" 23 - 0"

NOTES 1. For additional details not shown in this plan, refer to Standard Plan C-28.40. This guardrail transition is for connection to a vertical concrete shape or single slope barrier and cannot be connected directly to a concrete safety shape. Do not bolt nested W-Beam or rubrail W-Beam to posts and blocks on posts 1,2,3 and 5. Bolt tapered blocks directly to posts. The rubrail W-Beam can be shop bent to facilitate installation. Posts 1,2,3,4 and 6 require an additional hole to attach tapered blocks and/or rubrail. Posts 1 and 2 are W815 steel posts~ 7 - 6" long. Posts 3 through 9 areW69 steel posts ~ 6 - 0" long.
A
3 - 0" MIN. R. W-BEAM RUBRAIL 3 - 0" MIN. 1 2 3 4 5
EMBANKMENT WIDENING FOR BEAM GUARDRAIL
7 6
2.
21^
6^
3.
NESTED W-BEAM GUARDRAIL
EMBANKMENT WIDTH W ~ SEE TABLE, STANDARD PLAN C-28.40
PLAN VIEW
4.
5.
BEAM GUARDRAIL TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 20 (FOR TYPE 31) ~ PAY LIMIT BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 ~ PAY LIMIT FOUR SPACES @ 18 3/4" FOUR SPACES @ 3 - 1 1/2" 6 - 3"
6.
NESTED W-BEAM GUARDRAIL (UPPER RAIL ELEMENT)
W-BEAM GUARDRAIL
GROUND LINE
TAPERED BLOCKS ~ SEE DETAIL
W-BEAM RUBRAIL
6" 6" NOM. 3/4" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) 6"
9 6" NOM.
NOM.
NOM.
SEE NOTE 5
PLAN VIEW
TAPERED BLOCKS FOR RUBRAIL DETAIL ELEVATION VIEW

14" LONG (TYP.)
12" NOM.
BOLT LOCATION DETAIL FOR STEEL POST
S T A
4"
4"
NESTED W-BEAM GUARDRAIL (TYP.)
1 - 3 1/2"
3 1/2"
7"
VARIES GROUND LINE (TYP.)
BEAM GUARDRAIL (TYPE 31) TRANSITION SECTION TYPE 20 STANDARD PLAN C-25.18-02
9 1/2"
DETAIL
C
(OR)
SECTION
(STEEL POST)
SECTION
(STEEL POST)
B OBLIQUE VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
PORTATION.
32350
TAPERED BLOCK ~ SEE DETAIL
NOTE:
2 - 6"
O T
3/4" DIAM. HOLE
NE E R
2 - 7"
11 1/4"
10 5/8"
9 1/4"
8 3/4"
7 3/8"
6 3/4"
5 3/8"
4 3/4"
S D N N
F O R P

FACE OF BARRIER 3 - 1 1/2" 6 - 3" 6 - 3"

BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 6 - 3"
NOTES 1. Refer to Standard Plan C-1 and C-1b for additional details not shown on this plan. See contract plans for curb type and horizontal placement requirements. Use a single combination of blocks to achieve the actual 12" offset. See Standard Specification 9-16.3(2). Wood blocks shall be toe-nailed to post and blocks, (if block combinations are utilized) with a 16d galvanized nail to prevent block rotation. Wood blocks are shown. Blocks of alternative material may be used. See Standard Specification 9-16.3(2).
SHOULDER 6 12 BLOCKOUT (SEE NOTE 3)
W ~ SEE TABLE
12" 31" ACTUAL W69 STEEL POST (SEE NOTE 1)
2.
MID SPAN SPLICE GROUND LINE
1"
3.
14"
31"
TYPICAL ELEVATION
13 - 6 1/2"
4.
GROUND LINE HINGE-POINT 4 1/4" (TYP.) 4 1/4" (TYP.) SYMMETRICAL ABOUT 3 - 1 1/2" 6 - 3" 3 - 1 1/2"
SLOPE SEE TABLE
1 - 0 1/4"
TYPICAL SECTION ~ WITHOUT CURB

( 6 - 0" LONG POSTS) 2" (TYP.) 3/4" 2 1/2" SLOT (TYP.)
TYPICAL RAIL ELEMENT
AC
SLOPE \ EMBANKMENT TABLE

SLOPE
2H : 1V OR FLATTER STEEPER THAN 2H : 1V BUT NOT STEEPER THAN 1H : 1V
12 " TU AL
ANTI-ROTATION NAIL (16d) (TYP.) 1 3/16" 1" (TYP.) 1/4" DIAM. HOLE FOR ANTI-ROTATION 16d NAIL (TYP.) 14" W69 6 LONG STEEL POST (TYP.) (SEE NOTE 1) 5/8" RECESSED HEX NUT (TYP.) CUT WASHER (TYP.) 6 12 BLOCKOUT (TYP.) (SEE NOTE 3) 7"
W
2.5 MIN.
1
4.0 MIN.
3/
16
"
3/4" DIAM. HOLE THROUGH BLOCK FOR STEEL POST

6"
DETAIL
SEE NOTE 3 3/4" DIAM. HOLE FOR BUTTON HEAD BOLT (TYP.) (SEE DETAIL AT RIGHT)
WOOD BLOCK
FACE OF BARRIER SHOULDER 6 12 BLOCKOUT (SEE NOTE 4)
SEE NOTE 3
STEEL POST
W ~ SEE TABLE
12" ACTUAL W69 STEEL POST (SEE NOTE 1) SEE NOTE 3 5/8" 14" BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32 " OVAL GRIP AND RECESSED HEX NUT WITH CUT WASHER (TYP.) W69 STEEL POST (TYP.) RAIL ELEMENT (TYP.)
S T A
T
O T
1"
32350
31"
7" MAX.
14"
BEAM GUARDRAIL TYPE 31 STANDARD PLAN C-28.40-01

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
FACE OF CURB LIMIT
GROUND LINE
MAX.
6"
HINGE-POINT
SLOPE SEE TABLE
5/8" 1 1/4" BUTTON HEAD BOLT WITH 7/32" OVAL GRIP (TYP.) AND RECESSED HEX NUTS ~ 8 REQUIRED PER SPLICE
ISOMETRIC VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION ~ WITH CURB

( 6 - 0" LONG POSTS)
NOTE:
PERMISSIBLE CURB PLACEMENT AREA ~ SEE NOTE 2
NE E R
1" (TYP.)
7"
S D N N
F O R P

21 - 6"

C GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD (SEE NOTE 3) STEEL LIGHT STANDARD ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN J-28.60 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) GROUT ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN C-8b 1/2" DRAIN HOLE 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 1 1/2" CLR. A 2 - 0" A CONDUIT COUPLING ~ SEE NOTE 4
10 - 0" SEE ANCHOR BOLT LAYOUT DETAIL
9" 9"
10 - 0"
A 2 -0 " 5 -0 "
8"
8 "
B/2 4 "
GRADE SEPARATI ON
GRADE SEPARATI ON
1 # 4 1 1/2" 2 -1 0 "M I N. BARRI ER HEI GHT " E"EQUAL SPACES 3 -8 "M AX. CLR. 4 # 5 (TYP.) 4
1 # 4 2 -1 0 "M I N.
1 1/2" 3 -8 "M AX. 4 " E"EQUAL SPACES BARRI ER HEI GHT CLR.
A 2 -6 " 1 - 0" A 5 -1 "M AX. DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD
SEE TABL E
4 # 5 (TYP.) 21 TOP OF ROADWAY
TOP OF ROADWAY
21
4 - 6" 6 - 3" 9 - 0"
4 - 6" 6 - 3"
5 -1 "M AX.
SEE TABL E
EM BEDM ENT
EM BEDM ENT
1 -5 "M I N.
1 -5 "M I N.
PLAN
SEE NOTE 2
ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE STD. PLAN J-8b 2 1/2" CLR. 8 " D 3 # 4 F
2 # 4
D F
21 - 6" 6" 2" CLR. (TYP.) 2 4 # 5 1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 5 SPACES @ 1 - 0" = 5 - 0" 1- 0" 1- 0" 1 # 4 AND 3 # 4 13 SPACES @ 6" = 6 - 6" 3 " 5 " 1- 0" 1- 0" 1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 5 SPACES @ 1 - 0" = 5 - 0" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 6"
2 1/2" CLR. 2 -0 "
CAP
5 # 5 (TYP.)
16 6 # 5 5 # 5 (TYP.)
1 - 6"
SECTION
A
SEE NOTE 2 2 1/2" CLR. 5 - 0" CONSTR. JOINT W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE SEE NOTE 3
EXPANSION JOINT WITH 3/4" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER (TYP.) " E" EQUAL SPACES
SECTION NOTES
TOP OF ROADWAY 6 3/8" 6 3/8" CONDUIT 2 3/4" 2" CLR. (TYP.) 1" DIAM. ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) 2 -0 "
1. When connecting between cast-in-place and precast Single-Slope Barrier, provide a Connection Blockout and Rebar Grid as shown on Standard Plan C-13. 2. See the Contract Plans for conduit placement. 3. Grounding Conductor shall be non-insulated #4 AWG stranded copper, provide 3 - 0" min. slack. Clamp steel reinforcing bar with connector suitable for use embedded in concrete.
DOCUM ENT
(TYP.) 5 5 # 5 9 - 0"
3" (TYP.)
2 3/4" SEE NOTE 2
S T A
ELEVATION
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT ALL BENDS ARE 2" RADIUS MARK VARIES 5 1/2" TO 21 1/2" 2 ( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT) 3 ( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT) NO. 1 2 + 9 " 3 4 5 6 LOCATION SIZE QUANTITY
PLAN VIEW
5. This plan shall be used for 40 and 50 Light Standards with 16 max. length double mast arms. 6. Concrete shall be Class 4000.
E T
BAR LIST
BARRIER ~ TOP VERTICAL BARRIER ~ BOTTOM VERTICAL FND. & BARRIER ~ VERTICAL BARRIER ~ HORIZONTAL FOUNDATION FOUNDATION
# 4 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 5
28 12 16 " Q" 9 32 SEE NOTE 1
25470
U C
+ 9 "
11^ (TYP.) 11^ (TYP.) 1
SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET E F Q APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
TABLE
2 F+2 1/2" GRADE 3 F+26 1/2" SEPARATION 0 TO 5" BARRIER HEIGHT 3 - 6" 4 - 0" 4 - 6" A B C D
8"
2 - 0"
3 - 4"
3" MIN.
5 5
1 - 2" 10" 7"
12 12
Pasco Bakotich III

E E R
ANCHOR BOLT LAYOUT DETAIL
06-16-11
DATE
2 VARIES (B-4 1/4") TO (B+3 3/4") 3 VARIES (C-10 3/4") TO (C-5")
UP TO 7" UP TO 10"
9 1/8" 2 - 2 1/4" 3 - 6 1/4" 7" MIN.
10 1/4" 2 - 4 1/2" 3 - 8 1/2" 10" MIN. 6
14
ISOMETRIC VIEW
R I C H A
4 5 # 5
6 # 5
4. Install Conduit Coupling flush with top of foundation. Do not glue PVC stubout.
N O T
NE E R
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

21 - 6" 10 - 0" SEE ANCHOR BOLT LAYOUT DETAIL 9" 9" 10 - 0"

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD (SEE NOTE 3) STEEL LIGHT STANDARD 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) A 8" 1 1/2" CLR. ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN J-28.60 GROUT ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN C-8b A C 2 - 0" A
CONDUIT COUPLING ~ SEE NOTE 5 1/2" DRAIN HOLE 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 1 1/2" CLR.
A 5 -0 " 2 -0 "
8 "
B/2 4 "
1 # 4 GRADE SEPARATI ON
1 1/2" GRADE SEPARATI ON CLR. BARRI ER HEI GHT " E"EQUAL SPACES 4 -0 "M AX. 4
1 # 4
1 1/2" CLR. 4 " E"EQUAL SPACES BARRI ER HEI GHT 4 -0 "M AX.
A 2 -6 " DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 1 - 0" 5 -5 "M AX. A
SEE TABL E
3 -6 "
(TYP.) 21
(TYP.) 21 TOP OF ROADWAY
4 - 6" 6 - 3" 9 - 0"
4 - 6" 6 - 3"
TOP OF ROADWAY
5 -5 "M AX.
SEE TABL E
4 # 5
3 -6 "
4 # 4
EM BEDM ENT
SEE NOTE 4
EM BEDM ENT
1 -5 "M I N.
1 -5 "M I N.
PLAN
D ANCHOR PLATE STD. PLAN J-8b 3 # 4 F (TYP.) ~ SEE
2 # 4 D F
CAP
21 - 6" 6" 2" CLR. (TYP.) 2 4 # 5 1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 5 SPACES @ 3 " 5 " 1 - 0" = 5 - 0" 1- 0" 13 SPACES @ 6" = 6 - 6" 1- 0" 1- 0" 1 # 4 AND 3 # 4 1- 0" 1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 5 SPACES @ 1 - 0" = 5 - 0" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 6"
2 -0 "
2 1/2" CLR.
5 # 5 (TYP.) 16 6 # 5
2 1/2" CLR. 1 - 6"
SECTION
5 # 5 (TYP.) SEE NOTE 4 SEE NOTE 3 5 - 0" 2 1/2" CLR. CONSTR. JOINT W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
NOTES
" E" EQUAL SPACES TOP OF ROADWAY
SECTION
1. This Barrier/Foundation combination has been designed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Test Level 4 requirements. The horizontal vehicle impact force at the top of the barrier is taken at 54 kips for Strength and Extreme Limit States, and 10 kips for footing stability (overturning and sliding) in the Service Limit State. 2. When connecting between cast-in-place and precast Single-Slope Barrier, provide a Connection Blockout and Rebar Grid as shown onStandard Plan C-13.
2" CLR. (TYP.)
EXPANSION JOINT W/ 3/4" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER (TYP.)
DOCUM ENT
(TYP.) 5 5 # 5 9 - 0"
3" (TYP.) 6 3/8" 6 3/8" CONDUIT 2 3/4"
S T A
5. Install Conduit Coupling flush with top of foundation. Do not glue PVC stubout. 6. This plan shall be used for 40 and 50 Light Standards with 16 max. length double mast arms. 7. Concrete shall be Class 4000.
E T
ELEVATION
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT ALL BENDS ARE 2" RADIUS MARK VARIES 5 1/2" TO 21 1/2" 2 ( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT) 3 ( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT) NO. 1 2 + 9 " 3 4 5 6
BAR LIST
1" DIAM. ANCHOR LOCATION SIZE QUANTITY BOLT (TYP.)
BARRIER ~ TOP VERTICAL BARRIER ~ BOTTOM VERTICAL FND. & BARRIER ~ VERTICAL BARRIER ~ HORIZONTAL FOUNDATION FOUNDATION
# 4 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 5
28 12 16 " Q" 9 32 SEE NOTE 2 PLAN VIEW 2 3/4" SEE NOTE 4
25470
U C
SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER (42")
+ 9 "
11^ TYP. 11^ TYP. 1
ANCHOR BOLT LAYOUT DETAIL
LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION

2 F+2 1/2" 3 F+26 1/2" GRADE SEPARATION 2 VARIES (B-4 1/4") TO (B+3 3/4") 3 VARIES (C-10 3/4") TO (C-5") 0 TO 3" UP TO 6" MAX. BARRIER HEIGHT 4 - 0" 4 - 6"
TABLE
A B C D E F Q
Pasco Bakotich III

9 1/8" 2 - 2 1/4" 3 - 6 1/4" VARIES 6" TO 9" VARIES 6" TO 9" 6 6 1 - 2" 11" 14 14
06-16-11
DATE
10 1/4" 2 - 4 1/2" 3 - 8 1/2"
ISOMETRIC VIEW
R I C H A
4 5 # 5
See the Contract Plans for conduit placement. 4.

6 # 5
N O T
3. Grounding conductor shall be non-insulated #4 AWG stranded copper, provide a 3 - 0" min. slack. Clamp steel reinforcing bar with connector suitable for use embedded in concrete.
NE E R
E E R
2 -0 "
8 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER 24- 0" TAPER 12- 0" TYP. 1- 6" SIGN BRIDGE END POST SPACING " W" W /2

SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER 1- 6" A 24- 0" TAPER
^ 5 4 . P Y T
4 "
8 " EXPANSION JOINT
B/2
3 - 0"
EXPANSION JOINT DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD DUMMY JOINT (TYP.) 1 - 6" A EXPANSION JOINT (TYP.) A 1 - 9" BOLT CIRCLE (TYP.)
NOTES
1. When
PLAN
2. Grounding
Conductor shall be non-insulated #4 AWG stranded copper, provide a 3 - 0" slack. Clamp steel reinforcing bar with connector suitable for use embeded in concrete.
3.Install
Conduit Coupling flush with top of Barrier. Do not glue PVC stubout. shall be Class 4000, unless otherwise noted.
4.Concrete
C
SEE STD. PLAN G-70.10FOR SIGN BRIDGE DETAILS
24 - 0"
1 - 6"
END POST SPACING " W"
1 - 6"
24 - 0"
9" 2" CLR. (TYP.)
1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 ~15 SPACES @ 1 - 6" = 22 - 6"
9"
9"
1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 ~15 SPACES @ 1 - 6" = 22 - 6"
9" 3/4"
EXPANSION JOINT WITH 3/4" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER (TYP.)
2 3 # 5 2 4 # 5 4 4 # 5
2 3 # 5
CHAMFER (TYP.)
"E" EQUAL SPACES
TOP OF ROADWAY
3 EQUAL SPACES 2 1/2" CLR. MIN.
S T A
E T
3/4" 1/2"
3/4"
SEE THE CONTRACT PLANS FOR CONDUIT PLACEMENT SHAFT DEPTH " Z" ( VARI ES W I TH SPAN L ENGTH ~ SEE TABL E) 2 8 # 5 4 8 # 5 SHAFT REINFORCEMENT NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY 3" 5 # 4, 6 # 4 AND 7 # 4 @ 6" MAX. SPACING SEE SECTION " C", SHEET 2 FOR GROUNDING CONDUCTOR DETAILS 3 - 0" DIAM. SHAFT (SEE NOTE 2) 3"
3/4"
25470
U C
DUMMY JOINT
DIMENSIONS "W" AND "Z"

SIGN BRIDGE SPAN LENGTH 60 OR LESS 61 TO 91 91 TO 120 121 TO 150 W Z
SHAFT REINFORCEMENT 4 - 0" 5 - 0" 6 - 0" 7 - 0" 11 - 6" 13 - 6" 15 - 0" 16 - 6" SEE NOTE 1
SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER SIGN BRIDGE FOUNDATION

ELEVATION

Pasco Bakotich III

SHAFT DEPTH " Z" IS BASED ON ALLOWABLE LATERAL BEARING PRESSURE IN EXCESS OF 1500 PSF.
06-16-11
DATE
ISOMETRIC VIEW
R I C H A
N O T
3 -6 "
2" CLR. (TYP.)
DUMMY JOINT (TYP.)
NE E R
E E R
connecting between Cast-in-Place and Precast Single-Slope Barrier, provide a Connection Blockout and Rebar Grid as shown in Standard Plan C-13.
2 -0 "
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD ANCHOR BOLT ~ 1" DIAM. (BARRIER HEIGHT + 4 - 2") LONG, GALV., THREADED ROD OR STUD BAR WITH FOUR HEAVY HEX NUTS AND FOUR WASHERS (TYP.) A

3 - 0" SIGN BRIDGE END POST (SEE STD. PLAN G-70.10) GRADE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD SEPARATION 0 TO 5" UP TO 7" UP TO 10" BARRIER HEIGHT 3 - 6" 4 - 0" 4 - 6" A B C D E Q
TABLE
CONDUIT COUPLING ~ SEE NOTE 3 3/4" A 8" CHAMFER (TYP.) A 3 - 0" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
(SEE NOTE 2) 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 7 "
8"
2 - 0"
4 - 4"
3" MIN.
4 5
10 12 14
3 3 3
9 1/8" 2 - 2 1/4" 4 - 6 1/4" 7" MIN.
10 1/4" 2 - 4 1/2" 4 - 8 1/2" 10" MIN. 6
" E"EQUAL SPACES
BARRI ER HEI GHT
1 # 4 " E"EQUAL SPACES 1 1/2" 2 -1 0 "M I N. CLR. 3 # 5 (TYP.) 21 4 2 -1 0 "M I N. BARRI ER HEI GHT
1 # 4 " E"EQUAL SPACES 1 1/2" CLR. 3 # 5 (TYP.) 21 4 BARRI ER HEI GHT 2 -1 0 "M I N.
5 # 4 1 1/2" CLR. 4 # 5 (TYP.) TOP OF ROADWAY 3 4
3 SEE TABL E
ADD TWO 4 # 5 BARS, EQUALLY SPACED, AT THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION BARRIER
SEE TABL E
SEE TABL E
NOTCH PLATE AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR THE SHAFT REINFORCEMENT WHEN " W " = 4 - 0" 1 1/2" SNIP (TYP.)
TOP OF ROADWAY
TOP OF ROADWAY
21
4 5 ^ ( T Y P . )
1 1/16" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.)
D 1 1/2" CLR.
1 - 9" BOLT CIRCLE 2 # 4 B 2 1/2" CLR. 2 # 4 C 2 1/2" CLR. 6 # 4 2 1/2" 5 -0 " CLR. 4 3 -6 " ASTM A36 STEEL PLATE, 5/8" 21" 21"
SECTION
SECTION
B
7 # 4
STEEL PLATE DETAIL
BAR LIST
SPAN MARK NO. LOCATION 60 OR LESS SIZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BARRIER ~ TOP VERTICAL BARRIER ~ BOTTOM VERTICAL BARRIER ~ HORIZONTAL BARRIER ~ HORIZONTAL BARRIER ~ TOP VERTICAL CAP & BARRIER ~ VERTICAL CAP ~ TOP TRANSVERSE CAP ~ HORIZONTAL SHAFT ~ VERTICAL SHAFT ~ SPIRAL SEE TABLE, THIS SHEET, COLUMN " Q" # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 4 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 9 # 4 61 TO 91 LENGTH 91 TO 120 121 TO 150 QTY. SIZE 32 28 1 1 18 18 18 12 18 1 2 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 4 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 11 # 4 QTY. 32 28 1 1 20 20 20 12 24 1 2 1 0 # 4 SPI RAL HOOP W I TH 1 -0 "M AX. PI TCH
8 # 5 (TYP.)
3 0 ^
2 4
2 0
3 0 ^
STEEL PLATE (SEE DETAIL) AND THE TOP)
QTY. SIZE 32 28 1 1 14 14 14 12 12 1 2 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 4 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 11 # 4
QTY. SIZE 32 28 1 1 16 16 16 12 15 1 2 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 4 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 11 # 4
SEE NOTE 2 4 EQUAL SPACES C
SHAFT DEPTH " Z"( SEE TABL E, SHEET 1 )
CONCRETE CL ASS 4 0 0 0 P
12 9 # 9
15 9 # 11
18 9 # 11
24 9 # 11 BUNDLED
( ONE COM PL ETE TURN AT THE BOTTOM
VERTICAL SHAFT STEEL LAYOUT

10 # 4
. R L C " 3
3 -0 "
8" (TYP.)
S T A
E T
10
SEE LAP SPLICE DETAIL
6" 1 - 0" 1 VARIES 5 3/4" TO 2 - 9 1/2" 2 6 ( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT) ( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT)
9 # 9 OR # 11 (TYP.)
5 2 - 9 1/2"
LAP SPLICE DETAIL
25470
U C
+ 9 "
2 D 6 " I A M .
9 # 9 OR #11 VERTICAL REINF. 10 # 4 10 6 " BARS (QTY. VARIES WITH SPAN LENGTH ~ SEE BAR LIST)
11^ + 9 " 11^ (TYP.) (TYP.)
SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER SIGN BRIDGE FOUNDATION
2 9 1/2" 6 4 - 3 1/2"
C - 5" 3" CLR. 7 6" 4 CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE

1 5 2 VARIES (B - 4 1/4") TO (B + 22") 6 C - 5" ALL BENDS ARE 2" RADIUS
SECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

E E R
VARIES
NE E R
IF JOINING TWO SPIRALS,
06-16-11
DATE
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT
R I C H A
N O T
. N I M " 2 1
1 - 3" DIAM. HOLE 7 "
7 "
7 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD

NOTES BAR LIST
MARK NO. 1 2 3 1 LOCATION SIZE QTY.
12 - 0" DUMMY JOINT 4 "
12 - 0"
12 - 0"
1 -9 "
1.When connecting between Cast-in-Place and Precast Single-Slope Barrier, provide a Connection Blockout and Rebar Grid as shown in Standard Plan C-13 . 2.All concrete shall be class 4000.
BARRIER ~ TOP VERTICAL BARRIER ~ BOTTOM VERTICAL BARRIER ~ HORIZONTAL
# 4 # 4 # 5
24 24 1
1 -9 "
SEE DIMENSION TABLE ~ NOT COUNTING SPLICES
4 "
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT EXPANSION JOINT DUMMY JOINT EXPANSION JOINT VARIES 5 3/4" TO 3 - 3" ALL BENDS ARE 2" RADIUS 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT)+ 9 " 9 1 / 2 "(
PLAN A B
( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT)+ 9 "
36 - 0"
9"
1 # 4 & 2 # 4 ~ 23 SPACES @ 1- 6" = 34- 6"
9" 3/4" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER AT EXPANSION JOINT (TYP.)
11^ (TYP.)
11^ (TYP.)
2 3 # 5
" E" EQUAL SPACES
TOP OF ROADWAY
VARIES (B - 4 1/2") TO (C - 5 3/4")
ELEVATION
3/4" 1/2"
3/4"
TRAILING END TRANSITION (FROM MONOTUBE SIGN STRUCTURE FOUNDATION TO SINGLE-SLOPE DUAL-FACED BARRIER) 3/4"
8"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
3 - 6"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
1 # 4 1 1/2" " E"EQUAL SPACES 2 -1 0 "M I N. BARRI ER HEI GHT CLR. 3 # 5 (TYP.) 4
1 # 4 1 1/2" " E"EQUAL SPACES 2 -1 0 "M I N. CLR. 3 # 5 (TYP.) 4 BARRI ER HEI GHT
DUMMY JOINT
SEE TABL E
DOCUM ENT BUT AN EL ECTRONI C DUPL I CATE. THE ORI GI NAL , SI GNED BY
TOP OF ROADWAY
TOP OF ROADWAY
MONOTUBE SIGN STRUCTURE SINGLE-SLOPE BARRIER FOUNDATION (SEE BRIDGE PLANS)
R I C H A
21
21
S T A
E T
B 2 # 4
2 1/2" CLR. 2 # 4
2 1/2" CLR.
25470
U C
SECTION
SECTION
B ISOMETRIC VIEW
SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER TRANSITION FOR MONOTUBE SIGN SUPPORT
SEE NOTE 1

TABLE
GRADE SEPARATION 0 TO 5" UP TO 7" UP TO 10" BARRIER HEIGHT 3 - 6" 4 - 0" 4 - 6" A B C D E HORIZONTAL BARS (QTY.) 10 12
LEADING END TRANSITION (FROM SINGLE-SLOPE DUAL-FACED BARRIER TO MONOTUBE SIGN STRUCTURE FOUNDATION) SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
8"
2 - 0"
4 - 10"
3" MIN.
4 5
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
9 1/8" 2 - 2 1/4" 5 - 0 1/4" 7" MIN.
10 1/4" 2 - 4 1/2" 5 - 2 1/2" 10" MIN. 6
14
N O T
NE E R
E E R
7 "
7 "
GRADE SEPARATI ON
GRADE SEPARATI ON
SEE TABL E
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER 24 - 0" TAPER 12 - 0" (TYP.) EXPANSION JOINT (TYP.) FOUNDATION 4 - 0" A

SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER 24 - 0" TAPER 3/4" 1/2" 3/4"
3/4" EXPANSION JOINT
4 "
8 "
B/2
3 - 3"
EXPANSION JOINT DUMMY JOINT (TYP.) 1 - 7 1/2" A A
NOTES 1. SeeStandard Specification 8-21.3(9)for construction requirements. 2. Use a template to locate and secure the bolts during foundation installation. PLAN
B C
4. Grounding Conductor shall be non-insulated #4 AWG stranded copper, provide a 3 - 0" slack. Clamp steel reinforcing bar with connector suitable for use embedded in concrete.
5 # 4 AND 6 # 4 ~ 7 SPACES @ 6" = 3 - 6" 24 - 0"
CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE ~ SEE STD. PLAN G-60.10 24 - 0"
5. Install Conduit Coupling flush with top of Barrier. Do not glue PVC stubout.
9" 2" CLR. (TYP.)
1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 ~ 15 SPACES @ 1 - 6" = 22 - 6"
9" 3" CLR.
9" 3" CLR.
1 # 4 AND 2 # 4 ~ 15 SPACES @ 1 - 6" = 22 - 6"
9"
3 # 5
3 # 5
3 # 5
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
" E" EQUAL SPACES TOP OF ROADWAY
4 # 5
DUMMY JOINT (TYP.)

THE ENGI NEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBL I CATI ON, I S KEPT ON DOCUM ENT FI L E AT THE W ASHI NGTON STATE DEPARTM ENT OF TRANSBUT AN EL ECTRONI C DUPL I CATE. THE ORI GI NAL , SI GNED BY
1" STEEL CONDUIT OR AS PER CONTRACT ~ WHEN REQUIRED, CAP EACH END 6" DEPTH = Z ~ SEE TABL E
S T A
SEE SECTION " A", SHEET 2 FOR GROUNDING CONDUCTOR DETAILS (SEE NOTE 4)
E T
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SEE SECTION " A", SHEET 2 FOR SHAFT REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
SHAFT CONCRETE ALL OTHER CONCRETE STEEL REINF. BAR ANCHOR RODS
CLASS 4000P
25470
U C
CLASS 4000
SHAFT DEPTH
AASHTO M 31 GRADE 60 ASTM F 1554 GRADE 105 AASHTO M 291 SEE NOTE 3
TOTAL SIGN AREA (SF)
ALLOWABLE LATERAL BEARING PRESSURE (PSF)

1500 AND UP
SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE FOUNDATION
ANCHOR NUTS ANCHOR WASHERS ANCHORAGE GALVANIZING STEEL PLATE

13 - 0" 200 OR LESS SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
AASHTO M 293
16 - 0"
200 OR LESS
1000 ~ 1499
AASHTO M 232
18 - 0"
200 ~ 400
1500 AND UP
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
ASTM A 36
22 - 0"
200 ~ 400
1000 ~ 1499
ELEVATION
ISOMETRIC
R I C H A
N O T
NE E R
E E R
3. When connecting between cast-in-place and precast Single-Slope Barrier, provide a Connection Blockout and Rebar Grid as shown in Standard Plan C-13.
2 -0 "
DUMMY JOINT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

A ANCHOR ROD ~ 1 3/4" DIAM. (BARRIER HEIGHT + 4 - 2") LONG, THREADED 8" MIN. EACH END; W/ FOUR HEAVY HEX NUTS AND DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD TWO WASHERS ~ GALVANIZE EXPOSED ANCHOR ROD END 1 - 0" MIN. (TYP.) 1 "M AX. 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 3/4" A 8 " 3 - 3" PROVIDE SCREEN AROUND BASE ~ SEE SCREEN DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN G-60.10, SHEET 4 3 - 3" GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD (SEE NOTE 4)

BENDING DIAGRAM
" 0 1
CONDUIT COUPLING ~ SEE NOTE 5
1 5
VARIES 5" TO 3 - 0" 3 - 0" 135^
3/4" A 8" CHAMFER (TYP.) ( 1 / 2 BARRI ER HEI GHT)+ 9 "
(TYP.) 7
CHAMFER (TYP.)
5 # 4 2 -1 0 "M I N.
" E"EQUAL SPACES
" E"EQUAL SPACES
1 1/2" 2 -1 0 "M I N. BARRI ER HEI GHT 4 4 " E"EQUAL SPACES CLR.
1 # 4 1 1/2" 3 # 5 (TYP.) 4 CLR. BARRI ER HEI GHT 2 -1 0 "M I N.
1 # 4 1 1/2" 3 # 5 (TYP.) 4 CLR. BARRI ER HEI GHT
11^ (TYP.) SEE TABL E
3 - 8" SQUARE 3 - 8"
(TYP.)
SEE TABL E
SEE TABL E
4 # 5
1 5
TOP OF ROADWAY
6 # 4
21
TOP OF ROADWAY
21
TOP OF ROADWAY
21
3 -8 "
D 1
2 6
CL R.
11^ 2 # 4 CONCRETE CL ASS 4 0 0 0 C 2 1/2" CLR. 2 # 4 B 2 1/2" CLR. (TYP.)
7 # 5 ~ 4 EQUAL SPACES
3" CLR.
9 1 / 2 "
3 - 4"
8 # 5 (TYP.) 4 -0 "
SECTION
SECTION
2 1/2" CLR.
7 # 5 (TYP.)
VARIES ( B - 4 1/4" ) TO ( C - 4 1/4" ) L ENGTH
10
TABLE
GRADE SEPARATION 0 TO 5" UP TO 7" BARRIER HEIGHT 3 - 6" 4 - 0" 4 - 6" A B C D E Q
9 # 4 3 " (TYP.)
8"
2 - 0"
4 - 7"
3" MIN.
4 5
10 12 14
4 4 4
ALL BENDS ARE 2" RADIUS ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT
9 1/8" 2 - 2 1/4" 4 - 9 1/4" 7" MIN.
ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DEPTH = Z ~ SEE TABL E STANDARD. PLAN G-60.20 AND THE TOP) 1 PL ACED DI RECTL Y AGAI NST UNDI STURBED EARTH UP TO 10" 10 1/4" 2 - 4 1/2" 4 - 11 1/2" 10" MIN. 6
BAR LIST
MARK NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 BARRIER ~ TOP VERTICAL BARRIER ~ BOTTOM VERTICAL BARRIER ~ HORIZONTAL BARRIER ~ HORIZONTAL BARRIER ~ TOP VERTICAL BARRIER ~ BOTTOM VERTICAL CAP ~ HOOP CAP ~ TOP CAP ~ VERTICAL, EACH CORNER SHAFT ~ SPIRAL SHAFT ~ VERTICAL 32 32 2 2 8 8 5 4 4 1 3 12 VARIES VARIES 23 - 8" 3 - 8" VARIES VARIES 15 - 9" 10 - 10" 3 - 4" AS REQD " Z" MINUS CLEARANCES # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 4 # 4 # 5 # 5 # 4 # 4 # 9 STR. STR. STR.
DOCUM ENT
11 # 9
CONCRETE ( OR CASI NG, I F REQUI RED)SHAL L BE
AS REQ D
6 C - 5"
1 0 # 4 SPI RAL HOOP ~ 1 -0 "PI TCH
LOCATION
QTY.
LENGTH
SIZE
TYPE
11 # 9 (TYP.) CONCRETE CL ASS 4 0 0 0 P
( ONE COM PL ETE TURN AT THE BOTTOM
S T A
E T
STR.
25470
U C
SINGLE-SLOPE CONCRETE BARRIER CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE FOUNDATION
10 # 4

6 "
1 CL R. 3 "
CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE SEE TABLE, THIS SHEET, COLUMN " Q"
IF JOINING TWO SPIRALS, SEE LAP SPLICE DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN G-60.20, SHEET 2
Pasco Bakotich III

2 4 ADD TWO 4 #5 BARS, EQUALLY SPACED, AT THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION BARRIER
06-16-11
DATE
SECTION
R I C H A
N O T
4 -0 "
NE E R
E E R
5 "
2 1 / 2 "
( 1 / 2 BARRI ER
HEI GHT)+ 9 "
7 "
7 "
7 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S
. R L C " 4

TYPE 2A
DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN WALL HT

TYPE 2C TYPE 2D
WALL HT
TYPE 2B
BARS "D"&"E"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 12" #3 @ 9" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 9" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 9" #5 @ 7" #5 @ 6"
NOTES 1. Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 2A, 2B, 2C or 2D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights not listed, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the footing shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum.
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
W
2 - 0" 2 - 3" 2 - 6" 3 - 0" 3 - 3" 3 - 9" 4 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 6" 6 - 0"
t
5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
BAR "B"
W
2 - 3" 2 - 9" 3 - 3" 3 - 9" 4 - 3" 4 - 9" 5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 3" 6 - 9"
t
5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6" 7"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
BAR "B"
BARS "D"&"E"
#3 @ 12" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 11" #6 @ 12" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 8" #6 @ 8"
W
2 - 0" 2 - 6" 2 - 9" 3 - 3" 3 - 9" 4 - 3" 4 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 9" 6 - 3"
t
5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
BAR "B"
BARS "D"&"E"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 9" #5 @ 11" #6 @ 12" #6 @ 10" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 8"
W
2 - 6" 3 - 3" 3 - 6" 4 - 3" 4 - 9" 5 - 6" 6 - 0" 6 - 6" 7 - 0" 7 - 6"
t
5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6" 7" 7"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
BAR "B"
BARS "D"&"E"
#3 @ 11" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 8" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 7 1/4" #6 @ 7" #6 @ 6 1/4"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
#4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 15"
#4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 11"
#4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12"
#4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 9"
2.
3.
4.
WIND EXPOSURE & VELOCITY

NOISE BARRIER TYPE 2A 2B WIND EXPOSURE B1 B1 B2 B2 WIND VELOCITY (MPH) 80 90 80 90
t = WALL THICKNESS
RIGHT-OF-WAY
WALL & FOOTING
SEE CONTRACT 2C
t
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 3" (TYP.) 3" CLR. SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED LEVEL (TYP.) 3" (TYP.)
2D
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINTS (TYP.) @ 24 - 0" CENTERS
ALTERNATE AS SHOWN #4 BAR (TYP.)
REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" ~ CENTERED ON WALL
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL ON SPREAD FOOTING

3 - 0" MIN. BAR "D" (TYP.)
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON
FINAL GROUND LINE
2 1 MAX.
BAR "E" (TYP.)
S T A
E T
2 - 0" MIN.
BAR "E"
1 TOP OF FOOTING 4 MAX.
1 #4 @ 18" 2 2 1 - 0" BAR "B" BAR "A" WITH 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE AND EXTENDING THRU 2 CONSTRUCTION JOINT (TYP.) BAR "B" (TYP.) 1 - 0" (TYP.) 2 - 0" MIN. LAP (TYP.) LONGITUDINAL FOOTING REINFORCING BAR "A" (TYP.) 1 MAX. CONSTRUCTION JOINT (TYP.) ~ (SEE NOTE 4) 1 - 0" MIN.
UNDISTURBED SOIL
BAR "F" (TYP.)
NOISE BARRIER WALL TYPE 2
STANDARD PLAN D-2.04-00

3" CLR.
W/2
W
ALTERNATE PLACEMENT OF HOOKS
CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE
ELEVATION
2 REQUIRED FOR WALLS 24 - 0" ~ TYPE 2C, WALL HEIGHT 22 - 0" & 24 - 0" ~ TYPE 2B & WALLS 20 - 0", 22 - 0" & 24 - 0" ~ TYPE 2D
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
B I
O T
NE E R
C L
#4 @ 15" MAX. SPACING
2 - 0" MAX.
6" MIN.
I H N
F O R P

3" CLR. (TYP.)
1 - 0" MIN. (TYP.)
C LFOOTING W/2 BAR "A" (TYP.) (TRANSVERSE BARS NOT SHOWN)
W/2
FOR LOCATIONS WITHOUT FOOTING STEP
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) ANGLE POINT
1/2" NOISE SEALER (TYP.)
2 - 0"
0"
t 1
t1 2
t2 -
t 1 2
t2 2 t2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL ON SPREAD FOOTING

B I
t1 2
BAR "D" CORNER PANEL REINFORCED PER LISTED WALL HEIGHT REINFORCEMENT TABLE
PA N E
t1 2
S T A
t2 2
3" (TYP.)
E T
TRAFFIC SIDE
JOINT AND CORNER DETAIL

Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
FOOTING WIDTH TRANSITION DETAIL
I H N
F O R P
C L L

TYPE 4A
DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN WALL HT SHAFT DIAM. DEPTH DEPTH SHAFT REINF. BARS t "C"&"D" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 13" #3 @ 9" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 9" #4 @ 7" #4 @ 6" #5 @ 8" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6" SHAFT DIAM. DEPTH

TYPE 4C TYPE 4D
SHAFT REINF. BARS t "C"&"D" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 9" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 8" #5 @ 8" #6 @ 7" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6" 7" SHAFT DIAM. DEPTH DEPTH SHAFT REINF. WALL HT BARS "C"&"D" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 8" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 7" #6 @ 7" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" SOIL TYPE D1 D2
TYPE 4B
DEPTH SHAFT REINF. BARS t "C"&"D" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 12" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 9" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 8" #5 @ 7" #5 @ 6" #6 @ 7" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" SHAFT DIAM. DEPTH

NOISE BARRIER TYPE 4A 4B 4C 4D WIND EXPOSURE B1 B1 B2 B2 WIND VELOCITY (MPH) 80 90 80 90
DEPTH
D
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 14" 14"
D1
5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 9" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 9 - 0" 9 - 3" 9 - 3" 9 - 9"
D2
4 - 9" 5 - 3" 5 - 9" 6 - 3" 6 - 9" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 7 - 9" 7 - 9" 8 - 3"
BAR"P"
6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 6 ~ #9 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #8
D
12" 12" 12" 12" 14" 16" 16" 16" 16" 16"
D1
6 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 9 - 3" 10 - 0" 10 - 6" 11 - 3"
D2
5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 9" 7 - 3" 7 - 3" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 6" 9 - 0" 9 - 6" D
BAR"P"
6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #8 8 ~ #8
D
12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 14" 14" 14" 14" 16"
D1
5 - 9" 6 - 6" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 8 - 6" 9 - 0" 9 - 9" 10 - 3" 10 - 3"
D2
5 - 0" 5 - 6" 6 - 3" 6 - 9" 7 - 3" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 8 - 3" 8 - 9" 8 - 9"
BAR"P"
6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 8 ~ #6 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #8 8 ~ #9 8 ~ #8
D
12" 12" 12" 14" 14" 16" 16" 16" 16" 18"
D1
6 - 6" 7 - 6" 8 - 3" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 9 - 6" 10 - 0" 10 - 9" 11 - 6" 11 - 6"
D2
5 - 9" 6 - 6" 7 - 0" 7 - 3" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 9 - 9" 9 - 9"
BAR"P"
6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #8 8 ~ #8 8 ~ #9 8 ~ #10 8 ~ #10
SOIL TYPE
ANGLE OF INTERNAL FRICTION (DEGREES) 32 38
NOTES 1. Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 4A, 4B, 4C or 4D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, see next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the shaft cap shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
SHAFT DIAM.
C L WALL & SHAFT RIGHT-OF-WAY BAR "P"
6"
2.
SEE CONTRACT W 3.5 SPIRAL @ 6" PITCH 3" CLR. 135^ HOOK 2" CLR. 3/4" CHAMFER SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED #4 BAR (TYP.) 3" (TYP.) 2 - 0" FOR #3 & #4 BARS 2 - 2" FOR #5 BARS 2 - 7" FOR #6 BARS LEVEL (TYP.)
3.
4.
SECTION
A
6" MIN. 2 - 0" MAX. (TYP.)
5.
ALTERNATE AS SHOWN
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINTS @ 24 - 0" CENTERS (TYP.)
3" (TYP.)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL ON SHAFT FOUNDATION
B I
3 - 0" MIN. BAR "D" (TYP.) FINAL GROUND LINE 2 MAX. 1 TOP OF FINAL GROUND LINE
S T A
E T
6" MAX.
SHAFT CAP BAR "C" #4 STIRRUPS 4" 2
BAR "C" (TYP.) 3" MIN.
A
D1 OR D2
#4 STIRRUPS

2 4 ~ #4 OR 5 ~ #4 BARS CONSTRUCTION JOINT ~ (SEE NOTE 4)

9"
9"
1 - 6" 2
CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE #4 ~ TOTAL 8 BARS (TYP.) (WHEN H = 6 - 0" TO 12 - 0") #4 ~ TOTAL 10 BARS (WHEN H = 14 - 0" TO 24 - 0") WITH 2 - 0" MIN. LAP SPLICE
1 - 6" MIN., 5 - 0" MAX.
15 - 0" MAX. SHAFT SPACING
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION
SEE DETAIL "B" FOR SHAFT REINFORCEMENT
ELEVATION
PORTATION.
1 - 9"
27695
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
t = WALL THICKNESS
I H N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN C L SHAFT
9"
PLACE HOOKS PARALLEL TO WALL LAYOUT LINE (TYP.)
3"
SPACING @ 12"
THREE SPACES @ 6"
#4 STIRRUP
CONCRETE SHAFT
SHAFT REINFORCMENT
W 3.5 SPIRAL @ 6" PITCH
DETAIL "B"
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

S T A
E T
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
2 - 0"
t2 t 1 t1 2
t 1 2
t2 2
t2
BAR "D" REINFORCED PER LISTED WALL HEIGHT REINFORCEMENT TABLE
t1 2
t1 2
t2 2
3" (TYP.)

CORNER PANEL
TRAFFIC SIDE
PA N E L C L
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
NOTE:
0"
PORTATION.
27695
ANGLE POINT
NE E R
B I
O T
DEPTH D1 OR D2 ~ SEE NOTE 5
SHAFT LENGTH FOR PAYMENT
I H N
F O R P

TYPE 6A

TYPE 6D
WALL HT
TYPE 6B
TYPE 6C

BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 9"
NOTES 1. Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 6A, 6B, 6C or 6D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the foundation shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum.
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 3"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3 - 0"
BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3 - 0"
BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 5 - 9"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 9"
H
6 - 0"
NOISE BARRIER TYPE

6A
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80 90
8 - 0" 6B 10 - 0" 6C 12 - 0" 6D 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 90 80
2.
3.
4.
2 - 0" MAX.
RIGHT-OF-WAY
C LWALL
2
SEE CONTRACT
3" CLR.
HEIGHT MAY VARY IF REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH PROFILE CONSISTENT WITH ROADWAY PROFILE
6" MIN.
3" (TYP.)
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINTS (TYP.) @ 24 - 0" CENTERS MAX. LEVEL (TYP.)
0"
5"
2 1/2"
5"
2 1/2"
BAR "D" CORNER PANEL
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
TRAFFIC SIDE
3" (TYP.) #4
PA C L L E N
REINFORCED PER LISTED WALL HEIGHT REINFORCEMENT TABLE
ALTERNATE SIDES
SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED
BENDING DIAGRAM
7 - 5" FOR #3 OR #4 BAR OR 7 - 7" #5 BAR
2" R
12 7 1/2 3 - 0"
1 1/2" 2 3/8" 4 7/8"
2 - 0" FOR #3 OR #4 BAR 2 - 2" FOR #5 BAR
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SPREAD FOOTING

W-X-5" #4
10"+X
BAR "B"
BAR "B"
2
BAR "C"
BAR "E"
2" R 2 - 0" MIN.

2" MIN. 6" MAX.
3" CLR. (TYP.) 1 - 0" MIN. (TYP.)
FOOTING
#4 @ 18"
W/2 W/2
C L
3" CLR.
3
CONSTRUCTION JOINT (SEE NOTE 4) BARS "B", "C", "D" & "E" SPACE AS SHOWN ON TABLES
1 - 0"
1-1 3/4"
PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL #4 BAR TOP AND BOTTOM WHEN "X" EXCEEDS 3"
BAR "A" (TYP.)


(FOR LOCATIONS WITHOUT FOOTING STEP)
W
3
TYPICAL SECTION
#4 (TYP.) PLACE AS SHOWN WITH 2 - 0" SPLICE AND EXTENDING THRU CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
ELEVATION
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
NOTE:
2" CLR.
TOP OF FOOTING
PORTATION.
BAR "C"
27695
FINAL GROUND LINE
NE E R
1 1/2"
10"
#4 @ THREE EQUAL SPACES
2 - 8"
" 10
#4 (TYP.) ~ PLACE AS SHOWN
S T A
OPTIONAL
TOP OF ROADWAY
E T
B I
O T
ANGLE POINT
2 - 0"
1 -9 "
2 - 3"
I H N
F O R P

TYPE 6SSA

TYPE 6SSD
WALL HT
TYPE 6SSB
TYPE 6SSC

BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 9"
NOTES 1. Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 6SSA, 6SSB, 6SSC or 6SSD. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the foundation shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum.
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 3"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3 - 0"
BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3 - 0"
BARS "D"&"E"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
W
5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 5 - 9"
BARS
X 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 9"
H
6 - 0"
NOISE BARRIER TYPE

6SSA
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80 90 80 90
8 - 0" 6SSB 10 - 0" 6SSC 12 - 0" 6SSD 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
2.
3.
4.
2 - 0" MAX.
RIGHT-OF-WAY SEE CONTRACT

3" CLR.
C LWALL
6" MIN.
3" (TYP.)
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINTS (TYP.) @ 24 - 0" CENTERS MAX. LEVEL (TYP.) ANGLE POINT
2 - 0"
5"
-0
"
5"
2 1/2"
3" (TYP.) #4
2 1/2"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
TRAFFIC SIDE
ALTERNATE SIDES
SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED
BAR "D"
CORNER PANEL
3" CLR. (TYP.)
2 - 0" FOR #3 OR #4 BAR 2 - 2" FOR #5 BAR
1 - 0" MIN. (TYP.)
6 1/2"
#4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONC. WALL W/ SINGLE SLOPE TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SPREAD FOOTING
2 1/4"
BAR "A" (TYP.)

2 - 10" MIN.
S T A
FINAL GROUND LINE
#4 (TYP.) ~ PLACE AS SHOWN) 1 1/2"
(FOR LOCATIONS WITHOUT FOOTING STEP)
B I
#4 @ THREE EQUAL SPACES
E T
2 - 0" MIN.
BAR "C" LOCATION OF #4 WHEN X = 3" #4 @ 18"
2" CLR.
1
BENDING DIAGRAM
7 - 5" FOR #3 OR #4 BAR OR 7 - 7" #5 BAR SEE NOTE 4
1 - 0"
79^
3" CLR.
1-1 3/4"
PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL #4 BAR TOP AND BOTTOM WHEN "X" EXCEEDS 3"
10"+X BARS "B", "C", "D" & "E" SPACE AS SHOWN ON TABLES
NOISE BARRIER WALL TYPE 6SS
ELEVATION
6" " 2 - 3
BAR "E"

TYPICAL SECTION
2" R
VARIES
#4 (TYP.) PLACE AS SHOWN WITH 2 - 0" SPLICE AND EXTENDING THRU CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
PORTATION.
27695
NE E R
TOP OF FOOTING
NOTE:
TOP OF ROADWAY
O T
BAR "B"
OPTIONAL
FOOTING
W/2 W/2
C L
PA
C L L E N
I H N
F O R P
" 2 - 6
VARIES


NOTES
TYPE 7A
WALL HT
TYPE 7B
TYPE 7C
TYPE 7D
WALL HT
BARS H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
BARS "B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
BARS "B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 14" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
BARS "B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 9"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 14" #4 @ 12"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0"
ANGLE POINT
"
2 - 0"
1.
2 1/2"
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 7A, 7B, 7C or 7D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
-0
5"
2. 3.
12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" BAR "D" 18 - 0" CORNER PANEL

C L L E N PA
2 1/2"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
4.
TRAFFIC SIDE REINFORCED PER LISTED WALL HEIGHT REINFORCEMENT TABLE
BENDING DIAGRAM
3 1/2" #4 BAR
1

NOISE BARRIER TYPE
7A 7B 8 11" 7C 7D
-9
1 - 4" DIAM.
C LWALL
RIGHT-OF-WAY
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80

1 - 0"
2 - 4"
"
5" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 6 ~ #8 BAR "A" 2" CLR. SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" ~ CENTERED ON WALL
80 90
6"
#4 BAR
3" CLR.
SOIL TYPE
BAR "B"
135^ HOOK
BAR "C"
SOIL TYPE D1 D2 ANGLE OF INTERNAL FRICTION (DEGREES) 32 38
C L SHAFT
SECTION
A
3" (TYP.) LEVEL (TYP.)
6" MIN. 1 - 0" MAX.
3" (TYP.)
1 1/2" 2 3/8" 4 7/8"
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

1
#5 ~ 4 EQUAL
#5 3 EQUAL SPACES
2 - 8" 2
B I
2" CLR. BAR "B"

SPACES
2 - 0"
7"
FINAL GROUND LINE
S T A
10" MIN.
E T
2" R
2" MIN. 6" MAX. TOP OF ROADWAY BAR "E" (TYP.)
BAR "C" 6" MAX. 3" MIN. TOP OF ROADWAY
9 - 9" FOR D1 OR 8 - 3" FOR D2
SHAFT LENGTH
SEE NOTE 4
EXTEND SHAFT REINFORCEMENT INTO BARRIER AND BEND AS REQUIRED AT FACE OF BARRIER (TYP.)
10 1/2" 10 1/2" 1 - 4" W 3.5 SPIRAL @ 6" PITCH
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINTS AT 24 - 0" CENTERS MAX. (TYP.)
4 SPACES @ 9" MAX. = 3 - 0"
4 SPACES @ 1 - 0"= 4 - 0"
4 SPACES @ 9" MAX. = 3 - 0"

BARS "B" & "C"

SPACE BARS "D" & "E" AS SHOWN
BAR "A"
1 - 6" MIN. 5 - 0" MAX.
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
SECTION
C LJOINT
ELEVATION
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
SEE CONTRACT
2 - 0"
12
90
#4 @ 15" MAX. SPACING ALTERNATE AS SHOWN
2 - 0" FOR #3 & #4 BARS 2 - 2" FOR #5 BARS
I H N
F O R P


NOISE BARRIER TYPE 7SSA 7SSB 1 - 6" 7SSC 7SSD B2 B2 80 90 WIND EXPOSURE B1 B1 WIND VELOCITY
TYPE 7SSA
WALL HT
TYPE 7SSB
TYPE 7SSC
TYPE 7SSD
WALL HT
BENDING DIAGRAM
NOTES 1. Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 7SSA, 7SSB, 7SSC or 7SSD. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
BARS H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
BARS "B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
BARS "B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 14" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
BARS "B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 9"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 14" #4 @ 12"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" #4 BAR 16 - 0" 79 33/64
5 1/2"
" 1 - 0
#4 BAR 79 33/64
" 2 - 6
(MPH)
80 90
2. 3. 4.
SOIL TYPE
BAR "B"
18 - 0" 1 - 4" DIAM.
BAR "C"
SOIL TYPE D1 D2
ANGLE OF INTERNAL FRICTION (DEGREES) 32 38

2
C L SHAFT
RIGHT-OF-WAY
ANGLE POINT
0"
2 - 0"
2 1/2" 5"
5" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
6 ~ #8 BAR "A" 2" CLR.
6"
2 1/2"
135^ HOOK
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
TRAFFIC SIDE BAR "D" REINFORCED PER LISTED WALL HEIGHT REINFORCEMENT TABLE
#4 @ 15" MAX. SPACING ALTERNATE AS SHOWN
SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" ~ CENTERED ON WALL W 3.5 SPIRAL @ 6" PITCH
C L SHAFT
CORNER PANEL
SECTION
2 - 0" FOR #3 & #4 BARS 2 - 2" FOR #5 BARS 1 CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE
A
3" (TYP.) LEVEL (TYP.)
6" MIN. 1 - 0" MAX.
3" (TYP.)
6 1/2" TYP.
1 1/2" TYP.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONC. WALL W/ SINGLE SLOPE TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION
1
SPACES (TYP.)
#5 ~ 3 EQUAL
2" CLR.
BAR "B"
S T A
E T
TOP OF ROADWAY
TOP OF ROADWAY 6"
9 - 9" FOR D1 OR 8 - 3" FOR D2
SHAFT LENGTH
EXTEND SHAFT REINFORCEMENT INTO BARRIER AND BEND AS REQUIRED AT FACE OF BARRIER (TYP.)
2 1/2"
10 1/2" 10 1/2" 1 - 4" W 3.5 SPIRAL @ 6" PITCH
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINTS AT 24 - 0" CENTERS MAX. (TYP.)
4 SPACES @ 9" MAX. = 3 - 0"
4 SPACES @ 1 - 0" = 4 - 0"
4 SPACES @ 9" MAX. = 3 - 0"
BARS "B" & "C"
SPACE BARS "D" & "E" AS SHOWN

1 - 6" MIN. 5 - 0" MAX. C LJOINT
BAR "A"
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
SECTION
ELEVATION
PORTATION.
27695
NE E R
FINAL GROUND LINE
BAR "E" (TYP.)
BAR "C"
NOTE:
2 - 10" MIN.
B I
O T
SEE CONTRACT
3" CLR.
PA N E
C L L
I H N
F O R P

TYPE 9A

TYPE 9C TYPE 9D
WALL HT
TYPE 9B
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
W 2 - 0" 2 - 3" 2 - 6" 3 - 0" 3 - 3" 3 - 9" 4 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 6" 6 - 0"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
t 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5"
BAR "B" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 15"
SPIRAL BAR "G"

W2.0 @ 2" W2.0 @ 2" W2.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 1 3/4" W3.0 @ 1 1/2" W3.0 @ 1 1/2" W3.0 @ 1 1/2"
BARS W "D"&"H" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 12" #3 @ 9" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 9" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 9" #5 @ 7" #5 @ 6" 2 - 3" 2 - 9" 3 - 3" 3 - 9" 4 - 3" 4 - 9" 5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 3" 6 - 9"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
t 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6" 7"
BAR "B" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 11"
SPIRAL BAR "G"

W2.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 1 3/4" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 1 3/4" W4.0 @ 1 3/4"
BARS W "D"&"H" #3 @ 12" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 11" #6 @ 12" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 8" #6 @ 8" 2 - 0" 2 - 6" 2 - 9" 3 - 3" 3 - 9" 4 - 3" 4 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 9" 6 - 3"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
t 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6"
BAR "B" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12"
SPIRAL BAR "G"

W2.0 @ 2" W2.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 1 3/4" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 1 3/4"
BARS W "D"&"H" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 9" #5 @ 11" #6 @ 12" #6 @ 10" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 8" 2 - 6" 3 - 3" 3 - 6" 4 - 3" 4 - 9" 5 - 6" 6 - 0" 6 - 6" 7 - 0" 7 - 6"
BARS "A"&"F"
3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 6 ~ #4 6 ~ #4 6 ~ #4
t 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 6" 6" 7" 7"
BAR "B" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 15"
SPIRAL BAR "G"

W2.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 2" W3.0 @ 1 3/4" W3.0 @ 1 3/4" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 2" W4.0 @ 1 3/4" W4.0 @ 1 3/4" W4.0 @ 1 1/2"
BARS D&H #3 @ 11" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 8" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 9" #6 @ 7" #6 @ 7" #6 @ 6"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
t = WALL THICKNESS
2 - 9"
NOISE BARRIER TYPE

9A 9B 9C 9D C LWALL RIGHT-OF-WAY
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80 90 80 90
1.
W/2 MINUS 1 1/2"
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 9A, 9B, 9C or 9D. The Contract specifies actual wall designation. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 - 0" of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the footing shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum. All joints shall be in full contact and sealed.
2.
BAR "H"
3.
4.
SEE CONTRACT 1 1/2" CLR.
5.
t
3/4" CHAMFER
PANEL WIDTH 12 - 0" MAX.
LEVEL (TYP.) ALTERNATE AS SHOWN
6" MIN. 2 - 0" MAX.

PRECAST PANEL ~ TO BE PLACED VERTICALLY REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" ~ CENTERED ON WALL #3 BAR (TYP.) SEE JOINT DETAIL
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL ON SPREAD FOOTING

3 - 0" MIN. SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED FINAL GROUND LINE 2" x 2 - 1" HOLE FOR DOWEL BAR
S T A
BAR "D" (TYP.)
E T
1 - 0" 2 - 0" MIN. (TYP.)

BAR "G" 4
1 MAX.
BAR "G" SEE DETAIL A 2 GROUT PAD ~ SET PANEL IMMEDIATELY AFTER PLACING GROUT
MAX. 1
3 - 0" MAX.
BAR "F" 1 - 0" MIN.
BAR "A" WITH 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE EXTENDING THRU CONSTRUCTION JOINT (TYP.) 1 #4 @ 18" 1
BAR "A" (TYP.) 2 MAX. BAR "H" 1 CONSTRUCTION JOINT (SEE NOTE 4) BAR "B" 2 - 0" MIN. LAP (TYP.) 1 - 0" SEE DETAIL A 2
1 - 0"
3" CLR.

BAR "B"
BAR "H" ALTERNATE PLACEMENT OF HOOKS
TYPICAL SECTION
1 REQUIRED FOR WALL HEIGHT 24 - 0" ~ TYPE 9C, WALLS 22 - 0" & 24 - 0" ~ TYPE 9B & WALLS 20 - 0", 22 - 0" & 24 - 0" ~ TYPE 9D.
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
ELEVATION
NOTE:
UNDISTURBED SOIL
PORTATION.
27695
B I
O T
NOISE SEALER 1/2" (TYP.)
NE E R
BENDING DIAGRAM
NOTES
I H N
F O R P

3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 1/2" NOISE SEALER (TYP.) ANGLE POINT
2 - 0"
t 1
t1 2
t2 -
t 1 2
t2 2
t1 2
t1 2
t2 2
3" (TYP.)
BAR "D"
TRAFFIC SIDE
CORNER PANEL
WALL BAR "D"
BAR "G" SPIRAL 1 - 0" MIN. (TYP.) FILL VOID WITH GROUT
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL ON SPREAD FOOTING

C L FOOTING
W/2
JOINT HOLE ~ 2" I.D. WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE, OR RIGID POST-TENSIONED DUCT, OR CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE
W/2
S T A
E T
GROUT PAD TRANSVERSE BARS NOT SHOWN

FOR LOCATIONS WITHOUT FOOTING STEP
FOOTING

FILL THE JOINT HOLE WITH GROUT USING DUCTS. DUCTS SHALL BE LOCATED ON PANEL FACE OPPOSITE TRAFFIC
Harold J. Peterfeso
DETAIL A
11-10-05
DATE
PORTATION.
BAR "A" (TYP.)
27695
NOTE:
B I
GROUT DUCT
O T
BAR "H"
1" CLR. (TYP.)
NE E R
t2
-0
"
PA N E
C L L
I H N
F O R P

TYPE 13A

TYPE 13C TYPE 13D
WALL HT
TYPE 13B
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 10"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 11" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 3"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 1 - 6"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 1 - 0"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 5 - 9"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 1 - 6" 1 - 9"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 13" #5 @ 9"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 13" #5 @ 9"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 13" #4 @ 9" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 13" #5 @ 9"
ANGLE POINT BAR "D" OR "C" WALL BAR "G" ~ SPIRAL FILL VOID WITH GROUT
2 0"
2 - 0"
NOTES
WIND EXPOSURE & VELOCITY 2 1/2"
NOISE BARRIER TYPE 13A 13B WIND EXPOSURE B1 B1 B2 B2 WIND VELOCITY (MPH) 80 90
5"
1.
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 13A, 13B, 13C or 13D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the footing shall be spaced at 120 feet max. All joints shall be in full contact and sealed. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
BENDING DIAGRAM
2 - 9"
BAR "E" OR "J" 2 GROUT DUCT 2" I.D. WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE, OR RIGID POSTTENSIONED DUCT, OR CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE
PA
2. 3.
2 1/2"
BAR "D" CORNER PANEL
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 13C 13D 80 90
TRAFFIC SIDE
4. 5. 6.
GROUT PAD
LEVEL (TYP.)
PANEL WIDTH 15 - 0" MAX.

FOOTING 1 HEIGHT MAY VARY IF REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH PROFILE CONSISTENT WITH THE ROADWAY PROFILE FILL THE JOINT HOLE WITH GROUT USING DUCTS. DUCTS SHALL BE LOCATED ON PANEL FACE OPPOSITE TRAFFIC 5" #3
DETAIL
A
2
2" R
12
2 - 3"
C LWALL SEE CONTRACT
2 - 2"
2 - 9"
6" MIN. 2 - 0" MAX.
1 1/2" CLR. (TYP.)

RIGHT-OF-WAY
10"+X
W - X - 4 1/2"
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
BAR "E"
BAR "J"
REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" (CENTERED ON WALL)
PRECAST PANEL TO BE PLACED VERTICALLY NOISE SEALER 1/2" (TYP.)
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SPREAD FOOTING

ALTERNATE SIDES
3 7/8"
SURFACE TREATMENT
S T A
4 7/8" #4
E T
3/4" CHAMFER #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN #4 @ THREE EQUAL SPACES SEE DETAIL A W 3.0 WIRE SPIRAL @ 2" PITCH
2 - 8" 1
3 - 0" MIN.
BAR "B" #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10" R.
2" R.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10"
1 1/2" CLR. #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN 2" CLR. #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN BAR "J" BAR "E"
MAX. 1
1 - 0" 2 - 0" MIN.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
2" MIN., 6" MAX.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
#4 @ 18" 3" CLR. #4 ~ PLACE IN HEEL WHEN X = 1" GROUT PAD LEVELING COURSE. SET PANEL IMMEDIATELY AFTER PLACING GROUT
2" x 2 - 2" HOLE FOR BARS "E" & "J" (SEE DETAIL A )
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

#4 @ 18" SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
#4 TYP. ~ PLACE AS SHOWN W/ 2 - 0" SPLICE AND EXTENDING THRU CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
X W
1 - 1 3/4" BARS "B", "C", "D", "E" & "J" SPACE AS SHOWN ON TABLES
SEE NOTE 4
REINFORCEMENT SECTION
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION
ELEVATION
PORTATION.
FINAL GROUND LINE
27695
BAR "C"
TOP OF ROADWAY
NOTE:
. .
. .
. .
. .
B I
O T
NE E R
L L C E N
1 -9 "
I H N
F O R P

TYPE 13SSA

TYPE 13SSC TYPE 13SSD
WALL HT
TYPE 13SSB
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 10"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 11" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 3"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 1 - 6"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 0"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 1 - 0"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 11" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10"
W 5 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 3" 5 - 0" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 5 - 9"
X 1" 1" 1" 1" 10" 1 - 6" 1 - 9"
BARS
BAR "E"
BAR "D"
#3 @ 15" #3 @ 15" #3 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 13" #5 @ 9"
BAR "J" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 15" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 13" #5 @ 9"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 10"
"B"&"C"
#4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 13" #4 @ 9" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 12" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 10" #5 @ 13" #5 @ 9"

BAR "D" OR "C" WALL BAR "G" ~ SPIRAL FILL VOID WITH GROUT ANGLE POINT 1/2" NOISE SEALER (TYP.) NOISE BARRIER TYPE WIND EXPOSURE B1 B1 B2 B2 WIND VELOCITY (MPH) 80
NOTES 1. Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 13SSA, 13SSB, 13SSC or 13SSD. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the footing shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum. All joints shall be in full contact and sealed. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
BENDING DIAGRAM
2 - 0"
2 0"
5"
2 1/2"
BAR "E" OR "J" 2 GROUT DUCT 2" I.D. WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE, OR RIGID POSTTENSIONED DUCT, OR CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE
2.
13SSB 13SSC 90 80 90
3. 4. 5. 6.
2 1/2"
BAR "D"
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
13SSD
TRAFFIC SIDE GROUT PAD

PA
CORNER PANEL
FOOTING 1
DETAIL
A
2
11 33/64
C LWALL SEE CONTRACT RIGHT-OF-WAY
FILL THE JOINT HOLE WITH GROUT USING DUCTS. DUCTS SHALL BE LOCATED ON PANEL FACE OPPOSITE TRAFFIC
LEVEL (TYP.) 5" PANEL WIDTH 15 - 0" MAX.
2" R
VARIES
2 - 6"
2 - 9"
1 1/2" CLR. (TYP.) 6" MIN. 2 - 0" MAX.

#3 REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" (CENTERED ON WALL)
10"+X
W - X - 4 1/2"
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
BAR "E"
BAR "J"
PRECAST PANEL TO BE PLACED VERTICALLY
NOISE SEALER 1/2" (TYP.)
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL W/ SINGLE SLOPE TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SPREAD FOOTING

ALTERNATE SIDES
2 - 9"
HEIGHT MAY VARY IF REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH PROFILE CONSISTENT WITH THE ROADWAY PROFILE

6"
3 7/8"
SURFACE TREATMENT
S T A
6 1/2"
E T
3/4" CHAMFER #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN #4 @ THREE EQUAL SPACES SEE DETAIL A 1 1/2" CLR. W 3.0 WIRE SPIRAL @ 2" PITCH #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN 2" CLR. #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN BAR "J" BAR "E" #4 @ 18" 3" CLR. #4 ~ PLACE IN HEEL WHEN X = 1" GROUT PAD LEVELING COURSE. SET PANEL IMMEDIATELY AFTER PLACING GROUT 2 MAX. 1 #4
2 - 10" 1
BAR "C" #4 ~ PLACE AS SHOWN
3 - 0" MIN.
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - 0" 2 - 0" MIN.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
2" x 2 - 2" HOLE FOR BARS "E" & "J" (SEE DETAIL A )
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

#4 @ 18" SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET SEE NOTE 4 APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
#4 TYP. ~ PLACE AS SHOWN W/ 2 - 0" SPLICE AND EXTENDING THRU CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
X W
1 - 1 3/4"
REINFORCEMENT SECTION
BARS "B", "C", "D", "E" & "J" SPACE AS SHOWN ON TABLES
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION ELEVATION
NOTE:
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
TOP OF ROADWAY
PORTATION.
FINAL GROUND LINE
27695
. .
. .
BAR "B"
B I
O T
NE E R
13SSA
L L C E N
6" 2 -
I H N
F O R P


NOTES
NOISE BARRIER TYPE
14A 14B 14C 1 - 4 1/4" 4 14D
TYPE 14A
WALL HT
TYPE 14B
BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
TYPE 14C
BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
TYPE 14D
WALL HT 9" 3" BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 12"
BENDING DIAGRAM
H
3 - 0" MAX. 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 3 - 0" 2 - 7" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 1 1 - 4 1/4" 3 2 - 6" MIN.
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10" C L
2 - 3"
2 - 0"
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80 90 80 90
1.
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 14A, 14B, 14C or 14D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet level ground on each side. All joints shall be in full contact and sealed. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Base Plate, and Bar "B" shall have a Protective Coating of one of the following: Hot Dipped Galvanizing AASHTO M 232 for Hardware; AASHTO M 111 for Washers and Plates: Mechanical Galvanizing AASHTO M 298 CL 55, or Zinc Rich Paint, Paint threads and nuts after installation. The bottom 9" of Bar "B" shall be painted with one coat of Formula A-6-86 Zinc Dust Oxide Primer OR, one coat of Formula A-11-99 Primer. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
1 -9 "
12 9" MIN., 1 - 3" MAX. 8 2 12 8
6"
WALL
C L WALL
1 1/4" THREADED ROD WITH NUTS TOP & BOTTOM (TYP.)
1 9"
1-1"
2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) RIGHT-OF-WAY SIDE 1 1/2" CLR. TRAFFIC SIDE
7.
BAR "A" CENTERED ON WALL SEE CHART FOR BAR SIZE AND SPACING (TYP.) SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED 1/2" SEAL FULL HEIGHT (TYP.)
WALL TO BE SET PLUMB (TYP.)
1 - 8" 3" (TYP.) PLATE 1 1/2" (TYP.)
#3 @ 1 - 3" O.C. ALTERNATE SIDES (TYP.)
OPTIONAL 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE
1 - 7 1/4"
4 7/8"
1 3/8" DIAM. (TYP.)
ISOMETRIC VIEW
OPTIONAL 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE SHOWN FOR INSTALLATION 5" 7" 2 3/8" 1 ~ #4 @ END OF BARRIER
PLATE
OPTIONAL 1 CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE 1 HEIGHT MAY VARY IF REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH PROFILE CONSISTENT WITH THE ROADWAY PROFILE
1"
ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION
#5 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE BLOCKOUT FOR SHEAR KEY
1 ~ #4 @ END OF BARRIER 3 7"
2 - 8"
S T A
4 OPTIONAL 1
~ #4 @ END OF BARRIER
5 3/8"
3" MIN., 6" MAX.
ANCHOR BOLTS
E T
2" CLR. 5" #3 SPIRAL @ 4" PITCH
10 - 9" FOR D1 OR 9 - 0" FOR D2
12 ~ #5 (TYP.) 2 - 8" 2
#3 SPIRAL @ 4" PITCH
2 - 8"
1"
4 ~ #8 BAR "B"
2" 1 1/4" ANCHOR BOLT. SET BOLTS WITH TEMPLATE. USE NUTS TOP AND BOTTOM OF TEMPLATE TO SECURE LOCATION. FOR ALTERNATIVE ANCHOR SEE ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL 3" #8 (TYP.)
1
10" R.
#4 @ 12"
2"
TOP OF ROADWAY
3"
1 1/2" CLR. (TYP.)

SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS 2 - 6" APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
6 ~ #8
3"
3" MIN., 9" MAX.
ANCHOR SPIRAL WITH TWO TURNS TOP AND BOTTOM
Harold J. Peterfeso
SECTION A
11-10-05
DATE
SECTION AT SHAFT SUPPORT TYPICAL SECTION
NOTE:
8 1/2" (TYP.)
PORTATION.
C LSHAFT
27695
3"
3"
NE E R
SEE DETAIL C
B I
O T
C LBARRIER AND SHAFT
6" MIN., 1 - 0" MAX.
8"
1/2"
5"
I H N
F O R P

(20^ MAX.)/2 DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN END OF PANEL C LJOINT 4" NOISE WALL 20^ MAX.

C LSHAFT DEFORMED REINFORCMENT BAR
1 3/8" 1"
C LSHAFT
20^ MAX. 1" C LJOINT
3 - 0 1/4" MAX.
2 -6 1/4" MIN.
1"
2" 1/2" MAX. GAP (TYP.)
" -9
ANGLE POINT PLAN

C LSHAFT
1 3/4"
END OF PANEL
R = 4 1/2"
2"
DEFORMED REINFORCMENT BAR
9" MIN.
ADJUST REINFORCEMENT AS NECESSARY TO ACCOMODATE ANGLE POINT
1-3" MAX.
BAR "B"
TRAFFIC SIDE 4" (TYP.) END OF PANEL LIMITS OF TRANSVERSE BARRIER REINFORCEMENT (TYP.) SEE DETAIL D NOISE WALL WEDGE HEAD SHALL BEAR FIRMLY AND UNIFORMLY AGAINST BASE PLATE. BAR "B" SHALL BE HELD SECURE DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT TO PREVENT GAPS BETWEEN WEDGE HEAD AND BASE PLATE.
END OF PANEL 2 1/2"
1/8"
GROUT 3 1/2"
R= 3"
1/4"
NOISE SEALER 1/2" (TYP.) C LSHAFT
12 - 0"
12 - 0"
4"
OPTIONAL
C LSHAFT
C LSHAFT
SHEAR-KEY DETAIL TYPICAL INTERMEDIATE AND END PANEL
C L END OF PANEL 1/4" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) NOISE SEALER 1/2" (TYP.) 4"
BAR "B" 3" BLOCK-OUT 9" LONG ~ ENCASE BASE PLATE & BLOCK-OUT W/ GROUT AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF WALL PANEL MAX.
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

C L SHAFT
S T A
E T
1/4" x 3" x 3" WASHER (TYP.)
1 1/4" ANCHOR BOLT
DETAIL
4 1/2"
1 - 0" SLOT 1 3/8" x 1 3/4" FOR 1 1/4" ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.)
1/2" (TYP.) SEE SHEAR-KEY DETAIL
5"
9"

SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS 2" (TYP.) 2" 1 - 5" 1 - 9" APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
DETAIL
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
BASE PLATE DETAIL
PORTATION.
NOTE:
PLATE 1 3/4" x 9" x 1 - 9" ASTM A 36 GALVANIZED EMBEDDED IN GROUT. 3/4" CHAMFER ALL CORNERS.
1"
1 - 7 1/4"
TAPERED HOLE FOR #8 BAR (TYP.) ~ SEE BAR "B"
27695
NE E R
SET ELEVATION OF LEVELING NUT BEFORE SETTING PANEL
1 1/2"
B I
O T
6"
6"
2 1/2"
I H N
F O R P


NOTES
BENDING DIAGRAM
TYPE 14SSA
WALL HT
TYPE 14SSB
BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 11" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12"
TYPE 14SSC
BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
TYPE 14SSD
WALL HT BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #5 @ 12" #5 @ 12"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
BAR "A" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 15" #4 @ 10" #4 @ 10"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 6"
9" 4 11"
2" 3 1/ 1 6" 2 -
1.
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 14SSA, 14SSB, 14SSC or 14SSD. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. Panels shall have at least 3 feet level ground on each side. All joints shall be in full contact and sealed. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Base Plate, and Bar B shall have a Protective Coating of one of the following: Hot Dipped Galvanizing AASHTO M 232 for Hardware; AASHTO M 111 for Washers and Plates: Mechanical Galvanizing AASHTO M 298 CL 55, or Zinc Rich Paint, Paint threads and nuts after installation. The bottom 9" of Bar "B" shall be painted with one coat of Formula A-6-86 Zinc Dust Oxide Primer OR, one coat of Formula A-11-99 Primer. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
1 - 8" 3" (TYP.) 1 1/2" (TYP.)
11 33/64
6" 2 -
2.
9 1/2"
11 33/64
3.
6" 3 6" 2 9 1/2" 4 1/2"
11 33/64
4.
1 - 3 1/2" 1 - 0"
1 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 1 - 3 1/2"
5.
5 1 1/4" THREADED ROD WITH NUTS TOP & BOTTOM (TYP.)
C LWALL C LWALL 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) RIGHT-OF-WAY SIDE TRAFFIC SIDE
6.
7.
1/2" SEAL FULL HEIGHT (TYP.) WALL TO BE SET PLUMB (TYP.) BAR "A" CENTERED ON WALL SEE CHART FOR BAR SIZE AND SPACING (TYP.) SURFACE TREATMENT AS REQUIRED 1 CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE HEIGHT MAY VARY IF REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH PROFILE CONSISTENT WITH THE ROADWAY PROFILE PLATE

NOISE BARRIER TYPE WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
#3 @ 1 - 3" O.C. ALTERNATE SIDES (TYP.)
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80 90 80 90
14SSA 1 3/8" DIAM. (TYP.) 14SSB 14SSC 14SSD
ISOMETRIC VIEW
5" SHOWN FOR INSTALLATION 7 3/4" 6 1/2" OPTIONAL 1 1" C LBARRIER AND SHAFT 2
PLATE
ALTERNATE ANCHOR DETAIL

THREADED ROD WITH NUTS TOP AND BOTTOM
1 #5 5 BLOCKOUT FOR SHEAR KEY OPTIONAL 1 7 3/4" 6 1/2" 4 3 5 3/8"
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL W/ SINGLE SLOPE TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION
S T A
TOP OF ROADWAY 2" CLR. 5" #3 SPIRAL 6" MAX. 6"
E T
1 #4 @ 12"
SEE DETAIL C
C LSHAFT 1" 10 - 9" FOR D1 OR 9 - 0" FOR D2 3" 8 1/2" (TYP.)
3"
4 2
4 ~ #8 BAR "B" #3 SPIRAL @ 4" PITCH 2 - 8"
2 - 10"
21
2" 1 1/4" ANCHOR BOLT. SET BOLTS WITH TEMPLATE. USE NUTS TOP AND BOTTOM OF TEMPLATE TO SECURE LOCATION. #8 (TYP.) FOR ALTERNATIVE ANCHOR SEE ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL 3" 2 - 6"
#4 @ 12"
CLR 1/2"
. (TY
P.)
TOP OF ROADWAY

3"
6 ~ #8
3" MIN., 9" MAX. 3"
SECTION
ANCHOR SPIRAL WITH TWO TURNS TOP AND BOTTOM
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION
SECTION AT SHAFT SUPPORT
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
ANCHOR BOLTS
B I
O T
NE E R
1 1/2" CLR.
8"
2 - 10"
1/2"
5"
I H N
F O R P

(20^ MAX.)/2 DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN END OF PANEL C LJOINT 4" NOISE WALL 20^ MAX.

C LSHAFT DEFORMED REINFORCMENT BAR
1 3/8" 1"
C LSHAFT
20^ MAX. 1" C LJOINT
3 - 0 1/4" MAX.
2 -6 1/4" MIN.
1"
2" 1/2" MAX. GAP (TYP.)
" -9
ANGLE POINT PLAN

C LSHAFT
1 3/4"
END OF PANEL
R = 4 1/2"
2"
DEFORMED REINFORCMENT BAR
9" MIN.
ADJUST REINFORCEMENT AS NECESSARY TO ACCOMODATE ANGLE POINT
1-3" MAX.
END OF PANEL TRAFFIC SIDE 4" (TYP.) LIMITS OF TRANSVERSE BARRIER REINFORCEMENT (TYP.) 1 1/2" (TYP.) NOISE WALL
BAR "B"
WEDGE HEAD SHALL BEAR FIRMLY AND UNIFORMLY AGAINST BASE PLATE. BAR "B" SHALL BE HELD SECURE DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT TO PREVENT GAPS BETWEEN WEDGE HEAD AND BASE PLATE.
1 1/2" (TYP.)
SEE DETAIL D
END OF PANEL 2 1/2"
1/8"
GROUT 3 1/2"
R= 3"
1/4"
NOISE SEALER 1/2" (TYP.) C LSHAFT
12 - 0"
12 - 0"
4"
OPTIONAL
C LSHAFT
C LSHAFT
SHEAR-KEY DETAIL TYPICAL INTERMEDIATE AND END PANEL
C L END OF PANEL 1/4" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) NOISE SEALER 1/2" (TYP.) 4"
BAR "B" 3" BLOCK-OUT 9" LONG ~ ENCASE BASE PLATE & BLOCK-OUT W/ GROUT AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF WALL PANEL MAX.
PRECAST CONCRETE WALL W/ SINGLE SLOPE TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

C L SHAFT
S T A
E T
1/4" x 3" x 3" WASHER (TYP.)
1 1/4" ANCHOR BOLT
DETAIL
4 1/2"
1 - 0" SLOT 1 3/8" x 1 3/4" FOR 1 1/4" ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.)
1/2" (TYP.) SEE SHEAR-KEY DETAIL
5"
9"

SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS 2" (TYP.) 2" 1 - 5" 1 - 9" APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
DETAIL
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
BASE PLATE DETAIL
PORTATION.
NOTE:
PLATE 1 3/4" x 9" x 1 - 9" ASTM A 36 GALVANIZED EMBEDDED IN GROUT. 3/4" CHAMFER ALL CORNERS.
1"
1 - 7 1/4"
TAPERED HOLE FOR #8 BAR (TYP.) ~ SEE BAR "B"
27695
NE E R
SET ELEVATION OF LEVELING NUT BEFORE SETTING PANEL
1 1/2"
B I
O T
6"
6"
2 1/2"
I H N
F O R P

TYPE 16A
DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN WALL HT WALL HT

TYPE 16B
NOTES
BAR "C" BAR "D"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48"

NOISE BARRIER TYPE
16A 16B 16C 16D
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0"
CMU WIDTH
8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10"
DEPTH
DEPTH
D1
3 - 3" 3 - 6" 3 - 10" 4 - 7" 4 - 4" 4 - 7"
D2
3 - 0" 3 - 4" 3 - 6" 3 - 8" 3 - 10" 4 - 1" 4 - 3" 4 - 9" 5 - 0" 5 - 3"
BAR "C"
BAR "D"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" WALL HT
CMU WIDTH
8" 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10"
DEPTH
DEPTH
D1
3 - 8" 4 - 0" 4 - 4" 4 - 8"
D2
3 - 4" 3 - 8" 3 - 10" 4 - 2" 4 - 5" 4 - 8" 4 - 10" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 5 - 9"
1.
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 16A, 16B, 16C or 16D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. All masonry shall be hollow unit and installed as running bond. All masonry is to be specially inspected. All Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) cells that have vertical steel reinforcing bars or bond beam units shall be filled with grout. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the trench footing shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum. See "Masonry Wall Finishes and Details" sheet for masonry block finishes, special shapes, sizes and layouts. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
2. 3.
10 - 0" 90 12 - 0" 80 14 - 0" 90 16 - 0"
#6 @ 40" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #7 @ 24" #7 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32"
4 - 0" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0"
4 - 11" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 4 - 9" 6 - 0" 6 - 3"
4. 5.
SOIL TYPE
SOIL TYPE
D1 D2
18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 32 24 - 0" 38 WALL HT
5 - 4" 6 - 0" 6 - 8" 7 - 4"
4 - 10" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 5 - 9"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 18"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 18"
#6 @ 24" #7 @ 24" #7 @ 16" #8 @ 16"
ANGLE OF INTERNAL FRICTION (DEGREES)
6. 7.
TYPE 16C
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0"
TYPE 16D
BAR "C" BAR "D"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 16"
CMU = CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
CMU WIDTH
8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10"
DEPTH
DEPTH
D1
3 - 6" 3 - 9" 4 - 7" 4 - 4" 4 - 8"
D2
3 - 3" 3 - 5" 3 - 8" 3 - 11" 4 - 2" 4 - 5" 4 - 8" 5 - 0" 5 - 3" 5 - 6"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
CMU WIDTH
8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10"
DEPTH
DEPTH
D1
3 - 10" 4 - 2" 4 - 5"
D2
3 - 5" 3 - 9" 4 - 0" 4 - 4" 4 - 7" 4 - 11" 5 - 1" 5 - 6" 5 - 9" 6 - 0"
BAR "C"
BAR "D"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 32"
8.
9.
4 - 0" 4 - 0" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 7 - 4" 9 - 8" 12 - 0"
4 - 10" 5 - 3" 5 - 7" 5 - 10" 6 - 0" 6 - 6" 6 - 9"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 18" #7 @ 18" #8 @ 18" #9 @ 18"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 18" #7 @ 18" #8 @ 18" #9 @ 18"
4 - 0" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 7 - 8"
4 - 11" 5 - 3" 5 - 6" 5 - 9" 6 - 0"
RIGHT-OF-WAY
20 - 0" 22 - 0"
SEE CONTRACT 24 - 0" C LWALL AND TRENCH SEE CONTRACT 8" C LWALL AND TRENCH EXPANSION JOINTS @ 24 - 0" MAX CENTERS. SEE CONTRACT FOR LOCATIONS 8" 4 - 0" MIN. BOND BEAM AND REINFORCED EXTENSION AT STEP CMU (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 5 REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" (CENTERED) #5 (TYP.)
SOLID GROUT CAP BOND BEAM AT TOP
RIGHT-OF-WAY
SOLID GROUT CAP BOND BEAM AT TOP
CMU (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 5 REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" (CENTERED)
3 - 0" MIN.
LEVEL (TYP.)
3 - 0" MIN.
8" (TYP.)
4 - 0" TO LOWER
TWO BLOCKS MIN., THREE BLOCKS MAX.
S T A
#5 @ 4 - 0" MAX. (TYP.)
E T
SPLICE, OPTIONAL
2 - 8" MIN.
BOND BEAM
2 1 MAX. 2" CLR. (TYP.)
6" MIN.
2 1 MAX.
FINAL GROUND LINE
DEPTH D1 OR D2
SEE NOTE 9
6" MIN. #4 @ ABOUT 18" WITH 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE CONTINUOUS THRU EXPANSION JOINT
DEPTH D1 OR D2
SEE NOTE 9
BAR "C" #4 @ ABOUT 18" WITH 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE CONTINUOUS THRU EXPANSION JOINT

CONSTRUCTION JOINT (SEE NOTE 7) SEPARATE FROM WALL JOINT SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
10"
3" CLR.
TYPICAL SECTION 8" WIDE CMU

3" CLR.
1 - 0"
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION 10" WIDE CMU
ELEVATION
PORTATION.
FINAL GROUND LINE
27695
10" (TYP.)
4 - 0" TO LOWER
2" CLR. (TYP.)
NE E R
FINAL GROUND LINE
#5 @ 4 - 0" MAX. (TYP.)
NOTE:
B I
O T
2" (TYP.)
8"
2" (TYP.)
MASONRY WALL ON TRENCH FOOTING
BOND BEAM
I H N
F O R P

CELLS WITH VERTICAL REINFORCING AND BOND BEAMS SHALL BE FILLED WITH GROUT
EXPANSION JOINT FILLER PLACED IN SASH BLOCK RECESSES.
BACKER ROD
8" OR 10" CMU
1/2" JOINT #5 (TYP.) TRAFFIC SIDE
SEE DETAIL A
PLAN VIEW
DETAIL
TYPICAL EXPANSION JOINT
TYPICAL BOTH SIDES OF WALL
MASONRY WALL ON TRENCH FOOTING

8" CMU
10" CMU
S T A
E T
4 - 0" MAX.
BOND BEAM GROUTING LIMIT
TRAFFIC SIDE
#5 (TYP.)
TRAFFIC SIDE
SEE DETAIL A
PLAN VIEW
EXPANSION JOINT AT WIDTH STEP

BOND BEAM DETAIL
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
PORTATION.
27695
NE E R
BOND BEAM UNITS
NOTE:
B I
O T
#5 @ 4 - 0" MAX. (TYP.)
POLYURETHANE SEALANT
I H N
F O R P


TYPE 17B
WALL HT CMU
TYPE 17A
CMU
NOTES
BAR "C" BAR "D" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #7 @ 24" #7 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #7 @ 24" #7 @ 16" #8 @ 16" BAR "E" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18"
NOISE BARRIER TYPE

17A 17B 17C 17D
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80
H
WIDTH 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10"
W 2 - 0" 2 - 3" 2 - 6" 3 - 0" 3 - 3"
BAR "A" 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
BAR "C"
BAR "D" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32"
BAR "E" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18"
H
WIDTH 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" WALL HT 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10"
W 12 - 3" 2 - 9" 3 - 3"
BAR "A" 3 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 6 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4
1.
90 10 - 0" 80 12 - 0" 90 14 - 0" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 4 - 3" 4 - 9" 5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 3" 6 - 9" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" 4 - 0" 3 - 9" #4 @ 18"
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 17A, 17B, 17C or 17D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. All masonry shall be hollow unit and installed as running bond. All masonry is to be specially inspected. All Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) cells that have vertical steel reinforcing bars or bond beam units shall be filled with grout. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the footing shall be spaced at 120 feet maximum. See "Masonry Wall Finishes and Details" sheets for masonry block finishes, special shapes, sizes and layout.
2.
CMU = CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" WALL HT C L WALL AND FOOTING RIGHT-OF-WAY 8 - 0" SEE CONTRACT 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" SOLID GROUT CAP 16 - 0" 18 - 0" BOND BEAM AT TOP 8" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" 2" (TYP.) BAR SIZE #6 REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" (CENTERED) #7 #8 SPLICE LENGTH 2 - 8" 3 - 8" 4 - 10" 8" CMU (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 5 3 - 0" MIN. #5 @ 4 - 0" MAX. (TYP.) BAR W/ STANDARD HOOK, OR PROVIDE FOOTING DOWEL EXCEPT WHEN BARS "C" ARE REQUIRED TWO BLOCKS MIN., THREE BLOCKS MAX. 4 - 0" MIN. BOND BEAM AND REINFORCED EXTENSION AT STEP 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 4 - 0" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 7 - 0" 8 - 0" 2 - 6" 2 - 9" 3 - 3" 3 - 9" 4 - 3" 4 - 6" 5 - 3" 5 - 9" 6 - 3" 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 3 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 16" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 16" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 12" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 4 - 0" 4 - 0" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 7 - 4" 9 - 8" 12 - 0" 15 - 0" 3 - 3" 3 - 6" 4 - 3" 4 - 9" 5 - 6" 6 - 0" 6 - 6" 7 - 0" 7 - 6" 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 5 ~ #4 6 ~ #4 #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 24" #7 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #7 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" CMU 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 6 - 8" 7 - 4" 8 - 0" 3 - 9" 4 - 0" 5 - 0" 5 - 6" 6 - 0"
3.
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 24"
#6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 24"
4.
5.
TYPE 17C
TYPE 17D
CMU BAR "C" BAR "D" #6 @ 48" BAR "E" #4 @ 18"
H
WIDTH 6 - 0" 8"
W 2 - 0"
BAR "A" 3 ~ #4
H
WIDTH 6 - 0" 8"
W 2 - 6"
BAR "A" 3 ~ #4
BAR "C"
BAR "D" #6 @ 48"
BAR "E" #4 @ 18"
6.
7.
#4 @ 18" #4 @ 18" #4 @ 18"
8.
#4 @ 18" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12" #4 @ 12"
MASONRY WALL ON SPREAD FOOTING

#5 (TYP.) LEVEL (TYP.)
S T A
E T
4 - 0" TO LOWER BOND BEAM
OPTIONAL LAP SPLICE
SEE TABLE
2 - 0" MIN.
2 1MAX. FINAL GROUND LINE CONTINUOUS FOOTING REINFORCING STEEL BAR "A" @ EQUAL SPACING WITH 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE (TYP.) CONSTRUCTION JOINT (SEE NOTE 7) EXPANSION JOINTS @ 24 - 0" MAX CENTERS. SEE CONTRACT FOR LOCATIONS
#4 @ 18"
2" CLR.
1 - 0"

3" CLR.
BAR "C" ~ SEE WALL TABLE
BAR "E"
SPREAD FOOTING
ELEVATION
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
TYPICAL SECTION
PORTATION.
27695
2" CLR. (TYP.)
FINAL GROUND LINE
NOTE:
B I
O T
NE E R
I H N
F O R P

BACKER ROD
8" OR 10" CMU
#5 @ 4 - 0" MAX. (TYP.)
1/2" JOINT
#5 (TYP.)
TRAFFIC SIDE 4 - 0" MAX.
PLAN VIEW
BOND BEAM DETAIL
MASONRY WALL ON SPREAD FOOTING

8" CMU
10" CMU W/2
S T A
E T
BAR "A" (TYP.) TRAFFIC SIDE #5 (TYP.) TRAFFIC SIDE
SEE DETAIL A

PLAN VIEW

(FOR LOCATIONS WITHOUT FOOTING STEP) NOTE: TRANSVERSE BARS NOT SHOWN

Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
PORTATION.
27695
W/2
NOTE:
3" CLR. (TYP.)
1 - 0" MIN. (TYP.)
B I
O T
FOOTING
NE E R
C L
SEE DETAIL A
BOND BEAM UNITS BOND BEAM GROUTING LIMIT
DETAIL
I H N
F O R P

TYPE 19A
DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN WALL HT WALL HT

TYPE 19B
NOTES
DEPTH DEPTH
CMU H WIDTH
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 6 - 8" 7 - 4" 8 - 0" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 24" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 14" 14" 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 6 ~ #9 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #8
DEPTH
DEPTH
CMU H X WIDTH
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 4 - 0" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 32" #7 @ 24" #7 @ 16" 12" 12" 12" 12" 14" 14" 16" 16" 16" 16" 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #8 8 ~ #8
BAR "D"
BAR "C"
DIAM.
BAR "P" D1
5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 9" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 8 - 3" 8 - 9" 9 - 3" 9 - 3" 9 - 9"
BAR "D"
BAR "C"
DIAM.
BAR "P" D1
6 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 9 - 3" 10 - 0" 10 - 6" 11 - 3"
D2
4 - 9" 5 - 3" 5 - 9" 6 - 3" 6 - 9" 7 - 0" 7 - 6" 7 - 9" 7 - 9" 8 - 3"
D2
5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 9" 7 - 3" 7 - 3" 8 - 0"
1.
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 19A, 19B, 19C, or 19D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. All masonry shall be hollow unit and installed as running bond. All masonry is to be specially inspected. All Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) cells the have vertical steel reinforcing bars or bond beam units shall be filled with grout. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. Construction joints in the shaft cap shall be spaced 120 feet maximum. See "Masonry Wall Finishes and Details" sheet for masonry block finishes, special shapes, sizes and layouts. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
SOIL TYPE WIND EXPOSURE & VELOCITY
NOISE BARRIER TYPE
19A 19B 19C
2. 3.
4.
8 - 0" 8 - 6" 9 - 0" 9 - 6"
5.
6.
WALL HT
WALL HT
CMU H WIDTH
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 5 - 4" 5 - 4" 6 - 0" 6 - 8" 7 - 4" 8 - 0" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 40" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #6 @ 16" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #6 @ 16" #6 @ 16" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 14" 14" 14" 14" 16" 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 8 ~ #6 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #8 8 ~ #9 8 ~ #8
DEPTH
DEPTH
CMU H X WIDTH
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0" 8" 8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 10" 4 - 0" 4 - 8" 4 - 8" 5 - 4" 7 - 4" 9 - 8" 12 - 0" 15 - 0" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 48" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #8 @ 16" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 24" #6 @ 16" #7 @ 24" #7 @ 16" #7 @ 16" #7 @ 16" 12" 12" 12" 14" 14" 16" 16" 16" 16" 18" 6 ~ #5 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 8 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 8 ~ #8 8 ~ #9 8 ~ #10 8 ~ #10
DEPTH
DEPTH
BAR "D"
BAR "C"
DIAM.
BAR "P" D1
5 - 9" 6 - 6" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 8 - 6" 9 - 0" 9 - 9" 10 - 3" 10 - 3"
BAR "D"
BAR "C"
DIAM.
BAR "P" D1
6 - 6" 7 - 6" 8 - 3" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 9 - 6" 10 - 0" 10 - 9" 11 - 6" 11 - 6"
D2
5 - 0" 5 - 6" 6 - 3" 6 - 9" 7 - 3" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 8 - 3" 8 - 9" 8 - 9"
D2
5 - 9" 6 - 6"
7.
8.
7 - 0" 7 - 3"
9.
8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 9 - 9" D1 9 - 9" D2 RIGHT-OF-WAY SEE CONTRACT SOLID GROUT CAP BOND BEAM AT TOP 8" C LWALL 4 - 0" MIN. BOND BEAM AND REINFORCED EXTENSION AT STEP 8"
SOIL TYPE

32 38
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80 90 80 90
#5 (TYP.)
LEVEL (TYP.)
19D
MASONRY WALL ON SHAFT W/ GRADE BEAM FOUNDATION

REINFORCING STEEL BAR "D" (CENTERED)
S T A
E T
3 - 0" MIN.
4 - 0" TO LOWER BOND BEAM
2" CLR. (TYP.) 2 - 8"
MAX 1 REINFORCEMENT NOT SHOWN CONSTRUCTION JOINT (SEE NOTE 7)
#4 @18"
6" MIN. 2" CLR. (TYP.)
1 - 9"
BAR "C" 3"

#4 WITH 2 - 0" MIN LAP SPLICE (TYP.) 8 BARS TOTAL WHEN H = 6 - 0" TO 12 - 0" 10 BARS TOTAL WHEN H = 14 - 0" TO 24 - 0" 9" 9" SEE DETAIL A C LSHAFT SHAFT SPACING 15 - 0" MAX. REINFORCEMENT NOT SHOWN C LSHAFT C L SHAFT SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
4"
5 - 0" MAX., 1 - 6" MIN.
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
1 - 6"
TYPICAL SECTION
ELEVATION
1/2 ADJACENT SHAFT SPACING MAX.
PORTATION.
FINAL GROUND LINE
FINAL GROUND LINE
27695
NE E R
#5 @ 4 - 0" MAX. (TYP.)
OMIT DOWEL FROM SHAFT CAP WHEN "C" BARS ARE PRESENT
NOTE:
B I
CMU (SEE NOTE 5)
O T
2" (TYP.)
TWO BLOCKS MIN., THREE BLOCKS MAX.
EXPANSION JOINTS @ 24 - 0" MAX. CENTERS. SEE CONTRACT FOR LOCATIONS
TYPE 19C
TYPE 19D
I H N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN #5 @ 4 - 0" MAX. (TYP.)

C L SHAFT
BACKER ROD
9" 4 - 0" MAX. BOND BEAM UNITS BOND BEAM GROUTING LIMIT HOOKS PARALLEL TO WALL LAYOUT LINE
1/2" JOINT
#4
BOND BEAM DETAIL

A
CELLS WITH VERTICAL REINFORCING AND BOND BEAMS SHALL BE FILLED WITH GROUT EXPANSION JOINT FILLER PLACED IN SASH BLOCK RECESSES.
#4 STIRRUP SPACING @ 12"
3 ~ #4 STIRRUP SPACING @ 6"
8" OR 10" CMU
#5 (TYP.)
TRAFFIC SIDE #4 EVEN MULTIPLES OF 8"
CONCRETE SHAFT
MASONRY WALL ON SHAFT W/ GRADE BEAM FOUNDATION

SEE DETAIL B
3 - 0" #4 @ 1 - 0"
B I
S T A
E T
STEP DETAIL
CELLS WITH VERTICAL REINFORCING AND BOND BEAMS SHALL BE FILLED WITH GROUT 8" CMU EXPANSION JOINT FILLER PLACED IN SASH BLOCK RECESSES. 10" CMU 1 - 6"
DETAIL
NOTE SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE LAPPED AS SHOWN TO TERMINATE THE ENDS OF THE SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT (TOP AND BOTTOM).
2" C LR
1 - 5" MIN. LAP
6"
135^ HOOK (TYP.) TRAFFIC SIDE #5 (TYP.) TRAFFIC SIDE BAR "P" AT EQUAL SPACING (FOR TOTAL NUMBER SEE REINFORCEMENT SCHEDULE)

SEE DETAIL B
PLAN VIEW
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
SECTION
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
O T
PLAN VIEW
NE E R
DETAIL
DEPTH D1 OR D2 ~ SEE NOTE 9
SHAFT LENGTH FOR PAYMENT
3"
I H N
F O R P


TYPE 20B
TYPE 20A
WALL HT DEPTH DEPTH PILASTER SPACING WALL HT DEPTH DEPTH
NOTES
PILASTER SPACING
NOISE BARRIER TYPE

20A 20B 20C 20D
WIND EXPOSURE
B1 B1 B2 B2
WIND VELOCITY (MPH)

80 90 80 90
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
BAR "A" D1
5 - 6" 6 - 6" 7 - 0" 7 - 9" 8 - 3" 9 - 0" 9 - 6" 10 - 3" 10 - 9" 11 - 3"
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
D2
5 - 0" 5 - 6" 6 - 0" 6 - 6" 7 - 0" 7 - 6" 8 - 0" 8 - 6" 9 - 0" 9 - 6" 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #5 4 ~ #5 4 ~ #6 4 ~ #7 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 6 ~ #9 #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32"
L
16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
BAR "A" D1
6 - 6" 7 - 6" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 11 - 9" 12 - 6" 12 - 6" 12 - 6"
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
1.
D2
5 - 9" 6 - 6" 7 - 0" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 9 - 0" 9 - 9" 10 - 3" 10 - 3" 10 - 3" 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #7 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #5 4 ~ #6 4 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 6 ~ #9 6 ~ #10 6 ~ #10 6 ~ #10 #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32" #5 @ 32"
L
16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0"
Wall to be designated Noise Barrier Wall Type 20A, 20B, 20C, or 20D. The Contract specifies actual wall designations. For intermediate wall heights, use the next higher H. All masonry shall be hollow unit and installed as running bond. All masonry is to be specially inspected. All Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) cells that have vertical steel reinforcing bars or bond beam units shall be filled with grout. Panels shall have at least 3 feet of level ground on each side. See "Masonry Wall Finishes and Details" sheet for masonry block finishes, special shapes, sizes and layouts. The Contract specifies actual foundation requirements D1 or D2.
2. 3.
16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 12 - 0"
SOIL TYPE
SOIL TYPE
D1 D2
4. 5.

32 38
TIE SPACING
6.
BAR "A" SIZE #4 #5 #6 #7, #8,
SPACING 6" O.C. 6" O.C. 5" O.C. WALL HT DEPTH DEPTH
TYPE 20C
PILASTER SPACING WALL HT DEPTH DEPTH
TYPE 20D
PILASTER SPACING
7.
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0"
BAR "A" D1
6 - 3" 7 - 0" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 10 - 0" 10 - 9" 11 - 3" 12 - 0" 12 - 9"
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
D2
5 - 3" 6 - 0" 6 - 6" 7 - 3" 7 - 9" 8 - 3" 9 - 0" 9 - 6" 10 - 0" 10 - 6" 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #7 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #5 4 ~ #5 4 ~ #6 4 ~ #7 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 6 ~ #9 6 ~ #10 #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32"
L
16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0"
H
6 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 22 - 0" 24 - 0"
BAR "A" D1
7 - 0" 8 - 3" 9 - 3" 10 - 3" 11 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 9" 13 - 0" 13 - 0" 13 - 6"
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
D2
6 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 9" 8 - 6" 9 - 3" 9 - 9" 10 - 6" 10 - 6" 10 - 6" 11 - 3" 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #6 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 6 ~ #8 4 ~ #4 4 ~ #5 4 ~ #6 4 ~ #7 6 ~ #8 6 ~ #9 6 ~ #10 6 ~ #10 6 ~ #10 6 ~ #10 #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32" #6 @ 32"
L
16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 16 - 0" 14 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 0"
8.
4" O.C. #9, #10 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" RIGHT-OF-WAY 22 - 0" 24 - 0" SEE CONTRACT CMU = CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT C LPILASTER AND SHAFT SOLID GROUT CAP 8"
MASONRY WALL ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

A
32 - 0" MAX. EXPANSION JOINT SPACING 3 - 0" MIN. DOWEL ~ PROVIDE SAME NUMBER & SIZE AS BAR "B". #4, #5, LAP 2 - 6" #6 LAP 2 - 10" 2 #7 LAP 3 - 9" #8 LAP 4 - 11" #9 LAP 6 - 3" #10 LAP 7 - 11" TWO BLOCKS MIN., THREE BLOCKS MAX. 2 1 MAX. 2" CLR. TO FIRST TIE EXPANSION JOINT C LPILASTER PILASTER SPACING L C LPILASTER CMU PILASTER (TYP.)
C LPILASTER
S T A
1 - 3 3/8"
E T
C
TOP OF WALL
FINAL GROUND LINE
6" MIN.
DEPTH D1 OR D2
CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE DOWEL EMBEDMENT LENGTH = 40 x BAR "B" DIAM.
6" MIN.
BAR "A"
FINAL GROUND LINE

SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS BOTTOM OF WALL APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
B
3" CLR. ANCHOR SPIRALS W/ TWO TURNS TOP AND BOTTOM
Harold J. Peterfeso
2 - 0"
11-10-05
DATE
ELEVATION
SECTION AT PILASTER AND SHAFT
PORTATION.
27695
NE E R
LEVEL (TYP.)
NOTE:
B I
O T
I H N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN #6 x 5 - 0" WITH GREASED OR TAPED END, PENETRATING PIPE SLEEVE 8" MIN. BACKER ROD WITH POLYURETHANE SEALANT ~ BOTH WALL FACES

HORIZONTAL DOWEL ~ PROVIDE SAME NUMBER AND SIZE AS BAR "B" LAP 2 - 0" MIN. FILL PILASTER W/ CONCRETE 1 - 3 3/8" C LPILASTER & SHAFT BAR "C" 1 ~ #5 FULL HEIGHT
TRAFFIC SIDE
EXPANSION JOINT FILLED W/ NOISE SEALER 1 ~ #5 FULL HEIGHT BAR "C"
TRAFFIC SIDE 1 ~ #5 FULL HEIGHT
2 ~ #4 FULL HEIGHT (TYP.) BAR "C"
1 - 3 3/8"
1/2" CLEARANCE
1/2" CLEARANCE
TO FACE SHELL
C LPILASTER & SHAFT
1 1/2" CLR.
1/4
PIPE TO #6
SECTION
2 - 0" 6" TYP.
BAR "B" (TYP.) ~ FOR QUANTITIES GREATER THAN FOUR, PLACE BALANCE ON OUTSIDE FACES AS SHOWN
SECTION
TYPICAL EXPANSION JOINT 1 - 5" MIN. LAP

2" C LR.
C LPILASTER & SHAFT
PILASTER REINFORCEMENT
W3.5 @ 4" PITCH BAR "A" TRAFFIC SIDE C LPILASTER & SHAFT CAP ABOVE 135^ HOOK (TYP.)
0 33/64 ~ 45 33/64
SECTION
B
SOLID GROUT CAP
2" (TYP.)
NOTE SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE LAPPED 17" MIN. A 135 33/64 HOOK THAT IS HOOKED AROUND A LONGITUDINAL BAR SHALL BE USED TO TERMINATE THE ENDS OF THE SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT AT LAPPED SPLICES AND AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF SHAFT.
MASONRY WALL ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT BAR "B" #4 @ 4 - 0" MIN.
S T A
6" CMU (TYP.)
E T
BAR "C" @ CENTER OF WALL CAP ABOVE
0 33/64 ~ 45 33/64
BAR "C"
6" MIN.

R/W SIDE
4" COMPACTED LEVEL CRUSHED GRAVEL BASE
Harold J. Peterfeso
SECTION C
11-10-05
DATE
ANGLE POINT PLAN
PORTATION.
NOTE:
GROUT ALL CELLS BELOW GRADE SOLID, MIN. TWO COURSES (TYP.)
27695
B I
O T
FILL TOP COURSE W/ GROUT
NE E R
3/4" DIAM. x 1 - 0" SCHED. 40 PIPE WITH #6 x 30" GRADE 40 WELDED TAIL AS SHOWN LAPPED WITH AND SPACED PER BAR "C"
TO FACE SHELL
I H N
F O R P

EXPANSION JOINT DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN

NOTES 1. 2. All rebar shall have a minimum 1 1/2" cover. See Standard Plan D-2.92 for door and frame details. See Standard Plan D-2.06 for wall reinforcement not shown.
5 - 0"
5" BAR "A" #5 x 4 - 0" (TYP.) 4 1/2" (TYP.)
3" (TYP.)
BAR "A"
3.
#5 x 6 - 8" (TYP.)
DOOR ~ SEE NOTE 2
3" BAR "A" (7 BARS PER SIDE) 3" 4 - 0"
CONCRETE SLAB
#6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.) 2 PER SIDE OF DOOR
48" DOOR OPENING #6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.)
4" CONCRETE SLAB
ANCHOR PIN WELDED TO DOOR FRAME (TYP.)
WALL
CONCRETE SLAB
GROUND LINE 4"
CONCRETE SLAB
5 - 0"
PLAN VIEW
CONCRETE SLAB DETAIL
FOR CAST-IN-PLACE WALL ON OFFSET SPREAD FOOTING

A FRONT VIEW
B I
WALL
S T A
E T
BENDING DIAGRAM
CONCRETE SLAB
2 - 0"
CONCRETE SLAB
NOISE BARRIER WALL ACCESS DOOR TYPE 1
5"
4 1/2"

BAR "A"
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
ISOMETRIC CUTAWAY VIEW
NOTE:
GROUND LINE
PORTATION.
27695
SECTION
O T
NE E R
3" (TYP.)
4 - 0"
I H N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN #5 @ 6 - 8" (TYP.) BAR "A" (TYP.) 8"

NOTES 1.
4" CONCRETE SLAB
All rebar shall have a minimum 1 1/2" cover. See Standard Plan D-2.92 for door and frame details. See Standard Plan D-2.14 for wall reinforcement not shown.
2.
3.
48" DOOR OPENING 2 - 6" 4 - 6" 25 - 0"
TOP VIEW A B
TOP OF TRAFFIC BARRIER FOUNDATION
FINISHED GRADE LINE
OBLIQUE VIEW
TOP OF FOOTING DOOR ~ SEE DETAIL 8"
FRONT VIEW
5"
BAR "A"
FOR CAST-IN-PLACE WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER

B I
USE SPACING IN WALL PLAN PER WALL HEIGHT
S T A
E T
4" CONCRETE SLAB 2 - 9"
FINISHED GRADE CONCRETE SLAB TOP OF ROADWAY TOP OF ROADWAY
2- 0" MIN.
4"

BAR "F" 1

BAR "G"
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
SECTION
SECTION
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
O T
NE E R
2 - 8"
8"
I H N
F O R P


BENDING DIAGRAM
VARIES
BAR "A" 3" (TYP.) 4 1/2" (TYP.)
6"
#5 x 4 - 0" (TYP.)
" -9
11"
2 - 0"
94 33/64 154 33/64 3 - 0" 8"
#5 x 6 - 8" (TYP.)
5"
EXPANSION JOINT BAR "A" (7 BARS PER SIDE EQUALLY SPACED)
4 1/2" VARIES 11"
BAR "A"
BAR "B"
BAR "C"
BAR "F"
BAR "G"
VARIES
48" DOOR OPENING ANCHOR PIN WELDED TO DOOR FRAME (TYP.)
5 - 0"
#6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.) 4" CONCRETE SLAB
WALL
TRAFFIC SIDE
FOR CAST-IN-PLACE WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER

BAR "B" 1
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT
DOOR DETAIL
(SEE NOTE 2)
S T A
E T
BAR "C" 8" FINISHED GRADE 3" BAR "A" (TYP.) 3" 5"
1 TOP OF ROADWAY
ANCHOR PIN (TYP.) #6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.) 1"

SECTION
C SECTION D
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
B I
O T
NE E R
3" (TYP.)
4 - 0"
2 - 3"
I H N
F O R P


BENDING DIAGRAM
4 1/2" 2 - 0"
NOTES 1. 2. All rebar shall have a minimum 1 1/2" cover. See Standard Plan D-2.92 for door and frame details. See Standard Plan D-2.36 for wall reinforcement not shown.
5 - 0"
2 - 6"
4 - 6" #4 BAR
3.
BAR "A"
BAR "A" 2 - 0" 3" (TYP.) 4 1/2" (TYP.) 12" 12" 4 - 0" 5"
4" CONCRETE SLAB #4 BAR
#5 x 6 - 8" (TYP.)
EXPANSION JOINT
SEE NOTE 3
8"
4 - 6" 48" DOOR OPENING
4 - 0"
BAR "E"
BAR "A" (7 BARS PER SIDE)
48" DOOR OPENING 4" CONCRETE SLAB WALL
#6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.)
8" 5"
3" (TYP.)
WALL #5 x 4 - 0" (TYP.)
5 - 0"
SECTION
BAR "A"
FOR PRECAST WALL ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

1
DOOR FRAME (SEE NOTE 2) CONCRETE SLAB NOT SHOWN
S T A
E T
DOOR DETAIL
(SEE NOTE 2) CONCRETE SLAB FINISHED GRADE
CONCRETE SLAB
FINISHED GRADE
CONCRETE SLAB
2 - 3"
4"

Harold J. Peterfeso
ISOMETRIC CUTAWAY VIEW SECTION A
11-10-05
DATE
NOTE:
CONCRETE SLAB
PORTATION.
27695
BAR "E"
B I
O T
NE E R
1 - 5"
8"
2 - 3"
4 - 0"
5"
I H N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN #5 x 6 - 8" (TYP.) 8" BAR "A" (TYP.)

NOTES 1. 2. 3. All rebar shall have a minimum 1 1/2" cover. See Standard Plan D-2.92 for door and frame details. See Standard Plan D-2.44 for wall reinforcement not shown.
48" DOOR OPENING 2 - 6" 4 - 6" 5 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 0"
TOP VIEW A
DOOR ~ SEE DETAIL
TOP OF TRAFFIC BARRIER
2 - 8"
FINISHED GRADE LINE
1 1 MIN.
FRONT VIEW
8" 5"
CONCRETE SLAB BAR "A"
FOR PRECAST WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

DOOR FRAME (SEE NOTE 2)
S T A
E T
2 - 9"
CONCRETE SLAB
TOP OF ROADWAY
FINISHED GRADE
TOP OF ROADWAY
FINISHED GRADE
TOP OF ROADWAY

2 - 0"
BAR "F"

Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
B I
O T
NE E R
8"
2 - 3"
I H N
F O R P

2 - 6"
4 - 6"
BENDING DIAGRAM
BAR "A"
#4 BAR 2 - 0" 3" (TYP.) 4 1/2" (TYP.) 4 1/2" #5 x 6 - 8" (TYP.) 5"
" -9
11"
154 33/64 VARIES 8"
BAR "A"
BAR "A" (7 BARS PER SIDE)
VARIES
94 33/64 48" DOOR OPENING
BAR "D"
2 - 3"
2 - 0" 12" 4 - 0" 12"
#6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.)
#4 BAR
BAR "B" BAR "E"
#5 x 4 - 0" (TYP.)
FOR PRECAST WALL W/ TRAFFIC BARRIER ON SHAFT FOUNDATION

1 1 5 - 0"
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PORTATION. THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON
BAR "E" CONCRETE SLAB NOT SHOWN
B I
S T A
E T
DOOR DETAIL
4 - 0" (SEE NOTE 2)
CONCRETE SLAB
27695
GROUND LINE
WALL 4"

Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
NOTE:
NE E R
EXPANSION JOINT 6"
VARIES
BAR "F"
3" (TYP.)
2 - 3"
I H N
O T
F O R P


5 - 0"
NOTES 1. All rebar shall have a minimum 1 1/2" cover. See Standard Plan D-2.92 for door and frame details. See Standard Plan D-2.68 for wall reinforcement not shown.
BENDING DIAGRAM
4" CONCRETE SLAB
2.
4 - 0"
5"
4 1/2" WALL
4 - 0"
BAR "A"
2 - 0"
3.
4" CONCRETE SLAB
5 - 0"
SOLID GROUT CAP

BAR "A" CMU SOLID GROUT CAP 3" (TYP.) BAR "A"
8" OR 10" #5 x 7 - 0" (TYP.)
DOOR ~ SEE NOTE 2 WALL
3" OR 5" BAR "A" (7 BARS PER SIDE)
FOR MASONRY WALL (SHAFT FOUNDATION SHOWN)

B I
2 PER SIDE OF DOOR
S T A
DOOR FRAME ANCHOR (TYP.)
E T
48" DOOR OPENING
#6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.)
CONCRETE SLAB 3" (TYP.)
CONCRETE SLAB
GROUND LINE
4" (TYP.)

CONCRETE SLABS

Harold J. Peterfeso
FRONT VIEW SECTION A
11-10-05
DATE
PORTATION.
27695
GROUND LINE
NOTE:
#6 x 11 - 0" (TYP.)
O T
DOOR OPENING
NE E R
I H N
F O R P

1 - 0" DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN 3" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" ANCHOR PIN ~ 1/2" x 9" STEEL WELDED TO REINFORCEMENT PLATE 3" 5" 1

1 - 0" REINFORCEMENT PLATE ~ 5" x CHANNEL WIDTH x 1/4" W/ 1/2" x 9" ANCHOR PIN 1/2" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" C5 x 9 DOOR FRAME W/ 1/2" x 1 1/2" DOOR STOP 5" 1 1 1/2" DOORSTOP
9"
DOOR FRAMES MAY VARY TO MATCH WALL THICKNESS
16 GAGE STEEL DOOR FRAME
4 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL HINGE (TYP.)
WELD FRAME TOGETHER INSIDE OF CHANNEL. GRIND SMOOTH EXTERIOR SURFACES BEFORE PAINTING IF NEEDED.
1 - 2 1/4"
1 - 0"
2 - 0"
2 - 1 3/4"
6" x 16" S.S. PLATE W/ 10" x 1" DIAM. S.S. HANDLE
2 - 0"
1 - 0"
1 1/2" DOORSTOP WELD ANCHOR PIN TO HINGE REINFORCEMENT PLATE (TYP.) 7 - 0" 6 - 8"
1/2" x 9" ANCHOR PIN
6 - 8"
1 - 2 1/4"
ANCHOR REINFORCEMENT PLATE (TYP.) ~ (CHANNEL WIDTH) x 5" x 1/4", WELDED TO FRAME
HINGE & ANCHOR PIN REINFORCEMENT PLATE (TYP.) ~ (CHANNEL WIDTH) x 12" x 1/4", WELDED TO FRAME
GROUND LINE
GROUND LINE
1/2" TIE BAR
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
1/2" TIE BAR
FRONT VIEW NOTE
SIDE VIEW
All exposed metal surfaces shall be painted with paint conforming to the requirements in the Standard Specifications, Section 9.
S T A
E T
NOISE BARRIER WALL ACCESS DOOR & FRAME

ISOMETRIC VIEW
SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS
ISOMETRIC VIEW
ALTERNATE ACCESS DOOR AND FRAME FOR CAST-IN-PLACE AND PRECAST WALLS
ACCESS DOOR AND FRAME FOR CAST-IN-PLACE AND PRECAST WALLS
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
B I
O T
NE E R
7 - 0"
2 - 0"
4"
2 - 1 3/4"
4"
2 - 0"
I H N
F O R P

3" DRAWN BY: ADAM COCHRAN 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 3" 5" 1/2" 5" x CHANNEL WIDTH x 1/4" REINFORCEMENT PLATE W/ 1/2" HOLE FOR ANCHOR PIN

1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 5" 1 1/2" DOORSTOP
1 - 2 1/4"
1 - 0"
16 GAGE STEEL DOOR FRAME
1 - 0"
C5 x 9 DOOR FRAME W/ 1/2" x 1 1/2" DOOR STOP 4 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL HINGE (TYP.)
WELD FRAME TOGETHER INSIDE OF CHANNEL. GRIND SMOOTH EXTERIOR SURFACES BEFORE PAINTING IF NEEDED.
2 - 0"
HINGE & ANCHOR PIN REINFORCEMENT PLATE (TYP.) ~ (CHANNEL WIDTH) x 12" x 1/4", WELDED TO FRAME 2 - 0"
2 - 1 3/4"
1 1/2" DOORSTOP WELD ANCHOR PIN TO HINGE REINFORCEMENT PLATE (TYP.)
7 - 0"
6 - 8"
7 - 0"
6 - 8"
ANCHOR BOLT HOLES ~ 1/2" DIAM.
1 - 2 1/4"
5" x CHANNEL WIDTH x 1/4" REINFORCMENT PLATE FOR ANCHORS (TYP.) WELDED TO FRAME
GROUND LINE
GROUND LINE 4"
1/2" TIE BAR 1/2" TIE BAR
SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
S T A
E T
SEE COUNTERSINK DETAIL
16 GAGE STEEL DOOR FRAME W/ DOORSTOP
1/2" DIAM. HOLE
1/4"
3/4" 1/2" 1 1/2"
NOISE BARRIER WALL ACCESS DOOR & FRAME

SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS
ISOMETRIC VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
COUNTERSINK DETAIL ALTERNATE ACCESS DOOR AND FRAME FOR PRECAST WALLS ONLY ACCESS DOOR AND FRAME FOR PRECAST WALLS ONLY
Harold J. Peterfeso
11-10-05
DATE
NOTE:
REINFORCEMENT PLATE
PORTATION.
27695
B I
O T
NE E R
2 - 0"
4"
2 - 1 3/4"
2 - 0"
I H N
F O R P

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD APPROXIMATE FINAL BATTER FOR FACE OF GEOSYNTHETIC LAYERS 1

NOTES 1. For the values of "L," see sheet 3, and for the values of "S v ," see sheet 2. 2. For Geosynthetic Wall Construction Sequence, see sheet 4.
48 TOP GEOSYNTHETIC LAYER
3. "A s" is the peak seismic ground acceleration as defined and applied in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Articles 3.10.4.1 and 11.6.5. 4. The long-term geosynthetic design strength "T " shall be determined in accordance al with WSDOT Standard Practice T925. See Qualified Products List (QPL), Appendix "D," for products in which "T " has been determined. "H" and "Z" are graphically defined. al "Z" is the distance from the top of the wall to a geosynthetic layer, and is used to determine "T " for that layer. al 5. "L," the geosynthetic reinforcement length behind the wall face, is graphically defined. The maximum factored bearing stress acts in the vertical direction at the base of the wall. The load factors used are as specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications for each specified limit state.
GRAVEL BORROW BACKFILL BARRIER ON WALL ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN D-3.15, or D-3.16
GEOSYNTHETIC LAYERS (TYP.)
FINISHED GRADE AFTER CONSTRUCTION OF WALL FACING W AL L HEI GHT " H"
6. Fascia or facing type shall be selected from Standard Plans D-3.10 orD-3.11 and called out in the Contract Plans. Region is to coordinate with the Geotechnical Services and Bridge & Structures offices.
3 1
4 - 0" MIN. (TYP.) WALL FACING (TYP.) ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN D-3.10 or D-3.11 H GEOSYNTHETIC (TYP.) Z
LINE (TYP.)
GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCEMENT LENGTH AND LIMITS OF STRUCTURE EXCAVATION CLASS B INCL. HAUL, WALL BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
SECTION DETAIL KEY NOTES

1 GEOTEXTILE FOR UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE CLASS A, MODERATE SURVIVABILITY (ONLY NEEDED IF A GEOGRID IS USED FOR GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCEMENT) 2 1 - 0" MIN. GEOTEXTILE OVERLAP, TOP & BOTTOM < L
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL WITH 2 FT TRAFFIC SURCHARGE

TYPE 1, A < 0.51g s_ TYPE 5, A < 0.20g s_
FINISHED GROUND
L
THE ENGI NEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBL I CATI ON, I S KEPT ON DOCUM ENT FI L E AT THE W ASHI NGTON STATE DEPARTM ENT OF TRANSBUT AN EL ECTRONI C DUPL I CATE. THE ORI GI NAL , SI GNED BY PORTATI ON. A COPY M AY BE OBTAI NED UPON REQUEST.
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL
< 1 0 FT.
Sm a x .
2 1
S T A
2 1
TYPE 7, A < 0.20g s_
E T
25339
PERMANENT GEOSYNTHETIC WALL STANDARD PLAN D-3

SHEET 1 OF 4 SHEETS L L APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

GEOSYNTHETIC WALL
TYPE 2, A < 0.51g s_ TYPE 6, A < 0.20g s_
06-02-11
DATE
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL
TYPE 4, A < 0.51g s_ TYPE 8, A < 0.20g s_
TYPE 3, A < 0.51g s_
. A L YM L N E O A W S F H O I N
N O T
NE E R
1 0 %
2 -0 "M I N.
F O R P

PERMANENT GEOSYNTHETIC WALL - GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCEMENT DESIGN

WALL GEOMETRY AND REINFORCEMENT LAYER LOCATION
DEPTH BELOW GEOSYNTHETIC TOTAL WALL WALL TOP AT REINFORCEMENT VERTICAL HEIGHT, H (ft) FACE, z (ft) SPACING, S v (ft)
UP TO 5 5 5 _ 10 5 < H < 0 to 10 0 to 10 _ 15 10 < H < 0 to 10 10.1 to 15 0 to 10 10.1 to 15 _ 20 15 < H < 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 _ 25 20 < H < 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 20.1 to 25 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 20.1 to 25 _ 30 25 < H < 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 20.1 to 30 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 20.1 to 30 _ 35 30 < H < 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 20.1 to 30 30.1 to 35 0 to 10 10.1 to 20 20.1 to 30 30.1 to 35 1.0 1.25 1.0 1.25 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
LONG-TERM GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCEMENT STRENGTH REQUIRED,al T (lbs/ft)*

GEOSYNTHETIC WALL TYPE 1
505 631 530 660 580 760 730 950 584 992 730 1240 580 1050 1220 730 1310 1530 580 1050 1460 730 1310 1820 580 1050 1510 1690 730 1310 1890 2110
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL TYPES 2 AND 4

240 300 500 630 620 780 770 980 672 1072 840 1340 720 1180 1350 900 1470 1690 780 1240 1640 980 1550 2050 830 1290 1740 1920 1040 1610 2180 2400

220 280 470 590 570 740 710 920 616 1000 770 1250 660 1100 1270 820 1380 1590 700 1140 1540 870 1430 1920 740 1180 1630 1800 925 1480 2040 2250

505 631 528 660 584 760 730 950 584 992 730 1240 584 1048 1224 730 1310 1530 584 1048 1456 730 1310 1820 584 1048 1512 1688 730 1310 1890 2110
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL TYPES 6 AND 8

240 300 487 609 586 760 732 950 626 1032 783 1290 667 1128 1304 834 1410 1630 708 1168 1576 885 1460 1970 749 1216 1680 1848 936 1520 2100 2310

220 275 460 575 545 719 681 899 572 976 715 1220 599 1064 1240 749 1330 1550 626 1088 1496 782 1360 1870 653 1120 1584 1752
816
1980 2190
NOTE: See Note 4, sheet 1.
S T A
E T
25339

Pasco Bakotich III

06-02-11
DATE
N O T
1400
NE E R
DOCUM ENT
F O R P

PERMANENT GEOSYNTHETIC WALL - EXTERNAL STABILITY DESIGN

_ < 0.51g) (INCLUDES SEISMIC DESIGN FOR LARGE EARTHQUAKE:sA
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL TYPE 1 TOTAL WALL HEIGHT, H (ft)

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL TYPE 2 MAX. FACTORED BEARING STRESS (psf) L (FT) SERVICE 1
1057 1295 1469 1643 1817 2069 2165 2339 2513 2687 2800 3035 3209 3383 3557 3811 3905 4079 4253 4427 4629 4775 4949 5123 5297 5446 5645 5819 5993 6167 6320
852 1028 1203 1378 1553 1738 1903 2078 2253 2428 2607 2778 2953 3128 3303 3476 3653 3828 4003 4178 4375 4528 4703 4878 5053 5244 5403 5578 5753 5928 6112
975 1171 1366 1561 1756 1951 2146 2341 2536 2731 2924 3121 3316 3511 3706 3899 4096 4291 4486 4681 4873 5071 5266 5461 5656 5848 6046 6241 6436 6631 6823
MAX. FACTORED BEARING STRESS (psf) L (FT) SERVICE 1

847 1081 1248 1415 1582 1768 1916 2083 2250 2417 2650 2751 2918 3085 3252 3412 3586 3753 3920 4087 4268 4421 4588 4755 4922 5123 5256 5423 5590 5757 5863
STRENGTH 1
1220 1566 1800 2034 2268 2531 2736 2970 3204 3438 3783 3906 4140 4374 4608 4835 5076 5310 5544 5778 6038 6246 6480 6714 6948 7238 7416 7650 7884 8118 8251
EXTREME EVENT l
1011 1388 1685 1982 2279 2609 2873 3170 3467 3764 4198 4358 4655 4952 5249 5424 5843 6140 6437 6734 7040 7328 7625 7922 8219 8698 8813 9110 9407 9704 9874
EXTREME EVENT ll
1192 1949 2165 2381 2597 3278 3029 3245 3461 3677 4176 4238 4325 4541 4757 4927 5189 5405 5621 5837 6027 6269 6485 6701 6917 7148 7349 7565 7781 7997 8080
STRENGTH 1
1535 1862 2099 2336 2573 2968 3047 3284 3521 3758 3872 4232 4469 4706 4943 5286 5417 5654 5891 6128 6404 6602 6839 7076 7313 7523 7787 8024 8261 8498 8737
EXTREME EVENT l
1391 1671 1981 2291 2601 3006 3221 3531 3841 4151 4374 4771 5081 5391 5701 5975 6321 6631 6941 7251 7505 7871 8181 8491 8801 9093 9421 9731 10041 10351 10766
STRENGTH 1
1168 1415 1657 1899 2141 2394 2625 2867 3109 3351 3590 3835 4077 4319 4561 4787 5045 5287 5529 5771 6032 6255 6497 6739 6981 7228 7465 7707 7949 8191 8425
EXTREME EVENT l
1284 1598 1890 2182 2474 2811 3058 3350 3642 3934 4216 4518 4810 5102 5394 5621 5978 6270 6562 6854 7230 7438 7730 8022 8314 8632 8898 9190 9482 9774 10035
STRENGTH 1
1343 1613 1882 2151 2420 2685 2958 3227 3496 3765 4029 4303 4572 4841 5110 5371 5648 5917 6186 6455 6716 6993 7262 7531 7800 8057 8338 8607 8876 9145 9403
EXTREME EVENT l
1473 1756 2058 2360 2662 2947 3266 3568 3870 4172 4494 4776 5380 5682 5965 6286 6588 6890 7192 7519 7796 8098 8400 8702 8988 9306 9608 9910 10212 10544 5078
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 13 14 15 15 16 16 17 18 18 19 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25
7 8 9 10 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 21 21 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 31 32 32
6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
7 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 31 32 33 35 36 37 38 40 41 42 44 45 46
NOTE: See General Note 5, sheet 1.
PERMANENT GEOSYNTHETIC WALL - EXTERNAL STABILITY DESIGN

(INCLUDES SEISMIC DESIGN FOR LARGE EARTHQUAKE:sA_< 0.20g) GEOSYNTHETIC WALL TYPE 5 TOTAL WALL HEIGHT, H (ft)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1057 1358 1569 1780 1991 2266 2413 2624 2835 3046 3245 3468 3679 3890 4101 4326 4523 4734 4945 5156 5417 5578 5789 6000 6211 6577 6633 6844 7055 7266 7311
852 1107 1302 1497 1692 1924 2082 2277 2472 2667 2886 3057 3252 3447 3642 3848 4032 4227 4422 4617 4810 5007 5202 5397 5592 5773 5982 6177 6372 6567 6735
977 1278 1504 1730 1956 2228 2408 2634 2860 3086 3342 3538 3764 3990 4216 4456 4668 4894 5120 5346 5570 5798 6024 6250 6476 6684 6928 7154 7380 7606 7798
MAX. FACTORED BEARING STRESS (psf) L (FT) SERVICE 1

847 1105 1273 1441 1609 1768 1945 2113 2281 2449 2711 2785 2953 3121 3289 3522 3625 3793 3961 4129 4325 4465 4633 4801 4969 5123 5305 5473 5641 5809 5918
STRENGTH 1
1220 1607 1843 2079 2315 2531 2787 3023 3259 3495 3884 3967 4203 4439 4675 5015 5147 5383 5619 5855 6131 6327 6563 6799 7035 7238 7507 7743 7979 8215 8341
EXTEME EVENT l
992 1320 1553 1786 2019 2229 2485 2718 2951 3184 3516 3650 3883 4116 4349 4642 4815 5048 5281 5514 5763 5980 6213 6446 6679 6881 7145 7378 7611 7844 7998
EXTEME EVENT ll
1192 1688 2090 2463 2808 3278 3424 3699 3954 4190 4396 4616 4809 4990 5163 5201 5489 5646 5801 5955 6146 6272 6438 6611 6793 7148 7192 7412 7649 7904 8177
STRENGTH 1
1535 1928 2226 2527 2831 3372 3445 3755 4066 4378 4598 5004 5316 5628 5939 6125 6557 6863 7166 7466 7683 8057 8346 8631 8912 9408 9457 9720 9978 10229 10373
EXTREME EVENT l
1294 1574 1889 2211 2540 2776 3213 3555 3901 4249 4737 4948 5297 5644 5990 6321 6672 7006 7335 7657 7891 8280 8578 8866 9144 9515 9664 9905 10131 10343 10550
STRENGTH 1
1168 1536 1809 2082 2355 2692 2901 3174 3447 3720 4037 4266 4539 4812 5085 5383 5631 5904 6177 6450 6729 6996 7269 7542 7815 8075 8361 8634 8907 9180 9421
EXTREME EVENT l
1155 1560 1842 2124 2406 2773 2970 3252 3534 3816 4159 4380 4662 4944 5226 5546 5790 6072 6354 6636 6932 7200 7482 7764 8046 8319 8610 8892 9174 9456 9705
STRENGTH 1
1349 1786 2105 2424 2743 3145 3381 3700 4019 4338 4718 4976 5295 5614 5933 6291 6571 6890 7209 7528 7863 8166 8485 8804 9123 9436 9761 10080 10399 10718 11009
EXTREME EVENT l
FI L E AT THE W ASHI NGTON STATE DEPARTM ENT OF TRANSBUT AN EL ECTRONI C DUPL I CATE. THE ORI GI NAL , SI GNED BY
11 11 11 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 19 20 21 21 22 23 24 25 25
6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 19 20 21 21 22 23 24 25 25
6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 19 20 21 21 22 23 24 25 25
6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 19 20 21 21 22 23 24 25 25
1326 1868 2214 2906 3381 3598 3944 4636 5072 5328 5674 6020 6366 6762 7058 7404 7750 8096 8453 8788 9134 9480 9826 10143 10518 10864 11210 11556 11834 APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION 4290 2560
S T A
E T
25339

SHEET 3 OF 4 SHEETS
Pasco Bakotich III

06-02-11
DATE
NOTE: See Note 5, sheet 1.
N O T
NE E R
DOCUM ENT
F O R P


NOTES 1. Use of the Temporary Form System, as detailed in this plan, is optional.
SEE TEMPORARY FORM SYSTEM DETAIL, THIS SHEET
1. SET FORM ON COMPLETED LIFT.
2. To help maintain the wall face batter, leave the form system for the preceding layer in place while constructing the next layer. When the upper layer is complete, remove the form system from the lower layer and reset it for the next layer. See below.
TAIL
GEOTEXTILE
GEOSYNTHETIC
TAIL
2. UNROLL GEOSYNTHETIC AND POSITION IT SO THAT A 4 - 0" WIDE "TAIL" DRAPES OVER THE FORM. IF A GEOGRID IS USED FOR THE GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCEMENT, POSITION GEOTEXTILE TO PREVENT BACKFILL FROM
SPILLING THROUGH GEOGRID OPENINGS.
BACKFILL
3. PLACE THE BACKFILL UNTIL THE BACKFILL IS UP TO HALF OF THE REQUIRED VERTICAL GEOSYNTHETIC LAYER SPACING.
AL ONG W AL L FACE
WINDROW 4 TO 6 CENTERS
1" THICK PLYWOOD OR TIMBER PLANKS ~ CONTINUOUS
4. PLACE A WINDROW TO SLIGHTLY GREATER THAN FULL LIFT HEIGHT AGAINST THE FORM.
1" I.D. PIPE 3/8" STEEL STRAP 7/8" DIAM. STEEL PIN 3 " 5. PLACE THE GEOSYNTHETIC "TAIL" OVER THE WINDROW AND LOCK INTO PLACE WITH BACKFILL.
(WELDED TO STEEL STRAP)
2 - 7"
6. COMPLETE BACKFILLING UNTIL THE COMPACTED BACKFILL LAYER THICKNESS IS EQUAL TO THE REQUIRED VERTICAL GEOSYNTHETIC LAYER SPACING.
PLAN
S T A
E T
1"
2 "
Sv
25339
3/8" STEEL STRAP 7. THE FORM MAY BE LEFT IN PLACE WHILE CONSTRUCTING THE NEXT LAYER (SEE NOTE 2) OTHERWISE, RESET THE FORM AND REPEAT THE SEQUENCE. WOOD WEDGE TO SUPPORT AND ALIGN STRAP
GEOSYNTHETIC WALL CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

(SECTION VIEW)
ELEVATION
TEMPORARY FORM SYSTEM DETAIL

Pasco Bakotich III
06-02-11
DATE
N O T
1"
4 "
NE E R
F O R P

MOMENT SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINT SPACING @ 120 - 0" MAX. DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL

KEY NOTES
1 BARRIER GEOMETRY REFERENCE LINE 1 THE BARRIER GEOMETRY REFERENCE LINE (B.G.R.L.) IS PERPENDICULAR TO THE TRANSVERSE ROADWAY SLOPE (T.R.S.). FOR SUPERELEVATED TRANSVERSE ROADWAY SLOPES, THE B.G.R.L. ON THE LOW SIDE OF THE ROADWAY SHALL BE PERPENDICULAR TO THE T.R.S. UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 8% SUPERELEVATION; THE B.G.R.L. ON THE HIGH SIDE SHALL ALWAYS BE PERPENDICULAR TO THE T.R.S. JUNCTION BOX & PULL BOX ~ 8" 8" 1 - 6" NEMA 4 X S.S. (TYP.). JUNCTION BOX CAN BE RECESSED 1/2" MAX. SEE SPECIAL PROVISIONS. SIZE CONDUIT PER WIRING SCHEDULE, SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS. 1 1/2" MIN. CONCRETE COVER ~ INCREASE THE COVER AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AND FINISH. CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE THE NOTCH, DETAILED BY THESE DIMENSIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS, IS REQUIRED ONLY IF THE BARRIER IS ON WALL FACING. RUSTICATION ~ SEE RUSTICATION DETAIL FOR STRUCTURAL DETAILS BELOW THE MATCH LINE, SEE STANDARD PLANS D-3, D-3.10 OR D-3.11. 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT WITH PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER INSTALL BARRIER DUMMY JOINTS ON TRAFFIC SIDE ONLY WHEN ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES ARE SPECIFIED.
EXP. JOINT BARRIER EXPANSION JOINT (SEE TABLE) BARRIER DUMMY JOINT SPACING 4 - 0" MIN. TO 8 - 0" MAX. O.C. BARRIER DUMMY JOINT SPACING @ 8 - 0" O.C.
BARRIER EXPANSION JOINT SPACING (SEE TABLE) FINISHED HMA ROADWAY GRADE AT CURB LINE = PIVOT POINT FOR BARRIER GEOMETRY
BARRIER DUMMY JOINT SPACING @ 8 - 0" O.C.
SINGLE SLOPE BARRIER
FINISHED GRADE
TRANSVERSE ROADWAY SLOPE
1-0"
TERMINUS
MIN.
TRAFFIC SIDE
DUMMY JOINT (TYP.) (SEE DETAIL) 9
EXPANSION JOINT (TYP.)
MOMENT SLAB CONST. JOINT
2" CLR. 5 #5 @ 8" O.C.
PLAN VIEW
TYPICAL SECTION
SHOWN AT GRADE 1 2~ 1 #6 CONT. W/ 3 - 8" MIN. SPL. 9 1/4" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 1/4" 6 1/2" 6 7
2~ 2~ 8 #4
1 #6
SEE EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL ON STANDARD PLAN D-3.17 4"
10"
FOUR EQUAL SPACES
5 #5
" 1 1/2 R CL .
2 - 10" 2
9 FINISHED HMA ROADWAY GRADE AT CURB LINE = PIVOT POINT FOR BARRIER GEOMETRY
1 1/2" CLR.
5 - 0"
4 #4
2 LAYERS 15 LB. TAR PAPER
HMA
ROADWAY BASECOURSE
SLAB LENGTH MIN MAX -80 - 0" 60 - 0" 40 - 0"
SLAB BASE ON WALL 7 - 0" 8 - 0" 9 - 0" AT GRADE 5 - 0" 6 - 0" 7 - 0"
BARRIER EXPANSION JOINT SPACING MIN 80 - 0" 60 - 0" 40 - 0" MAX 120 - 0" 80 - 0" 60 - 0"
4 CURB LINE
MIN.
10"
6 #6
80 - 1" 60 - 1"
1 - 4"
SLAB
SLAB
20 ~ 8 #4 W/ 2 - 0" MIN. SPL. (TYP.) 6" MIN. 1 - 0" MAX.
CLR.
6 3"
40 - 1" 0
CONTACT BRIDGE OFFICE
6~
8 #4
4 #4 @ 1 - 4" O.C. 6 #6
E
S T A
7 #5 ~ @ 8" O.C.
3 #4 ~ 2" CLR. FROM TOP (SEE STD. PLAN D-3.10 OR D-3.11 ) 2 #4 (SEE STD. PLAN D-3.10 OR D-3.11 ) FACE OF CAST-IN-PLACE FASCIA 5" 6"
E T
ELEVATION
5 1- 0"

SLAB BASE (SEE TABLE) ALL REINFORCING BARS SHOWN ON THIS PLAN SHALL BE AASHTO M 31 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT
E
6 1/2" 11 1/4"
TYPICAL SECTION
+ HMA LIFT (10" MIN.) 3 - 9" + HMA LIFT (10" MIN.) SHOWN ON WALL + HMA LIFT (10" MIN.)
2 - 6 1/2"
= EPOXY COATED
21 4
1 - 8"
SLAB BASE - 4" (SEE TABLE)
21 4
3/4"
3/4" 1"
1/8"
1/4"
1"
PERMANENT GEOSYNTHETIC WALL SINGLE SLOPE BARRIER STANDARD PLAN D-3.15-00

11"
4" 1 - 2 1/4" 1 - 0"
3/4"
1/8"
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
7 #5
4 #4
5 #5
6 #6
DUMMY JOINT DETAIL
RUSTICATION DETAIL
PORTATION.
N I U G R ES T A N LE I G S N I E O N L A
25400
U C
E R
GEOSYNTHETIC
NOTE:
MATCH LINE
MATCH LINE
HK A S P E U G U A W S F H O I N
N O T
6~
8 #4
3" MIN. CLR.
1" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE
7 #5 @ 8" O.C.
FILL MATERIAL SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE IN CONTRACT
NE E R
EXP. JONIT
JOINT SCHEME
(REINF. STEEL NOT SHOWN)
MOMENT SLAB
4 5
TRAFFIC BARRIER
TRAFFIC BARRIER
10"
F O R P
R T S

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL MOMENT SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINT SPACING @ 120 - 0" MAX.

KEY NOTES
1 BARRIER GEOMETRY REFERENCE LINE 1 THE BARRIER GEOMETRY REFERENCE LINE (B.G.R.L.) IS PERPENDICULAR TO THE TRANSVERSE ROADWAY SLOPE (T.R.S.). FOR SUPERELEVATED TRANSVERSE ROADWAY SLOPES, THE B.G.R.L. ON THE LOW SIDE OF THE ROADWAY SHALL BE PERPENDICULAR TO THE T.R.S. UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 8% SUPERELEVATION; THE B.G.R.L. ON THE HIGH SIDE SHALL ALWAYS BE PERPENDICULAR TO THE T.R.S. JUNCTION BOX & PULL BOX ~ 8" 8" 1 - 6" NEMA 4 X S.S. (TYP.). JUNCTION BOX CAN BE RECESSED 1/2" MAX. SEE SPECIAL PROVISIONS. SIZE CONDUIT PER WIRING SCHEDULE, SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS. 1 1/2" MIN. CONCRETE COVER ~ INCREASE THE COVER AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AND FINISH. CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE THE NOTCH, DETAILED BY THESE DIMENSIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS, IS REQUIRED ONLY IF THE BARRIER IS ON WALL FACING. RUSTICATION ~ SEE RUSTICATION DETAIL FOR STRUCTURAL DETAILS BELOW THE MATCH LINE, SEE STANDARD PLANS D-3, D-3.10 OR D-3.11. 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT WITH PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER INSTALL BARRIER DUMMY JOINTS ON TRAFFIC SIDE ONLY WHEN ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES ARE SPECIFIED.
EXP. JNT. BARRIER EXPANSION JOINT (SEE TABLE) BARRIER DUMMY JOINT SPACING 4 - 0" MIN. TO 8 - 0" MAX. O.C. BARRIER DUMMY JOINT SPACING @ 8 - 0" O.C.
BARRIER EXPANSION JOINT SPACING (SEE TABLE) FINISHED HMA ROADWAY GRADE AT CURB LINE = PIVOT POINT FOR BARRIER GEOMETRY (TYP.)
BARRIER DUMMY JOINT SPACING @ 8 - 0" O.C.
F-SHAPE BARRIER
FINISHED GRADE
TRANSVERSE ROADWAY SLOPE
1-0"
TERMINUS
MIN.
TRAFFIC SIDE DUMMY JOINT (TYP.) (SEE DETAIL) 9 EXPANSION JOINT (TYP.) MOMENT SLAB CONST. JOINT MOMENT SLAB 4 5
PLAN VIEW EXP. JONIT
TYPICAL SECTION
SHOWN AT GRADE 2~ 1 #6 CONT. W/ 3 - 8" MIN. SPL. 9 3/4" 2 3/8" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 7 1/4" 1 1/4" 7
2" CLR. 5 #5 @ 8" O.C.
8 2~ 2~ 8 #4 4" 1 #6 SEE EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL ON STANDARD PLAN D-3.17
1 1/2"
8 1 - 10" 9 2 - 8"
5 #5
CLR.
2 1 1/2" CLR. 3 10" R 7 #5 2" R 4 #4
TRAFFIC BARRIER
10"
TOP OF ROADWAY BARRIER EXPANSION JOINT SPACING MIN 80 - 0" 60 - 0" 40 - 0" MAX 120 - 0" 80 - 0" 60 - 0"
4 - 10"
10"
2 LAYERS 15 LB. TAR PAPER
HMA
ROADWAY BASECOURSE
7"
SLAB LENGTH MIN MAX -80 - 0" 60 - 0" 40 - 0"
SLAB BASE ON WALL 7 - 0" 8 - 0" 9 - 0" AT GRADE 5 - 0" 6 - 0" 7 - 0"
6 #6
10"
80 - 1" 60 - 1"
1 - 4"
CURB LINE
SLAB
SLAB
20 ~ 9 #4 W/ 2 - 0" MIN. SPL. (TYP.) 6" MIN. 1 - 0" MAX.
CLR.
6 3"
40 - 1" 0
CONTACT BRIDGE OFFICE
5 1" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE 7 6~ 6~ 8 #4 8 #4 3" MIN. CLR. 4 MATCH LINE
8 #5 @ 8" O.C.
FILL MATERIAL SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE IN CONTRACT
3 #4 ~ 2" CLR. FROM TOP (SEE STD. PLAN D-3.10 OR D-3.11 ) 2 #4 (SEE STD. PLAN D-3.10 OR D-3-11 ) 5" 6"
4 #4 @ 1 - 4" O.C. 6 #6
E,
S T A
E T
7 #5 ~ @ 8" O.C.
ELEVATION

ALL REINFORCING BARS SHOWN ON THIS PLAN SHALL BE AASHTO M 31 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT
E
SLAB BASE (SEE MOMENT SLAB TABLE)
3 - 7" + HMA LIFT (10" MIN.)
+ HMA LIFT (10" MIN.)
(1" + HMA LIFT OF 10" MIN.)
SHOWN ON WALL
+ HMA LIFT (10" MIN.)
= EPOXY COATED
97^ 2 - 5"
1 - 4"
3/4"
3/4" 1"
1/8"
10
11" MIN.
1/4"
1"
PERMANENT GEOSYNTHETIC WALL F - SHAPE BARRIER STANDARD PLAN D-3.16-00

SLAB BASE - 4" (SEE TABLE)
11"
3/4"
4"
1 - 2" 1 - 0"
1/8"
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
8 #5
4 #4
5 #5
6 #6
7 #5
DUMMY JOINT DETAIL
RUSTICATION DETAIL
NOTE:
6 3/4"
1 - 2"
TYPICAL SECTION
PORTATION.
25400
U C
E R
5 1- 0"
NE E R
FACE OF CAST-IN-PLACE FASCIA
GEOSYNTHETIC
N O T
MATCH LINE
JOINT SCHEME
(REINF. STEEL NOT SHOWN)
FOUR EQUAL SPACES
TRAFFIC BARRIER
3"
MIN.
F O R P
R T S
2 -1 /4 "

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BARRIER PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER

NOTE
EXPANSION JOINT
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINT
1.
9" 4" PVC CONDUIT #9 ~ 2 - 3" LONG 5 1/4" 4"
Ensure that no concrete enters the PVC conduit during concrete placement.
1 1/4" PVC CONDUIT (TYP.) TO BE INSTALLED PARALLEL TO GRADE AND PARALLEL TO FACE OF BARRIER
16
20
#4 8"
20
PVC CAP (TYP.) #4
21
#4
18
21
#4
22 22
#4
CURB LINE
#4 CONNECTION BLOCKOUT IN PRECAST BARRIER SEE STANDARD PLAN C-13 CURB LINE
SECTION
FOR DETAILS NOT SHOWN ~ SEE TYPICAL SECTION STANDARD PLAN D-3.15 OR D-3.16
EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL

1/2" MIN. EXPANSION GAP BETWEEN BAR AND CAP FOR CAST-IN-PLACE TO PRECAST BARRIER CONNECTION
G
1 1/4" PVC CONDUIT (TYP.) TO BE INSTALLED PARALLEL TO GRADE AND PARALLEL TO FACE OF BARRIER
EXPANSION JOINT
1/2" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER IN EXPANSION JOINT
16
E
#9 ~ 3 - 0" LONG 4 1/2"
PVC CONDUIT
4"
PVC CAP (TYP.)
20
#4
10"
S T A
E T
21
#4
21
#4
22
#4
CURB LINE
22
#4
CURB LINE 1/2" MIN. EXPANSION GAP BETWEEN BAR AND CAP
SECTION

ALL REINFORCING BARS SHOWN ON THIS PLAN SHALL BE AASHTO M 31 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. L
20 21
FOR DETAILS NOT SHOWN ~ SEE TYPICAL SECTION STANDARD PLAN D-3.15 OR D-3.16
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT

E
EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL
PERMANENT GEOSYNTHETIC WALL EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS STANDARD PLAN D-3.17-00

= EPOXY COATED
#4 L = 7" #4 L = 8 7/8" #4 L = 10 3/4"
8"
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
22
PORTATION.
25400
U C
NOTE:
20
#4
N O T
NE E R
E R
#6 ~ 1 - 6" LONG
8" 10"
F O R P
R T S

NOTES
-1
\
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-
1. SEE CONTRACT FOR BACKFILL LIMITS AND GEOTUCTILE CLASS.
CONSTRUCTION GEDTUCTllE FOR UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE, MODERATE SURVIVABILITY.
FOR WALLS
I
GRAVEL BACKFILL m R DRAINS UNDERDRAIN PlPE
UNDERDRAIN PIPE
GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS.
CONDITION A OR CONDITION B WlTH GEOTEXTILE
1_1'-6"_1
MIN
CONDITION A
GRAVEL BACKFILL FORWALLS
GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS
b b
-, ,
..
b b
.. . . .. . . .
.
UNDERDRAIN PlPE
b . .
ALTERNATE DETAIL
TYPICAL FOR CONSTRUCTIONWlTH SHORING.
BACKFILL AND DRAINAGE FOR RETAINING WALLS STANDARD PLAN D-4
MIN
CONDITION B
NOTE' THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENTBUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE THE ORIGINAk SIGNED BY THEENGINEER ANOAFFROLED FOR WBUCATION, IS KEPT ONFILE ATTHE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENTOF TRANSPORTATION. A COPY MAYBE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
10/9B DATE
REMOVED GURADRAIL. CURB & METAL CRIB WALLS. RMSION
MT
1241/98
DATE
WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENTOF TRANSPORTATION OLYMPIA. WASHINGTON

Double loop
it
Single loop
per plans
Height
3 or
it
B n it A
Double loop
U A
it
Single loop
"
it
LACING DETAIL
W
3
id
th
O
ll
O
3
a er
it
Six independent wires encompassed
Unit A - 2 cell gabion = 6 Unit B - 3 cell gabion = 9 Unit C - 4 cell gabion = 12
FASTENING ADJACENT BASKETS
TYPICAL GABION
TWISTED FABRIC
Three vertical and 1/3H two horizontal wires encompassed
S T A
1 1 1
1/3H
WELDED FABRIC
CROSS CONNECTING WIRE

1 1 1 1 1 1
PLACMENT, INTERIOR CELLS OF FRONT GABIONS
GABIONS
CROSS-CONNECTING WIRE PLACEMENT, END CELLS
STANDARD PLAN D-6

6/19/98
DATE
PORTATION.
E E GI R E E S T I S G S N I O N LE A
25339
NOTE:
1/3H
. A L YM L N E A W O S F H O I N E G
O T
N E E R
ll
en
th
1/3H
1/3H
1/3H
1/3H
1/3H
1/3H
NN
F O R P

NOTES 1. All numerals are approx. 3 1/4" wide except numeral "1" which is approx. 5/8" wide. Spacing between the numeral "1" and any other numeral is 1". Spacing between all other numerals is 3/4". Traffic Barrier Connections between the bridge and the approaching roadway vary and may consist of concrete barrier extensions. Install the Date Numerals on the traffic barrier of the bridge itself.
DATE LOCATION ~ SEE DETAIL
2.
3.
BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER (TYP.)
BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER (TYP.)
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
DATE LOCATION ON TWO-WAY BRIDGES
DATE LOCATION ON ONE-WAY BRIDGES
BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER (TYPE MAY VARY) DATE NUMERALS ~ SEE DETAILS
6 - 2"
BRIDGE END ~ SEE NOTE 3
ALIGN THE NUMERALS PARALLEL TO TOP OF TRAFFIC BARRIER 1/8" (TYP.) 5/8" 1/8" (TYP.)
TOP OF ROADWAY
~ ~ 3 1/4"
3/4"
~ ~ 3 1/4"
3/4"
~ ~ 3 1/4"
3/4"
~ ~ 3 1/4"
ELEVATION VIEW
DATE LOCATION DETAIL

4 1/2" (TYP.) 4 1/2" (TYP.)
1/2"
K E
S T A
E T
TYPICAL DATE NUMERALS TYPICAL SECTION VIEW
NUMERAL "1"
DATE NUMERAL DETAILS
DATE NUMERAL PLACEMENT ON BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER STANDARD PLAN E-1

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
Ken L. Smith
02-21-07
DATE
PORTATION.
31805
NOTE:
O YS R E L M I A W F S H O I N
O T
NE E R
10"
H T N
~ ~
~ ~
F O R P
4x16 Solid bridging over all caps and mid panel points pieces 2x12x16-0" Bulkhead - three

4x16x3-0" splices
EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012 A

5/8 " DIA x1 1/2 " Bolt with square washer 22-0" ACP overlay (see Note 8) Deck plate See Note 7 Service Level 1 Bridge Rail
4x12 S1S Plank deck
4x12 S1S Plank deck
4x12 Blockout 12x14x24-0" Cap S1E On frame trestle bents where H exceeds 20,
3/4 "x22" Drift bolts (TYP)
Spans 15 or 17 17 span shown
4x12 Blockout (TYP) 2x6 Outside stringer to outside stringer; fasten
exceeds 20, outside piles shall be
DECK FRAMING PLAN - SINGLE LANE

4x16 Solid bridging 4x12 Blockout (TYP) 4x16x3-0" Splices
3/8 "x6" lag screw
6-8"
3-4"
3-4"
6-8"
On pile trestle bents where H
C L Roadway and bent
at each end of sway braces.
each stringer with
4x12 S1S plank deck
Sway bracing shall be placed on all frame bents.
13 1/2 "
outside posts shall be battered 2" per foot.
When H is less
than 10, sway braces may be omitted.
3/4 " Bolt with malleable washers
12x12 Posts
battered 2" per foot.
pieces 2x12x26-0"
3x 8 3x R ou gh
ou
gh
3/4 "x12" Dowel
3/4 "x18" Drift bolts
3/4 "x22" Drift bolts (TYP)
Spans 15 or 17 17 span shown
2x6 Outside stringer to outside stringer; fasten each stringer with 3/8 "x6" lag screw
12x12 Blocking
HALF SECTION-PILE BENT
HALF SECTION-FRAME BENT
TYPICAL SECTION-TWO LANE BRIDGE

12-0" TS 3"x6"x1/4" Steel post
DECK FRAMING PLAN - TWO LANE

A
1/2 "x7" Bolt (rail element to rest on 1-10" C Thrie beam L bolt head) 1" DIA bolts 3/4 "x7 1/2 " rod with lockwasher
ACP overlay (see Note 8) 4x12 S1S Plank deck
x8
3/8 " DIA x1" Bolt with 1 3/4 " square washer 1/2 " DIAx5"
3"x3"x1/2" Bearing plate Base plate

Sway bracing shall be placed on all frame bents.
On pile trestles, when H exceeds 10but is less than 20longitudinal braces shall be placed on outside piles on both sides of trestle in every third panel or as required by local
8x8 Filler
4x12 Blockout 10x12x14-0" Cap S1E 3/4 " DIA Bolt with malleable washers
See Note 7
S T A
F EO T
H I N G
On pile trestle bents where H exceeds
15, outside piles shall be battered
When H is less than
at each end of sway braces.
be used. Longitudinal struts and cross braces shall be fastened at each end with 3/4 " DIA bolts and malleable washers.
10, sway braces may be omitted.
points on sway braces
EXPIRES JANUARY 17, 1999
3
g h
3x
3x 8
3x
3x
PILE OR FRAME DETOUR BRIDGE WITH ASPHALT OVERLAY

USE ONLY FOR TEMPORARY BRIDGES
2" per foot.
3/4 "x16" Drift bolts
8x8
Filler
Two - 3x8
3x
3/4 "x12" Dowels
10x10 Sill
On frame trestles, longitudinal bracing shall be placed on outside posts on both sides of trestle in alternate panels or as required by local conditions. When H exceeds 20, two-story Longitudinal struts and 3/4 " DIA bracing shall be placed.
STANDARD PLAN E-2

SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS
3x
8
10x10 Blocking
HALF SECTION-PILE BENT
HALF SECTION-FRAME BENT
cross braces shall be fastened at each end with bolts and malleable washers.
TYPICAL SECTION-SINGLE LANE BRIDGE ELEVATION - FRAME TRESTLE
Brian Ziegler
05-29-98
DATE
NOTE:
intermediate
Boat spikes at
PORTATION.
1/2 "x8"
10x10 Posts
ELEVATION - PILE TRESTLE
10536
NE E R
conditions. When H exceeds 20two-story bracing shall
5-6"
5-6"
outside posts shall be battered 2" per foot
On frame trestle bents where H exceeds 12,
Lag bolts
11 1/2 "
Distribution plate
M .
TL N I Y W M I A W S
N O T
Bulkhead - three
F O R P
EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012 Beam Guardrail Type 10

TS 3"x6"x 1/4 " Steel post (TYP) (Thrie Beam)
NOTES 1. 2. 3.

Dimensions and notations for superstructure are typical for both single lane and two lane bridges. All timber and lumber shall be #2 or better and untreated Douglas fir-larch. All piling shall be untreated Douglas fir and shall be driven to develop a minimum load bearing capacity of 15 tons.
4. 5. 6. 1" DIA bolt with lock washer (TYP) 4x12 S1S Plank deck 7.
Blocking for frame bents shall be proportioned to carry a minimum load of 15 tons per post. All hardware shall be black, ungalvanized. Each deck plank shall be nailed to each stringer with two 7" spikes, number 1 or larger. On 17spans, stringers shall be 6x16 S1E. On 15 spans, stringers shall be 5x16 S1E.
B
8.
Two-lane bridges shall use thirteen lines of stringers, one-lane bridges shall use seven lines of stringers. Overlay thickness must be sufficient to cover bolts.
4"
4x12 Blockout (TYP) ACP overlay (see Note 8) 1-0"
4"
7 1/2 "
1 1/2 " 3/4 " Bolts with 4x16x3-0" Stringer splice 2 1/2 " 3 1/4 " 2 1/2 " malleable washers (TYP) 1-0" (TYP) 16-8" Span, use 4-2" 15-0" Span, use 3-9" C L Post 4-2" Drill and tap C L Post 3/4 " DIA hole 10 UNC through 1 1/4 " 9/16 " DIA Hole (two places)
1 1/2 " 3 1/4 " 1 3/8 " DIA Hole (two places)
1 1/4 "
5 1/2 "
1 1/4 "
SECTION A-A
1 3/8 " DIA Hole (two places) Drill and tap 3/4 " DIA hole 16 UNC through
5"
7"
1 1/2 "
3/8 " Steel plate
1/2 "
4" 1" Steel plate 8"
DISTRIBUTION PLATE DETAIL
Post C L 1/2 "x3"x3" Bearing plate with 1" DIA hole

FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSTHE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT
3/4 " DIA x7 1/2 " bolt AASHTO M 164
BASE PLATE DETAIL
1 1/4 " DIA x8" Rod TS 3"x6"x 1/4 " Steel post Base plate 1/2 "x5" Lag bolt (TYP) TYP Distribution plate 1 1/2 " 4 1/2 " 1 1/2 " 7 1/2 " with lockwasher threaded 2" (TYP)
1"
1-0"
3/4 "
3-9"
1/2 " R 9"
F EO T
H I N G
2"
paving bulkhead (fasten to timber deck with 5/8 " DIA lag bolts at 2-0" centers)
1-6" Deck plate
beveled as required at 7" face of distribution plate
1-0"
4"
3/8 " Steel plate
PILE OR FRAME DETOUR BRIDGE WITH ASPHALT OVERLAY

USE ONLY FOR TEMPORARY BRIDGES
4 1/2 "
5/8 " Steel deck plate 2"
1 1/4 " DIA (TYP) 1 1/2 "
2"
4"
4"
2" 1 1/4 " DIA Hole (TYP)
STANDARD PLAN E-2

BACKING PLATE DETAIL
SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS
1-0"
Brian Ziegler
05-29-98
DATE
SECTION B-B
NOTE:
Deck plate shall be
PORTATION.
4"
5"
10536
4 x "varies", treated timber
M . S T A
N O T
2"
NE E R
F O R P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA PILE TYPE D PERIMETER UNIT WEIGHT AREA MOMENT OF INERTIA
4

NOTE 1 1" PRESTRESSING STRAND (TYP.) 1 1 NOTE 1 1 1 NOTE 1 1 1/2" CLR. TYP. 1" CHAMFER ALL AROUND (TYP.) PRESTRESSING STRAND
RADIUS OF GYRATION
NUMBER OF STRANDS
(in.)
12 SQUARE 14 16 14 16 1/2 OCTAGONAL 18 20 24
(in.)
48.0 56.0 64.0 46.4 54.7 59.6 66.3 79.5
(lbs./ft.)
158 215 281 178 247 295 364 524
(in. 37/64 )
144 196 256 162 226 268 331 477
(in. )
1728 3201 5461 2103 4057 5746 8758 18161
(in.)
3.5 4.0 4.6 3.6 4.2 4.6 5.1 6.2
MINIMUM 4 6 7 5 7 8 9 13
MAXIMUM 7 10 13 8 11 13 16 22 D
SEE SPIRAL TERMINATION DETAIL (TYP.)
OPTIONAL 1/4" 2 1/2" D (O.D.) STEEL DRIVING RING (EITHER END OR BOTH)
1/2" DEEP, 6" LONG, 2" WIDE RECESS, CENTERED ABOUT LIFTING LOOP
SPIRAL REINF. (TYP.)
3 WRAPS OF SPIRAL WITH WELDED LAP SPLICE AT END
ELEVATION
5" @ 1" PITCH 5" @ 1" PITCH
SPIRAL TERMINATION DETAIL
PILE DETAILS
D/2 4"
1" CHAMFER (TYP.) PRESTRESSING STRANDS (TYP.) EQUALLY SPACED
NOTES 1. Place lifting loops at the lifting points shown in the PILE HANDLING DIAGRAM, Standard Plan E-4a, for the case stated in the contract. 2. Spirals shall be spliced either by lapping one full turn and bending the end of the spiral to a 135^ seismic hook, by welding, or by the use of a mechanical connector that develops 125% of the minimum yield strenth of the spiral. Welding shall meet the requirements of Standard Specification 6-02.3(24)E. 3. All prestressing strands are 1/2" or 0.6" diameter ( ), Grade 270, uncoated strands, d ps AASHTO M203, jack to 0.75 Fpu maximum. 4. Strength of concrete shall be 5.0 ksi at release and 7.0 ksi at final. 5. 2 1/2" cover if pile is exposed to salt water.
DUCTILE REGION (NOTE 4)
1 1/2" MIN. COVER SEE NOTE 7
SQUARE
LAP OR WELD SPLICE
LAP OR WELD SPLICE
D/2 4" PRESTRESSING STRANDS (TYP.) EQUALLY SPACED 30^

1" R
1" R (TYP.) 1 1/2" MIN. COVER SEE NOTE 7 1 - 0" 1 1
B I
1 - 0"
NON-DUCTILE REGION
VARIES @ 6" PITCH
S T A
E T
# 4 SPIRAL
E R
1/2" DIAM., 270 ksi STRAND LIFTING LOOP
BENDING DIAGRAM
OCTAGONAL
MAY BE FIELD BENT (TYP.) 5" @ 1" PITCH 5" @ 1" PITCH
10
"
(T Y
PILES LESS THAN 35 LONG
PILES MORE THAN 35 LONG
SPIRAL BAR
1"
1"
PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES

PL I CE
P. )
STANDARD PLAN E-4

SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT
4 "
SHOP WELD S(E) DEFORMED BAR AASHTO M 31 GR. 60 #4 #5 PLAIN STEEL BAR AASHTO M 31 GR. 60 1/2" DIAM. 5/8" DIAM. COLD DRAWN WIRE AASHTO M 32 W 20 W 31 DEFORMED WIRE AASHTO M225 D 20 D 31 WELD DIMENSIONS S 6 8 E 3 5 LENGTH (L) 4" 6" L/2
OR S(E) L
FIELD WELD OR SHOP WELD
Harold J. Peterfeso
08-27-03
DATE
SEE TABLE FOR WELD DIMENSIONS
SPIRAL WELDED LAP SPLICE DETAIL
SPIRAL LAP SPLICE DETAIL
NOTE:
TYPICAL SECTIONS
PORTATION.
27695
O T
NE E R
IL
WELD SPLICE ONLY
4 - 0" @ 3" PITCH
WELD SPLICE ONLY
VARIES @ PITCH IS THE LESSER OF D/5, 6dps , OR 8"
VARIES @ PITCH IS THE LESSER OF D/5, 6dps , OR 8"
DUCTILE REGION ~ FULL LENGTH
SPIRAL (NOTE 3)
SPIRAL (NOTE 3)
4 - 0" @ 3" PITCH
# 4 SPIRAL
# 4 SPIRAL
I H N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA PILE CAP # 4 SPIRAL @ 3" PITCH (TYP.) PILE CAP 4 # 6 (MIN.) GROUTED INTO DRILLED OR FORMED HOLES PILE CAP

4 # 6 (MIN.) GROUTED INTO DRILLED OR FORMED HOLES
PRECAST PILES, HANDLING NOTES 1. For pile lifting Cases 1 and 2, do not allow pile tip to bear on other piling stored in a lower layer. 2. For pile lifting Cases 3 and 4, tilt the pile in the air, do not allow the pile to touch the ground. 3. The minimum angle between the pile and the lifting strap is 60^ when the pile is in the horizontal position. 4. When directed to remove a lifting loop, cut it off at the bottom of the recess and patch the recess by filling it with 1:2 mortar, finishing it to the level of the pile face. The patch shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours prior to driving the pile.
SEE NOTE 6
2 - 0" MIN.
STRAND (TYP.)
3"
3"
2 - 0" MIN.
# 4 SPIRAL @ 3" PITCH (TYP.)
# 4 SPIRAL @ 3" PITCH (TYP.)
3"
CAST IN PLACE CLASS 4000P CONCRETE SEE NOTE 5 ROUGHENED SURFACE 2 - 0" MIN. PRECAST PILE PRECAST PILE
6. Expose the spiral reinforcement at the pile head and splice with new spiral in accordance with Standard Plan E-4, Note 2. 7. For handling and bunking, the Prestressed piles shall have at least the minimum number of strands shown on Std Plan E4. 8. Piles stored on the ground should be bunked on level dunnage at no more than 20 on center, with a maximum overhang of 10.
SEE NOTE 5
PRECAST PILE
PILE CUTOFF WITH STRANDS EXTENDING 2 - 0" MINIMUM
PILE CUTOFF WITH STRANDS EXTENDING LESS THAN 2 - 0"
BUILD-UP ON PILE DRIVEN BELOW CUTOFF
PILE TO PILE-CAP CONNECTIONS
L L/8 L/4 L/4 L/4 L/8 LIFTING LOOP OR CHOKER (TYP.) PILE
L/3 L/5
SEE NOTE 3 LIFTING POINT (TYP.)
)L L
B I
"L" IS MORE THAN 90
S T A
E T
L SEE NOTE 1 L/6 L/3 L/3 L/6 WHEN "L" IS 50 OR LESS SEE NOTE 1 WHEN "L" IS MORE THAN 50 BUT NOT MORE THAN 70
CASE 1
PILE
CASE 2
ROCKER BUNK
BUNK SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 3
"L" IS MORE THAN 70 BUT NOT MORE THAN 90
L L/5 3L/5 L/5
L/10
L/6 L/3 L/6 2L/7 2L/7 L
PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES HANDLING AND CAPPING

L/10
STANDARD PLAN E-4a

PILE SEE NOTE 2 BUNK BUNK WHEN "L" IS MORE THAN 70 BUT NOT MORE THAN 90 WHEN "L" IS MORE THAN 90 SEE NOTE 2
"L" IS 70 OR LESS
CASE 3
CASE 4
Harold J. Peterfeso
08-27-03
DATE
PILE BUNKING AND SHIPPING SUPPORT DIAGRAMS
PILE HANDLING DIAGRAMS
PORTATION.
27695
NOTE:
O T
(2/5
ROCKER BUNKS
NE E R
5. The length of the formed or drilled hole shall allow for potential cutoff and full development length of the steel reinforcement. The holes must be roughened and filled with epoxy resin.
I H N
F O R P

VARIES 12" TO 24" VARIES 10" TO 22" (SEE CONTRACT) MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE 1/2" R. ROADWAY 1" R. 1" R. MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE ROADWAY 1/2" R. 12" FACE OF CURB 6 1/2" 1" 5 1/2" 1" 1" R. 1/2" R. 6"

FACE OF CURB 6 1/2" VARIES 1" R. MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE ROADWAY VARIES FROM 6" TO 0", MAINTAIN 1H : 6V SLOPE ON SIDE OF CURB MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE ROADWAY
FACE OF CURB
FACE OF CURB
1"
1/2" R. VARIES FROM 12" TO 6"
6"
6"
1/2" R.
1/2" R. 2.0%
6"
6"
6"
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
1 - 6"
1 - 6"
6"
DUAL-FACED CEMENT CONCRETE TRAFFIC CURB AND GUTTER
CEMENT CONCRETE TRAFFIC CURB AND GUTTER
DEPRESSED CURB SECTION

AT CURB RAMPS AND DRIVEWAY ENTRANCES
6" 1/2" R. 6" 1" R. CEMENT CONCRETE OR ASPHALT CONCRETE SIDEWALK OR PATH 6" 1/2" R. VARIES FROM 6" TO 0" 6" 3/8" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER (WHEN ADJACENT TO CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK) 1 3/8" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER FLUSH WITH GUTTER PAN AT CURB RAMP ENTRANCE ~ 1/2" VERTICAL LIP AT DRIVEWAY ENTRANCE 1" R. CEMENT CONCRETE CURB RAMP, LANDING, OR DRIVEWAY ENTRANCE
NOTE 1. See Standard Plan F-30.10 for Curb Expansion and Contraction Joint spacing.
CEMENT CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CURB
CEMENT CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CURB

AT CURB RAMPS, LANDINGS, AND DRIVEWAY ENTRANCES
FACE OF CURB VARIES 12" TO 24" VARIES 10" TO 22" (SEE CONTRACT) 1" R. 1" R.
FACE OF CURB FACE OF CURB 7 1/4" 1" 3" 5 1/2" 1/2" R. 1" 1" R. 1/2" R. 4" 6" 4" 6 1/2"
S T A
FACE OF CURB
1"
6"
6"
6"
1 - 4"
1 - 4"
1 - 4"
CEMENT CONCRETE CURBS
STANDARD PLAN F-10.12-02

1 3/4" 1 3/4" 8 1/4" 8 1/4" SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
DUAL-FACED CEMENT CONCRETE TRAFFIC CURB
CEMENT CONCRETE TRAFFIC CURB
MOUNTABLE CEMENT CONCRETE TRAFFIC CURB
NOTE:
ROADWAY
ROADWAY
ROADWAY
ROADWAY
PORTATION.
32350
1 1/2" R.
O T
NE E R
1 - 0"
S D N N
F O R P

~ ~
DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA 13 - 0 1/4"
~ ~
5 - 0 3/4"
~ ~
5 - 0 3/4"
3/8" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER
5 - 0" R.
2 - 10 1/2"
5 - 0" R.
1 - 6" CEMENT CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
5 - 0" R. 5"
5 - 0" R.
5"
GUTTER PAN
RECTANGULAR FRAME AND GRATE ~ NOT INCLUDED IN CURB AND GUTTER BID ITEM
NOTES 1. The intent of this design is to facilitate the compaction of Hot Mix Asphalt pavement adjacent to a drainage structure. The centerline of the drainage structure may differ from the centerline of the frame and grate.
PLAN VIEW
FACE OF CURB
CENTERLINE OF FRAME & GRATE ~ SEE NOTE 2
CATCH BASIN GUTTER PAN

2.
2 - 10 1/2" 6 1/2" 5 1/2" 1/2" R. 1" 1" R. MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE 6" RECESS 1/2" 13" (1.08) SLOPE THE GUTTER PAN DOWN TO THE RECTANGULAR FRAME 1/2" R. 5 1/2" 1" 6 1/2"
VARIES 1 - 6" ~ 2 - 10 1/2" FACE OF CURB MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE 1" R. TOP OF ROADWAY
1" R.
1" R. 12"
1/2" R.
TOP OF ROADWAY 12"
6"
3"
5"
1/2" R.
S T A
E T
ADJUSTMENT SECTION ~ NOT INCLUDED IN CURB AND GUTTER BID ITEM
SECTION
DRAINAGE STRUCTURE ~ NOT INCLUDED IN CURB AND GUTTER BID ITEM
SECTION
CEMENT CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER PAN

ISOMETRIC VIEW
Kevin J. Dayton
12-20-06
DATE
PORTATION.
24035
NOTE:
K E
. D A Y NJ I T O V A W S F H O I N
N O T
NE E R
VARIES
6"
F O R P

SIDEWALK 5 - 0" MIN. BUFFER STRIP
1 3 - 0" MIN.

1
CURB 2
1 OUTSIDE
CURB 1
LANE
LANE
CURB 2
SPLITTER ISLAND
CURB 2
LANE
LANE
CURB 2
BUFFER STRIP
1 3 - 0" MIN.
1 SIDEWALK
TRUCK APRON
5 - 0" MIN.
CURB PLACEMENT
SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR TREATMENT (TYP.)
SECTION
A
CENTRAL ISLAND CURB 3
1
SIDEWALK 5 - 0" MIN.
BUFFER STRIP 3 - 0" MIN.
CURB 2
CIRCULATING ROADWAY
CURB 1
TRUCK APRON
SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR TREATMENT
CURB PLACEMENT
SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR PAVING AND SURFACING (TYP.)
SECTION
(ROUNDABOUT CONFIGURATION WILL VARY DEPENDING ON CONTRACT PLANS)
NOTES 1. See Standard Plan F-30.10 for Curb Expansion and Contraction Joint spacing.
SPLITTER ISLAND
CURB RAMP (TYP.) FACE OF CURB SIDEWALK (TYP.)
LEGEND
1 WIDTH VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS
C
12" 10"
5"
7" MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE 3" 1/2" R. (TYP.) SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR TREATMENT (TYP.) 8" R. 1 - 10" CURB 2 ~ OUTSIDE OR RIGHT SIDE OUTSIDE TRUCK APRON 6" R 9" 4" CURB 3 ~ CENTRAL ISLAND FACE OF CURB BUFFER ROUNDABOUT TRUCK APRON
CURB 1 ROUNDABOUT TRUCK APRON CEMENT CONCRETE CURB & GUTTER
NOSING CURB SECTION C
SPLITTER ISLAND
S T A
A
DETAIL
(SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR R)
1/2" R. (TYP.)
FACE OF CURB 12" R. MATCH ROADWAY SLOPE 4" 1/2" R. (TYP.)
MATCH ROADWAY 18" 6" SLOPE TOP OF TRUCK
6"
CURB
SIDEWALK
10"
6"
6"
APRON
ROUNDABOUT CEMENT CONCRETE CURBS

PARTIAL PLAN
12" R. 4" R.
4" R.

9"
9"
15"
9"
15"
9"
OPTIONAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT
CURB 2 (OUTSIDE, RIGHT SIDE OR SPLITTER ISLAND) ROUNDABOUT CEMENT CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
CURB 3 ROUNDABOUT CENTRAL ISLAND CEMENT CONCRETE CURB
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
NOTE:
FACE OF
4" R.
PORTATION.
3/8" PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER
12" R.
32350
ROUNDABOUT SPLITTER ISLAND
O T
NE E R
9"
S D N N
F O R P

8" DRAWN BY: BILL BERENS 1" 6" 1" 1" 8" 6" 1"
R .
1/ 2"
3"
1/ 2"
R .
1"
2"
1" R .
. 1" R
6"
1" R .
. 1" R
1"
3"
1 1/ 2" R .
1 1/ 2" R .
TYPE 1
(HOT MIX ASPHALT)
12"
# 3 BAR
12"
10 - 0" BETWEE N JOINTS (TYP.) 12"
12"
TYPE 4
(CEMENT CONCRETE)
CEMENT CONCRETE EXTRUDED CURB
8" 1" 6" 1" 1"
8" 6" 1"
# 3 BARS (TYP.)
SPACING OF ANCHOR BARS

(FOR TYPES 4, 5, AND 6)
2"
2"
NOTE
JOINTS MAY BE FORMED DURING INSTALLATION USING A RIGID DIVIDER OR SAWCUT AFTER CONCRETE CURES TO MINIMUM STRENGTH.
4"
2"
2"
TYPE 2
(HOT MIX ASPHALT)
6"
# 3 BAR
TYPE 5
(CEMENT CONCRETE)
2"
4"
1" R .
. 1" R
1" R .
. 1" R
K E
S T A
10" 2 1/2" 5" 2 1/2" 2 1/2"
10" 5" 2 1/2"
E T
6"
6"
EXTRUDED CURB
1" 2"
1" R .
. 1" R
1" R .
. 1" R
1"
6"

TYPE 3
(HOT MIX ASPHALT)
# 3 BAR
Ken L. Smith
TYPE 6
(CEMENT CONCRETE)
01-23-07
DATE
PORTATION.
1/
1/
31805
2"
2"
NOTE:
O YS R E L M I A W F S H O I N
O T
NE E R
1" MIN. (TYP.)
1/
1/
1 1/ 2" R . 1 1/ 2" R .
1 1/ 2" R . 1 1/ 2" R .
H T N
F O R P

12"
1" R.
2" R.
#3 REBAR ~ REQUIRED ONLY IN TANGENT BLOCK, WHEN LENGTH EXCEEDS 30" (1 1/2" CLR. BOTH ENDS)
" 30
IN
.~
" 60
TOP VIEW
INSIDE CORNER BLOCK
2" R.
6"
2" 1 1/2" CLR.
5"
2" 35/64 1/4" 12"
ISOMETRIC VIEW
12"
TYPICAL OF ALL
TANGENT BLOCK
END VIEW
TOP VIEW
OUTSIDE CORNER BLOCK
S T A
E T
N G
INSIDE CORNER BLOCK
18" RADIUS BLOCK
23" 30" R.
14" 18" R.
EXPIRES JUNE 19, 2008
45^
PRECAST CONCRETE SLOPED MOUNTABLE CURB

OUTSIDE CORNER BLOCK 30" RADIUS BLOCK

45^ SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS
ISOMETRIC VIEWS
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

09-05-07
DATE
18" RADIUS BLOCK
30" RADIUS BLOCK
PORTATION.
24557
NOTE:
B A K
, P H A C I S C T O A W S F H O I
T
NE E R
1" 35/64 1/4"
3"
I I I O O N
F O R P

1" R.
2" R.
2" R.
6"
2"
1" 35/64 1/4"
3"
5" B
2" 35/64 1/4" 12"
TOP VIEW
SECTION
TOP VIEW
INSIDE RADIUS BLOCK
OUTSIDE RADIUS BLOCK
CURB RADIUS TABLE

CURB RADIUS DIMENSION A DIMENSION B DIMENSION C
12"
2"
8"
4 TO 5
12"
1 1/2"
9"
12"
1"
10"
12"
7/8"
10 1/4"
B A K
18"
1"
16"
10
18"
7/8"
16 1/4"
S T A
E T
N G
11 TO 13
18"
3/4"
16 1/2"
INSIDE RADIUS BLOCK
16 TO 17
24"
3/4"
22 1/2"
23 TO 29
24"
1/2"
23"
30 TO 34
30"
1/2"
29"
PRECAST CONCRETE SLOPED MOUNTABLE CURB

OUTSIDE RADIUS BLOCK
35 TO 48
30"
3/8"
29 1/4"
49 TO 60
30"
1/4"
29 1/2"

SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS
OVER 60
USE TANGENT BLOCK, SEE SHEET 1
ISOMETRIC VIEWS
THIS TABLE LISTS THE CALCULATED DIMENSIONS FOR CASTING BLOCKS SUITABLE FOR CONSTRUCTING VARIOUS CURB RADII. CURVED BLOCKS, OR BLOCKS WITH DIFFERENT DIMENSIONS MAY BE ACCEPTABLE WITH PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.
Pasco Bakotich III

09-05-07
DATE
NOTE:
18 TO 22
24"
5/8"
22 3/4"
PORTATION.
24557
14 TO 15
18"
5/8"
16 3/4"
T
18"
1 1/8"
15 3/4"
NE E R
I I I O O N
F O R P

12.0 MIN. ~ 30.0 MAX. DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA

NOTES
SHOULDER
NOT LESS THAN 6.0
VARIES ~ SEE NOTE 3
1.
SIGN AND POST CENTERLINE
Attach the Milepost Sign Panel to a timber sign post using two 3/8" diameter lag bolts, with washers; see Standard Plan G-22.10. For post and attachment details on steel sign posts, see Standard Plan G-24.50, Type ST-1. Provide Supplemental Plaques and install on Mileposts where indicated in the Contract. See the Contract for the width of the Single-Faced Milepost Signs required (10" or 12"). For lateral installations behind traffic barrier, 6" high curbs, and ditches, see Standard Plan G-20.10. Install at the locations shown in the Contract. Installation may be moved 50 feet or less (longitudinally) before or after the contract location if obstructions are encountered, or to utilize the post of another sign. Mileposts that cannot be placed within this degree of accuracy shall be omitted entirely.
2. 3.
D10-1, D10-2, & D10-3 MILEPOST SIGN PANEL
4. 5.
4.0
44 (NOM.) TIMBER SIGN POST OR 2"2" STEEL SIGN POST
FOR SINGLE-FACED SIGNS
3.0 MIN.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
1" TO 2"
(TYP.)
TIMBER POST
STEEL POST
1/4" DIAM. 1 1/2" LAG BOLT AND WASHER 12.0 MIN. ~ 18.0 MAX. BACK EQUATION PLAQUE (D10-401) TIMBER POST SPUR ROUTE PLAQUE (D10-501)
1/4" DIAM. 3" HEX HEAD BOLT, NUT & WASHERS (USE FOR SINGLE-FACE INSTALLATIONS ALSO)
SHOULDER
NOT LESS THAN 6.0
BOLT AND POST CENTERLINE
INSTALL PLAQUE ON BOTH SIDES
T H E O
SINGLE-FACED SIGN
D10-101, D10-201, & D10-301 MILEPOST SIGN PANEL
DOUBLE-FACED SIGN
S T A
SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE ~ MOUNTING DETAIL

SEE NOTE 2
MILEPOST STANDARD PLAN G-10.10-00

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET 3.0 MIN.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION FOR DOUBLE-FACED SIGNS
EMBEDMENT
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
PORTATION.
NOTE:
44 (NOM.) TIMBER SIGN POST OR 2"2" STEEL SIGN POST
25335
4.0
. T R EJ E R P O A W S D EO F H I N G
T
NE E R
EMBEDMENT
R E I N A N O
F O R P

W 12 MIN. SHOULDER 6 MIN. SHOULDER W 12 MIN. SIGN SIGN

W 12 MIN. SHOULDER 6 MIN. SIGN
NOTES 1. Refer to the Sign Specification Sheet of the Contract for the V and W distances. The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the sign to the ground shall not be less than 7 for signs located within the Design Clear Zone.
2.
V (7 MIN.)
V (7 MIN.) FILL SLOPES STEEPER THAN 6H:1V
V (7 MIN.)
6H:1V SLOPE OR FLATTER SLOPE BREAK
SLOPE BREAK
SLOPE BREAK
IN FILL SECTION
ON STEEP FILL SLOPES
IN FILL SECTION
W 3 MIN. SIGN SHOULDER
W 12 MIN. 6 MIN. PRIMARY SIGN
W 12 MIN. SHOULDER
MAJOR SIGN
0" MIN. 3" MAX. EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE
0" MIN. 3" MAX.
V (7 MIN.)
V (7 MIN.) 5 MIN.
V (8 MIN.) V (5 MIN.)
SECONDARY SIGN
TRAFFIC BARRIER
SLOPE BREAK
SLOPE BREAK
SIGN INSTALLATION BEHIND TRAFFIC BARRIER
SIGN WITH SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE INSTALLATION IN FILL SECTION
GUIDE OR DIRECTIONAL SIGN WITH

EXPRESSWAYS AND FREEWAYS
S T A
BACKSLOPE
W 2 MIN. SHOULDER W 12 MIN. 4 MIN. SHOULDER W 12 MIN. 4 MIN. FLATTER THAN 3H:1V STEEPER THAN 3H:1V
D
7 MIN. 2 MIN.
SIGN
DITCH
DITCH
EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY V (7 MIN.) EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY V (7 MIN.) EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY V (7 MIN.)
BACKSLOPE
GROUND MOUNTED SIGN PLACEMENT

D
STANDARD PLAN G-20.10-00

CURB
SLOPE BREAK
SLOPE BREAK
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
SIGN INSTALLATION IN CURB SECTION
SIGN INSTALLATION IN DITCH SECTION
MULTIPLE SIGN POST INSTALLATION IN DITCH SECTION
PORTATION.
SIGN
SIGN
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
SECONDARY SIGN INSTALLATION ON
NE E R
SIGN INSTALLATION
SIGN INSTALLATION
MULTIPLE SIGN POST INSTALLATION
R E I N A N O
F O R P

DRAWN BY: LISA CYFORD

NOTES 1. Dimensions for the parts used to assemble the base connections are intentionally not shown. Base connections are patented, manufactured products that are in compliance with NCHRP 350 crash test criteria. The base connection details are only shown on this plan to illustrate how the parts are assembled. For Steel Sign Support Foundation, see Standard Plan G-25.10. For "H1" refer to the Sign Specification Sheet in the Contract. Mounting brackets with steel straps shall be the stainless steel one bolt, flared leg bracket and 3/4" wide, 0.030" thick strap "Band-it" products or an approved equal.
~ ~ 2"
SIGN PANEL
TOP OF SIGN
STEEL PIPE SIGN POST TOP OF SIGN POST
SIGN BRACE ~ WHEN REQUIRED
VARIES
2.
3.
SIGN PANEL SIGN POST
4.
"H1" POST HEIGHT
BOTTOM OF SIGN
BRACKET (TYP.)
7 - 0" MIN.
ANCHOR FERRULE (TYP.)
ANCHOR COUPLING (TYP.)
STEEL PIPE SIGN POST, DIAM. VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT
EXPLODED VIEW
BOTTOM OF SIGN
BREAKAWAY SIGN BRACKET ASSEMBLY
FINISHED GROUND LINE
BREAKAWAY SIGN POST BRACKET
S T A
ELEVATION
1" DIAM. NYLON WASHER ~ WHEN SIGN FACE HAS TYPE 3 OR 4 SHEETING 5/16" DIAM. HEX HEAD BOLT
MOUNTING BRACKET AND STEEL STRAP ~ SEE NOTE 4
5/16" DIAM. HEX HEAD BOLT
1" DIAM. STEEL FLAT WASHER
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT TYPE AP INSTALLATION DETAILS
1" DIAM. STEEL FLAT WASHER SIGN POST SIGN PANEL SIGN PANEL

SIGN POST SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

SECTION B DETAIL C PERSPECTIVE VIEW
11-8-07
DATE
NOTE:
1" DIAM. NYLON WASHER ~ WHEN SIGN FACE HAS TYPE 3 OR 4 SHEETING
MOUNTING BRACKET AND STEEL STRAP ~ SEE NOTE 4
PORTATION.
25335
T H E O
T
BOTTOM OF SIGN POST BRACKET
VIEW
NE E R
SEE STD. PLAN G-20.10
SEE NOTE 3
VARIES
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
1.
SIGN PANEL
~ ~ 2"
TOP OF SIGN
TOP OF SIGN POST STEEL TUBE SIGN POST
SIGN BRACE, WHEN REQUIRED
VARIES
Dimensions for the parts used to assemble the base connections are intentionally not shown. Base connections are patented, manufactured products that are in compliance with NCHRP 350 crash test criteria. The base connection details are only shown on this plan to illustrate how the parts are assembled. For Steel Sign Support Foundations, see Standard Plan G-25.10. For "H1" refer to the Sign Specification Sheet in the Contract.
2.
3.
"H1" POST HEIGHT
BOTTOM OF SIGN
SIGN POST SEE NOTE 3
SIGN PANEL BRACKET (TYP.)
ANCHOR COUPLING (TYP.)
STEEL TUBE SIGN POST, SIZE VARIES ~ SEE CONTRACT
EXPLODED VIEW
BOTTOM OF SIGN
BREAKAWAY SIGN POST BRACKET
S T A
1" DIAM. NYLON WASHER ~ WHEN SIGN FACE HAS TYPE 3 OR 4 SHEETING 5/16" DIAM. HEX HEAD BOLT
1" DIAM. STEEL FLAT WASHER
STEEL LOCK WASHER
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT TYPE AS INSTALLATION DETAILS STANDARD PLAN G-24.20-00

SIGN PANEL
SIGN POST
DETAIL
B
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE
PORTATION.
3/8" HEX HEAD NUT
25335
NE E R
ELEVATION
NOTE:
T H E O
BOTTOM OF SIGN POST BRACKET
T
VIEW
7 - 0" MIN.
VARIES
R E I N A N O
F O R P

~ ~ 2" ~ ~ 2" A

NOTES B
TOP OF SIGN
TOP OF SIGN POST 6" MAX.
"X" SIGN WIDTH SEE NOTE 3 MAX. T-BAR SIGN SUPPORT
TOP OF SIGN
1.
PIPE CLAMP
VARIES
SIGN PANEL
MAX.
PIPE CLAMP (TYP.)
"Y" SIGN HEIGHT
STEEL PIPE CAP
SEE NOTE 3
T-BAR SIGN SUPPORT STEEL PIPE CAP (TYP.) 3" (TYP.) 1/2" DIAM. 5 1/2" HEX BOLT, NUT AND 2 WASHERS
Dimensions for the parts used to assemble the base connections are intentionally not shown. Base connections are patented, manufactured products that are in compliance with NCHRP 350 crash test criteria. The base connection details are only shown on this plan to illustrate how the parts are assembled. For Steel Sign Support Foundations, see Standard Plan G-25.10. For "X", "Y", "H1", and "H2", refer to the Sign Specification Sheet in the Contract. Sign post shall be 2 1/2" nominal I.D. galvanized schedule 80 steel pipe. Do not tighten any slip plate bolt to the recommended torque before pre-tightening the other bolts. Progressively tighten the three slip plate bolts in 10 ft-lbs increments, alternately, to a final torque of 38 ft-lbs on each bolt.
6"
SIGN BRACE ~ WHEN REQUIRED
6"
2.
"H1" POST HEIGHT
MAX.
SEE NOTE 3
"H1" POST HEIGHT
BOTTOM OF SIGN
BOTTOM OF SIGN
PIPE CLAMP (TYP.)
6"
SIGN PANEL
SIGN PANEL
3.
SIGN PANEL
SEE NOTE 3
4. C 5.
MAX. 6"
(SEE STD. PLAN G-20.10)
VARIES
C
7 - 0" MIN.
7 - 0" MIN.
SIGN POST ~ SEE NOTE 4
SIGN POST ~ SEE NOTE 4 BOTTOM OF SIGN
SLIP BASE ASSEMBLY
SIGN POST
BOTTOM OF SIGN SLIP BASE ASSEMBLY
VIEW
BOTTOM OF UPPER SLIP PLATE DRAWN BY: LISA CYFORD
A
BOTTOM OF UPPER SLIP PLATE
VIEW
B
SLIP BASE DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
TYPE PL SIGN SUPPORT
TYPE PL-T SIGN SUPPORT
S T A
STEEL FLAT WASHER 5/16" U-BOLT
KEEPER PLATE
5/16" DIAM. HEX HEAD BOLT
EXPLODED VIEW
BASE PLATE
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT TYPES PL, PL-T, & PL-U INSTALLATION DETAILS
PIPE CLAMP AND U-BOLT

SIGN POST SIGN PANEL

ISOMETRIC VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE
DETAIL
C
EXPLODED VIEW
SLIP BASE ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
SPLIT SHAFT COLLAR
PORTATION.
NYLON WASHER ~ WHEN SIGN FACE HAS TYPE 3 OR 4 SHEETING
MANUFACTURED PIPE CLAMP
25335
MANUFACTURED PIPE CLAMP
NE E R
5/16" DIAM. HEX NUT & WASHER
SIGN POST
CAST UPPER BASE
SIGN POST
T H E O
T
U-BOLT
R E I N A N O
F O R P


F
D
"X" SIGN WIDTH SEE NOTE 3
"X" SIGN WIDTH SEE NOTE 3 SIGN PANEL
B
STEEL PIPE CAP (TYP.)
VARIES (TYP.)
3 - 0"
~ ~ 2"
~ ~ 2"
TOP OF SIGN POST 1 - 0"
STEEL PIPE CAP (TYP.)
~ ~ 2"
TOP OF SIGN
TOP OF SIGN
~ ~ 2"
1 - 0" MAX.
TOP OF SIGN POST
C C
"Y" SIGN WIDTH 3/16" ALUMINUM RIVETS @ 6" SPACING (TYP.) 3/16" ALUMINUM RIVETS @ 6" SPACING (TYP.) VARIES 12" MAX. SIGN PANEL SIGN POST ~ SEE NOTE 4 STEEL PIPE CAP "Y" SIGN WIDTH
SEE NOTE 3
PIPE CLAMP (TYP.) SEE NOTE 3 5 - 0" MAX.
1 - 0"
STEEL PIPE CAP
1 - 6"
"H1" POST HEIGHT
U-BAR SIGN SUPPORT
SIGN PANEL
U-BAR SIGN SUPPORT
BOTTOM OF SIGN
"H1" POST HEIGHT
"H2" POST HEIGHT
C
(SEE STD. PLAN G-20.10) SEE NOTE 3
1 - 6"
Z-BAR (TYP.) ~ 3.00 2.33
6"
BOTTOM OF SIGN
SIGN PANEL
SEE NOTE 3
SEE NOTE 3
1/2" DIAM. 5 1/2" HEX BOLT NUT AND 2 WASHERS
7 - 0" MIN.
7 - 0" MIN.
BOTTOM OF SIGN
BOTTOM OF SIGN
VIEW
SIGN POST ~ SEE NOTE 4 SLIP BASE ASSEMBLY BOTTOM OF UPPER SLIP PLATE (TYP.)
D
SLIP BASE ASSEMBLY
VIEW
BOTTOM OF UPPER SLIP PLATE

T H E O
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
S T A
TYPE PL SIGN SUPPORT

DUAL POST INSTALLATION
TYPE PL-U SIGN SUPPORT
6 - 0"
8 - 0" 2 - 0" 4 - 0"
10 - 0" 3 - 0" 4 - 0" 2.33" ALUMINUM RIVET
3 - 0"
5/16" U-BOLT
"Y" SIGN HEIGHT

6 - 0" 8 - 0" 2 - 0" 4 - 0" 10 - 0" 3 - 0" 4 - 0" SIGN PANEL 3" MANUFACTURED PIPE CLAMP
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT TYPES PL, PL-T, & PL-U INSTALLATION DETAILS

C F
1 - 0" 4 - 0"
Pasco Bakotich III

A, B, C, & F, MAY BE INTERPOLATED FOR INTERMEDIATE SIGN SIZES
11-8-07
DATE
DETAIL
NOTE:
1 - 0"
PORTATION.
SIGN POST
25335
"X" SIGN WIDTH
ALUMINUM "Z" BAR
T
NE E R
10"
R E I N A N O
F O R P

A A A

NOTES A 1.
SIGN PANEL SIGN BRACE, WHEN REQUIRED ~ SEE STD. PLAN G-50.10
SIGN POST ~ 2 1/4" SQUARE, 12 GAGE STEEL TUBE SIGN POST ~ 2" OR 2 1/4" SQUARE, 12 GAGE STEEL TUBE
"H1" POST HEIGHT
"H1" POST HEIGHT
SEE NOTE 2
SEE NOTE 2
"H1" POST HEIGHT
SEE NOTE 2
MAX.
TOP OF SIGN
~ ~9"
7 - 0" MIN.
VARIES
FINISHED GROUND LINE DRAWN BY: LISA CYFORD
~ ~2"
TOP OF LOWER SQUARE TUBE 4"
SEE NOTE 2
SIGN POST ~ 2 1/2" SQUARE, 12 GAGE STEEL TUBE
"H1" POST HEIGHT
DRIVE RIVET OR CORNER BOLT WITH NUT AND WASHERS ~ 2 REQUIRED
SIGN POST ~ 2" OR 2 1/4" SQUARE, 12 GAGE STEEL TUBE
Dimensions for the parts used to assemble the base connections are intentionally not shown. Base connections are patented, manufactured products that are in compliance with NCHRP 350 crash test criteria. The base connection details are only shown on this plan to illustrate how the parts are assembled. For "H1" refer to the Sign Specification Sheet in the Contract.
2.
BOTTOM OF SIGN
TOP OF SIGN POST
3 - 0"
3 - 6"
3 - 6"
3 - 0"
~ ~9"
BOLT STOP FOR SIGN POST
2 - 6"
STABILIZER FIN CLEAN-OUT BAR ANCHOR LEG ANGLE
LOWER SIGN POST SUPPORT ~ 2 1/2" SQUARE, 12 GAGE STEEL TUBE COMPACTED NATIVE BACKFILL MATERIAL 9" DIAM. 12" DIAM. COMPACTED NATIVE BACKFILL MATERIAL
4" MAX.
TOP OF LOWER SQUARE TUBE SIGN POST SIGN PANEL
ELEVATION
3 - 6"
TYPE ST-3 SIGN SUPPORT
BOLT STOP FOR SIGN POST LOWER SIGN POST SUPPORT ~ 2 1/2" OR 3", 7 GAGE, HOT-DIP GALV., HEAVY DUTY ANCHOR
ELEVATION
ELEVATION

12"
CONCRETE CLASS 3000 NYLON WASHER ~ WHEN SIGN FACE HAS TYPE 3 OR 4 SHEETING 3/8" HEX HEAD NUT BOTTOM OF SIGN
DIAM.
ELEVATION VIEW A
STEEL FLAT WASHER
T H E O
SIGN PANEL SIGN POST
S T A
WEDGE
SIGN POST
SIGN POST
STABILIZER FIN
SIGN POST LOWER SIGN POST SUPPORT
LOWER SIGN POST SUPPORT DRIVE RIVET OR HEX BOLT (TYP.) CLEAN OUT BAR BOLT STOP FOR SIGN POST
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT TYPES ST-1 ~ ST-4 INSTALLATION DETAILS
STANDARD PLAN G-24.50.00

DRIVE RIVET OR HEX BOLT (TYP.)
ANCHOR LEG ANGLE
BOLT STOP FOR SIGN POST
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE
TYPE ST-1
TYPE ST-2
TYPE ST-3
TYPE ST-4
PORTATION.
25335
NE E R
DETAIL
NOTE:
T
3/8" DIAM. 3 1/2" LONG HEX HEAD BOLT
STEEL LOCK WASHER
SIGN POST
3 - 0"
1"
VARIES
R E I N A N O
F O R P

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD " X" SIGN WIDTH SEE NOTE 3 0.20 X Z-BAR ~ 3.00 2.33 ( TYP. ) 6" (TYP.) 6 " 3 " SIGN PANEL " Y"SI GN HEI GHT SEE NOTE 3 0.60 X 0.20 X Z-BAR ~ 3.00 2.33 ( TYP. ) 0.15 X 0.35 X

NOTES
" X" SIGN WIDTH SEE NOTE 3 0.35 X 0.15 X 6" (TYP.) PANEL 3 " SIGN
1. Dimensions for the parts used to assemble the base connections are intentionally not shown. Base connections are patented, manufactured products that are in compliance with NCHRP 350 crash test criteria. The base connection details are only shown on this plan to illustrate how the parts are assembled. 2. For Steel Sign Support Foundations, see Standard Plan G-25.10. 3. For "X," "Y," "H1," "H2," and "H3," refer to the Sign Specification Sheet in the Contract.
SEE STANDARD PLAN G2 0 . 1 0
" H2 "POST HEI GHT
WINDBEAM HINGE PLATE (TYP.) " H1 "POST HEI GHT
SEE NOTE 3
SEE NOTE 3
@ 3 - 0" MAX.
" Y"SI GN HEI GHT
EQUAL SPACING
6 "
EQUAL SPACI NG
3 -0 "M AX.
WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST " H3 "POST HEI GHT
A
SEE NOTE 3
7 -0 "M I N.
WINDBEAM SEE STANDARD PLAN G2 0 . 1 0 HINGE PLATE " H1 "POST HEI GHT " H2 "POST HEI GHT (TYP.)
STEEL SIGN POST (TYP.) ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR POST SIZES 7 -0 "M I N.
A
SEE NOTE 3
BOTTOM OF SIGN POST BRACKET (TYP.)
STEEL SIGN POST ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR POST SIZE BRACKET ANCHOR COUPLING (TYP.) BOTTOM OF SIGN POST (TYP.)
ELEVATION
TYPE TP-A OR TP-B SIGN SUPPORT
TOP OF SIGN 3 " TOP OF SIGN POST
BRACKET (TYP.)
ELEVATION
EXPLODED VIEW
TYPE TP-A OR TP-B SIGN SUPPORT

C
TYPE TP-B BASE
AND TWO POST CLIPS (TYP.) SIGN PANEL ~ SEE WINDBEAM AND SIGN POST CONNECTION 3/16" ALUMINUM RIVETS @ 4" STAGGERED WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST
S T A
E T
SPACING (TYP.)
3 " EQUAL SPACI NG
3 -0 "M AX.
WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST ~ SEE CONTRACT FOR SIZE
29115
BRACKET (TYP.) BOTTOM OF SIGN BREAKAWAY HINGE PLATES ANCHOR COUPLING (TYP.)
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT TYPES TP-A AND TP-B INSTALLATION DETAILS

EXPLODED VIEW
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
TYPE TP-A BASE
TYPE TP-A BASE

(W69)
TYPE TP-B BASE

(W612 OR LARGER)
J O
.N C I S N W B E H S FA H O I N
N O T
ALUMINUM WIND BEAM
NE E R
SEE NOTE 3
SEE NOTE 3
DOCUM ENT
F O R P

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD TOP OF 3 " MAJOR SIGN MAJOR SIGN
3 "
TOP OF SIGN POST
B
Z-BAR ~ 3.00 3 " 2.33 6 " WINDBEAM
" Y"SI GN HEI GHT
C
SEE NOTE 3 TOP OF SIGN ALUMINUM WIND BEAM AND TWO MAJOR SIGN POST CLIPS (TYP.) ~ SEE WINDBEAM 3 " 3 " 3 " WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST 6 " Z-BAR Z-BAR VARI ES 3 " AND SIGN POST CONNECTION 3/16" RIVET
" H2 "POST HEI GHT
SECONDARY SIGN
0 "TO
@ 3 - 0" MAX.
VARI ES
EQUAL SPACING
3 "
SEE NOTE 3
6 "
3/16" ALUM. RIVETS @ 4" STAGGERED SPACING (TYP.)
SEE STD. PLAN G2 0 . 1 0
HINGE PLATE (TYP.) " H1 "POST HEI GHT SEE NOTE 3
3 "
3/8" DIAM. WITH TWO FLAT WASHERS AND ONE LOCKNUT PER BOLT
BOTTOM OF SIGN POST BRACKET (TYP.)
WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST ~ SEE CONTRACT FOR SIZE
DETAIL
SECONDARY SIGN BREAKAWAY HINGE PLATE
(BOLT ON ONE SIDE OF EACH WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST)
MAJOR AND SECONDARY SIGN SUPPORT INSTALLATION

BOTTOM OF SECONDARY SIGN
6 "
ELEVATION
SIGN PANEL
DOCUM ENT
VIEW
WIDE FLANGE
J O
STEEL SIGN POST (UPPER SECTION)
S T A
E T
" 4
WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST
29115
WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST (LOWER SECTION) BREAKWAY HINGE PLATES (TYP.)
3/16" ALUMINUM RIVET
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT TYPES TP-A AND TP-B INSTALLATION DETAILS

POST CLIPS

ALUMINUM WINDBEAM
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
BREAKAWAY HINGE PLATE CONNECTION
WINDBEAM AND SIGN POST CONNECTION

(ATTACH POST CLIPS ON BOTH SIDES OF WIDE FLANGE STEEL SIGN POST)
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
N O T
NE E R
7 -0 "M I N.
0 "TO
3 "
F O R P


SIGN POST SLIP BASE ASSEMBLY ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN G-24.30 BOTTOM OF UPPER M AX. SLIP PLATE 3 "
NOTES 1. Per TRANSPO: 5" to 8" square steel posts are acceptable and require type TP-B foundations. 2. Install conduit for post-mounted Junction Box in the concrete foundation, when required. See Standard Plan J-12, Sheet 2.
WIDE FLANGE TYPE TP-A OR TP-B BASE ~ SEESTANDARD PLAN G-24.60 FOR DETAILS 2 1 / 2 " NOM . BASE STUB BOTTOM OF SIGN POST BRACKET 4 " STEEL SIGN POST
MANUFACTURERSUPPLIED CONCRETE ANCHOR FERRULES DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 4 "
GROUND LINE BREAKAWAY SIGN BRACKET ASSEMBLY ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN G-24.10 & G-24.20 DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC MANUFACTURERSUPPLIED CONCRETE 2 1 / 2 " NOM . ANCHOR FERRULES FINISHED GROUND LINE 4 "
4 " COM PL ETE TURN AT TOP AND BOTTOM
# 4 SPI RAL HOOP W I TH 6 "PI TCH ~ ONE
FINISHED
8 ~ #5 BARS
#5 BAR (TYP.) 3 -0 " EVENLY SPACED 1 -6 "
FOUNDATI ON DEPTH VARI ES
KEY NOTES
SEE TABL E 1
COM PL ETE TURN AT TOP AND BOTTOM
BOTTOM OF SIGN POST BRACKET FOUNDATI ON DEPTH VARI ES
REINF. BARS EVENLY SPACED ~ SEE TABLE
2 1 / 2 C " L R .
Two-post installation. Single-post installations require square steel posts. For single-post installations, divide the 2 post MAX. XYZ in half.
SEE TABL E
CONCRETE CLASS 4000P
CONCRETE CLASS 4000P FOUNDATI ON DEPTH VARI ES
SEE TABL E
EVENLY SPACED
SEE TABL E
VARI ES
2 1 / 2 C " L R .
#5 BAR (TYP.)
ELEVATION VIEW
2 1 / 2 C " L R .
CONCRETE CLASS 4000P 4 "
TYPE PL, TYPE PL-T & TYPE PL-U FOUNDATION

TYPE PL, TYPE PL-T & TYPE PL-U FOUNDATION TABLE
MAX. XYZ
225 265
8 ~ #5 BARS
FDN. DEPTH 1
3 - 6" 4 - 0"
ELEVATION VIEW ELEVATION VIEW
300 600 2
4 - 6" 4 - 6"
R I C H A
TYPE TP-A & TYPE TP-B FOUNDATION

TYPE TP-A & TP-B FOUNDATION TABLE
SEE NOTE 1
TYPE AS & TYPE AP FOUNDATION

TYPE AS FOUNDATION TABLE
POST SIZE MAX. XYZ
250
S T A
E T
X (FT)
SIGN WIDTH
FDN. DIAM. FDN. DEPTH

18" 4 - 0"
POST SIZE
MAX. XYZ
3 POST 2355 3510 6180 9480 ----
ASTM A 36 ASTM A 992 2 POST 3 W6 x 12 W6 x 16 W8 x 21 W10 x 26 W12 x 30 W6 x 9 W6 x 12 W8 x 18 W10 x 22 W12 x 26 1570 2340 4120 6320 8700
VERTICAL REBAR
8 ~ # 5 8 ~ # 5 8 ~ # 6 8 ~ # 7 8 ~ # 7
FDN. 1 DEPTH
4 - 0" 5 - 0" 7 - 0" 8 - 0" 9 - 0"
4" SQ.
Y (FT) SIGN HEIGHT
Y/2 (FT)
25470
U C
TYPE AP FOUNDATION TABLE

SIGN PANEL
POST SIZE
3" O.D. 3 1/2" O.D. 4" O.D. 4 1/2" O.D.
MAX. XYZ
225 250 275 300
FDN. DIAM. FDN. DEPTH

18" 18" 24" 24" 3 - 6" 4 - 0" 4 - 0" 4 - 0"
1 SIGN SUPPORT
Z (FT) LONGEST POST
STEEL SIGN SUPPORT FOUNDATION DETAILS

FINISHED GROUND LINE APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
XYZ CALCULATION
XYZ (FT ) = X Y Z USED TO DETERMINE POST SIZE ~ SEE FOUNDATION TABLES
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
N O T
NE E R
E E R
Foundation depths based on allowable lateral bearing pressure in excess of 2500 PSF.
ETE TURN AT TOP AND BOTTOM 4 " COM PL
2 -4 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD X = 4 - 0" OR LESS 6" MIN. X/4 WINDBEAM (TYP.) X/4 1 - 0 MIN. 2 - 6" MAX.

NOTES 1. Mounting brackets with steel straps shall be a stainless steel band and buckle system product or an approved equal. Mounting brackets shall be universal channel clamps; steel straps shall be 3/4" wide and 0.030" thick. 2. All signs installed on mast arms or standards (poles) require windbeams. All signs shall be installed with horizontal edges level. A skewed windbeam is required only when the sign is mounted within 12" of the mast arm base (see Detail "A").
SIGNAL HEAD BACK PLATE
LEVEL
1 "( TYP. )
5^ ~ SEE NOTE 2
MAST ARM BASE BACK OF SIGN PANEL SIGNAL STANDARD
3. The street name sign shall be a maximum of 36 square feet and the sign height is a maximum of 3 feet.
X = MORE THAN 4 - 0" BUT NOT MORE THAN 8 - 0"
3/16" RIVET (TYP.) X/2 6" MIN. 1 - 0" WINDBEAM (TYP.) 1 - 0" 1 - 0 MIN. 2 - 6" MAX. ~ 4" MAX. SPACING
BACK OF SIGN PANEL SIGNAL HEAD BACK PLATE
LEVEL
DETAIL
TYPICAL FOR EACH CONNECTION
A
BACK OF SIGN PANEL
MAST ARM BASE SIGNAL STANDARD

BACK PLATE X = MORE THAN 8 - 0" BACK OF SIGN PANEL
S T A
E T
EQUALLY SPACED 6" MIN. 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 0 MIN. 2 - 6" MAX.
UNIVERSAL CHANNEL
MAST ARM
29115
STEEL STRAP LEVEL
SIGN INSTALLATION ON SIGNAL AND LIGHT STANDARDS

SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS BACK OF SIGN PANEL WINDBEAM (TYP.) SIGNAL STANDARD MAST ARM BASE WINDBEAM APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

NE E R
CLAMP
06-16-11
DATE
MAST ARM-MOUNTED STREET NAME SIGNS
TYPICAL MAST ARM INSTALLATION
SIGNAL HEAD
J O
N O T
1 "
F O R P

DIMENSIONS
4 - 0" MAX. A 3 - 0" 4 - 0" B 9" 0 . 2 5 Y 1 - 0" WINDBEAM 3/16" RIVET (TYP.) ~ 4" MAX. SPACING
WINDBEAM
A
Y = 5 -0 "M AX. 0 . 2 5 Y
MOUNTING BRACKET AND STEEL STRAP ~ SEE NOTE 1 SIGN PANEL
0 . 2 5 Y
1" (TYP.)
BACK OF SIGN PANEL
0 . 2 5 Y
SIGNAL OR LIGHT STANDARD
1 " ( T Y P . )
LEVEL
SECTION
DOCUM ENT
SIGN INSTALLATION ON SIGNAL OR LIGHT STANDARD
1 "( TYP. )
S T A
E T
DIMENSIONS
X 3 - 0" 3 - 0" 4 - 0" Y 2 - 6" 3 - 0" 2 - 6" C 1 - 0" 1 - 0" 1 - 3" D 6" 6" 9" MOUNTING BRACKET AND STEEL STRAP ~ SEE NOTE 1
29115
SIGN INSTALLATION ON SIGNAL AND LIGHT STANDARDS

BACK OF SIGN PANEL

LEVEL
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
MAST ARM-MOUNTED LANE USE SIGNS
J O
N O T
NE E R
7 -0 "M I N.
7 -0 "M I N.
F O R P


NOTES 1.
STEEL TUBE SIGN POST
Mounting brackets with steel straps shall be a stainless steel band and buckle system product or an approved equal. Mounting brackets shall be one bolt, flared leg; steel straps shall be 3/4" wide and 0.030" thick. Sign braces are only installed when specified in the contract. Sign braces are typically necessary on large sign panels that are exposed to high winds, traffic generated wind buffeting, or when snow thrown from plows might impact the sign. A nylon washer shall be placed between the sign and the steel washer when the sign face has Type 3 or 4 sheeting.
SIGN PANEL
2. 3.
SIGN BRACE
SIGN BRACE
4.
SIGN PANEL
TIMBER SIGN POST SIGN BRACE
MOUNTING BRACKET AND STEEL STRAP ~ SEE DETAIL
SIGN PANEL
SIGN BRACE ON TIMBER POST
STEEL PIPE SIGN POST
SIGN BRACE ON STEEL TUBE
SIGN PANEL FIELD DRILL 5/16" DIAM. HOLE IN SIGN PANEL (TYP.) 1/4" DIAM. 1" LONG HEX HEAD BOLT, NUT, AND WASHERS (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 4 FIELD DRILL 5/16" DIAM. HOLE IN SIGN PANEL (TYP.) SIGN PANEL
FOR SIGN ATTACHMENT, SEE STD. PLAN G-22.10
MOUNTING BRACKET AND STEEL STRAP DETAIL
T H E O
3/8" DIAM. 1 1/2" LONG LAG SCREW AND WASHERS
SIGN BRACE ON STEEL PIPE
STEEL TUBE SIGN POST
S T A
PLAN
PLAN
1/4" DIAM. 1" LONG HEX HEAD BOLT, NUT, AND WASHERS (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 4
STEEL PIPE SIGN POST
FIELD DRILL 5/16" DIAM. HOLE IN SIGN PANEL (TYP.)
SIGN BRACING
SIGN BRACE

MOUNTING BRACKET AND STEEL STRAP ~ SEE NOTE 1 5/16" DIAM. HEX HEAD BOLT AND WASHERS SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
PLAN
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE
PORTATION.
SIGN PANEL
25335
NOTE:
TIMBER SIGN POST
1/4" DIAM. 1" LONG HEX HEAD BOLT, NUT, AND WASHERS (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 4
SIGN BRACE
T
SIGN BRACE
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


SIGN WIDTH
SIGN BRACE DIMENSIONS

SIGN TYPE
YIELD DIAMOND-SHAPED OTHERS
1/3 SIGN
SIGN WIDTH MORE THAN 36"
SIGN WIDTH HEIGHT MORE THAN 36"
MORE THAN 36"
1/3 SIGN
SIGN HEIGHT
1/2 SIGN
HEIGHT
1/3 SIGN WIDTH - 1 3/4"
1/2 SIGN WIDTH - 2 1/4"
1/2 SIGN WIDTH - 1"
HEIGHT HEIGHT HEIGHT
LESS THAN 72"
SIGN POST TYPE

46 OR 66 TIMBER POST 68 TIMBER POST 7 1/2" 3" DIAM. STEEL PIPE 4 3/4" 2 1/2" SQUARE TUBE 2 1/2" BRACE
BRACE
5 1/2"
BRACE
1/3 SIGN
72" OR LARGER
1/3 SIGN
YIELD SIGN
SMALL RECTANGULAR SIGN
LARGE RECTANGULAR SIGN
B
" N 36
SIGN WIDTH SIGN WIDTH MORE THAN 36" 1/2 SIGN HEIGHT MORE THAN 36"
TOP
2"
1/2 SIGN
HEIGHT
1/2 SIGN
HEIGHT
3/4"
1/8" GALV. STEEL OR S.S. STRAP
1/2" DIAM. HOLE
3" 5/16" DIAM. 1" LONG SLOT (TYP.)
3"
1"
SIDE
BRACE
SIGN BRACE DETAIL

SIGN WIDTH
BRACE
BRACE
STOP SIGN DIAMOND-SHAPED SIGN RAILROAD WARNING SIGN

2/3 SIGN WIDTH - 3 1/4"
1/3 SIGN WIDTH - 1"
S T A
SIGN WIDTH
1/2 SIGN
TOP
HEIGHT
RE
SIGN HEIGHT
SIGN HEIGHT
3/4"
1/2" DIAM. HOLE
HEIGHT
2"
1/8" GALV. STEEL OR S.S. STRAP
1/3 SIGN
1 1/2"
3" 5/16" DIAM. 1" LONG SLOT (TYP.)
3"
1"
NO PASSING ZONE SIGN BRACE ~ SEE DETAIL
SIGN BRACING
1/3 SIGN WIDTH

SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS BRACE APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
SIDE
SIGN WIDTH
NO PASSING ZONE SIGN BRACE DETAIL
NO PASSING ZONE SIGN
SCHOOL ZONE SIGN
Pasco Bakotich III

11-8-07
DATE
SIGN BRACE PLACEMENT
PORTATION.
25335
TH
NE E R
40
"
MORE THAN 36"
NOTE:
T H E O
T
SIGN HEIGHT
SIGN HEIGHT
SIGN HEIGHT
1 1/2"
R E I N A N O
F O R P

CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH WITH TOP OF FOUNDATION (DO NOT GLUE PVC STUBOUT)

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE NON-INSULATED #4 AWG STANDED 2 "CL EARANCE COPPER ~ PROVIDE 3 - 0" SLACK (ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD) 4 - 0" 5 #5 (TYP.) 1 "M AX. AL L AROUND 2 #5 3 #9 (TYP.) 4 -0 " 1 -4 "
PROVIDE SCREEN AROUND BASE ~ SEE SCREEN DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN G-60.10 , SHEET 4
ANCHOR ROD ~ 1 3/4" DIAM. x 4 - 4" LONG, THREADED 8" MIN. EACH END; W/ 2 WASHERS & 4 HEAVY HEX NUTS ~ GALVANIZE EXPOSED ANCHOR ROD END FOR 1 - 0" MIN.
6 "
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
1 - 4"
1 - 4"
8 "
3 "
1 -0 "
FINISH GROUND LINE CONCRETE CL ASS 4 0 0 0
FINISH GROUND LINE
~ 4 EQUAL SPACES
1 -6 "
4 -0 "CAP
#5
1 -4 "
MI N.
2 "
1" STEEL CONDUIT OR AS PER CONTRACT ~ WHEN REQUIRED, 6" CAP EACH END
ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2 5 #5 (TYP.)
4 1 #4 (TYP.) 1
#4 SPIRAL
#4 (TYP.)
3 "
STEEL CONDUIT ANCHOR PLATE CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
TOP
CONCRETE (OR CASI NG, I F REQUI RED )SHAL L BE PL ACED
12 - 3 #9 ( ONE COM PL ETE TURN AT BOTTOM AND TOP)
NOTES 1. SeeStandard Specification 8-21.3(9) for construction requirements. 2. Use a template to locate and secure bolts in place during foundation installation.
VIEW
DI RECTL Y AGAI NST UNDI STURBED EARTH
4 - 0"
S T A
E T
3
. 4 " C L R
#9 (TYP.)
VALUES OF Z
TOTAL SIGN AREA FOUNDATION TYPE ALLOWABLE LATERAL 200 SF OR LESS 200 SF ~ 400 SF BEARING PRESSURE (PSF)
25470
U C
4 #4
CLAMP STEEL REINFORCING BAR WITH CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
Z
13 - 0" 1 16 - 0"
Z
18 - 0" 1500 AND UP
22 - 0"
1000 ~ 1499
CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE (TRUSS-TYPE) FOUNDATION TYPE 1

SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS 6 " APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION 3 "
ISOMETRIC
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
SIDE
R I C H A
N O T
NE E R
E E R
DEPTH = Z ~ SEE TABL E
CONCRETE CL ASS 4 0 0 0 P
# 4 SPI RAL ~ 1 -0 "PI TCH
8 "
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

2 - 6" BOLT CIRCLE
BAR LIST
2 2 3 0
2 "
MARK
LOCATION
QTY.
LENGTH
SIZE
TYPE
CAP VERTICAL 2 3 2" DIAM. HOLE FOR ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) 5 CAP TOP 4
" 4
4 5 12 1 4
3 - 10" 15 - 9" " Z" MINUS CLEARANCES AS REQUIRED 10 - 10"
#4 #5 #9 #4 #5
STR.
CAP HOOPS SHAFT VERTICAL SHAFT SPIRAL
STR.
(NO GALVANIZING REQUIRED)
BENDING DIAGRAM (ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT)

" 0 1
ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL

135 (TYP.)
3 - 4"
3 - 8" SQUARE 2 MAY BE FIELD BENT (TYP.)
LENGTH
3 - 8" SQUARE
SPIRAL BAR
1"
1"
SHOP WELD S( E) L/2
OR S( E) L
FIELD WELD OR SHOP WELD
DOCUM ENT
4 3
SEE TABLE FOR WELD DIMENSIONS
R I C H A
SPIRAL WELDED LAP SPLICE DETAIL
SPIRAL LAP SPLICE DETAIL
S T A
E T
COLUMN AND SHAFT SPIRAL OPTIONS
STEEL REINF. BAR ANCHOR RODS
AASHTO M 31 GRADE 60 ASTM F 1554 GRADE 105 AASHTO M 291
25470
U C
DEFORMED BAR AASHTO M 31 GRADE 60
PLAIN STEEL BAR AASHTO M 31 GRADE 60
COLD DRAWN WIRE AASHTO M 32
DEFORMED WIRE AASHTO M 225
WELD DIMENSIONS (INCHES) ANCHOR NUTS S E 1/8 L 4 ANCHOR WASHERS ANCHORAGE GALVANIZING ANCHOR PLATE AASHTO M 293
# 4
1/2" DIAM.
W20
D20
1/4
CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE (TRUSS-TYPE) FOUNDATION TYPE 1
# 5
5/8" DIAM.
W31
D31
5/16
3/16
AASHTO M 232

ASTM A 36 SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
# 6
3/4" DIAM.
W44
D44
3/8
3/16
Pasco Bakotich III

E E R
ALL OTHER CONCRETE
CLASS 4000
NE E R
WELDING SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF STD. SPEC. 6-02.3(24)E FOR WELD DIMENSIONS ~ SEE TABLE BELOW
SHAFT CONCRETE
CLASS 4000P
06-27-11
DATE
N O T
1/2" PLATE (ASTM A 36)
10 "( TY P . )
" S PL I CE
T S U R
F O R P
R T S


GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD (SEE NOTE 2)
FINISH GROUND LINE
ANCHOR PLATE
4 #10 TYP. 6 #5 TYP.
3" CLR. (TYP.)
ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN G-60.20, SHEET 2

" -0 1 N. I M
2, 3 OR 4 1" STEEL CONDUIT (GALV.) ~ OR AS SHOWN IN CONTRACT 3 #6 TYP.

" -0 1 N. I M " 6 2
NOTES 1. SeeStandard Specification 8-21.3(9)for construction requirements. 2. Grounding Conductor shall be non-insulated #4 AWG stranded copper. Provide a 3 - 0" min. slack.
5 PERPENDICULAR TO ROADWAY CENTERLINE
#5
STRAIGHT
SIDE ON SLOPED GRADE

2 #5 TYP. (SHOWN AT REDUCED SCALE)
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD (SEE NOTE 2)
TOP
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD (SEE NOTE 2) 1" STEEL CONDUIT (GALV.) ~ WHEN
3 - 3"
3 - 6" 2" CLR.
3 - 3" 1 "M AX.
REQUIRED ~ CAP EACH END 6 "
ANCHOR ROD ~ 1 3/4" DIAM. x 4 - 4"
8 "
THREADED 8" MIN. EACH END; W/ 2 WASHERS & 4 HEAVY HEX NUTS ~ GALVANIZE EXPOSED ANCHOR ROD END FOR 1 - 0" MIN.
(TYP.)
PROVIDE SCREEN AROUND BASE ~ SEE SCREEN DETAIL, STD. PLAN G-60.10, SHEET 4
2 "CL R.
4 SPACES @ 6 "
FINISH GROUND LINE

=2 -0 "
# 4
1 -6 "
#10 (TYP.)
COM PACTED I N CONFORM ANCE W I TH STD. SPEC. 2 0 9 . 3 ( 1 )E, M ETHOD 1 OR 4 .
CONCRETE SHAL L BE PL ACED DI RECTL Y AGAI NST UNDI STURBED EARTH
OR AL TERNATEL Y, BACKFI L L PL ACED AROUND FOUNDATI ON SHAL L BE
#5
3 "
6"
1 -0 "
( TYP. )
4 #10 TYP.
#10 TYP.
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
FOR SLOPED GRADE
ISOMETRIC
2 ~ AL L FORM W ORK SHAL L BE REM OVED #5 TYP. DEPTH = Z ~ SEE TABL E
ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN G-60.20 SHEET 2 # 5@ 1 -0 "M AX. SPACI NG Y =Z MI NUS 2 -0 "
S T A
E T
CLAMP STEEL REINFORCING BAR WITH CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE 3 #6
CLAMP STEEL REINFORCING BAR WITH CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
25470
U C
16 -
#10
#5 TYP.
CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE (TRUSS-TYPE) FOUNDATION TYPES 2 & 3

3 #6 6 #5 TYP. 2 - 0" MIN. SPLICE LENGTH

3"
#6
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
#6
3" 3 - 6"
4 "
2 SPACES @ 13" = 2 - 2" 10 - 0"
2 SPACES @ 13" = 2 - 2"
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
SIDE
END
R I C H A
N O T
NE E R
E E R
FOR LEVEL GRADE
6 "
1 -0 "
MI N.
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAW N BY: BI L L BERENS
BAR LIST ~ TYPES 2 AND 3
VALUES OF Z
TOTAL SIGN AREA FOUNDATION TYPE SIZE ALLOWABLE LATERAL 200 SF OR LESS 200 SF ~ 400 SF BEARING PRESSURE (PSF)
TOTAL SIGN AREA MARK LOCATION 200 SF OR LESS QTY. SIZE +200 SF -400 SF QTY.
PEDESTAL HOOP
#4
#4 TYPE 2 9 - 0" 11 - 0" 2500 OR GREATER
FOUNDATION WALL TIES
#5
#5 NOT LESS THAN 1500
TYPE 3 3 FOUNDATION VERTICALS 14 #6 14 #6
11 - 0"
13 - 6"
PEDESTAL VERTICALS
16
#10
16
#10
FOUNDATION WALL HORIZONTALS 5 AT SLOPE 2 #5 2 #5
FOUNDATION WALL HORIZONTALS
VARIES SEE PLANS
#5
VARIES SEE PLANS
#5
BENDING DIAGRAM
CONCRETE 1 -0 "
" 6
CLASS 4000P
3 - 2" 135 (TYP.)
2 - 6"
STEEL REINF. BAR ANCHOR RODS
AASHTO M 31 GRADE 60 ASTM F 1554 GRADE 105 AASHTO M 291
R I C H A
S T A
E T
2 3 - 2" SQUARE VARIES 4
ANCHOR NUTS ANCHOR WASHERS ANCHORAGE GALVANIZING ANCHOR PLATE
AASHTO M 232
25470
U C
ASTM A 36
3 -0 "
CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE (TRUSS-TYPE) FOUNDATION TYPES 2 & 3

Pasco Bakotich III

E E R
AASHTO M 293
06-27-11
DATE
N O T
Z MI NUS 6 "
NE E R
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 1 1/4" RIGID GALV. STEEL CONDUIT
SHAFT CONCRETE ALL OTHER CONCRETE STEEL REINF. BAR ANCHOR RODS CLASS 4000P 1
~ TO BE INSTALLED WHERE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER 1 - 6" D 1 - 6" 1 - 9" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE (TYP.) 1 -6 "
CLASS 4000 AASHTO M 31 GRADE 60 ASTM F 1554 GRADE 105 AASHTO M 291
. N I M " 2 1
8" (TYP.)
2 5 (TYP.)
1 -6 "
1 - 3" DIAM. NOTCH AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR SHAFT REINFORCEMENT WHEN D = 4 - 0"
ANCHOR NUTS ANCHOR WASHERS ANCHORAGE GALVANIZING ANCHOR
45^ (TYP.) 3/4" CHAMFER 3 (TYP.) SYMM. ABT EXCEPT CONDUIT
AASHTO M 293
LAP SPLICE DETAIL

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE NON-INSULATED #4 AWG STRANDED
TOP
1 - 9" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE
1/2" x 21" x 21"
AASHTO M 232
ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL
(ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD) 1 CASE THE EXCAVATION AND PLACE USING TREMIE METHOD WHEN WATER IS PRESENT CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH WITH TOP OF FOUNDATION (DO NOT GLUE PVC STUBOUT) BASE 6 " ELEVATION 6" SYMMETRICAL ABOUT EXCEPT CONDUIT N EQUAL SPACES 1 -0 " 4 4 " 1 - 0" 2 "CL R.
ANCHOR ROD ~ 1" x 2 - 9" THREADED 8" MIN. EACH END; W/ 3 WASHERS AND 4 HEAVY HEX NUTS 6 "
LEVEL 1 - 0" MIN. GALVANIZING
FINISH 2" CLR. 3 3 -0 " GROUND LINE
(TYP.)
TABLE
1 -6 " MI N. SPAN LENGTH VARIABLES 60 OR LESS DIMENSION ~ D BAR SPACES ~ N SHAFT DEPTH ~ Z 4 - 0" 2 11 - 6" 61 TO 90 91 TO 120121 TO 150 CONCRETE SHAL L BE PL ACED 5 - 0" 3 13 - 6" 6 - 0" 6 15 - 0" 7 - 0" 10 16 - 6" DI RECTL Y AGAI NST EARTH 6" SPI RAL W I TH 1 -0 "M AX. PI TCH 5 (TYP.) 2 1 / 2 "CL R.
FINISH GROUND LINE
1 1/2" 4 CLR.
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/ 5 1/2" x 1 5/8" x 2 - 0" ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL SHEAR KEY
3 - 0"
END
DOCUM ENT
BAR LIST
SPAN LENGTH MARK LOCATION
REINFORCING BAR WITH CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
S T A
60 OR LESS QTY. SIZE 9 4 6 4 4
61 TO 90 QTY. 14 1 8 6 8 SIZE 11 4 7 4 4
91 TO 120 QTY. 18 1 10 6 14 SIZE 11 4 8 4 4
121 TO 150 QTY. 23 1 12 6 22 SIZE 11 4 8 4 4
CLAMP STEEL
E T
2 3 4 5
SHAFT - SPIRAL CAP - TOP AND BOTTOM CAP - SIDES CAP - HOOPS
1 8 6 6
25470
U C
BENDING DIAGRAM
6 "
ELEVATION
1 4 1 -4 " Z + 2 - 4" D + 2 - 8" D + 2 - 8" 2 - 9" 5 "( TYP. )
SIGN BRIDGE (TRUSS-TYPE) FOUNDATION TYPE 1
FOUNDATION TYPE 1

1 2 - 6" 4 2
5" R. 3
2 -9 "
Pasco Bakotich III

ISOMETRIC
2 DETERMINE LENGTH FROM PLANS
NE E R
SHAFT - VERTICAL
11
06-27-11
DATE
(ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT) 2" RADIUS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
R I C H A
N O T
E E R
PLATE
ASTM A 36
COPPER ~ PROVIDE 3 - 0" SLACK
DEPTH = Z ~ SEE TABL E
T S U R
. R L C " 3
F O R P
R T S


D 1 - 6"
CONCRETE STEEL REINF. BAR ANCHOR RODS CLASS 4000P AASHTO M 31 GRADE 60 ASTM F 1554 GRADE 105 AASHTO M 291 3/4" CHAMFER
1 - 6" 45 (TYP.)
1 -6 "
1 - 3" DIAM. 1 1/16" DIAM. NOTCH AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR SHAFT REINFORCEMENT WHEN D = 4 - 0" HOLE (TYP.)
1 1/4" RIGID GALV. STEEL CONDUIT ~ TO BE INSTALLED WHERE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER
ANCHOR NUTS ANCHOR WASHERS ANCHORAGE GALVANIZING ANCHOR PLATE
1 - 9" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE (TYP.) 1 - 9" DIAM. 3 (TYP.) 1 (TYP.) BOLT CIRCLE
AASHTO M 293 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE NON-INSULATED #4 AWG STRANDED COPPER ~ PROVIDE A 3 - 0" SLACK AASHTO M 232 (ROUTE TO GROUNDING STUD) CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH WITH TOP OF BARRIER (DO NOT GLUE PVC STUBOUT)
1 -6 "
SYMM. ABT
TOP
1/2" x 21" x 21"
ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL
ASTM A 36
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT 1 - 0"
6" 3 - 0" ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL 1 (TYP.) 4 (TYP.) 3 -0 " 2 "CL R. 3/4" CHAMFER 2 (TYP.) LEVEL 1 - 0" (TYP.)
N EQUAL SPACES 1
ANCHOR ROD ~ 1" DIAM. x 2 - 9" THREADED 8" MIN.
1 - 0" MIN.
TABLE
SPAN LENGTH VARIABLES 60 OR LESS DIMENSION ~ D BAR SPACES ~ N 2 SHAFT DEPTH ~ Z TYPE 3 7 - 0" 8 - 6" 10 - 0" 11 - 6" 4 - 0" 2 5 - 6" 61 TO 90 5 - 0" 3 6 - 6" 91 TO 120 120 TO 150
GALVANIZING (TYP.) 2" CLR. 6
ISOMETRIC
1 - 0" TYP. 7 FINISH GROUND LINE 7
6 - 0" 6 7 - 6"
7 - 0" 10 8 - 6"
2 (TYP.) 6"
5 4
7 3 (TYP.) 8 @ 1 -6 "M AX. SPACI NG 4 DEPTH = Z ~ SEE TABL E
1 - 0" (TYP.)
(TYP.)
BAR LIST
SPAN LENGTH FOUNDATION TYPE MARK LOCATION
3 0 "
5 (TYP.)
60 OR LESS QTY. SIZE
61 TO 90 QTY. 4 16 8 8 42 8 4 8 12 SIZE 7 4 4 7 6 5 5 5 5
91 TO 120 QTY. 5 18 14 10 42 8 4 10 14 SIZE 8 4 4 8 7 5 5 5 5
120 TO 150 CLAMP STEEL QTY. 6 18 22 12 50 8 4 12 16 SIZE 8 4 4 8 7 5 5 REINFORCING BAR WITH CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
5 1
3" CLR.
1 2 3 2 AND 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 8 8
CAP - TOP CAP - SIDES CAP - HOOPS CAP - BOTTOM FND. WALL - VERTICAL FND. WALL - TIES FND. WALL - HORIZONTAL FND. WALL - HORIZONTAL FND. WALL - HORIZONTAL
4 14 6 8 30 8 4 8 10
6 4 4 6 6 5 5 5 5
S T A
E T
5 5
BENDING DIAGRAM
END
D + 2 - 8" 1 -4 " 2 - 9" 2 - 9" 6 "
SIDE
25470
U C
5" R. 1 2 5 7 D + 2 - 8" VARIES VARIES
VARI ES
1 -5 "
2 - 6"
CONCRETE BELOW FINISHED GROUNDLINE SHALL BE PLACED DIRECTLY AGAINST UNDISTURBED EARTH, OR ALTERNATELY, BACKFILL PLACED AROUND FOUNDATION SHALL BE COMPACTED IN CONFORMANCE WITH STANDARD SPECIFICATION 2-09.3(1)E, METHOD 1 OR 4. ALL FORMWORK SHALL BE REMOVED.
5 "
SIGN BRIDGE (TRUSS-TYPE) FOUNDATION TYPES 2 & 3
5" 4
5 -1 0 "

8
FOUNDATION TYPES 2 & 3
2 5 7
V A R
I E S
Pasco Bakotich III

NE E R
3 - 0"
6 "
10 - 0"
06-27-11
DATE
(ALL DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT) 2" RADIUS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
R I C H A
N O T
E E R
EACH END; W/ 3 WASHERS AND 4 HEAVY HEX NUTS
1 -6 "
MI N.
2 "CL R.
6 "
1 -6 "
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 3/8" 3 1/2" 6" STEEL PLATE (TYP.) 1" (TYP.) 1 1 / 4 " 9/16" 3/4" SLOTTED HOLE (VERT.) FOR 1/2" DIAM. MOUNTING BEAM BOLT (TYP.) ( TYP. )

LOCKNUT WITH NYLON INSERT, WASHER STEEL CHANNEL ~ C59
NOTES 1. Refer to Contract Plans for Monotube Beam Bracket element sizes, dimensions, and weld symbols.
1 1 / 2 "
( TYP. )
3/4" DIAM. HEX NUT AND WASHER 3/4" DIAM. SIGN BRACKET ROD WITH 4 WASHERS 3" Z-BAR AND 4 LOCK NUTS 3/8" 4" 3" STEEL PLATE (TYP.)
2. SeeStandard Plan G-90.10 for Sign Bracing and Lighting Placement details. 3. Galvanize all non stainless steel parts. 4. SeeStandard Plan G-90.40 for Sign Lighting details.
3/4" DIAM. SIGN 3/8" 4" 3" STEEL PLATE (TYP.) BRACKET ROD
VERTICAL BRACE ~ W413 STEEL MONOTUBE BEAM
VIEW
5. Hand holes shall be installed at the time of fabrication. Only additional conduits for lighting accommodations to previously non illuminated structures may be installed in field as long as the proper repairs are made to the structure. For details not shown, see Standard Plan J-75.40.
(TYP.)
A
(TYP.) 1/4 STEEL CHANNEL ~ C59 (TYP.) SIGN FACE ( TYP. ) 1 / 2 "
3/4" DIAM. SIGN BRACKET ROD MONOTUBE BEAM
POST CLIP
(TYP.) 3/8" 4" 3" STEEL PLATE VERTICAL BRACE ~ W413 STEEL (TYP.) 1/2" (TYP.) STEEL CHANNEL ~ (SEE NOTE 6)
7. 3 - 0" max. Vertical Brace and Monotube Beam Bracket spacing for walk-in cabinet Type VMS installation.
STEEL CHANNEL ~ C59 (TYP.)
1/4
SIGN BRACKET ROD ~ WITH LOCK NUTS (TYP.) MONOTUBE BEAM
1/2" DIAM. 1 1/2" LONG STEEL BOLT WITH WASHER, LOCK WASHER, AND LOCKNUT ~ DRILL 9/16" HOLES THROUGH WIDE FLANGE PER BOLT
C59
SECTION
A
(TYP.) 1/4
(TYP.) 6" DIAM. HAND HOLE AND REINFORCEMENT RING (TYP.) ~ INSTALL ON TOP OF MAST ARM AT EACH SIGN LIGHT LOCATION (TYP.) (SEE NOTE 5) 1 1/4" (TYP.)
DETAIL
SIGN FACE
C
SIGN BRIDGE OR CANTILEVER
WINDBEAM (TYP.)
HOLE IN CHANNEL FOR VERTICAL BRACES WITH LUMINAIRES, USE DETAILS BELOW MATCHLINE ON LUMINAIRE BRACKET DETAIL ~ STANDARD PLAN G-90.40 MATCHLINE
AT TOP OF SIGN
S T A
E T
WINDBEAM AND POST CLIP (TYP.) MONOTUBE BEAM 2 " BRACKET (TYP.) 3 "
25470
U C
BOTTOM OF SIGN
SIGN LIGHTING LUMINAIRE
OVERHEAD SIGN MOUNTING (MONOTUBE STRUCTURE)
SIDE VIEW
~ WHEN SHOWN IN THE CONTRACT, SEE STANDARD PLAN G-90.40 VERTICAL BRACE ~ W413 STEEL (TYP.) (SEE NOTE 6) SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
MONOTUBE CONNECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

LUMINAIRE BRACKET (TYP.)
06-27-11
DATE
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
~ WHEN SIGN LIGHTING IS SHOWN IN CONTRACT
MONOTUBE STRUCTURE
R I C H A
N O T
13/16" 1" SLOTTED
MONOTUBE BEAM
HORIZONTAL 3" Z-BAR
NE E R
E R
WINDBEAM AND
6. For VMS mounting, the Contractor may substitute W612 steel or W813 steel sections for the Vertical Brace 4 13 steel.
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAWN BY: LISA CYFORD 3/16"

NOTES 1. All Angle Irons and Steel Straps shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 232. Pipe, Caps, and T-Adapter shall be 1" I.D. white PVC, or Primed Steel, except the water intake pipe shall be white PVC. Pipe shall be Sch. 40. All pipe joints shall be threaded. Gage assembly pipe, fiberglass rod, and angle iron can be extended as needed to fit site requirements. Extra Pipe Clamps shall be added for security. Score the water intake pipe 1/4" deep, 1/32" wide (width of saw blade), every 1/2", alternating cuts on top and bottom for drainage. Place at lowest water level. Water level may vary, depending on season. Pour in approximately 1 tablespoon of cork dust at installation, and after each reading.
2" CAP STEEL ANGLE IRON 8 - 0" 2" 2" 2" 3/8" - 16 3" HEX BOLT, STEEL WITH 1" WASHER 1" 2"
2.
1/4" DIAM. HOLE (1) FOR AIR EXCHANGE 1 - 0" 3/8" - 16 HEX NUT WITH 1" WASHER 1 - 2"
ANGLE IRON EXTENSION ~ SEE NOTE 3
3.
A
EXTENSION SPLIT PIPE CLAMP
4.
1/4" 6 LONG FIBERGLASS ROD 4 - 0" 1 - 10"
1/4" 6 FIBERGLASS ROD
5. 6.
SECTION
PIPE ~ SEE NOTE 2
EXTENSION SPLIT PIPE CLAMP (TYP.) 1 - 0"
WATER LEVEL ~ SEE NOTE 5 1/2" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) 6" 4"
3/8" - 16 3/4" HEX BOLT WITH LOCK NUT (TYP.)
2 - 8"
1/4" STEEL
1" (TYP.)
SOIL SURFACE 4"
1 1/2" ANGLE IRON 8 - 0" MIN.
STEEL STRAP
1/4" 6 FIBERGLASS ROD
2 - 0"
1 - 0"
STEEL STRAP (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL
2 - 0" MIN.
6" ANGLE IRON ~ SEE DETAIL
3 3/4"
1/4"
1/2"
SANDRA L. SALISBURY
T-ADAPTER ~ SEE NOTE 2
MENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND
CUT POINT ON BOTH LEGS PVC CAP 2"
APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
CREST GAGE
CAP
1" I.D. 6" PVC WATER INTAKE PIPE ~ SEE NOTE 4
ANGLE IRON DETAIL

(SHOWN WITH EXTENSION)
CREST GAGE STANDARD PLAN H-30.10-00

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
WATER INTAKE AND CLEANOUT ASSEMBLY

DETAIL
B ISOMETRIC VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
6 - 0"
2 - 0"
1" I.D. SCHEDULE 40 PVC OR PRIMED STEEL PIPE
2"
2"

WEATHER RESISTANT BATTERY COMPARTMENT OPTICAL READER
1 - 9"
MOISTURE-PROOF (POTTED) INTERNAL DATA LOGGER
REMOVABLE ADJUSTER CAP
"0" CALIBRATION POINT (FINISHED GRADE)
3"
WELL SCREEN SLOTS BEGIN (ALL SLOTS 0.01")
WELL SCREEN
NO. 1 SAND OR PEA GRAVEL VARIES DEPENDING ON MODEL
MARK W. MAURER
WELL SCREEN SLOTS END
END OF PROBE 4 1/2"
AUTOMATED GROUND WATER MONITORING WELL STANDARD PLAN H-32.10-00
6"
SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION 2" MIN. ANNULUS AROUND WELL SCREEN
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
BENTONITE PELLETS
"0" CALIBRATION POINT MARKER
6"


STEEL POST FASTENERS
WOOD POST FASTENERS

SIZE / TYPE QUANTITY WASHERS LOCKNUTS
SIZE / TYPE
QUANTITY
WASHERS
LOCKNUTS
3/8" DIAM. 4 3/4" BOLT 3/8" DIAM. 3/4" BOLT 3/16" DIAM. 1" SCREW
2
4 4
4 8 8
2 4 4
3/8" DIAM. 2 3/4" BOLT 3/8" DIAM. 3/4" BOLT 3/16" DIAM. 1" SCREW 1 7/8" M-CLAMP
2
4 4 2
4 8 8 4
2 4 4 4
NOTES
MAILBOX ~ SIZE 1, 1A, OR 2 (SIZE 1A SHOWN) (SEE TABLE, SHEET 2, FOR DIMENSIONS)
1.
A socket and wedge anchoring system that meets the NCHRP 350 crash test criteria may be substituted in lieu of the anti-twist plate designs shown. Anti-twist plates are not required for wood post installations. The platform design shown on this plan features slots that accomodate several types of mailbox supports, only those slots necessary for assembling the type being installed are required. An adjustable platform may be used in lieu of this design, but it must fit the bracket design shown on this plan. Brackets are required for all single-post installations. Field drilling may be necessary. Center the mailbox on the platform to ensure space for the mailbox door to open and to allow space for installing the fasteners (See ALIGNMENT DETAIL, Sheet 2). Spacing of mailbox mounting holes varies among manufacturers. Attachment of the mailbox to the platform may require drilling additional holes through the mailbox to fit the platform. Attach a newspaper box to a steel post with two 1 7/8" Muffler Clamps spaced 4" apart. Field drill 7/16" holes in the newspaper box to fit. Use 2 1/2" 1/4" lag bolts to attach newspaper boxes to wood posts. Newspaper boxes must not extend beyond the front of the mailbox when the mailbox door is closed. A Type 2 Support (Standard Plan H-70.20) is required when 2 or more mailboxes are to be installed on one support.
2.
3/16" 1" PHILLPS HEAD SCREW, 2 WASHERS, AND LOCKNUT WITH NYLON INSERT (TYP.) ~ 4 SETS MIN.
3.
PLATFORM (SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2, SEE NOTE 2)
PLATFORM (SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2, SEE NOTE 2)
ADDITIONAL WASHERS ~ AS REQUIRED TO FILL GAP (TYP.)
4.
3/8" 4 3/4" HEX HEAD BOLT, 2 WASHERS & LOCKNUT, LENGTH TO FIT (TYP.)
5.
BRACKET (TYP.) (SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2) 3/8" 2 3/4" HEX BOLT 2 WASHERS & LOCKNUT (TYP.) 1 1/2"
1 1/2"
3/8" 3/4" HEX BOLT 2 WASHERS AND LOCKNUT (TYP.)
S T A
E T
N G
4"
4"
ANTI-TWIST PLATE (SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2, SEE NOTE 1)
7/16" HOLE (TYP.) 7/16" HOLE (TYP.)
7/16" HOLE (TYP.) 3/8" 2 3/4" HEX BOLT, NUT & 2 WASHERS (TYP.)
4 4 WOOD POST (SEE STD. SPEC. 9-28.14(1))
STEEL POST (SEE STD. SPEC. 9-32.1)
ANTI-TWIST PLATE (SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2, SEE NOTE 1) STEEL POST
MAILBOX SUPPORT TYPE 1

3"
STANDARD PLAN H-70.10-00

1 7/8" MUFFLER CLAMP (1 7/8" M-CLAMP) 2 LOCKNUTS & 2 WASHERS (TYP.)
WOOD POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL

(SEE STEEL POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL FOR SPECIFICATIONS NOT SHOWN)
ALTERNATE ANTI-TWIST PLATE DESIGN
Pasco Bakotich III

09-05-07
DATE
STEEL POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL
PORTATION.
24557
NOTE:
B A K
T
BRACKET (TYP.) (SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2)
NE E R
I I I O O N
F O R P

MAILBOX & PLATFORM DIMENSIONS
DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA SIZE 1 1A 2 MAILBOX DIMENSIONS L 19" 21" 24" W 6 1/2" 8" 11 1/2" H 8 1/2" 10 1/2" 13 1/2" PLATFORM DIMENSIONS L 17" 19" 21" W 6" 7 1/2" 11" H 1" 1" 1" EDGE OF SHOULDER OR TURNOUT VARIABLE 6" TO 12"

VARIABLE 0" TO 12" VARIABLE 0" TO 12"
FACE OF CURB
BACK OF SIDEWALK
7 1/2" 2 3/4" 1 1/8"
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE H 3 - 3" 5/16" 1 1/4" SLOT (TYP.)
7/16" 1 1/4" SLOT (TYP.) 1 7/16"
CURB TYPE VARIES SIDEWALK
2 1/4"
1 1/8"
3 - 3"
3 - 3"
STEEL OR WOOD POST
STEEL OR WOOD POST
STEEL OR WOOD POST
AT EDGE OF SHOULDER
SYMM. ABT
BEHIND CURB
UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN IN THE PLANS
BEHIND SIDEWALK
MAILBOX PLACEMENT SECTIONS

3/16" (TYP.) L 5/8" R (TYP.)
MAILBOX, PLATFORM, & POST
END
MAILBOX 1/4" 5/8" SLOT (TYP.)
5/8" (TYP.)
TOP
5/8"
SYMM. ABT
MAILBOX MOUNTING HOLE (TYP.)
PLATFORM DETAIL
SYMM. ABT 7/16" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.)
HOLE PLACEMENT FOR ALTERNATE DESIGN (TYP.) 3 - 3" MIN. O.C. POST TO POST 4 - 3" MIN.
TYPE 2
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
SIDE
SPACE PROVIDED ON BOTH ENDS TO ALLOW ACCESS TO FASTENERS (SEE NOTE 3)
PLATFORM
ALIGNMENT DETAIL
1 1/2" 1 1/2"
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
3/4"
B A K
2 3/4"
2 3/4"
S T A

1 1/2" 1 1/4" 6" NEWSPAPER BOX ~ SEE NOTE 4 FOR DETAILS SEE STD. PLAN H-70.20
E T
N G
90^ 6 1/4" 6 1/4" 90^ BEND ANTI-TWIST PLATE ~ SEE DETAILS SHEETS 1 & 2, SEE NOTE 1
6"
2 - 0"
3 - 0"
4"

3/4" 1" SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS
SIDE
2"
ISOMETRIC
STEEL POST WOOD POST
Pasco Bakotich III

09-05-07
DATE
FRONT
BRACKET DETAIL
POST PLACEMENT DETAIL
PORTATION.
1 1/2"
ANTI-TWIST PLATE DETAIL
24557
TOP
NOTE:
T
7 1/2"
NE E R
4 3/4"
I I I O O N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA MAILBOX ~ SIZE 1, 1A, OR 2 (SIZE 1A SHOWN) (SEE TABLE, STD. PLAN H-70.10, SHEET 2, FOR DIMENSIONS)

NOTES 1. The anchoring system shall meet NCHRP 350 crash test criteria. Use a socket and wedge system, or the anchoring system supplied by or recommended by the Type 2 Support manufacturer. A maximum of 5 mailboxes may be installed on a Type 2 Support. The Platform design shown in this plan is detailed in the PLATFORM DETAIL, Standard Plan H-70.10, Sheet 2. The design features slots that accomodate several types of mailbox supports; only those slots necessary for assembling the type being installed are required. An adjustable platform may be used in lieu of this platform design. Adjustable platforms must fit the 1 7/8" M-Clamp. Center the mailbox on the platform to ensure space for the mailbox door to open and to allow space for installing the fasteners (See ALIGNMENT DETAIL). Spacing of mailbox mounting holes varies among manufacturers. Attachment of the mailbox to the platform may require drilling additional holes through the mailbox to fit the platform. Attach a newspaper box to a Type 2 Support with two 1 7/8" Muffler Clamps spaced 4" apart. Field drill 7/16" holes in the newspaper box to fit. Newspaper boxes must not extend beyond the front of the mailbox when the mailbox door is closed.
2. 3.
3/16" 1" PHILLPS HEAD SCREW, 2 WASHERS, AND LOCKNUT WITH NYLON INSERT (TYP.) ~ 4 SETS MIN.
SNOW GUARD ~ WHEN REQUIRED (SEE DETAIL, SHEET 2)
4.
5.
PLATFORM ~ SEE NOTE 3
1 7/8" MUFFLER CLAMP (1 7/8" M-CLAMP), 2 WASHERS AND 2 LOCKNUTS (TYP.) MAILBOX, PLATFORM & SUPPORT
MAILBOX
B A K
MAILBOX MOUNTING HOLE (TYP.)
S T A
E T
N G
PLATFORM
NEWSPAPER BOX ~ SEE NOTE 5
ALIGNMENT DETAIL
SEE NOTE 4

ASSEMBLY DETAIL
Pasco Bakotich III

09-05-07
DATE
NOTE:
TYPE 2 MAILBOX SUPPORT (SEE STD. SPEC. 9-32.7)
PORTATION.
24557
NE E R
SPACE PROVIDED ON BOTH ENDS TO ALLOW ACCESS TO FASTENERS (SEE NOTE 4)
T
ADDITIONAL WASHERS ~ AS REQUIRED TO FILL GAP (TYP.)
I I I O O N
F O R P

VARIABLE 6" TO 12" EDGE OF SHOULDER OR TURNOUT

VARIABLE 0" TO 12" VARIABLE 0" TO 12"
FACE OF CURB
BACK OF SIDEWALK
A
1 - 6" 3 - 3" SIDEWALK 1/2" RAISED EXPANDED METAL
(TYP.) 1/8
1" 1" 1/8" ANGLE
ANGLE IRON 3 - 3" 3 - 3" CURB TYPE VARIES
9"
1/8
1- 4
AT EDGE OF SHOULDER
BEHIND CURB
UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN IN THE PLANS
BEHIND SIDEWALK
1/2" RAISED EXPANDED METAL MUFFLER CLAMP
MAILBOX PLACEMENT SECTIONS

SECTION A
FRONT VIEW
7/16" DIAM. (TYP.)
1 1/4" 1 1/4"
BOTTOM VIEW
SNOW GUARD DETAIL
4 - 3" MIN.
4 - 3" MIN. SNOW GUARD ~ WHEN REQUIRED, PLACE ON LEADING END OF SUPPORT (SEE DETAIL)
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
U.S. MAIL
B A K
5" MIN. BETWEEN MAILBOXES NEWSPAPER BOX ~ SEE NOTE 5
S T A
E T
N G
ANCHORING SYSTEM ~ (SOCKET AND WEDGE SHOWN) SEE NOTE 1


(WOOD POST SHOWN) FOR DETAILS SEE STD. PLAN I-70.10
MAILBOX SUPPORTS TYPE 2
Pasco Bakotich III

09-05-07
DATE
SPACING DETAIL
PORTATION.
24557
NOTE:
T
NE E R
TYPE 2
TYPE 2
TYPE 2
TYPE 1
I I I O O N
F O R P


NOTE Perform maintenance in accordance with Standard Specification 8-01.3(9)A and 8-01.3(15).
SILT FENCE ~ SEE STD. PLAN I-30.10 PLACE SAND BAGS AS REQUIRED AROUND CULVERT TO PROVIDE SUPPORT FOR SILT FENCE
GEOTEXTILE FOR TEMPORARY SILT FENCE ~ SEE STD. SPEC. 9-33.2(1), TABLE 6
POST ~ SEE STD. SPEC. 8-01.3(9)A) 2 - 0" MIN. CULVERT, BOX CULVERT, OR PIPE ARCH ~ END TREATMENT VARIES
DI
ST
B UR
ED
RO
C TE
TE
RE
A
FLOW
SILT FENCE DESIGN

EDGE OF GEOTEXTILE
SECTION
COMPOST BERM ~ SEE STD. PLAN I-80.10
MARK W. MAURER
MENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPART-
CULVERT, BOX CULVERT, OR PIPE ARCH ~ END TREATMENT VARIES
MENT OF TRANSPORTATION.
DI
ST
B UR
ED
AR
EA
EROSION CONTROL AT CULVERT ENDS STANDARD PLAN I-30.20-00

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
PR
TE
CT
ED
EA
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
COMPOST BERM DESIGN
A RE
EMBED POSTS INTO SAND BAGS AS REQUIRED
1 - 0" MIN.

DRAWN BY: LISA CYFORD SPACING VARIES (TYP.) ~ SEE WATTLE SPACING TABLE

NOTES 1. Wattles shall be in accordance with Standard Specification 9-14.5(5). Install Wattles along contours. Installation shall be in accordance with Standard Specification 8-01.3(10). Securely knot each end of Wattle. Abut adjacent Wattles tightly, end to end, without overlapping the ends. Pilot holes may be driven through the Wattles and into the soil when soil conditions require. Live stakes may be used for permanent installation and shall be in accordance with Standard Specification 9-14.5(6). Wattles shall be inspected regularly, and immediately after a rainfall produces runoff, to ensure they remain thoroughly entrenched and in contact with the soil. Perform maintenance in accordance with Standard Specification 8-01.3(15).
A 2.
22 3 - 0" WOODEN STAKE
3.
WATTLE
IE S A R
4" MAX.
3" MIN.
4.
L E N
T H
TRENCH ~ SEE NOTE 1
5.
5" MAX. 2" MIN.
6.
STAGGER JOINTS (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 2
1 - 0" MIN.
22 3 - 0" WOODEN STAKE SPACED EVERY 4 - 0" O.C. (TYP.)
TYPICAL SECTION
PLAN VIEW WATTLE DETAIL
SEDIMENT TRAPPING AREA (TYP.)
SPACING VARIES (TYP.) ~ SEE WATTLE SPACING TABLE
MARK W. MAURER
WATTLE SPACING TABLE

WATTLE ~ SEE DETAIL
NOTE:
THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCU-
SLOPE
1:1
MAXIMUM SPACING
10 - 0"
2:1
20 - 0"
WATTLE INSTALLATION ON SLOPE STANDARD PLAN I-30.30-00

3:1
30 - 0"
4:1
40 - 0"
SECTION
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE


NOTES
0"
10
1.
10 - 0" @ 30^ ANGLE EACH END TO PREVENT FLOW AROUND (TYP.)
Compost Sock shall be in accordance with Standard Specification 9-14.5(6). Compost Sock shall be a minimum of 8" in diameter or sized to suit conditions as specified by the Engineer or Contract. Compost material to be dispersed on site, as determined by the Engineer. When placing Compost Sock on slopes, use Erosion Control Blanket if specified by the Engineer and in accordance with Standard Specification 9-14.5(2). See Standard Plan I-60.10. Always install Compost Sock perpendicular to slope and along contour lines. Remove sediment from the up slope side of the Compost Sock when accumulation has reached 1/2 of the effective height of the Compost Sock. Live stakes can be used in addition to wooden stakes and shall be in accordance with Standard Specification 9-14.6(1). See plans for species selection and spacing.
30 ^
2.
SPACING VARIES
DISTURBED AREA
RI ES
(TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 4
3.
LE
NG
TH
VA
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET ~ SEE NOTE 3
COMPOST SOCK ~ SEE DETAIL
5.
CONTOUR LINE (TYP.)
PROTECTED AREA 6.
SECTION
22 3 - 0" WOODEN STAKE, SPACED EVERY 3 - 0" O.C. (TYP.)
PLAN VIEW
EXCESS SOCK MATERIAL, DRAWN IN AND TIED OFF AT STAKE (TYP.)
SLOPE INSTALLATION
22 3 - 0" WOODEN STAKE
DRAINAGE GRATE (CIRCULAR GRATE SHOWN)

STATE OF WASHINGTON
COMPOST SOCK ~ SEE NOTE 1
22 3 - 0" WOODEN STAKE, SPACED EVERY 3 - 0" O.C. (TYP.) EROSION CONTROL BLANKET ~ SEE NOTE 3 COMPOST SOCK ~ SEE DETAIL
NOTE:
REGISTERED LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
SANDRA L. SALISBURY
1 - 0"
MIN.
COMPOST SOCK
1 - 0" MIN. OVERLAP TYPICAL SECTION WIRE TIED (TYP.)
STANDARD PLAN I-30.40-00

COMPOST SOCK DETAIL
Pasco Bakotich III

ISOMETRIC VIEW
10-12-07
DATE
CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
4.
4" MAX.
3" MIN.


NOTES
GEOTEXTILE INLET
1.
Prefabricated units may be used in lieu of the design shown on this plan upon approval of the Engineer. Structure shall be constructed such that geotextile material shall be fastened to posts creating a seamless joint. Ensure that ponding height of water does not cause flooding on adjacent roadways or private property. Perform maintenance in accordance with Standard Specification 8-01.3(15).
2.
3.
4.
PLAN VIEW
(CROSS BRACES NOT SHOWN)
POST (SEE STD. SPEC. 8-01.3(9)A).
FASTEN CROSS BRACES TOGETHER WITH SCREWS, NAILS. NYLON TIES OR WIRE
ATTACH WOOD OR METAL CROSS BRACES TO STABILIZE WOOD
GEOTEXTILE FOR TEMPORARY SILT FENCE ~ SEE STD. SPEC 9-33.2(1), TABLE 6 2 - 0" MIN.
COMPACTED NATIVE SOIL
STATE OF WASHINGTON
FLO
W
GRATE
REGISTERED LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
MARK W. MAURER
SILT FENCE ~ SEE STD. PLAN I-30.10
NOTE:
4"

1 - 0" MIN.
BURY GEOTEXTILE IN TRENCH
4"
INLET
INLET
TEMPORARY SILT FENCE FOR INLET PROTECTION IN UNPAVED AREAS STANDARD PLAN I-40.10-00
ISOMETRIC VIEW SECTION A

(ENTIRE FENCE NOT SHOWN FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES)
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE


NOTES 1. Size the Below Inlet Grate Device (BIGD) for the storm water structure it will service. The BIGD shall have a built-in high-flow relief system (overflow bypass). The retrieval system must allow removal of the BIGD without spilling the collected material. Perform maintenance in accordance with Standard Specification 8-01.3(15).
2. 3.
4.
5" MAX.
DRAINAGE GRATE
TRIM
GRATE FRAME
DRAINAGE GRATE ~ RECTANGULAR GRATE SHOWN SEDIMENT AND DEBRIS OVERFLOW BYPASS
RETRIEVAL SYSTEM (TYP.)
BELOW INLET GRATE DEVICE
FILTERED WATER
BELOW INLET GRATE DEVICE
OVERFLOW BYPASS (TYP.)
MARK W. MAURER
SECTION VIEW
NOT TO SCALE
ISOMETRIC VIEW
NOTE:

MENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION STANDARD PLAN I-40.20-00

Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE


NOTES 1. Geotextile encased Check Dams shall meet the requirements of Standard Specifications 8-01.3(6)A and 9-14.5(4). Install the sloped ends of the Check Dam a minimum of 3" higher than the top of the check dam in the channel to ensure that water flows over the dam and not around it. Flat bottom ditch design shown, Check Dam installation details are similar for "V" bottom ditches. Perform maintenance in accordance with Standard Specifications 8-01.3(15).
2.
FRONT APRON
FRONT APRON
6" OVERLAP (TYP.)
3.
BACK OF DITCH (TYP.)
4.
DIG TRENCH APPROXIMATELY 6" WIDE AND DEEP, STAPLE END OF GEOTEXTILE AND BACKFILL WITH NATIVE MATERIAL
ORIENT THE SEWN EDGE OF THE CHECK DAM TOWARD THE UPSTREAM SIDE
CHECK DAM
FLOW
REAR APRON STAPLES (TYP.) ~ 3 FT. MAX. SPACING REAR APRON
STAPLES (TYP.) 8" MIN. LENGTH
PLAN VIEW SECTION B
DITCH ~ SEE NOTE 3 BACK OF DITCH (TYP.) BACK OF DITCH (TYP.) CHECK DAM FRONT APRON
MARK W. MAURER
REAR APRON ~ SEE NOTE 2
3" MIN.
GEOTEXTILE ENCASED CHECK DAM INSTALLATION STANDARD PLAN I-50.10-00

SECTION
ISOMETRIC VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA SPACE CHECK DAMS THE DISTANCE APART WHERE POINTS "A" AND "B" ARE THE SAME ELEVATION SPILLWAY A
FLOW
SPACE CHECK DAMS THE DISTANCE APART WHERE POINTS "A" AND "B" ARE THE SAME ELEVATION
WATTLE OR COMPOST SOCK (TYP.) B

FLOW
A FLOWLINE
FLOWLINE
EXTENDED SECTION
EXTENDED SECTION A
SIDE PROTECTION SPILLWAY QUARRY SPALLS (STD. SPEC. 9-13.6) SPILLWAY 2 - 0" MAX. BETWEEN STAKES 3/4" 3/4" WOODEN STAKE (TYP.)
:1V
8"
8"
WATTLE OR COMPOST SOCK
EFFECTIVE 16" DAM HEIGHT
2H
:1V
2H
16"
FLOWLINE
6" MIN.
6" MIN.
ELEVATION
NOTE
ROCK CHECK DAMS SHALL BE PLACED OUTSIDE OF THE CLEAR ZONE, OR BEHIND TRAFFIC BARRIER.
SECTION
A
1 - 6" MIN. PENETRATION (TYP.)
ELEVATION
ROCK CHECK DAM
WATTLE OR COMPOST SOCK CHECK DAM
SPACE CHECK DAMS THE DISTANCE APART WHERE POINTS "A" AND "B" ARE THE SAME ELEVATION
A
FLOW
STATE OF
FLOWLINE
WASHINGTON REGISTERED LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
EXTENDED SECTION
SACKS SHALL BE #10 BURLAP OR APPROVED ALTERNATE FILLED WITH 48 TO 55 LBS. OF GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS.
MARK W. MAURER
CHECK DAMS
6" MIN. 6" MIN.
PLACE SACKS FIRMLY AGAINST GROUND LINE AND ADJACENT SACKS.
18"

FLOWLINE SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

08-31-07
DATE
ELEVATION
SECTION
SANDBAG CHECK DAM


NOTES 1. More than the minimum of one fastener per square yard may be required due to conditions such as blanket composition, soil type, surface uniformity, and slope steepness. See Standard Specification 8-01.3(3).
6" 6" TRENCH
2.
1 - 6" MAX. CTRS. (TYP.)
BLANKET EDGE ANCHOR TRENCH
1 - 6" MAX. CTRS. (TYP.) 4" MIN. EDGE OVERLAP FASTENER (TYP.)
BLANKET ENDS
6" M IN.
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET
SHINGLE SPLICE
TAMPED NATIVE SOIL
FASTENER FASTENER ~ 3 - 0" MAX. CTRS.
6" MAX. CTRS. (TYP.)
ANCHOR TRENCH ~ SECTION
MARK W. MAURER
FL
OW
6" MIN. END OVERLAP
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET FASTENER
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET PLACEMENT ON SLOPE

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

08-31-07
DATE
SHINGLE SPLICE ~ SECTION
6" M IN.

6" MIN .

NOTES 1. More than the minimum of one fastener per square yard may be required due to conditions such as blanket composition, soil type, surface uniformity, and flow velocity. Provide Check Slots per manufacturers recommendations. Roll ends may be spliced in a check slot. See Standard Specification 8-01.3(3).

FLOW
6" MIN .
2.
TAMPED NATIVE SOIL FASTENER ~ 6" MAX. CTRS. FASTENER ~ 3 - 0" MAX. CTRS.
3. 4.
INITIAL ANCHOR ~ SECTION
A
INITIAL ANCHOR
CHECK SLOT
6" 6" TRENCH
6" MIN. END OVERLAP
BLANKET ENDS 3 - 0" MAX. CTRS. (TYP.)
BLANKET EDGES
D
6" MAX. CTRS. (TYP.)
ANCHOR TRENCH
FASTENER ~ 6" MAX. CTRS. EROSION CONTROL BLANKET
SHINGLE SPLICE
FLOW
6" MIN .
FASTENER (TYP.)
STATE OF
6" MIN .
WASHINGTON REGISTERED LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
TAMPED NATIVE SOIL FASTENER ~ 3 - 0" MAX. CTRS.
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
MARK W. MAURER
IN 6" M
NOTE:
CHECK SLOT ~ SECTION
6" MIN. EDGE OR END OVERLAP
FL
OW
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET FASTENER FASTENER FASTENER ~ 3 - 0" MAX. CTRS.
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET PLACEMENT IN CHANNEL

TAMPED NATIVE SOIL SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

08-31-07
DATE
SHINGLE SPLICE ~ SECTION
ANCHOR TRENCH ~ SECTION
IN. 6" M
25 2
EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012 KEY

1 2 Luminaire - see Contract for type and number
NOTES: EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012 1. Timber luminaire supports are allowed only for temporary installations where breakaway or slip bases are not required. 2. When down guys are required, See Standard Plan J-7d. 4 5
Galvanized steel mast arm - configuration varies with manufacturer
6 18 19 20 7 26 1-3" (TYP) 3
Mounting height - roadway to luminaire elevation difference see Contract
2%,
4 5
Mast arm length - see Contract 5/8 " galvanized thimble eyebolt (single or double) with washers and nuts or eyenut 10 11
2-6"
2 1
(TYP)
6 7 8 9
Bonding jumper Pole and bracket cable
19 7 8 13 6 9
Equipment grounding conductor see Standard Plan J-9a. From ground line to 10 above ground, enclose equipment grounding conductor in galvanized steel conduit, code sized. Above 10 from Connect to
32 8 7 10
ground, staple equipment grounding conductor to pole. supplemental ground per Standard Plan J-9a.
4 12 15
Service wedge clamp ACSR triplex or fourplex conductors - see Contract Copper split bolt connector Messenger cable Insulating tape for waterproof connection Fused quick disconnect - use 30 amp fuses for high mast supports Weatherhead - size as required Steel conduit 8" x 8" x 4" NEMA 3R junction box with raintight hubs and removable cover Grounding lug
11
10
10
11
11 12
2 AERIAL FEED 16 1
13 14 33 12 9 23 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
7 24
17
15 18 19
Direct burial conductors or galvanized steel conduits with conductors - see Contract Grounding bushing Supplemental ground - see Standard Plan J-9a. Class 5 timber pole - length sufficient for mounting height and burial depth Class 2 timber pole - length sufficient for mounting height and burial depth. 5/8 " x 9" step bolt 1/4 " x 10" plate collar bent to fit pole diameter (8" - 10") 3/8 " x 4" machine bolts (four required) with washers and nuts 1/2 " lag bolts (six required) - drill 2" pipe 9/16 " hole in plate UNDERGROUND FEED 21 2-0" 8
23
HIGH MAST TIMBER LUMINAIRE SUPPORT

Shown for 480 VAC power feed. Increase conductor and fuse size as required for 240 VAC power feed.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
22
TIMBER LUMINAIRE SUPPORT
Distance varies, 35 MIN, 50 MAX, depending on line clearance requirements 25 26
S T A
E T
N G
28
2-6" (TYP)
See Gusset Detail 1/4 "
6"
29 27
250
EXPIRES OCTOBER 26, 2000
31
2 UNITS
3 UNITS
4 UNITS
6 UNITS
PLAN VIEW
(TYP) 1/4 " 1/4 " plate
TIMBER LIGHT STANDARDS

STANDARD PLAN J-1f
TYPICAL LUMINAIRE MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS
60^(TYP)
PLAN VIEW LUMINAIRE SUPPORT BRACKET

GALVANIZE AFTER FABRICATION
GUSSET DETAIL
REPLACED PLAN TITLE REFERENCES WITH PLAN NUMBERS.
6/23/00
DATE
5/00
CORRECTED KEY NOTE 5.
TWS
WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
DATE
REVISION
BY
OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON
NOTE:
STEP BOLT PLACEMENT
PORTATION.
120^
E E GI R E E S T I S G S N I E O N L A
24655
NE E R
30
1" nonmetallic conduit with
3/4 " straps at code spacing
T O
R . IK YD C M B A W S F H O I
O T
3/4 " wire hole 2" from gusset plate, smooth hole edges
THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY
3-0"
12 pole terminal block
15
12 14
N A N
F O R P

Photoelectric control Photoelectric control Weatherhead

30 Class V treated timber pole Liquid tight flexible conduit, length 2 MIN, Photoelectric contol Current and potential transformers furnished and installed by utility Liquid tight flexible Conduit and conductors, size to utility requirements Weatherhead 1" conduit, three #12 Bend conduit to allow removal of weatherhead, 30 Class V treated timber pole Conduit and conductors, Bend conduit to pole and strap within 1 above cabinet size to utility requirements Bend conduit to pole and strap within 1 above cabinet Meter base Bend conduit to pole and strap within 18" above meter strap below bend Bond 1" conduit, three #12 (four #12 if transformers are used) conduit, length 2 MIN, 3 MAX - strap to pole
Weatherhead
Liquid tight flexible conduit, length 2 MIN, 3 MAX - strap to pole Bend conduit to allow removal of weatherhead, strap below bend Conduit and conductors, size to utility requirements 1" conduit, three #12 Bend conduit to pole and strap within 1 above meter 30 Class V treated timber pole Meter base
3 MAX - strap to pole
Bend conduit to allow removal of weatherhead, strap below bend
Bend conduit to pole and strap within 1 above meter
Meter base
Bend conduit to pole and strap within 1 above cabinet 3" - 6" nipple or warp fitting
3" - 6" nipple or warp fitting Hub and gasket (TYP)
Service cabinet LB Conduit Body 6 MAX 5 MIN 6 MAX 5 MIN use metal standoffs 6 MAX 5 MIN to mount to pole Service cabinet 30" MIN use metal standoffs 30" MIN to mount to pole
Hub and gasket 30" MIN Service breaker, 120VAC, 1P S/N
18" MIN
18" MIN
18" MIN
See Note 5 Conduit to luminaire, size as required See Note 5 Conduit to luminaire, size as required See Note 5 Conduit to Luminaire, size as required
TYPE A SERVICE, 120 VOLT
TYPE B SERVICE, 120/240 VOLT
TYPE C SERVICE, 480 VOLT
TYPE A, B AND C SERVICE LIGHTING DETAILS

Two 5/16 " x 1/2 " galvanized bolts
A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANS-
Photoelectric control oriented to north sky
D A
Two 5/16 " x 3" galvanized lag screws Two 1/4 " x 1/2 " brass bolts;
. P E DK I A V A W S F H C O
E T
S T A
I N G
drill bracket to fit meter base
Threadless couplings (TYP)
Conduit body
STANDARD PLAN J-3

PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL DETAILS
08-01-97
DATE
Sheet 1 of 2 Sheets
PORTATION.
0011089
Timber pole
NE E R
NOTE:
HN
O T
F O R P
1" conduit, three #12 (Photoelectric control)
EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012 NOTES:

1. Metering arrangements may vary with different serving utilities. The contractor shall verify the requirements of the utility prior to installing the service equipment.
1P 15 amp 125VAC flasher breaker Service 2P 240VAC Branch breaker service breaker 3. 9" 2.
All service pole conduit shall be secured to the pole with conduit strap at 5 centers.
All risers and service equipment shall be installed on side of pole that is away from traffic.
4.
Where required by the serving utility, service breakers shall be installed above the meter socket in a separate raintight enclosure.
8"
Removable Test switch false front
5.
Bend and attach to pole within 1 of enclosure. "Typical Grounding Details."
See Standard Plan
6. Subpanel for equipment 22"
For Type B service wiring diagram, use Standard Plan "Modified Type B Service". For Type C service wiring diagram, use Standard Plan, "Type E Service."
7.
See breaker schedule in contract for breaker and contactor sizes.
A
Jack mounted flasher (where required) Neutral busbar
A
120 VAC coil contactor
20" Meter base 6" (where required)
120 VAC
TYPE B SERVICE CABINET
Test switch
Photoelectric
Welded hinge
or time clock
Control breaker
Service 9"
SECTION A-A
To lighting standards
2P 480VAC service breaker
1" conduit three #12 (Photoelectric control)
Test switch
TYPE A WIRING DIAGRAM 120 VOLT
2P 480VAC branch breaker
Flasher breaker 24"
Removable false front
TYPE A, B AND C SERVICE LIGHTING DETAILS

D A
equipment
S T A
E T
I N G
150 VA 480/120 VAC dry transformer (500 VA Contactor (120 VAC coil) Jack mounted flasher (where required) if flasher used)
Neutral busbar
STANDARD PLAN J-3

20"
08-01-97
DATE
TYPE C SERVICE CABINET
Sheet 2 of 2 Sheets
PORTATION.
0011089
NE E R
NOTE:
Subpanel for
. P E DK I A V A W S F H C O
O T
44"
HN
F O R P

GENERAL NOTES
12 19

6" 12 19 5
PHOTOCELL BYPASS TEST ON
KEY
1 METER BASE PER SERVING UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. AS A MINIMUM, THE METER BASE SHALL BE SAFETY SOCKET BOX WITH FACTORY INSTALLED TEST BYPASS FACILITY THAT MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF EUSERC DRAWING 305. 2
PHOTOCELL TEST OFF-AUTOMATIC
200 AMP TYPE 120/240 1 SERVICE CABINET

6" 1. 2. 3. SEE STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-29.24, SERVICE CABINETS. HINGES SHALL HAVE STAINLESS STEEL OR BRASS PINS. CABINETS SHALL BE RATED NEMA 3R AND SHALL INCLUDE TWO RAIN TIGHT VENTS. METERING EQUIPMENT DOOR SHALL BE PAD LOCKABLE. EACH DOOR SHALL BE GASKETED. INSTALL BEST CX CONSTRUCTION CORE ON RIGHT DOOR. SEE DOOR HINGE DETAIL, SHEET 1 OF 2. THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT WITHIN THE SERVICE ENCLOSURE SHALL HAVE AN APPROPRIATELY ENGRAVED PHENOLIC NAME PLATE ATTACHED WITH SCREWS OR RIVETS: KEY NUMBERS 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 AND 16. KEY NUMBER 4 NAME PLATE SHALL READ: "PHOTOCELL BYPASS TEST ON" AND "PHOTOCELL TEST OFF- AUTOMATIC". SEE SERVICE CABINET DETAIL. METERING ARRANGEMENTS VARY WITH DIFFERENT SERVING UTILITIES. THE UTILITY MAY REQUIRE METER BASE MOUNTING IN THE ENCLOSURE, ON THE SIDE OR ON THE BACK OF THE ENCLOSURE. THE UTILITY MAY REQUIRE THE DIMENSION BETWEEN THE DOOR AND THE FRONT OF THE SAFETY SOCKET BOX TO BE LESS THAN THE 11 INCHES SHOWN IN THE LEFT SIDE- SAFETY SOCKET BOX MOUNTING DETAIL. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE SERVING UTILITYS REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF AND INSTALLING THE SERVICE EQUIPMENT. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE MINIMUM AND SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE THE VARIOUS SIZES OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED. ALL BUSSWORK SHALL BE HIGH GRADE COPPER AND SHALL EQUAL OR EXCEED THE MAIN BREAKER RATING. ALL BREAKERS SHALL BOLT ONTO THE BUSSWORK. JUMPERING OF BREAKERS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED. BUSSWORK SHALL ACCOMMODATE ALL FUTURE EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN IN THE BREAKER SCHEDULE. THE PHOTOCELL UNIT SHALL BE CENTERED IN THE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE TO PERMIT 360 DEGREE ROTATION OF THE PHOTOCELL WITHOUT REMOVAL OF THE PHOTOCELL UNIT OR THE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE. ALL INTERNAL WIRE RUNS SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH "TO - FROM" CODED TAGS LABELED WITH THE CODE LETTERS AND/OR NUMBERS SHOWN ON THE SCHEDULES. APPROVED PVC OR POLYOLEFIN WIRE MARKING SLEEVES SHALL BE USED. ALL NUTS, BOLTS AND WASHERS USED FOR MOUNTING THE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. A 1% TOLERANCE IS ALLOWED FOR ALL DIMENSIONS. UNISTRUT TYPE CHANNEL AND MOUNTING HARDWARE COMPONENTS SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. CONDUIT CLAMPS SHALL BE HOT DIPPED, GALVANIZED STEEL OR STAINLESS STEEL. INSTALL CONDUIT COUPLINGS ON ALL CONDUITS. PLACE COUPLINGS FLUSH WITH TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION. NOTE 15 HAS BEEN DELETED. THE METER BASE PORTION OF THIS SERVICE WAS DESIGNED TO MEET METERING PORTION OF EUSERC DRAWING 309 REQUIREMENTS. WHEN USING ALTERNATE DOOR HINGE: REMOVE HINGE PIN PRIOR TO WELDING HINGE TO CABINET AND PRIOR TO HOT DIP GALVANIZING CABINET. AFTER GALVANIZING, REPLACE PIN WITH BRASS PIN AND SOLDER IN PLACE. VERIFY THE SERVICE UTILITY STAND-OFF DIMENSION. ADJUST THE REMOVABLE PANEL TO THE MEASUREMENT PROVIDED BY THE UTILITY COMPANY. AFTER ADJUSTMENT, CUT OFF ALL-THREAD BOLTS SO THAT NO LESS THAN 2 AND NO MORE THAN 3 FULL THREADS EXTEND PAST THE FACE OF THE NUTS 1 5 13 19
REMOVABLE MOUNTING PANEL
2" MIN. 10"

1
14
PHOTOCELL BYPASS
4 SLIDE LATCH 21 10 15
MAIN BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) PHOTOCELL BREAKER (SPST 15 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) TEST SWITCH (SPDT SNAP ACTION, POSITIVE CLOSE 15 AMP - 120/277 VOLT - "T" RATED)
4.
11"
3 - 4"
SEE NOTE 6 SEE NOTE 6 VENTS BARRIER MOUNTING PANEL 19 18 18
2 6 6 16 7 3 9 20
TEST ON
3 4
PHOTOCELL TEST OFF/AUTOMATIC
5.
5 6 7 8
PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL, STD. SPEC. 9 - 29.11(2) BRANCH BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) SIGNAL BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) CONTACTOR (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) RECEPTACLE BREAKER (SPST 20 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) RECEPTACLE, GROUNDED (GFCI 20 AMP - 125 VOLT)
8 17
11
10
6.
19" SEE DOOR HINGE DETAIL
3- 4"
12
PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE - ENCLOSURE TO BE FABRICATED FROM 5/8" EXPANDED STEEL MESH WITH WELDED SEAMS AND MOUNTING FLANGES. HOT DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION. TYPE 5052 - H32 ALUMINUM WITH 5/8" x 5/8" OPENINGS EQUIVALENT TO 5/8" EXPANDED STEEL MESH
LEFT SIDE SERVICE CABINET DETAIL
FRONT
18 1/2" WELD TO EACH END OF MOUNTING BLOCK INSIDE FACE OF DOOR 3/8" 3/32 3/32 TYP. 1 1/2" 19" 6"
MOUNTING BLOCK (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL
MAY BE USED AS ALTERNATIVE MATERIAL. SEE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE MOUNTING DETAIL, SHEET 2 OF 2. 13 HINGED FRONT FACING DOOR WITH 4" x 4" MIN. POLISHED WIRE GLASS WINDOW. 14 HINGED DEAD FRONT WITH 1/4 TURN FASTENERS OR SLIDE LATCH.
7.
5" MIN. 11" MAX.
8.
TYP. 3/32 10 1/2" TACK WELD BOLT TO NUT, 4 PLACES
1/2" UNC S.S. 8" LONG ALL-THREAD, 6 PLACES (TYP.) ~ CUT OFF AFTER ADJUSTMENT, SEE NOTE 18
3"
2" 3" END PLATE (TYP.)
PLACE NUT AGAINST END PLATE BEFORE WELDING
1 1/2"
2"
15 CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER. BUSS SHALL BE 4 LUG TINNED COPPER. SEE CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER DETAIL ON SHEET 2 OF 2. SPARE BRANCH BREAKER (DPST 20AMP- 120/240 VOLT) METAL WIRING DIAGRAM HOLDER 1/4" DIAMETER DRAIN HOLE. DRILL BEFORE GALVANIZING. MOUNTING HOLE. SEE SERVICE CABINET MOUNTING DETAILS. 18 CIRCUIT PANEL BOARD - MINIMUM SIZE WITH SEPARATE MAIN BREAKER. 21 LABEL CABINET WITH BUSSWORK RATING.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
16 17
9.
90^ 35/64 1^ (TYP.)
FRONT SURFACE OF SAFETY SOCKET BOX
MOUNTING BLOCK DETAIL

18
12 GA. ~ MATERIAL TO BE THE SAME AS CABINET MATERIAL THREE 1/2" S.S. NUT (TYP.) WASHER ~ EACH SIDE OF THE PANEL
19 20
10.
11.
FOUR 1/4-20 S.S. PANHEAD PHILLIPS MACHINE SCREWS, WASHERS, AND NUTS ~ TOP AND BUTTOM, SPACED EVENLY 1 1/2" (TYP.) STAND-OFF DIMENSION ~ SEE NOTE 18 120/240 VAC 12 GA REMOVABLE PANEL 1/2" RETURN ~ WELD AT CORNERS 1 5
R .
13.
S T A
LEFT SIDE- SAFETY SOCKET BOX MOUNTING DETAIL

2 7 1/4" x 1 1/4" CLOSED CELL NEOPRENE GASKET CABINET DOOR
PHOTOCELL BYPASS TEST ON PHOTOCELL TEST
E T
BW R
14.
SIGNAL CKT
16.
B
CABINET OR PANEL WALL SPARE CKT TYP.
16
8 6 9
17.
ALTERNATE FOR TYPE B MODIFIED CABINET SEE NOTE 17
PIANO HINGE TYP.
8 1/8 PANEL DOOR 1/4" x 5/8" NEOPRENE GASKET 10 15
18.
CABINET
DOOR
TYP.
1/8
HINGE 2" HIGH x 2" OPEN 3/8" BARREL
11
DOOR HINGE DETAIL
SIZE PER NEC. MINIMUM SIZE #2
WIRING SCHEMATIC
LAP WELD
01/2005
REVISED SAFETY SOCKET BOX MOUNTING DETAIL
VIEW B-B
DATE
DOOR HINGE DETAIL
1/8
EXPIRES MAY 5, 2005
ILL CKT B
SERVICE CABINET TYPE B MODIFIED (0 - 200 AMP TYPE 120/240 SINGLE PHASE)
STANDARD PLAN J-3b

Harold J. Peterfeso
EB
03-04-05
DATE

REVISION BY
PORTATION.
NOTE:
15.
ILL CKT A
28680
OFF - AUTOMATIC
12.
TZ T E L O L C S A W S F H O I N
O T
NE E R
19
1-10"
18
19
11
NEUTRAL BUSS, 14 LUG COPPER
6"
10 1/2"
6"
R E N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA SEE NOTE 6 1 5/8" x 1 5/8" 12 GA. SLOTTED STEEL CHANNEL BRACKETS (TWO REQUIRED) 2" POLICE PANEL

SERVICE CABINET BOLTED 3/8" BOLT (TWO FOR EACH CHANNEL) NOT REQUIRED FOR STRUT MOUNT SEE STRAP DETAIL SEE NOTE 6 TO SLOTTED STEEL CHANNEL BRACKET (SEE SERVICE CABINET MOUNTING DETAILS AND STRAP DETAIL) SPRING NUT BEVEL 1/2"
FRONT OF CONDUITS AS REQUIRED. PLUMB CONDUIT 35/64 1 33/64 SEE GENERAL NOTE 14 1 5/8" x 2 7/16" 12 GA. SLOTTED STEEL CHANNEL BRACKETS (3 REQD), EMBED 12" MIN. IN FOUNDATION. CONTROLLER CABINET SERVICE CABINET 1 5/8" x 1 5/8" 12 GA. SLOTTED STEEL CHANNEL BRACKETS BOLTED TO POST USE TWO - 3/8" BOLTS, WASHERS AND NUTS FOR EACH CHANNEL. PEEN BOLT THREADS. (SEE SERVICE MOUNTING PLUMB CONDUIT 35/64 1 33/64 DETAILS AND STRAP DETAIL)
5-0" MIN. / 6-0" MAX.
TIMBER POST
ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) #4 BARS EACH CORNER
SLOTTED STEEL CHANNEL BRACKET BOLT SIZED FOR SLOTTED STEEL CHANNEL BRACKET, WITH LOCK WASHER & SPRING NUT (3 FOR EACH CHANNEL)
5-0" MIN. / 6-0" MAX.
1 5/8" x 2 7/16" 12 GA. BRACKETS BOLTED TO TO UTILITY

4
10"
#4 HOOPS
24"
6"
POST USE TWO - 3/8" BOLTS, WASHERS AND NUTS FOR EACH CHANNEL. PEEN BOLT THREADS.
6" GROUND ROD (TYP.)
CABINET BRACKET MOUNTING DETAIL

TO LUMINAIRES 3" 3"
4
TO CONTROLLER CABINET 6 x 8 TREATED TIMBER POST, 10 LONG
3"
3"
RIGHT SIDE OF SERVICE CABINET
CONDUIT COUPLING (TYP.) SEE GENERAL NOTE 14 TO UTILITY TO LUMINAIRES
13" DIAMETER DRAIN TILE WITH APPROVED COVER. (TYP.)
SERVICE CABINET MOUNTING DETAILS

TO CONTROLLER CABINET
FRONT OF SERVICE CABINET

2" x 1/8" HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STRAP
RIGHT SIDE OF SERVICE CABINET
FRONT OF SERVICE CABINET

METAL WASHERS NUT PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE FLANGE NUT SERVICE CABINET
POST MOUNT STRUT MOUNT
GROUND ROD
1 CABINET BASE 1" 24" 1" TWO #4 HOOPS ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.)
RUBBER WASHER (APPLY SILICONE SEALER TO BOTH SIDES OF RUBBER WASHER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION)
3/8" x 1" BOLT, LOCK WASHER AND NUT. (TYP.)
24"
POST MOUNT STRAP DETAIL
1/4" x 1" MACHINE BOLT
PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE MOUNTING DETAIL
CONTROLLER CABINET
R O
SEE STANDARD PLAN J-6c "CABINET FOUNDATION DETAILS", FOR DETAILS NOT SHOWN.
FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PORTATION.
1/2" MIN. (TYP.) BUSS

3 1
SERVICE
1"
DO
24"
OR
#4 BAR EACH CORNER
GROUND ROD
4
4" DIAM. x 1/2" DEEP SUMP. SLOPE FOUNDATION TOWARDS SUMP. 3/8" DIAM. POLYETHYLENE OR COPPER DRAIN PIPE. SLOPE TO DRAIN OUTSIDE FOUNDATION. TO SERVICE GROUND - PER STD. PLAN J-9a "TYPICAL GROUNDING DETAILS"
EXPIRES MAY 5, 2005
CABINET SIDE WALL 1/8" x 1 1/4" x 1 1/4" x 6" ANGLE
STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER
ELEVATION VIEW
SIDE VIEW
DETAIL A-A
SERVICE CABINET TYPE B MODIFIED (0 - 200 AMP TYPE 120/240 SINGLE PHASE)
PLAN VIEW OF SERVICE CABINET
CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER DETAIL
STANDARD PLAN J-3b

Harold J. Peterfeso
03-04-05
DATE
NOTE:
ALL CONDUITS PENETRATING CABINET SHALL BE TERMINATED WITH GROUNDING END BUSHING AND BONDED TO THE CABINET GROUNDING BUS.
STAINLESS STEEL ALLEN HEAD
FILLET WELD
28680
NE E R
19"
CABINET
DRIVE GROUND RODS BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE. MOVE ROD(S) AND DRAIN TILE(S) WITH COVER(S) AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE FULL GROUND PENETRATION. MAINTAIN A 6 MINIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN GROUND RODS AS DETAILED ON STD. PLAN J-9a "TYPICAL GROUNDING DETAILS".
1/8
R .
S T A
E T
CABINET SIDE WALL
BELLEVILLE STAINLESS STEEL SPRING WASHER
2"
1/4" x 2" STAINLESS STEEL BOLT WITH 2 STAINLESS STEEL NUTS. LIBERALLY COAT THIS ASSEMBLY WITH ANTI OXIDANT COMPOUND.
SLOTTED STEEL CHANNEL
CABINET BASE
6"
1"
D O O R
R E N
O T
F O R P

CABINET WIDTH PLUS 4 PULL POSTS AS SHOWN ON STD. PLAN L-2 4" DIAM. x 1/2" DEEP SUMP. SLOPE FOUNDATION TOWARDS SUMP. 3/8" DIAM. POLYETHYLENE OR COPPER DRAIN PIPE. SLOPE TO DRAIN OUTSIDE FOUNDATION. 1-9

GENERAL NOTES
KEY
1. 2. 3.
SEE STD. SPECIFICATION 9-29.24, SERVICE CABINETS. HINGES SHALL HAVE STAINLESS STEEL OR BRASS PINS. CABINETS SHALL BE RATED NEMA 3R AND SHALL INCLUDE TWO RAIN TIGHT VENTS.
8.
4. 7 - 0
DOOR SIDE 5. 12 SEE DETAIL A (TYP.) 2-0
METERING EQUIPMENT DOOR SHALL BE PAD LOCKABLE. EACH DOOR SHALL BE GASKETED. INSTALL BEST CX 9. CONSTRUCTION CORE ON BOTTOM DOOR. SEE DOOR HINGE DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN J-3b. CONCEALED HEAVY DUTY STAINLESS STEEL LIFT OFF HINGES ARE ALLOWED AS AN ALTERNATIVE TO DOOR HINGE DETAIL 10. SHOWN ON STANDARD PLAN J-3b. UPPER DOOR SHALL HAVE 2 HINGES AND LOWER DOOR SHALL HAVE 3 HINGES. THE LOWER DOOR SHALL HAVE A TWO POSITION DOOR STOP ASSEMBLY. THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT WITHIN THE SERVICE ENCLOSURE SHALL HAVE AN APPROPRIATELY ENGRAVED PHENOLIC NAME PLATE ATTACHED WITH SCREWS OR RIVETS: KEY NUMBERS 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 16 AND 21. KEY NUMBER 4 NAME PLATE SHALL READ: "PHOTOCELL BYPASS TEST ON" AND "PHOTOCELL TEST OFF- AUTOMATIC". SEE SERVICE CABINET DETAIL. METERING ARRANGEMENTS VARY WITH DIFFERENT SERVING UTILITIES. THE UTILITY MAY REQUIRE METER BASE MOUNTING IN THE ENCLOSURE, ON THE SIDE OR ON THE BACK OF THE ENCLOSURE. THE UTILITY MAY REQUIRE THE DIMENSION BETWEEN THE DOOR AND THE FRONT OF THE SAFETY SOCKET BOX TO BE LESS THAN THE 11 INCHES SHOWN IN THE LEFT SIDE- SAFETY SOCKET BOX MOUNTING DETAIL. SEE STANDARD PLAN J-3b FOR SAFETY SOCKET BOX DETAIL. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE SERVING UTILITYS REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF AND INSTALLING THE SERVICE EQUIPMENT. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE MINIMUM AND SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE THE VARIOUS SIZES OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED. 11.
ALL BUSSWORK SHALL BE HIGH GRADE COPPER AND SHALL EQUAL OR EXCEED THE MAIN BREAKER RATING. ALL BREAKERS SHALL BOLT ONTO THE BUSSWORK. JUMPERING OF BREAKERS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED. BUSSWORK SHALL ACCOMMODATE ALL FUTURE EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN IN THE BREAKER SCHEDULE. THE PHOTOCELL UNIT SHALL BE CENTERED IN THE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE TO PERMIT 360 DEGREE ROTATION OF THE PHOTOCELL WITHOUT REMOVAL OF THE PHOTOCELL UNIT OR PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE. ALL INTERNAL WIRE RUNS SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH "TO - FROM" CODED TAGS LABELED WITH THE CODE LETTERS AND/OR NUMBERS SHOWN ON THE SCHEDULES. APPROVED PVC OR POLYOLEFIN WIRE MARKING SLEEVES SHALL BE USED. ALL NUTS, BOLTS AND WASHERS USED FOR MOUNTING THE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. A 1% TOLERANCE IS ALLOWED FOR ALL DIMENSIONS. THE PHOTOCELL CIRCUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN FLEX CONDUIT WITHIN THE METER COMPARTMENT. INSTALL CONDUIT COUPLINGS ON ALL CONDUITS. PLACE COUPLINGS FLUSH WITH TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION. SEE PLANS FOR BREAKER SCHEDULE. SEAL CABINET TO FOUNDATION WITH A 1/2" BEAD OF SILICONE. APPLY SILICONE TO DRY SURFACE ONLY. THE METER BASE PORTION OF THIS SERVICE WAS DESIGNED TO MEET METERING PORTION OF EUSERC DRAWING 309 REQUIREMENTS.
METER BASE PER SERVING UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. AS A MINIMUM, THE METER BASE SHALL BE SAFETY SOCKET BOX WITH FACTORY INSTALLED TEST BYPASS FACILITY THAT MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF EUSERC DRAWING 305. MAIN BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) PHOTOCELL BREAKER (SPST 15 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) TEST SWITCH (SPDT SNAP ACTION, POSITIVE CLOSE, 15 AMP - 120/277 VOLT "T" RATED) PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL, STD. SPEC. 9 - 29.11(2) BRANCH BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) SIGNAL BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) CONTACTOR (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) RECEPTACLE BREAKER (SPST 20 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) RECEPTACLE, GROUNDED (GFCI 20 AMP - 125 VOLT) NEUTRAL BUSS, 14 LUG COPPER PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE - ENCLOSURE TO BE FABRICATED FROM 5/8" EXPANDED STEEL MESH WITH WELDED SEAMS AND MOUNTING FLANGES. HOT DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION. TYPE 5052 - H32 ALUMINUM WITH 5/8" x 5/8" OPENINGS EQUIVALENT TO 5/8" EXPANDED STEEL MESH MAY BE USED AS ALTERNATIVE MATERIAL. SEE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE MOUNTING DETAILS, STANDARD PLAN J-3b. HINGED FRONT FACING DOOR WITH 4 x 4 MIN. POLISHED WIRE GLASS WINDOW. HINGED DEAD FRONT WITH 1/4 TURN FASTENERS OR SLIDE LATCH. CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER. BUSS SHALL BE 4 LUG TINNED COPPER. SEE CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN J-3b. SPARE BRANCH BREAKER (DPST 20AMP- 120/240 VOLT) METAL WIRING DIAGRAM HOLDER REMOVABLE EQUIPMENT MOUNTING PAN 6 x 6 MIN. UNDERGROUND FEED - SERVICE WIREWAY (LEFT REAR CORNER) SCREENED VENTS, 2 REQUIRED, 1 EACH SIDE, LOUVERED PLATES. HEATER BREAKER (SPST 15 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) THERMOSTAT, 40 33/64 F CLOSURE - 3 DIFFERENTIAL STRIP HEATER (100 WATT NOMINAL) , WITH TERMINAL STRIP COVER. 24 CIRCUIT PANEL BOARD - MINIMUM SIZE WITH SEPARATE MAIN BREAKER.
2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTE: INSTALL FOUNDATION AS SLAB SECTION UNLESS IDENTIFIED FOR CONSTRUCTION IN FENCE LINE IN CONTRACT PLANS.
13.
14.
13
12
12 CABINET WIDTH PLUS 18
12 4-0 MAINLINE ROADWAY
6.
15. 16.
14
FRONTAGE ROAD
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
17.
15
INSTALLATION DETAIL
2- 4 6" 5 5 6" 12 7. 2 MIN. SEE NOTE 6 10" 3 - 4 1-7 6"
16
120/240 VAC
1 5
17 18 19
2 7
BW R
20 21
PHOTOCELL TEST OFF - AUTOMATIC
22 23 24
SIGNAL CKT 14"
{
16
13 SEE NOTE 4 SPARE CKT SPARE CKT
ILL CKT A
25
8 6
LABEL CABINET WITH BUSSWORK RATING.
24 2 7 - 0 25 17 14 3 7 9 21 16 16 6 SLIDE LATCH
PHOTOCELL BYPASS
20 6
TEST ON
S T A
FENCE POST 21 9
#6 INSULATED STRANDED
E T
19
ILL CKT C
PHOTOCELL
THERMOSTAT
8 6
T
TEST
18 4 8 8 23
22 10 8 8 15 11 8
OFF-AUTOMATIC
22
ILL CKT D
SERVICE CABINET
6
EXPIRES MAY 5, 2003
1 DRAIN
1/2" x 12 BOLT WITH 4 HOOK TO LUMINAIRES TO SERVICE GROUND PER STD. PLAN J-9a "TYPICAL GROUNDING DETAIL"
SIDE VIEW
(MINUS FOUNDATION)
PLAN VIEW
ILL CKT E 15 CONDUIT OZ GEDNEY TYPE GC BRONZE GROUND CLAMP OR EQUIVALENT (TYP.)
TO UTILITY TO CONTROLLER CABINET
SERVICE CABINET TYPE D (0 - 200 AMP TYPE 120/240 SINGLE PHASE)
11
FRONT VIEW
STANDARD PLAN J-3c

DETAIL A
SERVICE CABINET WIRING SCHEMATIC
Harold J. Peterfeso
06-24-02
DATE
NOTE:
ASPHALT OR CONCRETE
20
23
PORTATION.
CONDUIT COUPLING (TYP.) SEE NOTE 14
FOUNDATION
28680
NE E R
10
CONDUIT TO FENCE POST BONDING POINT
R .
O T
16
ILL CKT B
12.
3 - 8
{ { { { {
R E N
F O R P

CABINET WIDTH PLUS 4 PULL POSTS AS SHOWN ON STD. PLAN L-2
PHOTOCELL BYPASS TEST ON BW R PHOTOCELL TEST OFFAUTOMATIC

KEY
1 5 METER BASE PER SERVING UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. AS A MINIMUM, THE METER BASE SHALL BE SAFETY SOCKET BOX WITH FACTORY INSTALLED TEST BYPASS FACILITY THAT MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF EUSERC DRAWING 305. MAIN BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) PHOTOCELL BREAKER (SPST 15 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) TEST SWITCH ( SPDT SNAP ACTION, POSITIVE CLOSE 15 AMP - 120/277 VOLT "T" RATED) PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL, STD. SPEC. 9 - 29.11(2) BRANCH BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) SIGNAL TRANSFORMER BREAKER (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) CONTACTOR (SEE BREAKER SCHEDULE) RECEPTACLE BREAKER (SPST 20 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) RECEPTACLE, GROUNDED (GFCI 20 AMP - 125 VOLT) 7. 11 12 NEUTRAL BUSS, 14 LUG COPPER PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE - ENCLOSURE TO BE FABRICATED FROM 5/8" EXPANDED STEEL MESH WITH WELDED SEAMS AND MOUNTING FLANGES. HOT DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION. TYPE 5052 - H32 ALUMINUM WITH 5/8" x 5/8" OPENINGS EQUIVALENT TO 5/8" EXPANDED STEEL MESH MAY BE USED AS ALTERNATIVE MATERIAL. SEE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE MOUNTING DETAILS, STANDARD PLAN J-3b. HINGED FRONT FACING DOOR WITH 4 x 4 MIN. POLISHED WIRE GLASS WINDOW. HINGED DEAD FRONT WITH 1/4 TURN FASTENERS OR SLIDE LATCH CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER. BUSS SHALL BE 4 LUG TINNED COPPER. SEE CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER DETAIL, STANDARD PLAN J-3b. SPARE BRANCH BREAKER (DPST 20AMP- 240/480 VOLT) 11. 17 8 15 18 19 METAL WIRING DIAGRAM HOLDER REMOVABLE EQUIPMENT MOUNTING PAN 6 x 6 MIN. UNDERGROUND FEED - SERVICE WIREWAY (LEFT REAR CORNER) SCREENED VENTS, 2 REQUIRED, 1 EACH SIDE, LOUVERED PLATES HEATER BREAKER (SPST 15 AMP - 120/240 VOLT) 16. 22 THERMOSTAT, 40 33/64 F CLOSURE - 3 DIFFERENTIAL STRIP HEATER (100 WATT NOMINAL), WITH TERMINAL STRIP COVER
21"
5.
2 3 4
DOOR SIDE
THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT WITHIN THE SERVICE ENCLOSURE SHALL HAVE AN APPROPRIATELY ENGRAVED PHENOLIC NAME PLATE ATTACHED WITH SCREWS OR RIVETS: KEY NUMBERS 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 16, 21 AND 25. KEY NUMBER 4 NAME PLATE SHALL READ: "PHOTOCELL BYPASS TEST ON" AND "PHOTOCELL TEST OFF- AUTOMATIC". SEE SERVICE CABINET DETAIL. METERING ARRANGEMENTS VARY WITH DIFFERENT SERVING UTILITIES. THE UTILITY MAY REQUIRE METER BASE MOUNTING IN THE ENCLOSURE, ON THE SIDE, OR ON THE BACK OF THE ENCLOSURE. THE UTILITY MAY REQUIRE THE DIMENSION BETWEEN THE DOOR AND THE FRONT OF THE SAFETY SOCKET BOX TO BE LESS THAN THE 11 INCHES SHOWN IN THE LEFT SIDE- SAFETY SOCKET BOX MOUNTING DETAIL, SEE STD. PLAN J-3b. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE SERVING UTILITYS REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF AND INSTALLING THE SERVICE EQUIPMENT. THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE MINIMUM AND SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE THE VARIOUS SIZES OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED. ALL BUSSWORK SHALL BE HIGH GRADE COPPER AND SHALL EQUAL OR EXCEED THE MAIN BREAKER RATING. ALL BREAKERS SHALL BOLT ONTO THE BUSSWORK. JUMPERING OF BREAKERS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED. BUSSWORK SHALL ACCOMMODATE ALL FUTURE EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN IN THE BREAKER SCHEDULE. THE PHOTOCELL UNIT SHALL BE CENTERED IN THE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE TO PERMIT 360 DEGREE ROTATION OF THE PHOTOCELL WITHOUT REMOVAL OF THE PHOTOCELL UNIT OR THE PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE. ALL INTERNAL WIRE RUNS SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH "TO - FROM" CODED TAGS LABELED WITH THE CODE LETTERS AND/OR NUMBERS SHOWN ON THE SCHEDULES. APPROVED PVC OR POLYOLEFIN WIRE MARKING SLEEVES SHALL BE USED. ALL NUTS, BOLTS, AND WASHERS USED FOR MOUNTING PHOTOCELL ENCLOSURE SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. A 1% TOLERANCE IS ALLOWED FOR ALL DIMENSIONS. SEE PLANS FOR BREAKER SCHEDULE. INSTALL CONDUIT COUPLINGS ON ALL CONDUITS. PLACE COUPLINGS FLUSH WITH TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION. SEAL CABINET TO FOUNDATION WITH A 1/2" BEAD OF SILICONE. APPLY SILICONE TO DRY SURFACE ONLY. THE METER BASE PORTION OF THIS SERVICE WAS DESIGNED TO MEET METERING PORTION OF EUSERC DRAWING 309 REQUIREMENTS.
4" DIAM. x 1/2" DEEP SUMP. SLOPE FOUNDATION TOWARDS SUMP. 3/8" DIAM. POLYETHYLENE OR COPPER DRAIN PIPE. SLOPE TO DRAIN OUTSIDE FOUNDATION.
240 / 480 VAC

6 - 4 1
6.
5 6
TO SIGNAL CKT TRANSFORMER
7 8
7 6 SPARE CKT 16 SPARE CKT 25 24 6
12
8.
2 - 0
SEE DETAIL A (TYP.)
ILL CKT B
8 6
12
CABINET WIDTH PLUS 18
12 4 - 0 FRONTAGE ROAD
12
21
9 10 6
ILL CKT C
13
9.
8 14
FRONT VIEW
NOTE: INSTALL FOUNDATION AS SLAB SECTION UNLESS IDENTIFIED FOR CONSTRUCTION IN FENCE LINE IN CONTRACT PLANS.
MAINLINE ROADWAY
SIDE VIEW
T 22
ILL CKT D 15
10.
INSTALLATION DETAIL
23
6 16 ILL CKT E
2 - 0
2 - 4 6" 6"
1 - 7 6" 12
12. 13. 14.
2" MIN.
5 28 10" 1 6 6 24 16 27 4 - 4 SEE NOTE 6 13 26 4

11
20
2 6 6 6 7 16
SLIDE LATCH 17 14
15.
WIRING SCHEMATIC
21
12"
20
#6 INSULATED STRANDED
23
22
10
PHOTOCELL TEST
R .
25
S T A
DRY TRANSFORMER (480/120 VOLT) 3 KVA COPPER BUSSED AND COPPER WOUND RESERVED FOR METER, CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND/OR DISCONNECT SWITCH AS REQUIRED BY THE UTILITY 24 CIRCUIT PANEL BOARD - MINIMUM SIZE WITH SEPARATE MAIN BREAKER.
E T
26 OZ GEDNEY TYPE GC BRONZE GROUND CLAMP OR EQUIVALENT (TYP.)
THERMOSTAT
OFF- AUTOMATIC
18 2 - 0 25 17 19
8 8 18
8 8
8 CONDUIT CONDUIT COUPLING (TYP.) SEE NOTE 14 ASPHALT OR CONCRETE 20
28
LABEL CABINET WITH BUSSWORK RATING
DETAIL A
15 23 11
GENERAL NOTES
SERVICE CABINET

1. 2. SEE STD. SPECIFICATION 9-29.24, SERVICE CABINETS. HINGES SHALL HAVE STAINLESS STEEL OR BRASS PINS. CABINETS SHALL BE RATED NEMA 3R AND SHALL INCLUDE TWO RAIN TIGHT VENTS. METERING EQUIPMENT DOORS SHALL BE PAD LOCKABLE. EACH DOOR SHALL BE GASKETED. INSTALL BEST CX CONSTRUCTION CORE ON BOTTOM LEFT AND RIGHT DOORS. SEE DOOR HINGE DETAIL, STD. PLAN J-3b; CONCEALED HEAVY DUTY STAINLESS STEEL LIFT OFF HINGES ARE ALLOWED AS AN ALTERNATIVE. UPPER LEFT DOOR SHALL HAVE 3 HINGES, LOWER LEFT DOOR SHALL HAVE 2 HINGES, AND RIGHT DOOR SHALL HAVE 3 HINGES. LOWER DOOR SHALL HAVE A TWO POSITION DOOR STOP ASSEMBLY.
1"
SIDE VIEW
DRAIN 1/2" x 12 BOLT WITH 4 HOOK (MINUS FOUNDATION) FENCE POST
EXPIRES MAY 5, 2005
3.
TO UTILITY
TO CONTROLLER CABINET TO LUMINAIRES
TO SERVICE GROUND PER STD. PLAN J-9a "TYPICAL GROUNDING DETAILS"
FOUNDATION
4. CONDUIT TO FENCE POST BONDING POINT
SERVICE CABINET TYPE E (0 - 200 AMP TYPE 240/480 SINGLE PHASE)
FRONT VIEW
SERVICE CABINET
PLAN VIEW
STANDARD PLAN J-3d

Harold J. Peterfeso
09/2003 REVISED KEY NOTE 16 MHG
11-05-03
DATE

DATE REVISION BY
PORTATION.
28680
NE E R
27
NOTE:
6 - 4
9 21
18
24
TRANSFORMER BREAKER (DPST 15 AMP - 480 VOLT)
O T
{ { { { {
16
ILL CKT A
10
R E N
F O R P

Pole wall 1/4 " 2 1/2 " Split coupling 2 1/2 " DIA elbow (see Note 1) A 2 1/2 " DIA Chase Nipple 2 1/2 " DIA Short Nipple D
Base plate thickness
1 3/4 " 1 3/4 " 1 3/4 " 2"
EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012 NOTES

1.
7200 LB 1/0
STRAIN POLE DIMENSION CHART

POLE CLASS (Resultant Horizontal Tension) KEY ITEM
1900 LB 2700 LB 3 3700 LB 3 4800 LB 1/0 5600 LB 1/0 6300 LB 1/0
2 1/2 " diameter weatherhead may be substituted for the elbow and nipple assembly.
Pole gauge
2.
Pole shaft shall have 0.14"/ft taper.
Base plate width
15"
15"
17"
18"
18"
20"
20"
3. B C
Anchor bolt circle diameter
16" 16" 19" 20" 20" 22" 22"
See Standard Plan J-7d for details.
Pole base diameter
10"
12"
14"
14"
15"
16"
17"
4.
Handholes may be 6" x 4" oval or rectangle.
2"
2"
2"
WIREWAY DETAIL
E F Mast arm length as noted in Contract G
Anchor bolt size
1"x36" 1 1/4 "x60" 1 3/8 "x60" 1 1/2 "x60" 1 1/2 "x60" 1 3/4 "x66" 1 3/4 "x66"
Two threads MIN, 5/8 " MAX

Anchor plate size
1"x3"x3" 1"x4"x4" 1"x4"x4" 1"x5"x5" 1"x5"x5" 1"x6"x6" 1"x6"x6"
E with two heavy hex nuts and two heavy washers Grout pad thickness = nut height + 1" MAX
2" Clearance
Vertical steel number and size
Eight #5 Eight #6 Eight #7 Eight #7 Eight #8 Eight #8 Eight #9
3/4 " Chamfer 3/8 " DIA Plastic drain tube Pavement surface
2 1/2 "
1"
1/8 "
Hand hole frame
3/8 "
1/2 " Steel bolt,
surface
1 1/2 " long, with washer
inside edges
40-0" or 50-0" from light source to base plate (See Contract)
Tap plate F for

3/16 Removable raintight hand
anchor bolt threads #4 Hoops, round or square at 1-0" approximate centers

4"
1/8 " MIN 1/4 " G

1" Plate centered
hole cover with gasket. Fasten with 2 stainless steel (ASTM F-593) screws
270^ 3/16 " All handholes 180^ 0^ Luminaire and wireway 90^ Wireway
G (TYP)
6"
2 1/2 " Clearance 3 Square or round or 4 round (steel shown for round)
3/16
CONE SECTION DETAIL
ATTACHMENT POINT ANGLES

5/8 " DIA x 3 1/2 " Cone section Heavy hex bolt Wireways (two per pole) (See Detail) Removable 6" 6" cap and nut (5 each per clamp) 1 1/8 " (TYP)
FOUNDATION DETAIL
HANDHOLE DETAIL
See Note 4
(See Contract)
Round and smooth
and nut for ground.
1"-2"
M .
S T A
F EO T
H I N G
Radius as Varies - 6" MIN Varies - 6" MIN required Strain clamp one per cable connection 30-0" (See Detail)
TYP
DIA + 1/4 " A B
30-0"
(TYP)
(TYP)
1 1/8 "
Handhole 7" (See Detail) Schedule 80 pipe sleeve 1" DIA x 1" Cable connect bolt 3 1/2 " 3/8 " Thick (A36) steel clamps C Base Plate (See Detail) D 1/4 " 3/8 " for 3 Gauge for 1/O Gauge
STRAIN POLE STANDARDS TYPE IV AND V

STANDARD PLAN J-7c
11"
11"
STRAIN CLAMP TYPE IV STANDARD DETAIL BASE PLATE DETAIL
06-19-98
DATE
TYPE V STANDARD
PORTATION.
1 1/8 "
10536
NE E R
Anchor Bolt
NOTE:
N O T
2 1/4 "
Unpaved
Foundation depth
2 1/2 " Clearance
18" MIN
F O R P
A
Face of guardrail
Back of curb
Edge of shoulder
Conduit reserve area
Conduit
PLAN
2 Conduit reserve area
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT
. . .
PLACEMENT
. .
FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
WI L L S T
D . B AMW R I S H O A I
E T
bo
.
x
. .
te
ep
SECTION A-A
:1
EXPIRES SEPT 10, 1998
STANDARD PLAN J-10

07-18-97
DATE
NOTE:
an
PORTATION.
er
th
E E GI R E E S T I S G S N I E O N L A
0014812
NE E R
J. .
N G
J-box
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
. .
. . . .
N W O N
O T
F O R P

SA CYFORD I DRAW N BY: L
2 - 0" 1 # 4 # 3 4 (TYP.) 4 " 2 # 4 SLIPFITTER

TOP OF POLE
NOTES 1. Steel Shaft shall be tapered either round or dodecagon (12-sided), 11-gauge, 4 1/2" O.D. at slipfitter weld. Taper shall be 0.14 inches per foot.
" 2 / 1 2 ) . P Y T (
DI AM . 2 -3 "
2 1/2" CLR. (TYP.) 2 -0 " 1/8
2. Hand Holes shall include a removable, rain-tight cover and gasket, fastened with two stainless steel screws (ASTM F 593). 3. Clamping Bolts shall be tightened to 50 ft-lbs max. torque. After state inspection, burr threads to prevent nut rotation. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. 4. The final height of the Anchor Bolts must be below the top of the Slip Plate Assembly to ensure proper function of the Slip Base.
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ANCHOR BOLT ANCHOR BOLT TEMPLATE TEMPLATE
3 # 4
5. All Poles shall be hot dip galvanized per AASHTO M111.

TAPERED STEEL SHAFT ~ SEE NOTE 1
SECTION
SECTION
(TYP.)
6. Grounding Conductor shall be non-insulated #4 AWG stranded copper, provide 3 - 0" min. slack. Clamp to steel reinforcing bar with connector suitable for use embedded in concrete.
SEE STD. SPEC. 9-07.1(2)FOR BENDING DIAM.
HOLE (TYP.) HEI GHT OF STANDARD TAPERED STEEL SHAFT ~ SEE NOTE 1 GROUNDING NUT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ SEE NOTE 6 1/8 3/16 1/2" STEEL BASE PLATE ~ SEE DETAIL GROUT PAD ~ INSTALL AFTER
3/16 TAPERED STEEL SHAFT ~ SEE NOTE 1 4" 6" HAND HOLE ~ SEE NOTE 2
1 - 7"
(2) 3/4" DIAM. STEEL HEX NUT, (2) WITH FLAT WASHERS (TYP.) 2 FULL THREADS MIN. 5/8" MAX. TOP OF FOUNDATION PAVED SURFACE 3/8" PREMOULDED JOINT FILLER
135^ HOOK 1 -7 " (TYP.) 1 # 4 2 # 4 1/2" STEEL PLATE W/HOLE = POLE BASE + 1/6" 3/16 1 - 10" 1/8 9" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE
BASE PLATE DETAIL

DIMENSIONS ARE OUT TO OUT UNPAVED SURFACE USE DETAILS ABOVE MATCHLINE FOR ROUND CONCRETE FOUNDATION MATCHLINE GROUNDING NUT HAND HOLE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ SEE NOTE 6 M AX. 8 " 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) TOP OF BASE PLATE ~ SEE NOTE 2 GROUNDING NUT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ SEE NOTE 6 HAND HOLE ~ SEE NOTE 2 MATCHLINE SQUARE CONCRETE FOUNDATION 2 "
PLUMBING STANDARD
1 "TO
3/8" I.D. DRAIN TUBE IN GROUT PAD
LEVELING NUT (TYP.)
SEE DETAILS ABOVE MATCHLINE ON
6" DIAM. HOLLOW IN CENTER OF GROUT PAD
3/4" 2 - 6" ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ ASTM F 1554 GR 55 (SEE NOTE 4) CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH
STEEL REINFORCING BAR M AX. 8 " 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
WITH TOP OF FOUNDATION

ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR DIAM.
2 1 / 2 "
2 1 / 2 "
4 "
4 "
S T A
DETAIL
1# 4 (TYP.)
E T
2 -0 "
1 -8 "
3 -0 "
3 -0 "
1 -3 1 / 2 "
1 -3 1 / 2 "
1" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.)
1/4" STEEL PLATE
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ~ SEE CONTRACT PLAN FOR DIAM.
( TYP. )
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ~ SEE CONTRACT PLAN FOR DIAM.
( TYP. )
36103
1 1/2"
ANCHOR BOLT TEMPLATE 2 "CL R. ( TYP. ) ( TYP. ) (TYP.) 3/4" HEX NUTS, STEEL, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) FLAT WASHERS, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT 2 - 3" ROUND FLAT WASHERS, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT 2 - 0" SQUARE 2 1/2" CLR. 2 "CL R. ANCHOR BOLT TEMPLATE (TYP.) 3/4" HEX NUTS, STEEL, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT 2 1/2" CLR. (TYP.) 9" BOLT CIRCLE
TYPE PS, TYPE 1, RM & FB SIGNAL STANDARD FOUNDATION DETAILS
STANDARD PLAN J-21.10-02

ANCHOR BOLT TEMPLATE
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
Pasco Bakotich III

NE E R
1 -8 "
# 4 3 (TYP.)
MI N.
# 4 2 (TYP.)
# 4 3 (TYP.)
06-27-11
DATE
ROUND CONCRETE FOUNDATION DETAIL
SQUARE CONCRETE FOUNDATION DETAIL
FIXED BASE
B R I
. W J A N W A S FA H O I N
T
TOP OF BASE PLATE
2 -0 "
1" DIAM.
9"
9 "
H S L N O
MI N.
F O R P

SLIP PLATE ~ ASTM A572 GR. 50 OR ASTM A588 1 - 3" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE ( TYP. ) 1" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) 7/8" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.)

1 1 / 4 "
^ 5 3 ) . P Y T (
1 - 3" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE 7/16" R. HOLE DIAM. = POLE BASE + 1/16" (TYP.)
1 3 / 8 "
SLIP PLATE TAPERED STEEL SHAFT WALL
3 7 / 1 6 "
( TYP. )
( TY P. )
1 - 3" DIAM. 4 " 1 2 0 ^( TYP. ) BOLT CIRCLE
1/8 3/8 1/8 3/8 ANCHOR PLATE 3/16
BASE PLATE
6 0 ^
4 "( TYP. )
6" DIAM. HOLE 5/8" R. (TYP.) 9" 8 1/2" 6" 6"
7" DIAM. HOLE
6" DIAM. HOLE BASE PLATE ~ ASTM A36 6" 8 1/2" KEEPER PLATE 6" 8 1/2"
SECTION
SECTION
ANCHOR PLATE ~ ASTM A572 GR. 50 OR ASTM A588
(28 GAGE SHEET METAL) PLACE BETWEEN POLE BASE PLATE AND SLIP PLATE ON TOP OF MIDDLE WASHERS ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN J-28.42
FOR DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN, SEE SLIP AND ANCHOR PLATES DETAIL
TAPERED STEEL SHAFT ~ SEE NOTE 1 GROUNDING NUT 3/16 ~ SEE NOTE 6 ~ SEE NOTE 2 1/8 3/16 1/2" BASE PLATE 1 1/4" ANCHOR PLATE HARDENED ROUND WASHER (TYP.)
FOR DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN, SEE BASE PLATE DETAIL
BASE PLATE DETAIL
2 - 0" 3 # 4 (TYP.) TOWARD ROADWAY 7/8" DIAM. HOLE W/ SMOOTH CHAMFERED EDGES STRAP TEMPLATE DI AM . 2 "M AX. 3# 4 (TYP.) 2 -0 " 3/8" I.D. DRAIN TUBE IN GROUT PAD TOWARD ROADWAY 1# 4 3/4" CLAMPING BOLT (TYP.)~ SEE NOTE 3
STRAP TEMPLATE
" 2 / 1 . R L C
2 -3 "
PLATE WASHER (TYP.)
28 GAUGE KEEPER PLATE 1 3/8" SLIP PLATE
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT
TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION 4 " 2 1/2" CLR. 1/2" THICK 2" WIDE 2 3/4" LONG STEEL BAR 2 # 4 (TYP.)
M AX.
MI N.
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT
GROUT PAD ~ INSTALL AFTER PLUMBING STANDARD LEVELING NUT (TYP.)
PLATE WASHER DETAIL SECTION

SEE DETAILS ABOVE MATCHLINE ~ FIXED BASE SQUARE CONCRETE FOUNDATION, SHEET 1 MATCHLINE HAND HOLE GROUNDING NUT ~ SEE NOTE 2 M AX. GROUNDING NUT
3" DIAM. GROUT WELL (TYP.)
~ 3/4" HEAVY HEX NUT AND HARDENED WASHER
D
SEE DETAILS ABOVE MATCHLINE ~ FIXED BASE SQUARE CONCRETE FOUNDATION, SHEET 1
SECTION
E
3/4" 2 - 6" ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ ASTM F 1554 GR 55 (SEE NOTE 4) MATCHLINE HAND HOLE ~ SEE NOTE 2 M AX. 6" DIAM. HOLLOW IN CENTER OF GROUT PAD STEEL REINFORCING BAR
CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH WITH TOP OF FOUNDATION (DO NOT GLUE PVC STUBOUT) ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR DIAM.
8 "
8 "
TOP OF BASE PLATE
TOP OF BASE PLATE
DOCUM ENT
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
DETAIL D E
1 3 / 8 "
3 7 / 8 "
1 3 / 8 "
3 7 / 8 "
4 "
4 "
S T A
E T
1 3/16" DIAM. 1# 4 (TYP.)
2 -0 "
2 -0 "
MI N.
MI N.
3# 4 (TYP.)
3 -0 "
3 -0 "
# 4 3 (TYP.) 1 -3 1 / 2 "
TACK WELD ~ AT ALL OVERLAPPING LOCATIONS (TYP.)
1 -3 1 / 2 "
36103
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR DIAM. STRAP TEMPLATE ASSEMBLY (TYP.) ~ 1/4" STEEL BARS, 3 REQD. ~ 2 PLACES 3/4" HEX NUTS, STEEL, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT FLAT WASHERS, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT 2 - 3" ROUND 2 1/2" CLR. (TYP.)
( TYP. )
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR DIAM. STRAP TEMPLATE ASSEMBLY
( TYP. )
1/4" STEEL BAR (TYP.) ~ 2" WIDE 1 - 3" LONG 2 "CL R. ( TYP. ) (TYP.) ~ 1/4" STEEL BARS, 3 REQD. ~ 2 PLACES 3/4" HEX NUTS, STEEL, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT FLAT WASHERS, 4 REQD. PER ANCHOR BOLT 2 1/2" CLR. (TYP.) 2 - 0" SQUARE
2 "CL R.
( TYP. )
TYPE PS, TYPE 1, RM & FB SIGNAL STANDARD FOUNDATION DETAILS
STRAP TEMPLATE DETAIL

Pasco Bakotich III

ELEVATION
ELEVATION
NE E R
1 -8 "
1 -8 "
# 4 2 (TYP.)
) . P Y T ( " 1 1
(TYP.)
06-27-11
DATE
ROUND CONCRETE FOUNDATION DETAIL
SQUARE CONCRETE FOUNDATION DETAIL
SLIP BASE
B R I
T
SLIP AND ANCHOR PLATES DETAIL
KEEPER PLATE DETAIL
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
4" 6" HAND HOLE
SA CYFORD I DRAW N BY: L
1 / 8 "
3 / 4 "
1 / 2 "
) TYP. ^( 0 2 1
H S L N O
F O R P

TOP OF FOUNDATION LEVEL W/ SIDEWALK OR ABOVE SOIL SURFACE ~ SEE PLACEMENT DETAILS 2 1 / 2 "M AX. GROUNDING CONDUCTOR NON-INSULATED #4 AWG STRANDED COPPER ~ PROVIDE 3 MIN. SLACK (ROUTE CONDUCTOR TO 1 1 / 2 "CL R. GROUNDING STUD) CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH WITH TOP OF FOUNDATION (DO NOT GLUE PVC STUBOUT) 2 1 / 2 "M AX. TOP OF FOUNDATION LEVEL W/ SIDEWALK OR ABOVE SOIL SURFACE ~ SEE PLACEMENT DETAILS
SIGNAL POLE
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR NON-INSULATED #4 AWG STRANDED COPPER ~ PROVIDE 3 MIN. SLACK (ROUTE CONDUCTOR TO GROUNDING STUD) CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH
NOTES 1. This structure has been designed according to the Fifth Edition 2009 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals. Basic wind velocity is 90 mph, Design Life/Recurrence Interval 50 years, and Fatigue Category III. 2. Foundations are designed for Type II, III, and SD Signal Standards with a maximum mast arm length of 65. 3. Foundations are designed for Single Mast Arm Standards and Double Mast Arm Standards with 90 between arms. Special foundation design is required for Double Arm Standards where the angle between mast arms is other than 90. For Double Mast Arm Standards with 90 between arms, use larger XYZ value for foundation depth selection. 4. Foundations not within the parameters of this standard require Special Design. Contact the WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office through the Engineer for Special Foundation Designs. 5. Foundations constructed within Ecology Embankments shall be increased in depth by the depth of the Ecology Embankment. 6. The top 2 feet of the foundation shall use a smooth form (such as paper or cardboard). After the concrete has cured, this entire form shall be removed. 7. For design parameters between the values listed in Table, depth requirements may be interpolated between the values provided.
SIGNAL POLE 1
1 GROUT
WITH TOP OF FOUNDATION (DO NOT GLUE PVC STUBOUT)
GROUT
M AX.
M AX.
7 "
SEE TABL E FOR FOUNDATI ON DEPTH " D"
M AX.
CONCRETE CAST W I THI N A CORRUGATED
1 -6 "
1 1 / 2 "
EARTH EMBANKMENT AS REQUIRED ~ SEE PLACEMENT DETAILS EXISTING GRADE
1 -6 "
M AX.
CL R.
7 "
EARTH EMBANKMENT AS REQUIRED ~ SEE PLACEMENT DETAILS EXISTING GRADE 2
1 -6 "
1 -6 "
AGAI NST UNDI STURBED EARTH,
DRI L L ED SHAFT ( CL ASS 4 0 0 0 P)
MI N.
CONCRETE CAST DI RECTL Y
M ETAL PI PE STAYI NPL ACE
2 ANCHOR BOLTS & ANCHOR PLATE SUPPLIED BY SIGNAL POLE MANUFACTURER CLAMP CONDUCTOR TO STEEL REINFORCING WITH LISTED CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE #4 HOOPS @ 1 - 0" CENTERS CL R. 3 " 8 - #8 BARS EVENLY SPACED 3" CLR. (TYP.) 1 MAX. GROUND SLOPE
FORM ( CL ASS 4 0 0 0 P) 2
MI N.
CLAMP CONDUCTOR TO STEEL REINFORCING WITH LISTED CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE LIMITS OF EXCAVATION (TYP.) #4 HOOPS @ 1 - 0" CENTERS CL R. 3" CLR. (TYP.)
1 MAX. GROUND SLOPE ANCHOR BOLTS & ANCHOR PLATE SUPPLIED BY SIGNAL POLE MANUFACTURER 8 - #8 BARS EVENLY SPACED SHORING OR EXTRA EXCAVATION (TYP.) CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
3 - 0" SQUARE DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD OR ROUND OR 4 - 0" ROUND
UNDISTURBED EARTH
OVER-EXCAVATED AREA SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH CONTROLLED-DENSITY FILL (CDF) OR WITH SOIL IN ACCORDANCE WITH STD. SPEC. 8-20.3(2)
1 - 0" 3 - 0" OR 4 - 0" MIN. (TYP.) ROUND
UNDISTURBED EARTH (TYP.)
FOUNDATION REINFORCEMENT DETAIL

CONCRETE CAST DIRECTLY AGAINST UNDISTURBED EARTH, DRILLED SHAFT 2
FOUNDATION REINFORCEMENT AND BACKFILL DETAIL

CONCRETE CAST WITHIN A CORRUGATED METAL PIPE STAY-IN-PLACE FORM
ALTERNATE # 1
1 CONDUIT SIZE AND QUANTITY AS SHOWN IN THE CONTRACT; CAP BOTH ENDS
ALTERNATE # 2 ALTERNATE #2 - CONSTRUCTION METHOD

METAL (SUBSURFACE) FORM REQUIRED When the existing soil will not retain a vertical face, over-excavate the foundation area and install a 36" or 48" diameter corrugated metal (pipe) form. The top of the corrugated metal form shall terminate 1 foot below final grade. Continue forming to full height using paper or cardboard form to achieve a smooth finish on final exposed cement concrete. Support the form as necessary to remain plumb.
THE ENGI NEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBL I CATI ON, I S KEPT ON DOCUM ENT PORTATI ON. A COPY M AY BE OBTAI NED UPON REQUEST.
ASSEMBLY NOTE
2 A TEMPORARY TEMPLATE SHALL BE USED TO HOLD THE TOP OF THE ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY SECURELY IN THE PROPER POSITION DURING THE FOUNDATION INSTALLATION
PAPER OR CARDBOARD FORM SHALL NOT BE USED BENEATH THE GROUND SURFACE
FOUNDATION DEPTH "D" TABLE

ALTERNATE #1 - DRILLED SHAFT-TYPE CONSTRUCTION
FOR LATERAL BEARING PRESSURE = 2500 PSF & = 34, 1500 PSF & = 28 , 1000 PSF & = 26
GROUND SLOPE = 3H : 1V OR FLATTER GROUND SLOPE = GREATER THAN 3H : 1V TO 2H : 1V
Place the concrete foundation. After concrete has cured, remove the entire paper or cardboard form portion. Backfill with controlled-density fill or compacted borrow in accordance withStandard Specification 8-20.3(2).
ALLOWABLE LATERAL BEARING PRESSURE
FOUNDATION TYPE
3 - 0" ROUND
XYZ (FT) 700 900 1350 1500 1900 2300 2600 3000
FOUNDATION TYPE
3 - 0" ROUND
XYZ (FT) 700 900 1350 1500 1900 2300 2600 3000
S T A
E T
10 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 11 - 0" 15 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 20 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 0" 1000 PSF
SPECIAL FOUNDATION DESIGN SPECIAL FOUNDATION DESIGN SPECIAL FOUNDATION DESIGN 11 - 0" 11 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 21 - 0" 21 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 11 - 0" 12 - 0" 13 - 0" 13 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 11 - 0" 12 - 0" 13 - 0" 13 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 0" 14 - 0" 18 - 0" 18 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 11 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 11 - 0"
1000 PSF
3 - 0" SQUARE 4 - 0" ROUND 3 - 0" ROUND
9 - 0" 11 - 0" 13 - 0" 15 - 0" 18 - 0" 18 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 2500 PSF OR GREATER 1500 PSF
1500 PSF
3 - 0" SQUARE 4 - 0" ROUND 3 - 0" ROUND 3 - 0" SQUARE 4 - 0" ROUND
25470
U C
9 - 0" 11 - 0" 15 - 0" 15 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 0" 7 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0"
2500 PSF OR GREATER
3 - 0" SQUARE 4 - 0" ROUND
ALTERNATE #2 - CORRUGATED METAL PIPE TYPE CONSTRUCTION

FOR LATERAL BEARING PRESSURE = 2500 PSF &
GROUND SLOPE = 3H : 1V OR FLATTER
= 23 , 1500 PSF & = 18 , 1000 PSF & = 17

GROUND SLOPE = GREATER THAN 3H : 1V TO 2H : 1V
SIGNAL STANDARD FOUNDATION PLAN

XYZ (FT)

1000 PSF
FOUNDATION TYPE
3 - 0" ROUND 4 - 0" ROUND 3 - 0" ROUND
XYZ (FT) 700 900 1350 1500 1900 2300 2600 3000

1000 PSF
FOUNDATION TYPE

2300 2600 3000
700
900
1350
1500
1900
10 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 15 - 0" 20 - 0" 25 - 0" 28 - 0" 28 - 0" 8 - 0" 8 - 0" 7 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 8 - 0" 9 - 0" 12 - 0" 13 - 0" 14 - 0" 15 - 0" 15 - 0" 1500 PSF
SPECIAL FOUNDATION DESIGN SPECIAL FOUNDATION DESIGN 11 - 0" 11 - 0" 14 - 0" 18 - 0" 21 - 0" 24 - 0" 28 - 0" 28 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 10 - 0" 11 - 0" 13 - 0" 16 - 0" 18 - 0" 18 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 14 - 0" 16 - 0" 21 - 0" 23 - 0" 23 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 10 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 0" 12 - 0"
8 - 0" 11 - 0" 15 - 0" 18 - 0" 21 - 0" 25 - 0" 25 - 0" 7 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 7 - 0" 8 - 0" 10 - 0" 13 - 0" 15 - 0" 15 - 0" 2500 PSF OR GREATER
1500 PSF 4 - 0" ROUND 2500 PSF OR GREATER 3 - 0" ROUND 4 - 0" ROUND 7 - 0" 11 - 0" 13 - 0" 18 - 0" 20 - 0" 20 - 0" 6 - 0" 6 - 0" 7 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0" 9 - 0"
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
R I C H A
N O T
NE E R
E E R
3 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S


NOTES 1. The Steel Light Standard Placement depicted on this plan is only intended for installations where roadside conditions allow its usage. Roadside conditions may require a special design by the Bridge Office, as determined by the Project Engineer. See Standard Plan J-28.30 for foundation details and construction methods. See Standard Plan J-28.50 for pole base and hand hole details.
2.
SEE TAPER NOTE
3.
20.0 END TAPER ~ FOR OPPOSING TRAFFIC (SEE TAPER NOTE) TOE OF EMBANKMENT WIDENING FOR END TAPER FOR OPPOSING TRAFFIC (SEE TAPER NOTE) SEE TAPER NOTE 4.5 4.5
TAPER NOTE
TOE OF EMBANKMENT WIDENING
End Taper (on approach from opposing traffic): 20 (longitudinal) = use on one-way roadways or where the Light Standard is not in the Design Clear Zone of the opposing traffic. use when the Light Standard is in the Design Clear Zone of the opposing traffic.
6H:1V min. taper
4.5 MIN. 6 MIN. 1 1 TYPICALLY 16.0 6 MIN. FOUNDATION VARIES 1
SHOULDER
FILL MATERIAL
MAST ARM
TRAFFIC
PLAN VIEW
CASES A & B
EMBANKMENTS
BASED ON FIELD CONDITIONS, STEEL LIGHT STANDARD PLACEMENT CAN BE ADJUSTED 35/64 4.0, WHEN APPROVED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER.
SEE TAPER NOTE

T H E O
S T A
TOE OF EMBANKMENT WIDENING FOR END TAPER FOR OPPOSING TRAFFIC (SEE TAPER NOTE)
DITCH INVERT (FLOW DIRECTION NOT INDICATED)
4.5 MIN. 6 MIN. 1 TYPICALLY 16.0 VARIES 1 FOUNDATION 6 MIN. 1
SHOULDER
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD PLACEMENT (SLIP BASE)

FILL MATERIAL
MAST ARM

TRAFFIC
PLAN VIEW
Pasco Bakotich III

08-07-07
DATE
CASE C
DITCH SECTIONS
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
SEE TAPER NOTE
BEVELED END SECTION
T
END TAPER ~ FOR OPPOSING TRAFFIC (SEE TAPER NOTE)
20.0
4.5
4.5
CULVERT ~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION (SEPARATE BID ITEM)
TOE OF EMBANKMENT WIDENING
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P

DRAWN BY: BILL BERENS VARIES WITH OFFSET DISTANCE (3.0 MIN.) EDGE OF SHOULDER HAND HOLE NOT STEEPER THAN 10H:1V SLOPE SLOPE ROUNDING FILL MATERIAL NOT STEEPER THAN 10H:1V SLOPE NOT STEEPER THAN 1.5H:1V STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION SLOPE 3H:1V THRU 2H:1V 3.0 MIN.

VARIES WITH OFFSET DISTANCE (3.0 MIN.) EDGE OF SHOULDER HAND HOLE NOT STEEPER THAN 10H:1V SLOPE SLOPE ROUNDING 3.0 MIN.
SLIP BASE
SLIP BASE
NOT STEEPER THAN 10H:1V SLOPE
FILL MATERIAL
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION SLOPE FLATTER THAN 3H:1V
NOT STEEPER THAN 2H:1V
SECTION VIEW
SECTION VIEW
CASE A SLOPES 3H:1V THRU 2H:1V (MAX.)
CASE B SLOPES FLATTER THAN 3H:1V
EMBANKMENTS
PROVIDE 3.0 MIN. LEVEL GRADE TO PREVENT BUILD-UP OF DEBRIS AROUND BASE VARIES WITH OFFSET DISTANCE (3.0 MIN.) EDGE OF SHOULDER SLIP BASE HAND HOLE BACK SLOPE SLIP BASE
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSTHE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON
VARIES WITH OFFSET DISTANCE (3.0 MIN.) EDGE OF SHOULDER BACK SLOPE
HAND HOLE
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
S T A
SECTION VIEW
SECTION VIEW
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD PLACEMENT (SLIP BASE)
CASE C FORE SLOPES 4H:1V OR FLATTER
CASE D FORE SLOPES STEEPER THAN 4H:1V (2H:1V MAX.)

DITCH SECTIONS
Pasco Bakotich III

08-07-07
DATE
PORTATION.
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION
25335
NE E R
FORE SLOPE 4H:1V OR FLATTER
FILL MATERIAL
FORE SLOPE STEEPER THAN 4H:1V (2H:1V MAX.)
NOTE:
T H E O
T
FILL MATERIAL
R E I N A N O
F O R P

DRAWN BY: BILL BERENS 3.0 MIN. FOR BEAM GUARDRAIL 4.0 MIN. FOR CONC. BARRIER TYPE 2

NOTES
3.0 MIN. FOR BEAM GUARDRAIL 4.0 MIN. FOR CONC. BARRIER TYPE 2
1.
See Standard Plan J-28.30 for foundation details and construction methods. See Standard Plan J-28.50 for pole base and hand hole details.
EDGE OF SHOULDER/ FACE OF GUARDRAIL TRAFFIC BARRIER (BEAM GUARDRAIL SHOWN) HAND HOLE FIXED BASE
EDGE OF SHOULDER/ FACE OF GUARDRAIL TRAFFIC BARRIER (BEAM GUARDRAIL SHOWN) HAND HOLE FIXED BASE
2.
VARIES (1.5 MAX.) NOT STEEPER THAN 2H:1V STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION SPECIALLY DESIGNED STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION
MAXIMUM EXPOSED CONCRETE EQUALS THE RATIO OF THE GRADE OF THE EXISTING SLOPE TIMES THE DIAMETER OF THE FOUNDATION EXISTING SLOPE STEEPER THAN 2H:1V
SECTION VIEW
SECTION VIEW
CASE E SLOPES 2H:1V OR FLATTER BEHIND TRAFFIC BARRIER
CASE F SLOPES STEEPER THAN 2H:1V BEHIND TRAFFIC BARRIER (SPECIAL DESIGN FOUNDATION)
EMBANKMENTS
OUTSIDE OF DESIGN CLEAR ZONE 4.0 MIN.
PROVIDE 2.0 MIN. LEVEL GRADE TO PREVENT BUILD-UP OF DEBRIS AROUND BASE
OUTSIDE OF DESIGN CLEAR ZONE 4.0 MIN. TOE OF BACK SLOPE FIXED BASE
PROVIDE 2.0 MIN. LEVEL GRADE TO PREVENT BUILD-UP OF DEBRIS AROUND BASE
FIXED BASE
T H E O
BACK SLOPE STEEPER THAN 3H:1V (2H:1V MAX.) EDGE OF SHOULDER / FACE OF CURB STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION BACK SLOPE STEEPER THAN 3H:1V (2H:1V MAX.)
S T A
FORE SLOPE STEEPER THAN 4H:1V (2H:1V MAX.)
CEMENT CONCRETE TRAFFIC CURB
SECTION VIEW
SECTION VIEW
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD PLACEMENT (FIXED BASE)
CASE G ROADSIDE DITCH WITH FORE SLOPE STEEPER THAN 4H:1V (2H:1V MAX.)
CASE H CUT SECTION WITH BACK SLOPE STEEPER THAN 3H:1V (2H:1V MAX.)

Pasco Bakotich III
08-07-07
DATE
BACK SLOPES
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
EDGE OF SHOULDER
DITCH BOTTOM
T
HAND HOLE
HAND HOLE
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ~ NON-INSULATED #4 AWG STRANDED COPPER ~ PROVIDE 3 - 0" MIN. SLACK (ROUTE CONDUCTOR TO LUMINAIRE GROUNDING STUD) 3" DIAM. GROUT WELL (TYP.) CONDUIT COUPLING ~ INSTALL FLUSH WITH TOP OF BARRIER (DO NOT GLUE PVC STUBOUT) 2 "M AX. ( TYP. ) 36"

NOTES 1. SeeStandard Plan J-28.40 for Luminaire Pole base mounting details.
EIGHT #7 BARS, EVENLY SPACED
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
CENTER THE CONDUIT IN THE FOUNDATION
2. The Strap Templates shall be held in place by nuts, 6" from the top of the foundation and 3" from the bottom of the anchor bolts. 18 heavy duty hex nuts and 6 round washers are required for a Slip Base assembly. 18 heavy duty hex nuts and 6 plate washers are required for a Fixed Base assembly. 3. Use Steel Light Standard Foundation Type A on level ground or slopes not exceeding 4H : 1V. Use Type B for slopes steeper than 4H : 1V, but not exceeding 2H : 1V. Slopes steeper than 2H : 1V shall require a special design. 4. These foundations are designed for a minimum of 2000 PSF (TYPE A)or 1500 PSF (TYPE B)allowable lateral bearing pressure for the soil. A special foundation shall be required for soil with allowable lateral bearing pressure lower than 1500 PSF. 5. The Luminaire Pole height shall not exceed 50 (H1). 6. Slip Bases shall not be installed on 50 (H1) poles with Double Mast Arms, nor on poles weighing more than 1000 lbs. 7. Slip Bases are not required on poles placed outside of the Design Clear Zone, nor on poles installed behind traffic barrier.
37 / 8 "M AX.
( TYP. )
( TYP. )
3 / 4 "
#7 REINFORCING STEEL BAR 1 #4 REINFORCING STEEL HOOP
ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE TABLE CLAMP CONDUCTOR TO STEEL REINFORCING BAR WITH LISTED CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE #4 HOOP (TYP.) 1 - 3" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE (TYP.)
1" DIAM. CONDUIT ~ CAP EACH END ~ PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CONDUIT FOR COMMUNICATION OR
TOP VIEW
FIXED BASE
HEAVY HEX NUT (TYP.) ~ SIZE TO MATCH ANCHOR BOLT (SEE TABLE)
SEEFIXED BASE FOR DETAILS NOT SHOWN
SIGNAL CABLE WHERE SHOWN IN THE CONTRACT
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW

51 / 4 "
SLIP BASE
2 "CL R.
3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) MI N. 3 "
8. Foundations constructed within Ecology Embankments shall be increased in depth by the depth of the Ecology Embankment. 9. Exposed portions of the foundation shall be formed to create a Class 2 surface finish. All forming shall be removed upon completion of foundation construction. 10. For excavation, concrete placement, and backfill options, see METHOD 1 and METHOD 2 on Sheet 2 of 2. 11. The Anchor Bolts shall be high-strength steel, manufactured from ASTM A449, with heavy hex nuts and hardened washers. Galvanize the Anchor Bolts according to AASHTO M232.
ROUND WASHER SIZE TO MATCH ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE TABLE DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 1 - 6" MIN. BELOW GROUND 2 - 0" MIN. UNDER PAVEMENT
STRAP TEMPLATE ASSEMBLY (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL
12. The foundation shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements of Standard Specification 8-20.3(4). 13. SeeStandard Plans C-8b andC-85.14 for steel light standards on traffic barrier.
SEE NOTES 3 & 4
ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE TABLE
EXTEND THE CONDUIT 6" MIN. BEYOND THE FOUNDATION OR THE CONTROLLED DENSITY BACKFILL #4 HOOP (TYP.) CLAMP CONDUCTOR TO STEEL REINFORCING BAR WITH LISTED CONNECTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
S T A
HEAVY HEX NUT (TYP.) ~ SIZE TO MATCH ANCHOR BOLT (SEE TABLE)
E T
( D + 1/16" ) DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) ISOMETRIC VIEW ~ SEE TABLE #7 (TYP.) CONCRETE CLASS 4000P
TRAFFI C
SLIP BASE
ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY

(SLIP BASE SHOWN)
1/4" STEEL BAR (TYP.) ~ 2" WIDE 1 - 3" LONG
25470
U C
21 / 2 "CL R.
2 1/2" CLR.
ANCHOR BOLT TABLE

LUMINAIRE HEIGHT (H1)
20 TO 50 20 TO 50 20 TO 45 46 TO 50
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION TYPES A & B

4 "M I N.
MAST ARM TYPE

SINGLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE
MAST ARM LENGTH

6 TO 16 6 TO 8 10 TO 16 10 TO 16
ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER "D"

1"

FIXED BASE
1 - 1" (TYP.)
1" 1" 1 1/8" TOP VIEW SEESLIP BASE FOR DETAILS NOT SHOWN
ANCHOR BOLT LAYOUT
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
ELEVATION VIEW
STRAP TEMPLATE ASSEMBLY
FIXED BASE
R I C H A
N O T
TYPE A : 5 -# 4 HOOPS @
TYPE B : 8 -# 4 HOOPS @
NE E R
E E R
~ NG ~ 9"SPACI ~ 1 1 " SPACI NG ~
TYPE A : 4 -6 "
TYPE B : 8 -0 "
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

NOTE These foundation Construction Methods are applicable to all Steel Light Standard Placement Cases. SeeStandard Plans J-28.22, J-28.24, andJ-28.26.
LUMINAIRE POLE
EDGE OF SHOULDER LUMINAIRE POLE
EDGE OF SHOULDER
SLOPE ROUNDING
6 "M AX.
POLE BASE
POLE BASE
SLOPE ROUNDING EMBANKMENT WIDENING
EMBANKMENT WIDENING SLOPE 2H : 1V (MAX.) OR FLATTER
UNDISTURBED SOIL (TYP.) SLOPE 2H : 1V (MAX.) OR FLATTER
UNDISTURBED SOIL (TYP.) TEMPORARY SLOPE OR SHORE AS REQUIRED (TYP.) METAL FORM FOR LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION OVER-EXCAVATED AREA SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH CONTROLLED-DENSITY-FILL (CDF), OR WITH COMPACTED BORROW IN ACCORDANCE WITH CONCRETE CLASS 4000P STANDARD SPECIFICATION 8-20.3(2) LIMITS OF STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION CONCRETE CLASS 4000P
3 - 0" DIAM.
UNDISTURBED SOIL
1 - 0" (TYP.)
3 - 0" DIAM. UNDISTURBED SOIL (CASE A SHOWN)
(CASE A SHOWN)
METHOD 1
NO SUBSURFACE FORM
METHOD 2
METAL (SUBSURFACE) FORM REQUIRED
Auger the hole for the foundation. Use paper or cardboard form to achieve a smooth finish on the final exposed cement concrete. Support the form as necessary to remain plumb. SeeStandard Plans J-28.24 andJ-28.26 for maximum heights of exposed foundation when no embankment widening is to be installed. Place the concrete foundation. After concrete has cured, remove the paper or cardboard form portion. Construct the embankment widening (if required).
S T A
E T
SeeStandard Plans J-28.24 andJ-28.26 for maximum heights of exposed foundation when no embankment widening is to be installed. Place the concrete foundation. After concrete has cured, remove the paper or cardboard form portion. Backfill with controlled-density fill or compacted borrow in accordance withStandard Specification 8-20.3(2). Construct the embankment widening (if required).
25470
U C
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATION TYPES A & B

CONSTRUCTION METHODS
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
R I C H A
N O T
This option is only used when the existing soil in the hole will remain standing and the cement concrete can be placed without causing the soil to collapse. Concrete shall be cast directly against undisturbed soil.
When the existing soil will not retain a vertical face, over-excavate the foundation area and install a 36" diameter, corrugated metal (pipe) form. The corrugated metal form shall not extend more than 6" below any portion of the foundation that will remain exposed upon final grading. Continue forming to full height using paper or cardboard form to achieve a smooth finish on final exposed cement concrete. Support the form as necessary to remain plumb.
NE E R
E E R
TYPE A : 4 -6 "
TYPE B : 8 -0 "
TYPE A : 4 -6 "
TYPE B : 8 -0 "
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAWN BY: BILL BERENS 1 1/4 " DIAM. HOLE W/ SMOOTH CHAMFERED EDGES LUMINAIRE POLE

NOTES CLAMPING BOLT TABLE
LUMINAIRE HEIGHT (H1)
20 TO 50
MAST ARM TYPE

SINGLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE
MAST ARM LENGTH

6 TO 16 6 TO 8 6 TO 8 10 TO 16 10 TO 16
CLAMPING BOLT DIAMETER "D"
1.
50 (H1) poles with double mast arms or poles weighing in excess of 1000 lbs. shall not be installed on a Slip Base. The Slip and Anchor Plates shall be manufactured from ASTM A572 GR.50 or ASTM A588. All Slip Plate notched surfaces shall be finished smooth. The Clamping Bolts shall be high strength steel, manufactured from AASHTO M164, with heavy hex nut and hardened washer. Galvanize the Clamping Bolts according to AASHTO M232. Round and smooth all edges along wire-way to protect the conductors. See Standard Plan J-28.70 for wiring details. Galvanize the Anchor/Slip Plate after fabrication according to AASHTO M 111. Clamping Bolt diameters may vary on existing installations. Replace them with the same size as the originals when repairing or reusing a luminaire pole.
2.
1" 1" 1 1 1
HEAVY HEX NUT (TYP.) ~ SIZE TO MATCH CLAMPING BOLT
20 TO 45 46 TO 50 1/2" THICK 2" WIDE 2 3/4" LONG STEEL BAR 20 TO 45 46 TO 50
3.
4.
PLATE WASHER DETAIL

PLATE WASHER (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL 1 SLIP BASE NOT ALLOWED
5. 6.
6" POLE BASE PLATE
8 1/2"
1 - 3" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE 6" 8 1/2" 1" (TYP.) 4" (TYP.)
9" 1 1/2" (TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
120^ (TYP.) 4"
9/16" R. (TYP.)
KEEPER PLATE
SLIP PLATE 35^ (TYP.)
1 1/16" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) 6" DIAM. HOLE HARDENED ROUND WASHER (TYP.) ~ SIZE TO MATCH CLAMPING BOLT
7" DIAM. HOLE (28 GAUGE SHEET METAL) TOP VIEW 6" DIAM.HOLE 1 - 3" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE 120^ (TYP.)
(T 4" YP .)
1 1/4" THICK ANCHOR PLATE 1 1/16" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.)
KEEPER PLATE
120^ (TYP.)
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
SLIP PLATE
ANCHOR/SLIP PLATE ASSEMBLY
ANCHOR PLATE
R I C H A
(TYP.)
S T A
E T
SLIP PLATE
1 1/4"
B
1 3/8"
ANCHOR PLATE 3/8 ANCHOR PLATE 7/16 1/8
EXPIRES NOVEMBER 14, 2008
SECTION
TOP VIEW
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD ANCHOR/SLIP PLATE FOR SLIP BASE
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW
ANCHOR/SLIP PLATE ASSEMBLY

Pasco Bakotich III

08-07-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25470
NE E R
HEAVY HEX CLAMPING BOLT (TYP.) ~ 1" DIAM. (SEE NOTE 6). TORQUE CLAMPING BOLTS ~ SEE NOTE 4, STD. PLAN J-28.40
SLIP PLATE
NOTE:
60^
N O T
T S U R
F O R P

LUMINAIRE POLE LUMINAIRE POLE 1" HEAVY HEX NUT (TYP.) 2 PLATE WASHER (TYP.) ~ SEE STD. PLAN J-28.42 1 5 / 8 " POLE BASE PLATE 1 1 / 2 "M AX.

1.00 - 8 UNC 8" LONG BOLT THREADED FULL LENGTH (ASTM A325 OR F 1554 GR. 105) WITH TWO HEAVY HEX NUTS, TWO PLATE WASHERS, AND A ROUND WASHER (TYP.) (GALVANIZED AASHTO M232)
NOTES 1. Galvanize the Elbow Assembly after fabrication according to AASHTO M 111. 2. SeeStandard Plan J-28.50 for Pole Base and Hand Hole details.
3/16" THICK PREFORMED "FABREEKA" FABRIC PAD WITH 5" DIAM. HOLE. CEMENT TO FLANGE PLATE AND TRIM OUTSIDE EDGE FLUSH. 1 - 3" 5" (TYP.)
9"
4 " ( T Y P . )
3 / 4 "
B A
1 0 "
120^ (TYP.)
5" DIAM. ACCESS HOLE
2 POLE BASE PLATE
1 / 4 "( TYP. )
BAND (TYP.) TAP FOR BOLT (TYP.)
. D .
( TYP. )
TYP. 5/16 1/4
. R " 0 1
1 0 . 75 " O
1 - 3" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE 1 5/8" PLATE (ASTM A36)
1 -3 "
5 "
LOCK WASHER (TYP.)
HEAD MACHINE 3 1/2" 3/16" (17" MIN. LONG) SCREW W/ LOCK WASHER (TYP.) (STAINLESS STEEL)
1 " ( T Y P . )
10 3/4" O.D. 0.365 WALL ~ WELDED ELBOW (ASTM A234 GR. WPB)
5/16
1 1/2" DIAM. WEEP HOLE 1" DIAM. HEAVY HEX BOLT (TYP.) 5/16" 1/2" FLAT HEAD MACHINE SCREW (TYP.) 7/16 3/4" FABREEKA PAD DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD ELBOW 1 SEE CONTRACT PLAN FOR SLOPE OF PARAPET FACE. 2 SEE STANDARD PLAN J-28.50 FOR POLE BASE PLATE REQUIREMENTS. 1 10"
" 2 / 1 " 8 / 15
THICK STEEL BAND (TYP.) ~ BEND TO FIT
TAP FOR BOLT (TYP.)
5" DIAM. HOLE
1 5/8" PLATE (ASTM A36)
VIEW
SECTION
THE FACE SHALL BE PLANE AFTER FABRICATION, TO PROVIDE A SEAL BETWEEN THE BARRIER AND THE ELBOW.
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD ELBOW DETAIL

FOR LUMINAIRE POLES WITH SINGLE MAST ARM 12 - 0" OR LESS AND DOUBLE MAST ARMS 8 - 0" OR LESS, MOUNTED ON BRIDGE OR RETAINING WALLS.
HAND HOLE
PEDESTRIAN RAILING LUMINAIRE POLE
HAND HOLE 3 " HAND HOLE LUMINAIRE POLE
S T A
~ ~
E T
SEE
PL ANS
PL ANS
SEE
SEE
FOR CLARITY
FOR CLARITY
BANDS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY
ELBOW ~ SEE DETAIL
ELBOW ~ SEE DETAIL
ELBOW ~ SEE DETAIL 1" CONDUIT ~ SEE BRIDGE PLANS 1" CONDUIT ~ SEE BRIDGE PLANS 1" DIAM. H. S. BOLT W/ HARDENED LOCK WASHER AND NUT (TYP.) (ASTM A325 OR F 1554 BR. 105) SEE BRIDGE PLANS FOR LUMINAIRE SEE BRIDGE PLANS FOR LUMINAIRE ANCHORAGE DETAIL WHEN TRAFFIC BARRIER HEIGHT IS 42", MAINTAIN APPROX. HEIGHT FROM TOP OF BARRIER TO HAND HOLE SHOWN. ANCHORAGE DETAIL
25470
U C
1" CONDUIT ~ SEE BRIDGE PLANS 1" DIAM. H. S. BOLT W/ HARDENED LOCK WASHER AND NUT (TYP.) (ASTM A325 OR F 1554 GR. 105) SEE BRIDGE PLANS FOR LUMINAIRE ANCHORAGE DETAIL
1" DIAM. H. S. BOLT W/ HARDENED LOCK WASHER AND NUT (TYP.) (ASTM A325 OR F 1554 GR. 105)
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD ELBOW MOUNTING ON BRIDGE 7 RETAINING WALL

Pasco Bakotich III

BRIDGE PEDESTRIAN BARRIER SINGLE-SLOPE BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER F-SHAPE BRIDGE TRAFFIC BARRIER
E E R
BANDS NOT SHOWN
BANDS NOT SHOWN
06-27-11
DATE
TYPICAL SECTIONS
R I C H A
~ ~
N O T
LUMINAIRE POLE
CONTRACT
CONTRACT
CONTRACT
NE E R
PL ANS
5/16" 1/2" FLAT
~ ~ 3"
3 "
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT BRACKET ~ 1/4" THICK STEEL 2" WIDE 4" LONG 3/16 (TYP.)

NOTES 1. Pole Base Plate for a Slip Base design shall be 1 1/4" steel manufactured from ASTM A572 GR. 50 or ASTM A588. Pole Base Plate for a Fixed Base design shall be either 1 1/4" steel manufactured from ASTM A572 GR. 50, ASTM A588, or 1 1/2" manufactured from ASTM A36. All Pole Base Plate notched surfaces shall be finished smooth. 2. Round and smooth all edges along wire-way to protect conductors. See Standard Plan J-28.70 for wiring details.
ROUND AND SMOOTH INSIDE EDGES 1 CLAMP ~ 1/8" THICK STEEL 2" WIDE 3" LONG
1 "
POLE BASE PLATE
3. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 111.

GROUNDING BOLT 2 1 / 2 " T 2
REMOVABLE RAINTIGHT HAND HOLE COVER WITH GASKET ~ FASTEN WITH TWO STAINLESS STEEL (ASTM F 593) SCREWS
4. See Standard Plans C-8b, C-85.14, and J-28.60 for foundation and base plate requirements when steel light standards are mounted on concrete traffic barrier. 5. See Standard Plan J-28.42for details when Slip Base is required.
1 "( TYP. )
1 TYPICAL HAND HOLE ORIENTATION 4" LUMINAIRE POLE
THE CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT CONFIGURATIONS VARY AMONG DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS. CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENTS ARE REQUIRED ON ALL POLES, FIXED OR SLIP BASE.
3 5 ^ ( T Y P . )
HAND HOLE 2 T = RIM PLATE THICKNESS BY LUMINAIRE POLE FABRICATOR. FIXED BASE: RADIUS = ( D/2+1/16" ) (TYP.) ~ FOR "D," SEE TABLE ON STANDARD PLAN J-28.30 8 1 / 2 " SLIP BASE: RADIUS = 9/16" (TYP.) ~ MATCH SLIP 6 "
B
LUMINAIRE POLE
PLATE, STANDARD PLAN J-28.42

1 2 0 ^ ( TY P. )
3/16 ~ SEE STD. PLAN J 2 8 . 4 5 HAND HOLE 1
POLE BASE PLATE
STRUCTURE
GROUNDING BOLT 6 " LUMINAIRE POLE
C
" 4 ) P. TY (
BACK-UP STRIP 3 4 1" MIN. POLE BASE PLATE POLE BASE PLATE FOR DETAILS NOT SHOWN, SEE VIEW A ABOVE ORIENTATION FOR INSTALLATION ON BRIDGE OR RETAINING WALL ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN J-28.45 (COVER NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) 3 1/4" THICK, OR NO THINNER THAN POLE WALL THICKNESS. TACK WELD OR SEAL WELD TO BASE PLATE.
TO
6" DIAM. HOLE
FOR PLATE THICKNESS, REFER TO NOTE 1
TOP VIEW
POLE BASE PLATE DETAIL

ELEVATION VIEW
CONFIGURATION AND LOCATION OF THE HAND HOLE VARIES AMONG MANUFACTURERS ~ MINIMUM SIZE OPENING SHOWN
t =
SIZE OF FILLET WELD BY LUMINAIRE POLE FABRICATOR.
SECTION
S T A
E T
D
6" DIAM. HOLE POLE BASE PLATE
25470
U C
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD POLE BASE AND HAND HOLE DETAILS

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET 1/4" BACK-UP STRIP LUMINAIRE POLE APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

06-02-11
DATE
VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
R I C H A
N O T
VIEW
NE E R
E E R
VIEW
UNL ESS M OUNTED
~ ~ 11"
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

1 - 0" DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 6" 2 1/2"

NOTES 1. SeeStandard Plans C-8b andC-85.14 for foundation and anchor bolt details.
2 3/4"
2 3/4"
1" STEEL PLATE 1 3/4" (ASTM A 572 GR. 50 OR ASTM A 588) 1 8 1 / 2 " T HAND HOLE
2. Round and smooth all edges around hand hole and along the wire-way to protect the conductors. 3. SeeStandard Plan J-28.70 for wiring details. 4. Install grout after plumbing the pole.
BACK-UP RING 6 3 / 8 "
5" DIAM. HOLE
3/16 CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT CONTINUOUS BACK-UP BRACKET ~ 1/4" THICK STEEL, 2" WIDE 4" LONG POLE WALL
1 -5 "
RING ~ 1/4", OR NO
WALL THICKNESS ~ TACK CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT ~ SEE DETAIL WELD TO PLATE
1 "M I N.
POLE WALL
POLE BASE PLATE 2
GROUNDING BOLT
t
3/16 CLAMP ~ 1/8" THICK STEEL, 2" WIDE 3" LONG 1 3 / 4 "
HAND HOLE
CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT DETAIL

CONFIGURATIONS VARY AMONG DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS
REMOVABLE RAINTIGHT HAND HOLE COVER WITH GASKET ~ FASTEN WITH TWO STAINLESS STEEL (ASTM F 593) SCREWS 1 1/4" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) 1 T = RIM PLATE THICKNESS BY LUMINAIRE POLE FABRICATOR
VIEW
A
2
t =
SIZE OF FILLET WELD BY LUMINAIRE POLE FABRICATOR
SECTION
LUMINAIRE POLE
DOCUM ENT
4" HAND HOLE ~ CONFIGURATIONS VARY AMONG DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS
LUMINAIRE POLE 6 "
S T A
E T
ANCHOR BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 1 6 " TOP OF POLE BASE PLATE GROUT POLE BASE PLATE TOP OF FOUNDATION / BARRIER HAND HOLE
25470
U C
3/8" DRAIN TUBE
STEEL LIGHT STANDARD BARRIER MOUNTED BASE

Pasco Bakotich III

SEE NOTE 4
06-02-11
DATE
PLACEMENT DETAIL
ISOMETRIC VIEW
R I C H A
N O T
NE E R
E E R
THINNER THAN POLE
6 3 / 8 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

NOTES
(4) 1 1/4" DIAM. ANCHOR BOLTS W/ 6 - HEAVY HEX NUTS AND BOLT IS GALVANIZED, FULL LENGTH (ASTM A449 OR F1554 GRADE 105) DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 1 -6 " 6 - WASHERS PER BOLT ~ BOLT CIRCLE - 4" ANCHOR BOLT TEMPLATE 4 -4 " ~ 1/2" PLATE, ASTM A36. GALV. NOT REQUIRED (2 PER POLE) BOLT CIRCLE + 4"
1. These Foundations are designed for a minimum of 1,500 PSF allowable lateral bearing pressure for the soil. A Special Foundation shall be required for soil with allowable lateral bearing pressure lower than 1,500 PSF. 2. These Foundations are designed for installation on level ground, or on sloping ground, not to exceed 2 : 1 slopes. Slopes steeper than 2 : 1 require a special design. 3. Foundations constructed within ecology embankments shall be increased in depth, by the depth of the ecology embankment. 4. Foundations not within the parameters of this standard require Special Design. Contact the WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office through the Engineer for Special Foundation Designs.
ANCHOR BOLT TEMPLATE
25 1/2" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE 1 3/8" HOLE (TYP.)
5. The top 2 - 0" of the foundation shall use a smooth form (such as paper or cardboard). After the concrete has cured, this entire form shall be removed. 6. Galvanized Welded Wire Mesh shall be 2 mesh per lineal inch, 0.0625" diam. wire, with 0.4375" overlap. Contractor to form fit and install. DESIGN CRITERIA:
( TYP. )
1 / 2 "
8 "
ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY
*
THREADED LENGTH
CAMERA POLE DRILL AND TAP FOR 1/4" DIAM. CAP SCREW, 3 PLACES, @ 9" CENTER TO CENTER, ALL 4 EDGES S. S. SCREW, ASTM F593 AND WASHER ANCHOR BOLT TOP OF BASE
FOR LOAD CASES #1 and #2 20 - 30 40
3H : 1V OR FLATTER
4 - 6" 5 - 6" 7 - 0"
2H : 1V
DIAMETER
LENGTH
BOLT CIRCLE
25 1/2" 25 1/2" 25 1/2"
WIND VELOCITY:
6 - 6" 7 - 6" 9 - 0" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 4 - 4" 4 - 4" 4 - 4"
GALVANIZED WELDED WIRE MESH ~ SEE NOTE 6
TOP OF FOUNDATION
50
90 MPH Maximum Pole Deflection shall not exceed 0.7" in 30 MPH and 1.4" in 70 MPH wind. LOAD CASE # 1 Camera (1) - EPA = 4.00 sq. ft. @ 2 - 0" above pole top, and:
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR # 4 AWG STRANDED COPPER WITH 3 MIN. SLACK, CLAMP CONDUCTOR TO REBAR WITH LISTED CONDUCTOR SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, ROUTE CONDUCTOR TO CAMERA POLE GROUNDING STUD.
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR # 4 AWG STRANDED COPPER WITH 3 MIN. SLACK, CLAMP CONDUCTOR TO REBAR WITH LISTED CONDUCTOR
Dish (1) - 1 - 0" diameter @ pole top level. LOAD CASE # 2 Camera (1) - EPA = 4.00 sq. ft. @ 2 - 0" above pole top, and: Camera (2) - EPA = 0.54 sq. ft. each @ 1 - 0" and 2 - 0" from pole top, and:
GALVANIZED WELDED WIRE MESH
SUITABLE FOR USE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, ROUTE CONDUCTOR TO CAMERA POLE GROUNDING STUD.
CAMERA POLE NUT HEI GHT + 1 " 61 / 2 "M AX. 2" DIAM. CONDUIT WITH CAPS ON BOTH ENDS 5 "M I N. GALVANIZED WELDED WIRE MESH ~ SEE DETAIL
61 / 2 "M AX.
2" DIAM. CONDUIT WITH CAPS ON BOTH ENDS GALVANIZED WELDED WIRE MESH ~ SEE DETAIL 5 "M I N.
NUT HEI GHT + 1 "
CAMERA POLE
NEMA Cabinet (2) - EPA = 1.33 sq. ft. each @ 3 - 8" from pole top, install both NEMA cabinets back to back, and: Radio Equipment (2) - EPA = 2.25 sq ft. each @ 2 - 0" and 9 - 0" from pole top. EPA = Effective Projected Area
M AX.
1 -6 "
1 -6 "
M AX.
2 "
2 "
CONC. CAST DI RECTL Y AGAI NST UNDI STURBED SOI L 2 -0 "
S T A
E T
4 - 1 1/4" DIAM. ANCHOR BOLT 2 1 MAX. GROUND SLOPE
4 - 1 1/4" DIAM. ANCHOR BOLT
1 MAX. GROUND SLOPE
8 - #7 BARS ~ EVENLY SPACED
25470
U C
UNDISTURBED SOIL (TYP.) 2" CLR. (TYP.) LIMITS OF STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
8 - #7 BARS ~ EVENLY SPACED
2" CLR. (TYP.)
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
#4 HOOPS @ 1 - 0" ON CENTER (TYP.)
CAMERA POLE FOUNDATION DETAILS
#4 HOOPS @ 1 - 0" ON CENTER (TYP.) CONCRETE

CONCRETE CLASS 4000 P 3 - 6" ROUND
CLASS 4000 P
1 - 0" (TYP.)
3 - 6" ROUND
UNDISTURBED SOIL
FOUNDATION REINFORCEMENT DETAIL

(CONCRETE CAST DIRECTLY AGAINST UNDISTURBED EARTH)
FOUNDATION REINFORCEMENT AND BACKFILL DETAIL

(CONCRETE CAST INSIDE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE STAY-IN-PLACE FORM)
Pasco Bakotich III

E E R
06-27-11
DATE
ALTERNATE # 1
ALTERNATE # 2
R I C H A
2 -0 "
Shoring or Extra Excavation as Required. Excavated area shall be backfilled with Controlled-Density Fill or with soil in accordance with Standard Specification 8-20.3(2).
N O T
ALTERNATE #2 - CONSTRUCTION METHOD
NE E R
CAMERA POLE HEIGHT
DEPTH OF FOUNDATION "D"
ANCHOR BOLT ASTM A449 OR F1554 GR 105
This structure has been designed according to the Fifth Edition 2009 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires , and Traffic Signals. Basic wind velocity is 90 MPH. Design Life/Recurrence Interval 50 years and Fatigue Category III.
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

1/4" CLOSED CELL NEOPRENE GASKET CAMERA MOUNT PLATE SEE POLE TOP DETAIL AND CAMERA POLE DATA TABLE DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 0 . 3 7 5 " 1/4" CLOSED CELL NEOPRENE GASKET 1 -0 "

NOTES
POLE TOP PLATE
6"
1. Verify Pole Top Plate, Camera Mount Plate, Bolt Circle, and Bolt Holes are adequate for the required Camera prior to releasing poles for manufacturing. 2. Steel shall be galvanized after fabrication per AASHTO M111. Hardware shall be galvanized per AASHTO M232. Fasteners less than 0.50" (in.) diameter shall be stainless or brass. 3. Attach Camera to Camera Mount Plate using four (4) 3/8"-16 UNC 1.75" stainless steel bolts with eight (8) stainless steel washers and four (4) lock-nuts with nylon inserts, or as approved by the Camera Supplier. 4. For Ground Mount Details, see Standard Plan J-29.10. For Elbow Mount Details, see Standard Plan J-29.16. DESIGN CRITERIA:
RAIN CAP DETAIL
4.75" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE FOR CAMERA MOUNT WITH 4 0.44" 0.75" SLOTS EQUALLY SPACED ~ SEE NOTES 1 AND 3
13.00" DIAM. POLE TOP PLATE 1.75" DIAM. CENTER HOLE (IN BOTH PLATES) UPPER HAND HOLE WITH FRAME AND COVER ON FACE
1 -0 "
1/4 0.50" DIAM. J-HOOK FOR WIRING WELDED TO INTERIOR OF POLE 1 - 0" FROM TOP OF POLE AND 180 FROM UPPER HANDHOLE
CAMERA MOUNT PLATE (DIAM.) ~ SEE NOTE 1
TOP DIAM. "PT" ~ SEE TABLE
LOCATE HOOK OVER 0.25" 1.00" LONG SLOT IN POLE WALL
VIEW
A
2 1/2" DIAM. HEAVY WALLED PIPE T=0.276" 0 . 5 0 " CAMERA MOUNT PLATE 1/4 3/16
WIND VELOCITY: 90 MPH Maximum Pole Deflection shall not exceed 0.7" in 30 MPH and 1.4" in 70 MPH wind. LOAD CASE #1:
~ SEE CAM ERA POL E DATA 1/4-20 NC, HHCS S. S. (TYP.) LENGTH SUFFICIENT TO SECURE CONDUCTOR BUT NOT TOUCH POLE WALL
3 "
POLE TOP PLATE
1 -0 "
Camera (1) - EPA = 4.00 sq. ft. @ 2 - 0" above pole top, and:
1/4
0.75" 1" SLOT (2 REQUIRED) 180 APART 1/4 TO FACILITATE GALVANIZING ~ ORIENTED AS REQUIRED
Dish (1) - 1 - 0" diameter @ pole top level. LOAD CASE #2: Camera (1) - EPA = 4.00 sq. ft. @ 2 - 0" above pole top, and:
UPPER HAND HOLE 5.625" 7.375" FRAME WITH COVER
Camera (2) - EPA = 0.54 sq. ft. @ 1 - 0" and 2 - 0" from pole top, and:
0 . 3 7 5 " ( TYP. ) 1 . 5 "
POLE TOP DETAIL
NEMA Cabinet (2) - EPA = 1.33 sq. ft. @ 3 - 8" from pole top, install back-to-back NEMA Cabinets, and:
POLE WALL
BOLT HOLE, DIAM. "Z" ~ SEE TABLE
ROUND OR MULTI-SIDED
Radio Equipment (2) - EPA = 2.25 sq. ft. each @ 2 - 0" and 9 - 0" from pole top. EPA = Effective Projected Area
0.25" R.
ANCHOR BOLT SQUARE " S" BASE PL ATE CIRCLE ~ SEE TABLE FOR DIAM. ~ SEE TABL E
CONDUCTOR
1/2" - 13 NC TAPPED CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT ~ SEE DETAIL
S T A
GROUND ANGLE
1/4" STEEL CHANNEL
1/4
E T
CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT DETAIL

HAND HOLE CONDUCTOR ATTACHMENT DETAILS MAY VARY PER MANUFACTURER
VIEW
B
LOWER HAND HOLE SHALL BE PLACED
CAMERA POLE DATA

CAMERA HEIGHT "PL" (FT.) TOP DIAM. "PT" SQUARE (IN.) "S" (MIN.) (IN.)
8.50 8.50 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 10.00 10.00 25.00 25.00 25.00 25.00 25.00 25.00 25.00 25.00
25470
U C
B
LOWER HAND HOLE GROUND ANGLE 5.625" 7.375" FRAME WITH COVER
90 TO ROADWAY
POLE TUBE BOLT CIRCLE (IN.)

25.50 25.50 25.50 25.50 25.50 25.50 25.50 25.50
POLE MOUNT TYPE
HOLE "Z" (IN.)

1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
ANCHOR CONNECTION BOLT BOLT DIAM. DIAM. (IN.) (IN.)

_ _ _ 1.25 _ 1.25 _ 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 _ 1.25 _ 1.25 _
CAMERA POLE STANDARD
1 -0 "
TOP OF FOUNDATION OR TOP OF MOUNT (SEE CONTRACT FOR TYPE REQUIRED ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN J-29.10 OR J-29.16 FOR DETAILS)
15 20 30 20 - 30 40 40 50 50
ELBOW ELBOW ELBOW GROUND ELBOW GROUND ELBOW GROUND

GALVANIZED WELDED WIRE MESH ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN J-29.10
1 -0 "
CAMERA POLE
CAMERA POLE FOR LOADING LOAD CASE #1 POLE BASE DETAIL
(TOP MOUNT CAMERA AND 1 - 0" DIAM. DISH)
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
STEEL PLATE
R I C H A
N O T
NE E R
E E R
J-HOOK FOR WIRING LOAD CASE #1
This structure has been designed according to the Fifth Edition 2009 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals . Basic wind velocity is 90 MPH. Design Life/Recurrence Interval 50 years.
0 . 5 0 "
CAM ERA HEI GHT " PL"
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

J-HOOK 180 SEE POLE TOP DETAIL AND CAMERA POLE DATA TABLE 1 -0 " 1 -0 " RADIO EQUIPMENT REINFORCING PLATE

NEMA 4X TERMINAL CABINET (STAINLESS STEEL WITH HINGED DOOR) 3 -0 "
SEAL WITH SILICONE (TYP.)
GROUNDING NUT/ANGLE 2" COUPLINGS HAND HOLE (1 FROM TOP)
HAND HOLE (3 FROM TOP) RADIO ATTACHMENT HOLE
3 -3 "
HAND HOLE 4 -0 "
24 LUG TERMINAL STRIP WITH 6 JUMPERS
NEMA BOX 90
270
ATTACHMENT ~ SEE DETAIL UPPER HAND HOLE WITH FRAME AND COVER ON FACE GROUNDED RECEPTACLE ~ GFCI 20 AMP-125 VOLT
RADIO EQUIPMENT
B T OL O P TH A P H NC L OL O A H E L E O R TE I N B O L T
4 5
0 LOWER HAND HOLE
REINFORCING PLATE (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL
4 -0 "
GROUNDING BUSS
NEMA BOX DETAIL
J-HOOK (1 FROM TOP)
RADIAL INDEX LOAD CASE #2
POLE TOP PLATE 3
2 0.25 5 1 5 0 -0 "
3 -0 "
9 (TYP.) 8 (TYP.)
1/4 0.50" DIAM. J-HOOK FOR WIRING WELDED TO INTERIOR OF POLE 3 - 0" FROM TOP OF POLE AND 180 FROM UPPER HANDHOLE
12 6
14 9 "
LOCATE HOOK OVER 0.25" 1.00" 4 LONG SLOT IN POLE WALL
13
J-HOOK FOR WIRING LOAD CASE #2
6 10 (TYP.)
7 11 1/4" DIAM. DRAIN HOLE ~ DRILL FROM INSIDE
0.25 0.50"
REINFORCING PLATE TO INSTALL 3 " RADIO EQUIPMENT
S T A
NEMA BOX ATTACHMENT DETAIL
3/8" THICK
3"
POLE 0.19
E T
KEY
1 2
CAMERA/TDA POLE MOUNTS NEMA 4X (STAINLESS STEEL) ~ SIZE 16" H 12" W 6" D
2" NPT HOLE AND TAP PLATE CENTERED OVER 2.50" DIAM. HOLE IN POLE WALL LOWER HAND HOLE SHALL BE PLACED 90 TO ROADWAY
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CAMERA MOUNT PLATE CAMERA UPPER HANDHOLE 2" COUPLING 2" SHORT NIPPLE CHANNEL DRILLED 1/8" OVERSIZE OF NIPPLE STEEL WASHER CONDUIT WATERTIGHT LOCKNUT
25470
U C
RADIO EQUIPMENT REINFORCING PLATE
CAMERA POLE STANDARD

1 -0 " TOP OF FOUNDATION OR TOP OF MOUNT (SEE CONTRACT FOR TYPE REQUIRED ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN J-29.10 OR J-29.16 FOR DETAILS) SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
END BUSHING BACK PLATE ~ DRILL OVER SIZE FOR CONDUIT, SEAL WASHER, AND LOCKNUT
12 13
TERMINAL BLOCK HINGED DOOR WITH TWO PAD-LOCKABLE FLIP LATCHES (TYP.)
CAMERA POLE FOR LOADING LOAD CASE #2

(TOP MOUNT CAMERA, 2 SIDEMOUNT CAMERAS, 2 NEMA CABINETS & 2 RADIO EQUIPMENTS)
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
14
J-HOOK FOR WIRING
R I C H A
N O T
NE E R
E E R
9 0 ( T Y P . )
DOCUM ENT
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

NOTES 1. For information not shown, see Steel Light Standard Elbow detail, Standard Plan J-28.45. For Camera Pole Details, see Standard Plan J-29.15.
25" 0.25" R. (TYP.)
4 5 ( T Y P . )
2. Round and smooth all edges along wire-way to protect conductors; see Standard Plan J-28.70. 3. The manufacturer shall verify that the Elbow Top Plate matches the Camera Pole Base, and shall submit the shop drawings for approval. 4. Galvanize after fabrication according to AASHTO M111. 5. Install galvanized steel protective band (3/16" thick 3 1/2" high (A36)) on all four sides after truing pole, as shown in Standard Plan J-28.45, except fasten 6" from corners on 25" square base.
1 5/8" ELBOW TOP PLATE (A 36) 2 5 "
25.50" DIAM. BOLT CIRCLE
5" DIAM. HAND HOLE
VIEW
TAP FOR 1 1/4" DIAM. BOLT FOR 1 1/4" - 8 UNC, 8" LONG BOLT THREADED FULL LENGTH (ASTM A325) WITH TWO HEAVY HEX NUTS AND 3 ROUND WASHERS (TYP.) (ASTM A325 or F1554 GR. 105)
A
15 / 8 "
1 - 3" 1.25" DIAM. HOLE (TYP.) 5" 3/8 1 5 " 1/4

. D .
5"
~ FOR 1" DIAM. ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY TO BARRIER OR WALL (ASTM A325 or F1554 GR. 105)
7/16
O
5 "
B
10 3/4" O.D. 0.365 WALL ~ WELDING ELBOW (ASTM A234 GR.WPB) 10" R. 1
S T A
E T
1 5/8" PLATE (A36)
1/2" DIAM. WEEP HOLE
15" 1 1 SEE CONTRACT PLANS FOR SLOPE OF PARAPET FACE
VIEW
25470
U C
ELEVATION VIEW
CAMERA POLE ELBOW MOUNT ~ 25" SQUARE
CAMERA POLE STANDARD DETAILS STANDARD PLAN J-29.16-00

Pasco Bakotich III

NE E R
3/4"
06-27-11
DATE
R I C H A
N O T
1 -3 "
5 7 . 0 1
E E R
5 "
T S U R
F O R P
R T S

DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD (L) 1/4" NC 3/4" S. S. GROUND STUD WITH (2) S. S. NUTS AND S. S. FLAT WASHER MOUNTED NOT LESS THAN 3" FROM END OF BOX (TYP.) S. S. PIANO HINGE WITH S. S. ROD

NOTES
1/4 - 20 1" S. S. SLOTTED PAN HEAD SCREW (TYP.)
1. Drilling through reinforcing steel is not allowed. If steel is hit while drilling, the location shall be moved and the abandoned hole filled with grout conforming to Standard Specification 6-02.3(20). There shall be a minimum of 3" edge distance to the centerline of anchor holes in concrete. Mount the stainless steel support using an approved resinbonded anchor system, installed per manufacturers recommendation. Resin bonded anchors shall be stainless steel and shall be of 3/8" diameter. (Expansion Anchors are not allowed). 2. The System Identification letters on the box lid shall be 1/8" line thickness formed by engraving, stamping, or with a S. S. weld bead. See System Identification Detail and Standard Specifications 9-29.2(4) . 3. SeeStandard Plan J-60.13 for Stainless Steel Channel details. 4. Size Junction Box per NEC 314.28 , with the exception that for all length and width calculations, use the 8 times multiplier instead of the 6 times.
A B
SEE NOTE 5 1" (TYP.) 1/4 - 20 1" S. S. SEALED WELL NUT WITH DAM AT BONDING JUMPER #8 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING REAR. ~ TACK WELD NUT IN 3 PLACES (TYP.)
2 "
LT
CONDUIT (TYP.) TAPE 4 SPARE 1/4 - 20 NC 1" S. S. 2" (TYP.) SLOTTED PAN HEAD SCREWS TO INSIDE BACK OF BOX
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ~ SEE NOTE 2
( D)
CONDUCTOR
1"
SECTION
1/2" FIELD DRILL 1/4" DIAM. HOLE FOR DRAIN ~ ONE SIDE ONLY IN LOWEST CORNER (TYP.)
18 GAUGE PIANO HINGE 1 1/2" OPEN 1/4" BARREL 1 5/8" 1 5/8" STAINLESS STEEL 5" MIN. TO 6" MAX. EQUALLY SPACED (3 SIDES ~ OMIT ON PIANO HINGE SIDE) 12-GAUGE S. S. MOUNTING FLANGE (TYP.) (TYP.) 1/16 1" - 1" RESIN-BONDED ANCHOR (TYP.) ~ SEESTANDARD PLAN J-60.13 1 1/4" 1/4" CLOSED CELL NEOPRENE GASKET SEE NOTE 2 CHANNEL ON STRUCTURE (TYP.) 1/8" PIN
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION DETAIL ~ ~ 1"

(TYP.)
~ ~ 1"
(TYP.)
ITS
1/2" (TYP.)
1 "
PLAN VIEW
TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL, WELDED SEAM CONSTRUCTION 12-GAUGE BACKBOX WITH #4 FINISH
See Contract Plans for * L, W, and D dimensions. SECTION

1 "M I N.
ISOMETRIC VIEW
( TYP. )
12-GAUGE S. S. MOUNTING FLANGE S. S. PIANO HINGE WITH S. S. ROD
STAINLESS STEEL CHANNEL (TYP.)
EQ. SPA.
S T A
E T
3/8" DIAM. 1 1/2" S. S. LENGTH BOLT (TYP.)
MOUNTING STRIP
8 "M AX.
6 "M I N.
EMBEDMENT LENGTH 4 1/2" MIN. (TYP.)
( W)
RESIN-BONDED ANCHOR BOLT ~
1 "
" 1 ) . P Y T (
) " P . 1 Y T (
29115
( TYP. )
45 / 8 "
" 1 ) . P Y T (
3/16" FILLET WELDING BEAD (TYP.) ~ BOTTOM ROW IS STAGGERED FROM TOP ROW
TOP ENTRY NEMA 4X SURFACE-MOUNT JUNCTION BOX
EQ. SPA.
4 "M AX.
DRAIN HOLE (TYP.) 2 "
( TYP. )
3 "

RESIN-BONDED ANCHOR BOLT
1 "M I N.
( TYP. )
Pasco Bakotich III

ISOMETRIC VIEW
(MOUNTING STRIP SHOWN)
ELEVATION VIEW
(MOUNTING FLANGE SHOWN)
NE E R
) " . 1 P Y T (
12-GAUGE S. S.
06-16-11
DATE
4 "M AX.
( TYP. )
2 "
J O
N O T
( TYP. )
45 / 8 "
5. Equipment Bonding Jumper shall be #8 AWG (min.) 1 foot of tinned, braided copper.
DOCUM ENT
F O R P


12 8 4 33 14 11 4 14 40 8
NOTES 1. If parallel circuits of different sizes are contained in one conduit, the size of the grounding conductor shall be determined on the basis of the largest conductor. Only one grounding conductor is required for each conduit, regardless of the number of circuits contained. 2. Service ground per serving utility requirement. If the utility uses aluminum service conductors, an approved Al-Cu pressuretype ground connector shall be used to secure the service neutral to the copper neutral bar in the service enclosure. Except for the above, all grounding conductors shall be copper. 3. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be sized in accordance with the National Electric Code (No. 8 minimum).
TO POWER SOURCE 8 10
6 OR 2 7 ROADW AY 2
( SEE CONTRACT)
34 8 RAI L ROAD 1 2 10 8 10 FRONT 12 40 11 12 45 10 13 23 4 14 11 11 4 39 CONTINUED ON SHEET 2 14 41 28 22 8 9 13
12 5 14 1 11 4 40
4 14 11
40
4 14
14
13
6 OR 2 ROADW AY 2 7
8 ( SEE CONTRACT) 13 23 41 28 22 8 9 23 41 28 22 8 9 13 23 41 28 22 8 9 13 6 43 FRONT 3
15 42 13
13 23 41 28 22 8
RAI L ROAD 1 2
COMBINED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION
23 41 28 22 11 13 23 41 28 22 11 13 23 41 28 22 11 13
5 19 15
23 8 24
41
28
22
11
11
39
13 CONTINUED ON SHEET 2 15
8 13 8 13 40 8 6 8 13 8 43 6 43 FRONT 10 8 ( SEE CONTRACT) 10 8 10 8 34 9 13 40 9 40 9 13 45 13 9 3 23 41 28 22 FRONT
42
5 25 11 13 40 8 15
RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION

2 RAI L ROAD 1 10 8 33 8 23 41 28 22 11 12 23 41 28 22 11 12 23 41 28 22 11 12 11 4 39 13 12 CONTINUED ON SHEET 2 8 6 4 43 FRONT 15 42 2
42
23 8
41
28
22
11
12 5 3
8 4 12 40 10 4 4
8 4 12 40 4
8 4 12 40 10 4
9 15 19 25
23 12
41
28
22
11 12 40 8
S T A
45 10 8 8 8 34 FRONT
19
15
J O
E T
GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) APPLICATION
GROUND DETAILS
10 15
ELECTRICAL LOAD SUPPORT (LUMINAIRE POLE AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL POLE)
20 21
8
TO SERVICE NEUTRAL BUS TO GROUNDING TERMINAL OR CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM
33
11
COPPER SOLDERLESS CRIMP CONNECTOR GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) OPTION A - 10 RMC WITH FIELD BEND - APPROVED ADAPTER FITTING - GROUNDING BUSHING OPTION B - 10 RMC - GS FACTORY ELBOWS - APPROVED ADAPTER FITTING - GS COUPLING - GROUNDING BUSHING
RMC
PVC
12 13 14
33 22
BONDING JUMPER ATTACHED TO BOX WALL COUPLING NUT
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABINET
12
29115
APPLICATION APPLICATION
34 35 36
CABINET GROUNDING BUSS (COPPER) RIGID PVC OUTERDUCT WITH PVC OR PE INNERDUCT GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT OUTERDUCT WITH PVC OR PE INNERDUCT
23
BONDING JUMPER ATTACHED TO BOX LID(S) GROUND STUD. # 8 AWG (MIN.) 4 TINNED BRAIDED COPPER.
KEY
1 2 3 4 5
SERVICE NEUTRAL SERVICE GROUND GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR BONDING JUMPER GROUNDING BUSHING (TYP. ALL RMC CONDUIT TERMINATIONS)
24
END BELL BUSHING (TYP. ALL NON-METALLIC CONDUIT TERMINATIONS)
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
LOCATE WIRE. COIL 10 INSIDE CABINET, CABLE VAULT, OR PULL BOX DETECTABLE UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE. COIL 2 INSIDE CABINET, CABLE VAULT, OR PULL BOX TRANSFORMER CABINET GROUNDING CONDUCTOR NON-INSULATED (FROM REINFORCING CAGE) BOX FRAME BONDING ATTACHMENT POINT GROUND LUG WELDED TO CABINET WALL (W/ TINNED COPPER BUSS) CABINET MAIN BONDING JUMPER
TYPICAL GROUNDING DETAILS
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
CODE SIZED PVC HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT (HDPE) NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC) SCHEDULE 80 BOX LID(S) GROUND STUD CABLE VAULT PULL BOX ITS CABINET EDGE OF FOUNDATION

15 16 17 18
GROUND ROD EDGE OF FOUNDATION, POLE OR SERVICE SUPPORT CLAMP JUNCTION BOX OR 8" DRAIN TILE WITH APPROVED COVER
6 7 8 9
GROUNDED NEUTRAL BUS (COPPER) SERVICE ENCLOSURE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR JUNCTION BOX
Pasco Bakotich III

10
06-16-11
DATE
ITS CAMERA, RAMP METER, TRAFFIC DATA STATION, HIGHWAY ADVISORY RADIO UNGROUNDED CABINET NEUTRAL BUSS (COPPER)
19
CODE SIZE RMC
12
9 3
N O T
NE E R
2 ROADW AY 1
DOCUM ENT
F O R P

23 DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD 41 28 22 11 14 40 8 23 41 28

22 11 14 40 8 38 TOP OF PAVEMENT OR EXISTING GROUND 38 TOP OF PAVEMENT OR EXISTING GROUND
1 2 "
8 9 4 4
13 9
8 4
13
44
37
37 8
36
36
B
14 14 CONTINUED FROM SHEET 1 11 4
11
E
14
C
30 OR 29 14 13 30 OR 29 14 11
29 14 14
SECTION
11 4 11 4 39 14
SECTION
FROM DIFFERENT SERVICE 8 45 FRONT 13 6 43 FRONT 15 45 13 38 41 28 23 41 28 22 8 34 2 TOP OF PAVEMENT OR EXISTING GROUND
13
8 FRONT 31 45
13 23 41 28 22 8 29
13 41 28
14
13
13
34
1 2 "
44
COMBINED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION
ITS - COMBINED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION
ITS - COMBINED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)AND RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION. FIBER OPTIC CABLE ONLY, NO METALLIC CONDUCTORS
31 3 5 ITS - COMBINED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION
19
15
35
37
OR 13 SHOWN 26 OR 27 POSSIBLE
D
23 13 CONTINUED FROM SHEET 1 11 13 41 28 22 11 13
C
30 OR 29 13 30 OR 29 13 23 41 28 22 11 13 11 13 11 39 13 FROM DIFFERENT SERVICE
SECTION
~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS
TOP OF PAVEMENT OR EXISTING 38 GROUND
8 8 34 31 FRONT 29 45 41 28 41 28
34
8 FRONT
8 45 6 43 FRONT
15 42
29 31 3
37 8 25 15
ITS - RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION

8 9
ITS - RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION FIBER OPTIC CABLE ONLY - NO METALLIC CONDUCTORS
8 40 9
13 SHOWN 26 OR 27 POSSIBLE
ITS - RIGID PVC CONDUIT (PVC) APPLICATION

TOP OF PAVEMENT OR EXISTING 40 38 GROUND
SECTION
~ SEE CONTRACT PLANS
8 1 2 "
DOCUM ENT
10 23 41 28 22 11 23 41 28 22 11
10 OR
S T A
12 OR 14
E T
B
23 12 CONTINUED FROM SHEET 1 11 4 12 41 28 22 11 12
E
30 OR 29 12 30 OR 29 12 23 41 28 22 11 12 4 12 11 4
SECTION
11
39
12 FROM DIFFERENT SERVICE 15 42 2
8 4 34 31 FRONT 45
8 4
34
8 FRONT
8 45 6 43 FRONT 3
29115
29
41
28
41
28
29
4 31
5 19 15
ITS - GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) APPLICATION

8 9 4
ITS - GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) APPLICATION FIBER OPTIC CABLE ONLY - NO METALLIC CONDUCTORS
4 40 8 9 4
ITS - GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) APPLICATION

40
Pasco Bakotich III

44 23 41 28 22 11 8 23 41 28 22 11 44 8
06-16-11
DATE
J O
N O T
36
37
NE E R
1 2 "
1 2 "
F O R P

1 "

SERVICE GROUND
2
SUPPLEMENTAL GROUND
SERVICE GROUND
16 8 24
32 18 3 20
TYPE D SERVICE CABINET 3 6 17 24
SEE STANDARD PLAN J-10.10 18 3
B
17 24
21 17 18 DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD
25 1 - 0" 15 NOM.
15 6" MIN. (TYP.) 15 25 3
6 - 0" MIN. 15 3
25
15
DETAIL
DETAIL
SEE KEY ON SHEET 1 FOR PARTS
1 "
SUPPLEMENTAL GROUND
SERVICE GROUND
SERVICE GROUND
16 8 5
32 18 3 20
TYPE D SERVICE CABINET 3 6 17 5 4
SEE STANDARD PLAN J-10.10 3 5 18
21 17 4 18
17 4
19 1 - 0" 15 NOM. 6" MIN. (TYP.) 15 19 3 15
6 - 0" MIN. 15 3
19
THE ENGI NEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBL I CATI ON, I S KEPT ON DOCUM ENT FI L E AT THE W ASHI NGTON STATE DEPARTM ENT OF TRANSBUT AN EL ECTRONI C DUPL I CATE. THE ORI GI NAL , SI GNED BY PORTATI ON. A COPY M AY BE OBTAI NED UPON REQUEST.
15
GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) APPLICATION DETAIL DETAIL
S T A
E T
grounding for luminaire standards with direct burial aerial feeds, or where required in the plans 2 Required at all service and separately derived systems 3 Type D service cabinet shown. Use this concept for Type E cabinet or transformer. Type D service cabinet shall be installed on lower surface of foundation only. Type B service cabinet and transformer cabinet shall be installed on raised surface of foundation only. 6 SEE STANDARD PLAN J-3b 6 SEE STANDARD PLAN J-3b
29115

SHEET 3 OF 4 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION 6 - 0" MIN. 15 6 - 0" MIN. 15
4 5
Type B modified service cabinet Grounding electrode conductor and equipment grounding conductor shall not be routed through lug on grounding bushing. 15 15
Pasco Bakotich III

Required to supplement equipment
06-16-11
DATE
J O
N O T
NE E R
F O R P

1

EDGE OF LID SUPPORT FRAME
2 "
3/8" 2" 2" Frame Bonding Stud Plate with 1/4NC 1" Stainless Steel Bonding Stud. Weld Bonding Stud to Frame Bonding Plate. Weld to lid support frame. 1/4" weld ~ 3 sides. Grind lid bearing surface flat after welding. All corners rounded. Corners along exposed sheared or cut edges shall be broken by light grinding to achieve an approximate 1/16" (inch) chamfer or rounding. Protect conductors with fireproof cloth prior to welding. Omit Frame Bonding Stud Plate if the Frame Bonding point already exists. Weld all around lid bonding stud ~ 1/4 NC 1" stainless steel ~ liberally coat entire assembly w/ anti-seize compound.
6 "
2"
3 "
3"
23
LID BONDING STUD
1/8
2 DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD
FRAME BONDING BOLT
1 22
STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER ~ FENDER
BOND TINNED BRAIDED COPPER BONDING JUMPER ~ #8 MINIMUM LOCATION 4 TO FRAME BONDING STUD
FILLET WELD AND EDGE WELD (TYP.) 2"
1/8 23 LID SUPPORT DEPTH 2 ATTACH TO FRAME BONDING BOLT
LID SUPPORT ~ FRAME VARIES AMONG MANUFACTURERS (FIELD VARIFY) 1/4" MIN. 1 STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER ~ FENDER 22 TO EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR WITH FULL CIRCLE CONNECTOR BONDING JUMPER ~ #8 MINIMUM 4 TINNED BRAIDED COPPER (BOND JUMPER TO EQUIPMENT 23 ROUTE LID BONDING JUMPER TO LID BONDING STUD WITH FULL CIRCLE CONNECTOR STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER FRAME BONDING STUD ~ STAINLESS STEEL ADJUSTING NUTS 1/4" NC 1" STAINLESS STEEL WELD TO FRAME BONDING
DOCUM ENT FI L E AT THE W ASHI NGTON STATE DEPARTM ENT OF TRANS-
PLAN
STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER
3" STAINLESS STEEL NUT ~ 2 EACH
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR)
LID BONDING DETAIL A B

LID TO FRAME BONDING JUMPER COPPER SOLDERLESS CRIMP CONNECTOR
STUD PLATE ~ LIBERALLY COAT THIS ASSEMBLY WITH ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
S T A
E T
22
29115
FRAME BONDING DETAIL
BONDING JUMPER ~ FRAME TO EQUIPMENT BONDING CONDUCTOR 8 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR PVC

ELEVATION
GRS 8
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
J O
N O T
NE E R
F O R P

3 - 8" 5/8" DIAM. THREADED INSERT 3 - 2" DRILL & TAP FOR 1/2-13 S. S. PENTA BOLTS PLACE 120 APART COAT LIBERALLY WITH ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND DIAMOND PATTERN ~SEE NOTE 3 (TYPICAL) ~ SEE NOTE 9 25" DIAM. CAST IRON RING AND DUCTILE IRON LOCKING COVER 3 BONDING JUMPER ~SEE NOTE 6 2 -2 " 2 -8 " 1/4-20 UNC 1 11/16" MIN. LENGTH THREADED BRASS GROUND INSERT WITH STEEL LEAD GROUND ROD BONDED TO FRAME AND REINFORCING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ~ SEE NOTE 7 5 CORED HOLES IN FRAME FOR TYING DRILL & TAP FOR 1/2-13 S. S. BOLT USE HOLE FOR BONDING JUMPER 8 6 4 1 1/2" DIAMETER S. S. BRIDLE RING ~ SEE DETAIL

NOTES 1. The Heavy Duty Lid shall be used when a Pull Box is placed in the paved shoulder or the traveled way. Use a 9" thick lid for new Pull Box installations. Use a 6" thick Heavy Duty Lid when converting a Standard Duty Pull Box into a Heavy Duty Pull Box in the paved shoulder or the traveled way and no overlay is called for in the Contract. Otherwise, see Contract Plans for overlay depth and fabricate lid thickness to match overlay depth. 2. Use Standard Duty Pull Box and Lid when placed in unpaved areas. Use Standard Duty Pull Box in sidewalks, walkways, and shared-use paths. 3. Minimum lid thickness shown. The diamond pattern shall be a minimum of 3/32" thick. 4. Standard Duty Pull Boxes installed in sidewalks, walkways, and shared-use paths shall have a slip-resistant coating on lid and shall be installed with the surface flush with and matched to the grade of the sidewalk, walkway, and shared-use paths. The non-slip lid shall be identified with permanent marking on the underside indicating the type of surface treatment (see Contract Documents for details) and the year of manufacture. The permanent marking shall be 1/8" inch line thickness formed with a stainless steel weld bead and shall be placed prior to hot-dip galvanizing. 5. A 1/4-20 UNC 3/4" S. S. ground stud with (2) S. S. nuts and (2) S. S. flat washers shall be attached to the Standard Duty Lid and coated with anti-seize compound. Provide a 5/8" diameter cored hole in the ductile iron lid gusset (Heavy Duty Lid) with 1/2-13 UNC 1 1/4" S. S. bolt, (3) S. S. flat washers, and (2) S. S. nuts for the Bonding Jumper.
STANDARD DUTY LID ~ HINGED, SPRING ASSISTED
TO THE RE-BAR (TYPICAL 4 PLACES)
HEAVY DUTY LID

SEE NOTE 1
1
SEE NOTE 1
7 ~ SEE NOTE 6
1 6 4
SECTION
CONDUITS SHOWN EXTENDED FOR CLARITY (TYP.) ~ SEE STANDARD SPECIFICATION 8-20.3(5) 8
(LID NOT SHOWN)

4 1 2 3 4 5 Equipment Grounding Conductor Copper Solderless Crimp Connector Equipment Bonding Jumper ~ See Note 5 See Contract for conduit size and number Provide a 1 1/2" wide 3 1/2" high 3/16" thick min. flat area for lifting purposes (for Ductile Iron Lid only) 6 7 8 GRS Shown ~ See Contract for conduit type PVC Shown ~ See Contract for conduit type Location Wire TO BOTTOM OF LID 3 - 8" GROUND STUD ~SEE NOTE 4 6 " LIFT HOLE 1/8 3 - 0" GROUND STUD ~SEE NOTE 5 1 4 7 ~ SEE NOTE 6 1 2 6 ~ SEE NOTE 6
6. Connect a Bonding Jumper to the steel conduit bushing for GRS conduit and connect the steel conduit bushing jumper to the equipment ground at the threaded brass ground insert. Connect the equipment grounding conductors in the PVC and/or GRS conduits to the brass ground insert. The Bonding Jumper shall be #8 min. x 4 (ft.) of tinned braided copper between the lid and the frame of the Heavy Duty tops and from the Heavy Duty top to the threaded brass ground insert. The Bonding Jumper shall be #8 min. x 4 (ft.) of tinned braided copper between the lid on a Standard Duty Pull Box and the threaded brass ground insert. See Contract Plan Sheets andStandard Plan J-60.05 for Bonding Jumper requirements. 7. The system identification letters shall be 1/8" line thickness formed by engraving, casting, stamping, or with a S. S. weld bead. See COVER MARKING DETAIL. See Standard Specification 9-29.2(4). Ductile iron lid lettering shall be recessed. 8. Cement concrete shall be Class 4000. 9. Plastic plugs shall be put into the lid inserts after fabrication and the lid installation. 10. Capacity - conduit diameter = 40" (in.). Standard Specification Section 8-20.3(6) . Field bend 11. Excavate material, place 6" crushed surfacing pad per #3 reinforcing bar to allow conduit into the Pull Box. Field bend reinforcing bar back into place, wire tie in (2) places, and cast in commercial concrete (commercial concrete only allowed for box bottom/wall completion). 12. This drawing depicts a typical Pull Box assembly. Reinforcing not shown. Each manufacturers Pull Box assembly will vary. Refer to the approved manufacturers shop drawings for all dimensions and the actual arrangement.
ISOMETRIC CUTAWAY
SURFACE HARDWARE MOUNTING RACK ~ S. S. 1 5/8" SLOTTED 1 "M I N. CHANNEL 1 - 0" 4 1 / 2 " 1 - 6" 3 "M AX.
S T A
~ 1" TO 2" DIAMETER
TOP OF PAVED
2 - 0"
TOP OF SOIL SURFACE
E T
5" MIN. 1 -0 "
1 -6 "
36103
GALVANIZED PULLING IRON - 1 @ EACH CORNER (4 REQUIRED) KNOCKOUT (TYPICAL)
DIAMOND PATTERN ~SEE NOTE 3
RECESSED LIFTING RING AND LOCK
IDENTIFICATION ~SEE NOTE 7
6 "
SYSTEM
PULL BOX
GROUND ROD KNOCKOUT 1 - 10"

SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS 6" DIAM. SUMP WITH APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
TOP
SECTION
2" DIAM. DRAIN HOLE
Pasco Bakotich III

VIEW C
06-27-11
DATE
PULL BOX ASSEMBLY

(SHOWN WITH STANDARD DUTY LID)
B R I
T
2 -8 "
3 -6 "
NE E R
DOCUM ENT
H S L N O
F O R P

BRIDLE RING ~ SEE DETAIL 8 LOCATION WIRE ~ PROVIDE 1 - 0" DIAM. LOOP ABOVE CHANNEL SECTION. SECURE IN BRIDLE RING SEE NOTE 5

DUCTILE IRON LID GROUND STUD - THREAD INTO PREDRILLED HOLE IN FRAME FLANGE, DRILL AND TAP 1/2" - 13 ~ SEE NOTE 5 BRIDLE RING ~ SEE DETAIL 3 CORED HOLE ~ DO NOT DRILL OR TAP ~ DO NOT DRILL INTO OR THROUGH GUSSETS 1
6" PIPE HANGER ~ SEE DETAIL HEAVY DUTY LID ~ SEE NOTE 1 CABLE BUFFER ~ SEE PIPE HANGER DETAIL DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD
1/4-20 UNC 1 11/16" MIN. LENGTH THREADED BRASS GROUND INSERT WITH STEEL LEAD GROUND ROD BONDED TO FRAME AND REINFORCING 1 1 2 ROUGHENED SURFACE REQUIRED PRIOR TO CASTING BOTTOM / WALL CONCRETE 8 SPLICED #3 REINFORCING BAR (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 11 FACTORY CAST BLOCK OUT W/ ROUGHENED EDGES VERI FY FI EL D STEEL REINFORCING SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE #3 REINFORCING BAR (TYP.) 9 AT NO TIME SHALL THE CABLES MINIMUM BENDING RADIUS LIMITATIONS BE COMPROMISED #3 REINFORCING BAR (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 11 7 ~ SEE NOTE 6 1 8
TIE WRAP
P U B L OX L
7.53" (TYP.) 6" BOTH ENDS
1" MIN. 2" MAX.
INTERNAL OBLIQUE VIEW

COIL THE CABLE BY USING A "FIGURE 8" FOLDED IN THE MIDDLE TO FORM A LOOP
D
ISOMETRIC CUTAWAY
(TYP. OF 4 PLACES)
6" MIN. (TYP.)
FIELD VERIFY
2" CLEAR (TYP.) TO END OF REINFORCING BAR
SPLIT PULL BOX ASSEMBLY

(SHOWN WITH HEAVY DUTY LID)
SEE PULL BOX, SHEET 1, FOR DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN
VIEW
S T A
HARDWARE MOUNTING RACK S. S. HEX HEAD BOLT ~ 1/2-13 UNC 15/16" ~ S. S. 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL
~ ~ 1"
(TYP.)
~ ~ 1"
(TYP.)
E T
ITS
1/2" (TYP.)
S. S. CHANNEL NUT WITH SPRING (PARTIAL CHANNEL SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
PIPE HANGER ~ S. S., 12 GAGE, 1" WIDE
SEE NOTE 7
9" DIAMETER
36103
S. S. HEX BOLT 3/8-16 UNC 9" 7 "
1 1/2" DIAM. BRIDLE RING ~ S. S. 1/4" DIAM. WIRE SIZE (FABRICATE IF NOT AVAILABLE COMMERCIALLY)
PULL BOX
CABLE BUFFER ~ FLEXIBLE, PLASTIC PIPE, 6" DIAM., 1 - 0" LONG, SPLIT

S. S. NUT
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
PIPE HANGER DETAIL

FABRICATE IF NOT AVAILABLE COMMERCIALLY
BRIDLE RING DETAIL
LOGO DETAIL
B R I
T
COVER MARKING DETAIL
NE E R
DOCUM ENT
H S L N O
F O R P

6 - 10" 6" (TYP.)

NOTES 1. The Heavy Duty Lid shall be used when a Cable Vault is placed in the paved shoulder or the traveled way. Use a 9" thick lid for new Cable Vault installations. Use a 6" thick Heavy Duty Lid when converting a Standard Duty Cable Vault into a Heavy Duty Cable Vault in the paved shoulder or the traveled way and no overlay is called for in the Contract. Otherwise,
38 1/2" DIAM. CAST IRON RING AND DUCTILE IRON LOCKING STANDARD DUTY LID ~ HINGED, SPRING ASSISTED 1 1/2" DIAMETER S. S. BRIDLE RING ~ SEE DETAIL BONDING JUMPER ~SEE NOTE 6 1/4-20 UNC 1 11/16" MIN. LENGTH THREADED BRASS GROUND INSERT WITH STEEL LEAD GROUND ROD COVER DRILL & TAP FOR 1/2-13 S. S. PENTA BOLTS (TYP. OF 4) COAT LIBERALLY WITH ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
5/8" DIAM. THREADED INSERT (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 9
see Contract Plans for overlay depth and fabricate lid thickness to match overlay depth.
2. Use Standard Duty Cable Vault and Lid when placed in unpaved areas. Use Standard Duty Pull Box in sidewalks, walkways, and shared-use paths. 3. Minimum lid thickness shown. The diamond pattern shall be a minimum of 3/32" thick. 4.Standard Duty Cable Vaults installed in sidewalks, walkways, and shared-use paths shall have a slip-resistant coating on the lid and shall be installed with the surface flush with and matched to the grade of the sidewalk, walkway, and shared-use paths. The non-slip lid shall be identified with permanent marking on the underside indicating the type of surface treatment (see Contract Documents for details) and the year of manufacture. The permanent marking shall be 1/8" inch line thickness formed with a stainless steel weld bead and shall be placed prior to hot-dip galvanizing. 5. A 1/4 - 20 UNC 3/4" S. S. ground stud with (2) S. S. nuts and (2) S. S. flat washers shall be attached to the Standard Duty Lid and coated with anti-seize compound. Provide a 5/8" diameter cored hole in the ductile iron lid gusset (Heavy Duty Lid) with 1/2 - 13 UNC 1 1/4" S. S. bolt, (3) S. S. flat washers, and (2) S. S. nuts for the Bonding Jumper. 6. Connect a Bonding Jumper to the steel conduit bushing for GRS conduit and connect the steel conduit Bushing Jumper to the equipment ground at the threaded brass ground insert. Connect
( TYP. )
6 "
DIAMOND PATTERN ~SEE NOTE 3
4 -6 "
BONDED TO FRAME AND REINFORCING
A
7 1 5 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ~SEE NOTE 7 8 CORED HOLES IN FRAME FOR TYING TO THE RE-BAR (TYP. 4 PLACES) DRILL & TAP FOR 1/2-13 S. S. BOLT ~ USE HOLE FOR BONDING JUMPER 4 6 6 4 4 SEE NOTE 5
HEAVY DUTY LID

SEE NOTE 1
6 SEE NOTE 1 4 1
the equipment grounding conductors in the PVC and/or GRS conduits to the brass ground insert. The Bonding Jumper shall be #8 min. x 4 (ft.) of tinned braided copper between the lid and the frame of the Heavy Duty tops and from the Heavy Duty top to the threaded brass ground insert. The Bonding Jumper shall be #8 min. x 4 (ft.) of tinned braided copper between the lid on a Standard Duty vault and the threaded brass ground insert. See Contract Plan Sheets and Standard Plan J-60.05 for Bonding Jumper requirements.
7. The system identification letters shall be 1/8" line thickness formed by engraving, casting, stamping, or with a S. S. weld bead. See COVER MARKING DETAIL, Standard Specification 9-29.2(4). Ductile iron lid lettering shall be recessed. 8. Cement concrete shall be Class 4000. 9. Plastic plugs shall be put into the lid inserts after fabrication and the lid installation.
SECTION
A
1 Equipment Grounding Conductor Copper Solderless Crimp Connector Equipment Bonding Jumper ~ See Note 6 See Contract for Conduct Size and Number Provide a 5" Wide 3" High 3/16" Thick Min. Flat Area for Lifting Purposes (for Ductile Iron Lid Only) 6 7 GRS Shown ~ See Contract for Conduit Type PVC Shown ~ See Contract for Conduit Type Location Wire 6 4 ~ SEE NOTE 6 5 2 3 4
(LID NOT SHOWN)
10. Capacity - conduit diameter = 60" (in.).

6 4
CONDUITS SHOWN EXTENDED FOR CLARITY ~ SEE STANDARD SPECIFICATION 8-20.3(5) 8 7 4 ~ SEE NOTE 6
11. Excavate material, place 6" crushed surfacing pad per Standard Specification 8-20.3(6) . Field bend #3 reinforcing bar to allow conduit into the Cable Vault. Field bend reinforcing bar back into place, wire tie in (2) places and cast in commercial concrete (commercial concrete only allowed for bottom/wall completion). 12. This drawing depicts a typical Cable Vault assembly. Reinforcing not shown. Each manufacturers Cable Vault assembly will vary. Refer to the approved manufacturers shop drawings for all dimensions and the actual arrangement.
DOCUM ENT FI L E AT THE W ASHI NGTON STATE DEPARTM ENT OF TRANS-
C
8
ISOMETRIC CUTAWAY
6 - 10" GROUND STUD 5 "M I N. ( TYP. ) ~ SEE NOTE 5
GROUND STUD (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 5 3 "M AX. 1 "M I N. TOP OF PAVED LIFT HOLE (TYP.) ~ 1" TO 2" DIAMETER SURFACE TOP OF SOIL SURFACE
5 - 0"
S T A
E T
TO BOTTOM OF LID 1/8
HARDWARE MOUNTING RACK (TYP.) ~ S. S. 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL 3 - 0" 2 -0 "
4 -6 "
4 -6 "
8" DIAM. KNOCKOUT (TYP.) 8 EACH WALL
36103
8 "
GALVANIZED PULLING IRON 3 - 0" 1 @ EACH CORNER (4 REQUIRED)
CABLE VAULT

DIAMOND PATTERN ~ SEE NOTE 3 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ~ SEE NOTE 7 RECESSED LIFTING RING AND LOCK (TYP.) 6" DIAM. SUMP WITH 2" DIAM. DRAIN HOLE GROUND ROD KNOCKOUT SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
SECTION TOP
B VIEW C
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
CABLE VAULT
(SHOWN WITH STANDARD DUTY LID)
B R I
T
1 -0 "
NE E R
H S L N O
6 "
F O R P

BRIDLE RING ~ SEE DETAIL 8 LOCATION WIRE ~ PROVIDE 1 - 0" DIAM. LOOP ABOVE CHANNEL SECTION SECURE IN BRIDLE RING DUCTILE IRON LID

3 BONDING JUMPER ~SEE NOTE 6 GROUND STUD - THREAD INTO PREDRILLED HOLE IN FLANGE, BRIDLE RING DRILL AND TAP 1/2" - 13 ~SEE NOTE 5 ~ SEE DETAIL
8" PIPE HANGER ~ SEE DETAIL DRAW N BY: L I SA CYFORD
SEE NOTE 5
1 CORED HOLE ~ DO NOT CABLE BUFFER (TYP.) ~ SEE PIPE HANGER DETAIL 3 DRILL OR TAP ~ DO NOT DRILL INTO OR THROUGH GUSSETS 1/4-20 UNC 1 11/16" MIN. LENGTH THREADED BRASS GROUND TAP SPLICE CASE MOUNTING AT SPLICE LOCATION INSERT WITH STEEL LEAD GROUND ROD BONDED TO FRAME AND REINFORCING 9 HEAVY DUTY LID ~SEE NOTE 1 TIE WRAP (TYP.) 8 8 3 LIFT HOLE ~ 1" TO 2" DIAMETER
#3 REINFORCING ~ SEE NOTE 11
FACTORY CAST BLOCKOUT W/ ROUGHENED EDGES FI EL D 1 VERI FY
AT NO TIME SHALL THE CABLES MINIMUM BENDING RADIUS LIMITATIONS BE COMPROMISED 1 2 4 " 7
INTERNAL OBLIQUE VIEW
ROUGHENED SURFACE REQUIRED PRIOR TO CASTING BOTTOM / WALL CONCRETE CONDUIT WITHOUT INNERDUCT 7 2" CLEAR (TYP.) 8 1 TO END OF REINFORCING BAR 1" MIN. 2" MAX. FIELD VERIFY 6" MIN. TYP.
COVER MARKING DETAIL ~ ~ 1"

(TYP.)
SHOWN ~ SEE SHEET 1 FOR CONDUIT WITH INNERDUCT
~ ~ 1"
(TYP.)
STEEL REINFORCING
VIEW
ITS
1/2" (TYP.)
#3 REINFORCING BAR (TYP.)
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE
DOCUM ENT
7.08" (TYP.) 6" (TYP.) HARDWARE MOUNTING RACK S. S. HEX HEAD BOLT ~ 1/2-13 UNC 15/16" ~ S. S. 1 5/8" SLOTTED CHANNEL
SEE NOTE 7
S T A
E T
ISOMETRIC CUTAWAY
S. S. CHANNEL NUT WITH SPRING (PARTIAL CHANNEL SHOWN FOR CLARITY) PIPE HANGER ~ S. S., 12 GAGE, 1" WIDE
9" DIAMETER
1 1/2" DIAM. BRIDLE RING ~ S. S. 1/4" DIAM. WIRE SIZE (FABRICATE IF NOT AVAILABLE COMMERCIALLY)
36103
S. S. HEX BOLT 3/8 - 16 UNC 9" 7 "
CABLE VAULT
CABLE BUFFER ~ FLEXIBLE PLASTIC PIPE, 8" DIAM., 1 - 0" LONG, SPLIT

BRIDLE RING DETAIL
S. S. NUT
PIPE HANGER DETAIL

FABRICATE IF NOT AVAILABLE COMMERCIALLY
SPLIT CABLE VAULT

(SHOWN WITH HEAVY DUTY LID)
SEE CABLE VAULT, SHEET 1, FOR DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN
LOGO DETAIL
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
B R I
T
E L B T UL CA A V
NE E R
BAR (TYP.)
H S L N O
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ELENA BRUNSTEIN END ROAD WORK G20-2A RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS

NOTES SIGN SPACING = X 1.
60 / 65 MPH 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 800 35/64 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64
Sign sequence is the same for both directions of travel. Adjust for the direction of roadway curves. Flashing Warning Lights (Type B per MUTCD) and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance Warning Signs. Existing conflicting pavement markings and signs that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary pavement markings shall be used to delineate bypass detour. Raised pavement markers and/or temporary guideposts may be used on bypass as directed by the Engineer. Steady Burning Warning Light (Type C per MUTCD) shall be used to mark Channelizing Devices at night.
2.
3.
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE
ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS.
4.
CHANNELIZING DEVICE SPACING

POSTED SPEED (MPH) IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 40
5.
50 / 70 W1-4R 35 / 45 25 / 30
7. 8.
Temporary barriers and end treatments shall be crashworthy. To improve visibility, consider use of temporary illumination at closure points. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05. Consider using a PCMS for additional advance warning.
W13-1
ROAD
WORK AREA
R11-2 B/W
9.
XX
MPH
CLOSED
10.
W1-6 W1-4L W24-1
W12-401R OR
STREAM OR OTHER OBSTRUCTION
W12-401L
FOR LOCAL AGENCY USE ONLY NOT FOR USE ON STATE ROUTES
MPH
S T A
TEMPORARY WHITE EDGE LINE
W20-1
ROAD WORK AHEAD

X
LEGEND
ROAD CLOSURE WITH DIVERSION

CHANNELIZING DEVICES
STANDARD PLAN K-10.20-01

BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 R SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 L TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR SIGN LOCATION APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
TEMPORARY DOUBLE YELLOW CENTERLINE
XX
X
W13-1
NE E R
6.
Where advisory speed is 30 mph or less, reverse turn signs should be used. Other curve or turn Warning Signs may be substituted to depict roadway alignment.
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
SIGN SPACING = X (1)

RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 500 35/64 WORK AREA 350 35/64 R11-2 B/W 200 35/64 (2)
1.
Modify Regulatory Traffic Control Devices, as needed, for the duration of the detour. Two Flashing Warning Lights (Type A per MUTCD) may be used to mark each barricade at night. Trail Blazers shall be installed throughout the detour, as appropriate. Signing shown for the one direction only. Coordinate with emergency services. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
2.
ROAD
100 35/64 (2)
ROAD CLOSED
WILL BE CLOSED
MON DA - MON DA XAM XPM
R11-1501 B/W
3. 4.
W20-3
AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS.
(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE
5. ROAD CLOSED
STREET
(2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
6.
AHEAD
X
M3-1
MAIN
ROAD CLOSED AHEAD

W20-3
R11-4 B/W
D3-101
MAIN ST. DETOUR
B/W
ROAD CLOSED
XX MILES AHEAD
LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY
OR
ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC
M4-8
M6-3
DETOUR
M4-10L
(OPTIONAL)
NORTH
M3-1
MAIN ST. D3-101

STREET
T H E O
DETOUR
2X
(OPTIONAL)
M4-8
S T A
M6-1L M3-1 D3-101
MAIN
NORTH MAIN ST. DETOUR

X
M4-8 W20-2
LEGEND
M5-1
DETOUR
SIGN LOCATION BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 R X BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 L W20-3
AHEAD
ROAD CLOSURE WITH OFF-SITE DETOUR
ROAD CLOSED AHEAD

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T
NE E R
NORTH
R11-3
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
LONGITUDINAL BUFFER SPACE = B

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 55 30 85 35 120 40 170 45 270 RURAL ROADS
SIGN SPACING = X 1.
45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 500 35/64 350 35/64 RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS
This plan is intended for use on roadways when traffic volumes create sufficient gaps for motor vehicles to yield. Steady Burning Warning Lights (Type C per MUTCD) shall be used to mark Channelizing Devices at night. Adequate sight distance shall be provided for drivers to see opposing traffic, otherwise use flaggers and/or Temporary Signal. Extend Channelizing Device taper across shoulder ~ recommended. Post mount signs when in place for 3 days or longer. For speed limit 35 mph or higher replace W1-3R with W1-4R. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05. Consider using a PCMS for additional advance warning.
2.
200 35/64 100 35/64
3.

ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 / 45 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 60 40 AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS.
4. 5. 6. 7.
R1-2 R/W W3-2
W20-4
8.
ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD

W20-1
YIELD
ROAD WORK
TO
END ROAD WORK G20-2A R1-2a B/W
AHEAD
ONCOMING TRAFFIC
100 MAX.
15
WORK AREA
2 MIN.
S T A
W20-1
W1-3R
END ROAD WORK
G20-2A
ROAD WORK AHEAD

W20-4
ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD
LANE CLOSURE WITHOUT FLAGGERS ~ LOW VOLUME ROAD

LEGEND

SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 L FLASHING WARNING LIGHT SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
LONGITUDINAL BUFFER SPACE = B 1.

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 360 50 425 55 495 60 570 65 645
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Night work requires additional roadway lighting at flagging stations. See WSDOT Standard Specifications for additional details. Extend Channelizing Device taper across shoulder ~ recommended. Sign sequence is the same for both directions of travel on the roadway. Channelizing Device spacing for the downstream taper option shall be 20 O.C. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
2. BUFFER DATA
END ROAD WORK OR DOWNSTREAM TAPER TO SHOW END OF WORK AREA ~ SEE NOTE 5 G20-2A
TYPICAL PROTECTIVE VEHICLE WITH TMA (SEE NOTE 1) VEHICLE TYPE

4 YARD DUMP TRUCK, SERVICE TRUCK, FLAT BED, ETC.
3. 4.
LOADED WEIGHT
MINIMUM WEIGHT 15,000 LBS. (MAXIMUM WEIGHT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION)
5. 6.
ROLL AHEAD STOPPING DISTANCE = 30 FEET MIN.

(DRY PAVEMENT ASSUMED)
0 10

K E A
1
RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS,
60 / 65 MPH 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS
800 35/64 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2) 100 35/64 (2)
O W
G20-2A END ROAD WORK

50 10 . IN . M AX S E IC . IN 0 6
RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE W20-7A (1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE INTERCHANGE RAMPS, AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
X
(2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT
BE
X
W20-7B ~ OPTIONAL IF POSTED SPEED 40 MPH OR LESS
ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
PREPARED TO STOP
W20-4
W20-7A
ONE LANE
W20-1
S T A
ROAD
X
BE
X
WORK AHEAD
PREPARED TO STOP
X
ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD

W20-4
ROAD WORK AHEAD

W20-1
LEGEND
LANE CLOSURE WITH FLAGGER CONTROL

FLAGGING STATION SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
AHEAD
T H E O
T
ROAD
X
NE E R
10 0
50 M IN . A X .
B D M E V M X
30 0
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
MINIMUM TAPER LENGTH = L

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 12 25 105 115 125 30 150 165 180 POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600
(FEET)
CHANNELIZING DEVICE SPACING 1.

POSTED SPEED IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 40
55 550 605 660
60 660 720
(MPH) 50 / 65 35 / 45 25 / 30
Channelizing Devices are recommended along centerline to separate traffic from work operation. Devices are required at tapers to shift traffic movement between lanes and to protect all flagging stations. Night work requires additional roadway lighting at flagging stations. See WSDOT Standard Specifications for additional details. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05. See Standard Plan K-20.40 for additional details.
2.
3.
4.
G20-4 36" x 18" B/O
PILOT CAR FOLLOW ME
L/2
S T A
WORK AREA
LEGEND
FLAGGING STATION SIGN LOCATION
LANE CLOSURE WITH PILOT CAR

CHANNELIZING DEVICES SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET PILOT VEHICLE MOTORIST VEHICLE APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
PILOT CAR FOLLOW ME
T H E O
G20-4 36" x 18" B/O
T
SP-1 24" x 16" 4" C B/W
STOP WAIT FOR PILOT CAR
NE E R
W O R K A R E A
L /2
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES SIGN SPACING = X (1) 1.
RURAL HIGHWAYS 60 / 65 MPH 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 800 35/64 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2)

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 360 50 425 55 495 60 570

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 25 105 115 125 30 150 165 180 POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600
(FEET)
55 550 605 660
60 660 720
RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Existing conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary markings shall be used as necessary, and signs shall be post mounted for long term projects. Steady-Burn Warning Lights (Type C, MUTCD) shall be used to mark Channelizing Devices at night. For speed limits of 30 mph or less, sign W1-3 shall be used in lieu of sign W1-4. Extend device taper (L/3) across shoulder ~ recommended. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. Channelizing Device spacing for the downstream taper option shall be 20 O.C. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
BUFFER DATA
12
2.
URBAN STREETS 100 35/64 (2) ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE
LOADED WEIGHT
MINIMUM WEIGHT 15,000 LBS.

(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE INTERCHANGE POSTED SPEED IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT 50 / 60 35 / 45 25 / 30 80 60 40 W20-1 ROADWAY CONDITIONS. RAMPS, AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, DRIVEWAYS.
3.
(MAXIMUM WEIGHT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION)
(MPH)
4.

5.
ROAD WORK
W1-4L
6. 7.
AHEAD
8.
KEEP
R4-7B END ROAD WORK OR DOWNSTREAM TAPER TO SHOW END OF WORK AREA ~ SEE NOTE 7 G20-2A 24" x 30" B/W
RIGHT
L/2 SEE NOTE 5
WORK AREA
S T A
FOR OPPOSING TRAFFIC DEVICES W20-1 W4-2R ~ COMPLIANCE DATE 12/23/13 END ROAD WORK G20-2A
ROAD
WORK AHEAD
LEFT LANE CLOSED AHEAD
W20-5L SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED PCMS PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN ARROW PANEL 1.5 SEC LANE CLOSED
PCMS
SAMPLE MESSAGE
LANE SHIFT ONTO PASSING LANE
LEGEND

1 MILE AHEAD 1.5 SEC SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
FIELD LOCATE IN ADVANCE OF LANE CLOSURE SIGNING
PORTATION.
25335
L/2
DEVICE SPACING ~ 1/2 DISTANCE
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
2 MIN.
PCMS
R E I N A N O
PCMS
F O R P




LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 25 105 115 125 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 POSTED SPEED (MPH) 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660 60 660 720
(FEET)
65 780
70 840
RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead Stopping Distance. Extend device taper (L/3) across shoulder ~ recommended. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. Traffic Safety Drums for all tapers on high speed roadway ~ recommended. Transverse Devices in closed lane every 1000 35/64 ~ recommended. Channelizing Device spacing for the downstream taper option shall be 20 O.C. Use advanced notice for any overwidth loads prior to lane closure for altenative routes if applicable ~ recommended. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
BUFFER DATA
TYPICAL PROTECTIVE VEHICLE WITH TMA (SEE NOTE 1)
12
2.
100 35/64 (2)
3.
VEHICLE TYPE
LOADED WEIGHT

(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE POSTED SPEED IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 80 60 40 ROADWAY CONDITIONS. AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
4.
(MPH)
5.

6.
W20-5R
7. RIGHT LANE CLOSED

W4-2L ~ COMPLIANCE DATE 12/23/13 W20-1
AHEAD
8.
ROAD
END ROAD WORK G20-2A OR DOWNSTREAM TAPER TO SHOW END OF WORK AREA ~ SEE NOTE 6
WORK AHEAD
100
L SEE NOTE 2
X PCMS
SEE NOTE 5
WORK AREA
S T A
W5-1
ROAD NARROWS
LEGEND
LATERAL BUFFER ~ 4 TEMPORARY LANE ~ 12 MIN. EXISTING SHOULDER 2 EXISTING LANE WORK AREA CHANNELIZING DEVICES EXISTING LANE EXISTING PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED SHOULDER PCMS PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN ARROW PANEL EXISTING EDGE STRIPE EXISTING LANE STRIPE
SIGN LOCATION
SINGLE LANE CLOSURE WITH ENCROACHMENT

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
SECTION
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
LONGITUDINAL BUFFER SPACE = B 1.

A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Devices shall not encroach into adjacent lanes. Extend device taper (L/3) across shoulder ~ recommended. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. Use Transverse Devices in closed lane every 1000 35/64 ~ recommended.
BUFFER DATA
G20-2A OR DOWNSTREAM TAPER TO SHOW END OF WORK AREA ~ SEE NOTE 7
END ROAD WORK
2. 3.
200
LOADED WEIGHT
4.
WORK AREA
RECOMMEND CLOSING ADJACENT LANE TO MAINTAIN BUFFER SPACE ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN K-24.20 FOR ALTERNATE ENCROACHMENT
5.
2 MIN.

7. MINIMUM TAPER LENGTH = L

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 12 25 30 (FEET)
Channelizing Device spacing for the downstream taper option shall be 20 O.C. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660 60 660 720 L B
8.

RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 60 / 65 MPH 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 800 35/64 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2)
W4-2L ~ COMPLIANCE DATE 12/23/13
100 35/64 (2)
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE X W20-5O1

TWO LANES
S T A
(2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT X ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
CLOSED AHEAD
SAMPLE MESSAGE
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70 40 / 45 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 1 2 ONE MILE AHEAD 1.5 SEC PCMS
ROAD WORK AHEAD
2 LANES CLOSED
1.5 SEC
FIELD LOCATE IN ADVANCE
DOUBLE LANE CLOSURE ON MULTILANE ROADWAY
LEGEND
OF LANE CLOSURE SIGNING

SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED PCMS PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
ARROW PANEL
PORTATION.
25335
PCMS
W20-1
NOTE:
RAMPS, AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
T H E O
T
(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE INTERCHANGE
RIGHT
NE E R
6.
Traffic Safety Drums for all tapers on high speed roadway ~ recommended.
2L
R E I N A N O
F O R P




LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 25 105 115 125 30 150 165 180
(FEET)
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660 60 660 720
RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Devices shall not encroach into adjacent lanes. Extend device taper (L/3) across shoulder ~ recommended. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. Use Transverse Devices in closed lane every 1000 35/64 ~ recommended.
BUFFER DATA
12
2.
URBAN STREETS 100 35/64 (2) ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE
3. 4.
LOADED WEIGHT

(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE INTERCHANGE POSTED SPEED IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 80 60 40 ROADWAY CONDITIONS. RAMPS, AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
(MPH)
5.

7.
W20-5R
Channelizing Device spacing for the downstream taper option shall be 20 O.C. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
8. RIGHT LANE
CLOSED AHEAD
W20-1
ROAD WORK
END ROAD WORK OR DOWNSTREAM TAPER TO SHOW END OF WORK AREA ~ SEE NOTE 7 100 1 B L X X X PCMS G20-2A
AHEAD
SEE NOTE 5 WORK AREA
S T A
SEE STANDARD PLAN K-24.20 FOR ALTERNATE ENCROACHMENT
PCMS
SAMPLE MESSAGE
SINGLE LANE CLOSURE ON MULTILANE ROADWAY
LEGEND
1 SIGN LOCATION LANE CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED 1.5 SEC PCMS PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN FIELD LOCATE 1 MILE 35/64 , IN ARROW PANEL ADVANCE OF LANE CLOSURE 1.5 SEC CLOSED 2 ONE MILE AHEAD

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
2 MIN.
T H E O
T
NE E R
6.
Traffic Safety Drums for all tapers on high speed roadway ~ recommended.
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
G20-2A

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 360 50 425 55 495 60 570 65 645 70 730
W20-1 END
1.
ROAD WORK AHEAD

X
ROAD WORK
Existing conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary markings shall be used as necessary. Steady-Burn Warning Lights (Type C, MUTCD) shall be used to mark Channelizing Devices at night. Exposed ends of Concrete Barriers shall be tapered outside the clear zone or fitted with impact attenuators. Roadside Barrier and End Treatment shall be crashworthy. Refer to Design Manual, Chapter 710 & 720, for barrier and attenuator information. Temporary concrete barrier may be Type 2 (see Standard Plan C-8) or Alternative (see Standard Plan K-80.30). Anchoring may be required (see Standard Plans K-80.35 and K-80.37). For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
2.
3. SIGN SPACING = X (1)

RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 60 / 65 MPH 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 800 35/64
4.
500 35/64 350 35/64
5.
200 35/64 (2) 100 35/64 (2) 2 TEMPORARY WHITE EDGE LINE MIN. 12
6.
(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE INTERCHANGE RAMPS, AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, AND DRIVEWAYS. (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
WORK AREA
LONGITUDINAL BARRIER FLARE RATES

POSTED SPEED ANCHORED BARRIER UNANCHORED BARRIER

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 12 25 105 115 125 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 POSTED SPEED (MPH) 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660
(FEET)
(MPH) W12-401R 60 55 B 50 45 40 OR BELOW
18 : 1 16 : 1 14 : 1 12 : 1 11 : 1
16 : 1 14 : 1 12 : 1 11 : 1 10 : 1
60 660 720
65 780
70 840
W12-501R

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 65 35 / 45 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT
80 60 40 G20-2A END ROAD WORK
T H E O
S T A
W20-5R
CLOSED
SIGN LOCATION X CHANNELIZING DEVICES TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER WITH REFLECTORS
SAMPLE MESSAGE
1 RIGHT 2 ONE MILE AHEAD 1.5 SEC
AHEAD
W20-1
LANE CLOSED 1.5 SEC
ROAD
PCMS PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
SINGLE LANE CLOSURE WITH TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER
WORK
ARROW PANEL TRAFFIC SAFETY DRUM PCMS TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET FIELD LOCATE IN ADVANCE OF LANE CLOSURE SIGNING APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
AHEAD
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
NOTE:
LEGEND
RIGHT LANE
PCMS
PORTATION.
25335
T
(FEET)
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 25 105 115 125 (FEET)

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 360 50 425 RURAL ROADS
SIGN SPACING = X
45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600
RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS
(MPH) 50 35 / 45 25 / 30
BUFFER DATA
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE 12 ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS.
LOADED WEIGHT
MINIMUM WEIGHT 15,000 LBS. (MAXIMUM WEIGHT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION) W20-1
W20-5
ROAD WORK

KEEP
CLOSED AHEAD
PCMS #2
RIGHT
L/2 DEVICE SPACING ~ 1/2 DISTANCE FOR OPPOSING TRAFFIC DEVICES L/2 X
SEE NOTE 2 WORK AREA PCMS #1
X W4-2L
L X
L/2
L/2
L/2
W20-1
~ COMPLIANCE DATE 12/23/13
ROAD WORK
W20-5R W1-4L
T H E O
AHEAD
RIGHT LANE CLOSED AHEAD NOTES 1. A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Extend device taper (L/3) across shoulder ~ recommended. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. If the lane shift is short and has minimal radius curve (30mph or less) use sign W1-3 in lieu of sign W1-4. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
S T A
T
SAMPLE MESSAGE #1
1 LANES CLOSED AHEAD 1.5 SEC 2 NO LEFT TURN 1.5 SEC
SAMPLE MESSAGE #2
1 CENTER LANE CLOSED 1.5 SEC 2
2. LEGEND 3.
SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES
NO LEFT TURN 1.5 SEC PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED
4.
LANE SHIFT ONTO TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE

5.
FIELD LOCATE IN ADVANCE OF LANE CLOSURE SIGNING
FIELD LOCATE IN ADVANCE OF LANE CLOSURE SIGNING PCMS PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN ARROW PANEL
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
NOTE:
PCMS
PCMS
25335
NE E R
R4-7B 24" x 30" B/W
CENTER LANE
AHEAD
R E I N A N O
F O R P

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 360 50 425 RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS

500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 25 105 115 125 (FEET)
SIGN SPACING = X
45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600
(MPH) 50 35 / 45 25 / 30
BUFFER DATA
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE 12 ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE INTERCHANGE RAMPS, AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
LOADED WEIGHT
MINIMUM WEIGHT 15,000 LBS. (MAXIMUM WEIGHT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION) W20-5L
W4-2R

W20-1
ROAD WORK AHEAD

L/2
LANE WIDTH 10 MIN. ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN K-24.20 FOR ALTERNATE ENCROACHMENT
X PCMS
WORK AREA
1 LANE WIDTH 10 MIN. ~ SEE STANDARD PLAN K-24.20 FOR ALTERNATE ENCROACHMENT
L/2
W20-1
W4-2R ~ COMPLIANCE DATE 12/22/13

WORK
T H E O
LEFT LANE
CLOSED AHEAD NOTES 1. A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. Prohibit turns as necessary for traffic conditions. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Device (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
S T A
AHEAD
PCMS
SAMPLE MESSAGE
1 LEFT LANE CLOSED 1.5 SEC 2
LEGEND
NO LEFT TURN CHANNELIZING DEVICES 1.5 SEC PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED FIELD LOCATE IN ADVANCE OF LANE CLOSURE SIGNING PCMS PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN ARROW PANEL SIGN LOCATION
2. 3. 4.
LEFT AND CENTER LANE CLOSURE ~ TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE

Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T
ROAD
W20-5L
NE E R
PCMS
R E I N A N O
F O R P


SIGN SPACING = X (1) NOTES
800 35/64 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2)

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 360 50 425 55 495 60 570 RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS
1.
RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS W20-1
ROAD WORK AHEAD
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. If an existing signal is present, the signal shall be set to "red flash mode" or turned off during flagging operations. Extend device taper (L/3) across shoulder ~ recommended. Law enforcement officer may be used in lieu of flaggers to control intersection traffic. For speed limit of 30 mph or less use sign W1-3 in lieu of sign W1-4. Maintain a minimum of one access point for each business within the Work Area limits. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
2.
100 35/64 (2)
URBAN STREETS
3.
(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE X INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS. (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
W20-4 ~ OPTIONAL IF POSTED SPEED 40 MPH OR LESS

ONE LANE
4.
BUFFER DATA
TYPICAL PROTECTIVE VEHICLE WITH TMA (SEE NOTE 1)
ROAD AHEAD
5. 6.
VEHICLE TYPE
LOADED WEIGHT
W20-7B
BE
PREPARED TO STOP
7.
W20-7B ~ OPTIONAL IF POSTED SPEED 40 MPH OR LESS X
8.
W20-7A 1
BE

W20-7A
PREPARED TO STOP
W20-1 W20-5C
CENTER LANE
ROAD WORK AHEAD

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 40
CLOSED
100
X 2
X L/2 X
AHEAD
L/2
WORK AREA
L/2
B X X
50
L/2
KEEP
R4-7B 24" x 30" B/W
W20-1
ROAD WORK AHEAD BE
W1-4L W20-7A
S T A
PREPARED TO STOP
2 W20-7A
DEVICE SPACING ~ 1/2 DISTANCE FOR OPPOSING TRAFFIC DEVICES
W20-7B ~ OPTIONAL IF POSTED SPEED 40 MPH OR LESS X
PREPARED
LEGEND
X
TO STOP
FLAGGING STATION SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED X
W20-4
ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 25 105 115 125 30 150 165 180
(FEET)
INTERSECTION ~ LANE SHIFT ON THREE LANE TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE STANDARD PLAN K-30.20-00
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660 60 660 720
W20-1
ROAD WORK AHEAD
10 11 12
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
NOTE:
BE
PORTATION.
25335
T H E O
T
SEE NOTE 3 (TYP.)
RIGHT
NE E R
X 100
100
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES CHANNELIZING DEVICE SPACING

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 360 50 425 55 495 60 570 65 645 W20-1
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70

ROAD
IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20
IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 40
1.
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. If an existing signal is present, the signal shall be set to "red flash mode" or turned off during flagging operations. Extend device taper (L/3) across shoulder ~ recommended. Law enforcement officer may be used in lieu of flaggers to control intersection traffic. Closing lane in advance of flagging location when multiple lanes are on approach leg ~ recommended. Maintain a minimum of one access point for each business within the Work Area limits.
35 / 45 25 / 30
2.
BUFFER DATA
WORK AHEAD
3.
X
LOADED WEIGHT
W21-1 SEE NOTE 9

WORKERS
4. 5.
W20-7B 1
6.
BE

TO STOP

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 12 25 105 115 125 30 150 165 180
(FEET) W20-7B W20-7A 60 660 720 65

BE
8.
For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05. 9.
W20-5R W4-2L 2 W20-1
RIGHT LANE CLOSED AHEAD
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660
780 W20-7A
PREPARED TO STOP
ROAD WORK AHEAD
100
X 1
X B
SEE NOTE 3 (TYP.) L X X X
A four sign sequence is required with posted speed 45 mph or higher. An appropriate standard warning sign reflecting the road condition or work operation may be used in place of the "WORKERS" sign. An acceptable alternative would be to repeat any of the signs from the sequence.
50 MIN. 300 MAX.
WORK AREA
X X X L L/2 X X
L/2
S T A
ROAD WORK
RIGHT LANE
BE PREPARED TO STOP
CLOSED AHEAD
2 W20-7A 3
COMPLIANCE DATE 12/23/13 OPTIONAL WHEN THE POSTED SPEED IS 40 MPH OR LOWER
AHEAD
W20-5R
W20-7B
3 X
RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS
800 35/64 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2) X
PREPARED TO STOP
LEGEND
W21-1 SEE NOTE 9
WORKERS
INTERSECTION ~ LANE SHIFT ON FIVE LANE TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE

FLAGGING STATION SIGN LOCATION
100 35/64 (2) X

CHANNELIZING DEVICES W20-1

ROAD WORK AHEAD
(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS. (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED ARROW PANEL
Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
NOTE:
BE
W20-7B
PORTATION.
25335
W20-1
W4-2L
W20-7A
T H E O
T
NE E R
PREPARED
7.
Consider using a PCMS, field located in advance of signing, on the five lane roadway.
R E I N A N O
F O R P

DRAWN BY: ELENA BRUNSTEIN W20-1

NOTES
G20-2A
ROAD
END
1.
ROAD WORK
WORK AHEAD
SIGN SPACING = X
RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 100 35/64 100 X
If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed (see Standard Plan K-34.20). The normal procedure is to close on the near side of the intersection any lane that is not carried through the intersection. However, when this results in the closure of a right lane having significant right turning movements, then the right lane may be restricted to right turn only, as shown. This procedure increases the through capacity by eliminating right turns from the open through lane. Prohibit turns as necessary for traffic conditions. Flashing Warning Lights (Type A per MUTCD) should be used, as needed, to mark barricades at night. Steady Burning Warning Lights (Type C per MUTCD) shall be used to mark channelizing devices at night. For long term projects, conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary markings shall be used as necessary. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
2.
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE W20-1 ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS.
3. 4.
ROAD WORK
G20-2A END ROAD WORK WORK AREA
5.
AHEAD
6.
X

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 40
7.

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 12 25 105 115 125
(FEET) R3-7R B/W
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660 W20-1
END ROAD WORK
RIGHT LANE MUST TURN RIGHT

X
G20-2A
ROAD WORK AHEAD
T H E O
S T A
T
W4-7
THRU TRAFFIC
END G20-2A ROAD WORK
MERGE LEFT
25335
LEGEND
ROAD
SIGN LOCATION
WORK
CHANNELIZING DEVICES BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 L ARROW PANEL
INTERSECTION ~ RIGHT LANE CLOSURE FAR SIDE
AHEAD
W20-1

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
NOTE:
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
G20-2A END
1.
W20-1
ROAD WORK
If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed (see Standard Plan K-34.20). The normal procedure is to close on the near side of the intersection any lane that is not carried through the intersection. However, when this results in the closure of a left lane having significant left-turning movements, then the left lane may be reopened as a turn bay for left turns only, as shown. Prohibit turns as necessary for traffic conditions. Flashing Warning Lights (Type A per MUTCD) should be used, as needed, to mark barricades at night. Steady Burning Warning Lights (Type C per MUTCD) shall be used to mark channelizing devices at night. For long term projects, conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary markings shall be used as necessary. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
ROAD
SIGN SPACING = X
RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 100 35/64 W20-1 ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE
2.
WORK AHEAD
X
3. 4.
ROAD
ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS. WORK G20-2A END ROAD WORK AREA
WORK AHEAD
5.
6.
X

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 12 25 105 115 125
(FEET)
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550 605 660
7.

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 40 W20-1 END ROAD WORK X
G20-2A
ROAD
AHEAD
LEFT LANE
S T A
MUST
TURN LEFT
END L
G20-2A
ROAD WORK
W4-2R ~ COMPLIANCE DATE 12/23/13
LEGEND
W20-5L
SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES

X
INTERSECTION ~ LEFT LANE CLOSURE FAR SIDE

TEMPORARY TRAFFIC ARROW ~ OPTIONAL ARROW PANEL
ROAD WORK
BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 R
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
AHEAD
W20-1
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
100
WORK
R3-7L B/W
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES 1. 2. Prohibit turns as necessary for traffic conditions. Flashing Warning Lights (Type A per MUTCD) should be used, as needed, to mark barricades at night. Steady Burning Warning Lights (Type C per MUTCD) shall be used to mark channelizing devices at night. For long term projects, conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary markings shall be used as necessary. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
SIGN SPACING = X
RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 100 35/64
ROAD WORK AHEAD

X
3.
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE SEE NOTE 4 ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS. SEE NOTE 1 R3-2 R/W G20-2A END ROAD WORK W20-1
4.
5.
ROAD
(FEET) G20-2A END 55 550 605 660 ROAD WORK R4-7 B/W WORK AREA X
WORK AHEAD
(FEET) 10 11 12
25 105 115 125
30 150 165 180
35 205 225 245
40 270 294 320
45 450 495 540
50 500 550 600

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80 60 40 X
W20-1
END ROAD WORK
G20-2A
ROAD
L/2
WORK AHEAD
S T A
ROAD WORK
G20-2A
END R3-7L B/W
LEGEND
MUST
TURN LEFT
SIGN LOCATION X CHANNELIZING DEVICES TEMPORARY TRAFFIC ARROW ~ OPTIONAL BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 R W4-7
THRU TRAFFIC MERGE RIGHT
INTERSECTION ~ MULTIPLE LANE CLOSURE

X SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET W20-1
ROAD WORK AHEAD
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
LEFT LANE
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
LANE WIDTH
POSTED SPEED (MPH)
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
ROAD WORK
W20-5L POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 55 30 85 35 120 40 170 45 270
1.
NO LEFT TURN signs are to be used if traffic volumes are too high or there is an operating signal. Close the left turn pocket if there is one on the side street. When turn prohibitions are implemented, two turn prohibition signs should be used, one on the near side and, space permitting, one on on the far side of the intersection. If the work space extends a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed (see Standard Plan K-34.20). Flashing Warning Lights (Type A per MUTCD) should be used, as needed, to mark barricades at night. Steady Burning Warning Lights (Type C per MUTCD) shall be used to mark channelizing devices at night. For long term projects conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary markings shall be used. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
AHEAD
X
2.

X
3.
4.
5.
G20-2A
6.
SIGN SPACING = X
RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 500 35/64 L 350 35/64 200 35/64 100 35/64 R3-2 R/W
END ROAD WORK
7.
ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE L/2
R3-2 R/W
W20-1
ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS. G20-2A END ROAD WORK R4-7 B/W
ROAD WORK AHEAD

WORK AREA X

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 10 11 12 25 105 115 125
(FEET)
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600 55 550
(T
605
E
660
O N
S T A

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 20 IN TANGENT
(FEET) 80 60 40 W20-1 X X END
ROAD WORK R3-7R B/W
ROAD WORK
LEGEND
R3-2 R/W
TURN RIGHT
AHEAD
SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES G20-2A ARROW PANEL BARRICADE ~ TYPE 3 L OBLITERATED MARKING
THRU TRAFFIC MERGE LEFT
INTERSECTION ~ HALF ROAD CLOSURE WITH LANE SHIFT

W4-7 SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
END ROAD WORK X
ROAD WORK AHEAD

W20-1
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
NOTE:
MUST
PORTATION.
RIGHT LANE
G20-2A
25335
T H E O
T
NE E R
.)
R E I N A N O
F O R P
SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD
CROSS HERE
R9-11 B/W
16 MIN.
SIDEWALK DETOUR
R9-11A MOD B/W
SIDEWALK DETOUR
R9-11A MOD B/W PEDESTRIAN PATH
*
SIDEWALK CLOSED
R9-9 B/W
WORK AREA R9-11 B/W WALKWAY ~ 5 MIN. SEE NOTE 2
R9-11 B/W
SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD CROSS HERE
WORK AREA
MIN.
16
USE OTHER SIDE
R9-10 B/W
S T A
PEDESTRIAN DETOUR
NON-WORKING HOURS
PEDESTRIAN DETOUR
WORKING HOURS
R8-3 B/W
1.
When crosswalks or other pedestrian facilities are closed or relocated, temporary facilities shall be detectable and shall include accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian facility. Controls shown are for pedestrian traffic only. Use Warning Lights on barricades. Maintain a minimum width of 3 feet for pedestrian path. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
INTERSECTION ~ PEDESTRIAN DETOUR
2. Install on Type 2 Barricades throughout the work area 24 hours prior to implementing traffic control. Prior notification of Local Law Enforcement required. 3. 4. 5.

LEGEND
*
SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES TYPE 2 BARRICADE
NO
PARKING
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
NOTE:
NOTES
PORTATION.
25335
T H E O
T
NE E R
CROSS HERE
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES SIGN SPACING = X (1)
RURAL ROADS 55 550 605 URBAN STREETS 25 MPH OR LESS 100 35/64 (2) 660 ALL SIGNS ARE BLACK ON ORANGE UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2)
BUFFER DATA

LANE WIDTH (FEET) 25 105 115 125
(FEET)
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 30 150 165 180 35 205 225 245 40 270 294 320 45 450 495 540 50 500 550 600
1.
LOADED WEIGHT
10 MINIMUM WEIGHT 15,000 LBS. 11 (MAXIMUM WEIGHT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION) 12
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. For long term projects conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed. Temporary markings shall be used as necessary and signs shall be post mounted. The sign MOTORCYCLES USE EXTREME CAUTION may be used. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
2.

(DRY PAVEMENT ASSUMED) (1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS. (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT W20-1 ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
3.
ROAD WORK
G20-2A END ROAD WORK 50 / 70 35 / 45 25 / 30 G20-2A END ROAD WORK 40 30 20 80 60 40 W21-801 * W8-1801 POSTED SPEED (MPH) X IN TAPER (FEET) IN TANGENT (FEET)
4.
AHEAD
*WHEN APPLICABLE
W20-1
ABRUPT LANE EDGE
NO SHOULDER
ROAD WORK AHEAD
A
1 B L/3 X X X
WORK AREA
S T A
X W20-1 W20-1 X END ROAD WORK
G20-2A
ROAD WORK AHEAD

G20-2A END ROAD WORK
ROAD WORK AHEAD

SHOULDER WORK AREA 2 EXISTING LANE
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICE
INTERSECTION ~ SHOULDER WORK
LEGEND

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED 4H:1V WEDGE OF COMPACTED STABLE MATERIAL ~ SEE WSDOT STD. SPEC. 1-07-23(1)
SECTION
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
SHOULDER WORK AREA PROTECTION

(NOT TO SCALE)
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
(FEET)


SHOULDER WIDTH (FEET) 6 8 25 30 35
1.
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 40 45 270 360 450 50 300 400 500 55 330 440 550 60 360 480 600 65 390 520 650 70 420 560 700 SEE STD. PLAN K-40.40
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a TMA is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Channelizing Device spacing for the downstream taper option shall be 20 O.C. No Encroachment on the traveled lane is permitted. If Encroachment is necessary, the lane shall be closed (see Standard Plan K-24.20). Signs to be post mounted for long term projects. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
SEE STD. PLAN K-40.40
2. 3.
BUFFER DATA
10 LESS THAN 6
3 DEVICES MINIMUM, SPACED 10 O.C.
LOADED WEIGHT
4. CHANNELIZING DEVICE SPACING

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 50 / 70 45 / 50 IN TAPER (FEET) 40 30 IN TANGENT (FEET) 80
5.

SIGN SPACING = X
RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS 60 / 65 MPH 45 / 55 MPH 800 35/64 500 35/64
ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE INTERCHANGE RAMPS, AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
WORK AREA
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY FILE AT THE WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSA COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PORTATION. THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION, IS KEPT ON
L/3
100
T H E O
S T A
T
END W20-1 W21-5 W2O-301 ROAD WORK
SHOULDER
SHOULDER CLOSED
WORK
AHEAD
25335
WORK
NE E R
ROAD
SHOULDER CLOSURE ~ HIGH SPEED ROADWAY (45 MPH OR HIGHER)

LEGEND

SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
NOTE:
60
2 MIN.
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
(FEET)

POSTED SPEED (MPH) LENGTH B (FEET) 25 155 30 200 35 250 40 305 45 50 55 60 65 70

SHOULDER WIDTH (FEET) 6 8 25 63 84 105 30 90 120 150 35 123 164 204
1.
POSTED SPEED (MPH) 40 160 214 267 SEE STD. PLAN K-40.20 45 50 55 60 65 70 SEE STD. PLAN K-40.20
A Protective Vehicle is recommended regardless if a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) is available; a work vehicle may be used. When no TMA is used, the Protective Vehicle shall be strategically located to shield workers, with no specific Roll-Ahead distance. Channelizing Device spacing for the downstream taper option shall be 20 O.C. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
BUFFER DATA
2.
10 LESS THAN 6 3 DEVICES MINIMUM, SPACED 10 O.C.
3.
LOADED WEIGHT

POSTED SPEED (MPH) 35 / 40 25 / 30 IN TAPER (FEET) 30 20 IN TANGENT (FEET) 60 RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, 40 RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS

RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2) 100 35/64 (2)

WORK AREA
S T A
END W20-1 W21-5 ROAD WORK
SHOULDER
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
LEGEND
SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ~ RECOMMENDED
SHOULDER CLOSURE ~ LOW SPEED ROADWAY (40 MPH OR LESS)

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NE E R
ROAD
NOTE:
L/3
100
T H E O
T
10 MIN.
2 MIN.
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
PROTECTIVE VEHICLE ROLL AHEAD DISTANCE = R

TYPICAL PROTECTIVE VEHICLE WITH TMA STATIONARY OPERATION
1.
In those situations where multiple work locations within a limited distance make it practical to place stationary signs, the distance between the advance Warning Sign and the Work Area should not exceed 5 miles. In those situations where the distance between the advance signs and the Work Area is 2 to 5 miles, a Supplemental Distance plaque should be used with the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign. No encroachment into traffic lane is permitted with this plan. Work vehicle and Shadow vehicle shall use Warning Beacons. Shadow vehicle shall maintain 500 to 1000 of sight distance to approaching traffic. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
VEHICLE TYPE
LOADED WEIGHT
2.
30 FEET
3. 4.
ROLL AHEAD DISTANCES VARY AND SHALL BE DETERMINED IN FIELD BASED ON WORK OPERATION AND SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS
* PROTECTIVE VEHICLE MOUNTED *

ROAD
SHOULDER
5. 6.
W21-5
W20-1
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
R WORK VEHICLE SEE NOTES 1 AND 2
WORK AREA
SHADOW VEHICLE
S T A
LEGEND
SIGN LOCATION
SHOULDER CLOSURE ~ SHORT DURATION
PROTECTIVE VEHICLE

TRUCK MOUNTED ATTENUATOR ~ RECOMMENDED SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION SEQUENTIAL ARROW PANEL TYPE "B" ~ CAUTION MODE
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
WARNING BEACON ~ REQUIRED
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES

RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 500 35/64 350 35/64 200 35/64 (2)
1.
The sign shown is not required in the following cases: the work space is behind a barrier, or more than 2 behind the curb, or more than 15 from the edge of a roadway. For sign size, refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
2.
100 35/64 (2)
(1) ALL SIGN SPACING MAY BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE AT-GRADE INTERSECTIONS AND DRIVEWAYS. (2) THIS SIGN SPACING MAY BE REDUCED IN URBAN AREAS TO FIT ROADWAY CONDITIONS.
X
T H E O
SEE NOTE 1 W20-1
S T A
T
ROAD WORK
AHEAD
25335
LEGEND
SIGN LOCATION
WORK BEYOND THE SHOULDER

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
NOTE:
WORK AREA
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
INSTALL THESE OR OTHER WARNING SIGNS AS NEEDED FOR THE SPECIFIC HAZARD 1. ABRUPT LANE EDGE 3.
W8-1 B/O W8-1801 B/O W21-1701 B/O W21-801 B/O
Implement this plan when the initial roadway assessment is complete and determined to be passable with caution. Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) ~ recommended. For one-lane two-way traffic situations (see Standard Plan K-20.40) for additional details. Spot hazards shall be marked with barricades or channelizing devices to alert motorists. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD
WATER OVER ROADWAY
ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC

R11-4 B/W
YIELD
NO
MOTORCYCLES USE EXTREME CAUTION
BUMP
R1-2 W/R
2.
SHOULDER
W20-4 B/O
W8-2001 B/Y
4.
PCMS
SAMPLE MESSAGE
1 CAUTION STORM DEBRIS 1.5 SEC 2
ON ROAD NEXT XX MILES 1.5 SEC
FIELD LOCATE IN ADVANCE OF HAZARD
SP-1
OVERHANGING TREES OR OBSTACLES BELOW 16
S T A
6" D 6" D 2. 6" D
NEXT X MILES
THIS SIGN IS NOT A REPLACEMENT FOR REQUIRED TRAFFIC CONTROL MEASURES NEEDED AT MORE SUBSTANTIAL HAZARD LOCATIONS.
EMERGENCY ~ PASSABLE HAZARD

LEGEND
SP-1 SIGN LOCATION TYPE 2 BARRICADE WITH TYPE "A" WARNING LIGHT OR CHANNELIZING DEVICE FLASHING WARNING LIGHT

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
NOTE:
SP-1 WITH MILEAGE OVERLAY PLAQUE B/O
SLIDES AND STORM DEBRIS ON ROADWAY
6" D
1.
INSTALL FOR EMERGENCY USE, AS NEEDED, ON PASSABLE ROADWAYS WITH SPOT OR CONTINUOUS HAZARDS REQUIRING MINIMAL OR NO SPECIFIC WARNING.
25335
NOTICE
8" D
NOTES
T H E O
T
NE E R
SP-1
W AT ER OR DE BR IS (P AS SA BL E)
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
CHANNELIZING DEVICE SPACING 1. SIGN SPACING = X (1)

RURAL HIGHWAYS RURAL ROADS RURAL ROADS & URBAN ARTERIALS RURAL ROADS, URBAN ARTERIALS, RESIDENTIAL & BUSINESS DISTRICTS URBAN STREETS 60 / 65 MPH 45 / 55 MPH 35 / 40 MPH 25 / 30 MPH 25 MPH OR LESS 800 35/64 50 / 70 500 35/64 35 / 45 350 35/64 25 / 30 200 35/64 (2) 100 35/64 (2) 20 40 30 60 40 80 POSTED SPEED (MPH) IN TAPER (FEET) IN TANGENT (FEET)
See Standard Plan K-24.60 for typical lane closure signing details, device spacing requirements, and lane closure taper length. MOTOCYCLES USE EXTREME CAUTION signs shall be installed when the following roadway conditions exist: % % % % grooved pavement abrupt lane edge steel plates loose gravel of earth
2.
Specific signs for each of the conditions noted shall be installed along with MOTORCYCLES USE EXTREME CAUTION signs. 3. For signs size refer to Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M55-05.
W21-1701
W8-2001
MOTORCYCLES USE EXTREME CAUTION
GROOVED PAVEMENT
WORK AREA
S T A
GROOVED
LANE EDGE
LOOSE GRAVEL
STEEL PLATES
PAVEMENT
W21-801
W8-2001
W8-7
W21-1801
LEGEND MOTORCYCLE WARNING SIGN (W21-1701) SHOULD BE INSTALLED AT 1 MILE SPACING, THROUGHOUT THE WORK ZONE WHERE THE CONDITION EXISTS, AS PART OF THE SEQUENCE OF OTHER APPROPRIATE STANDARD WARNING SIGNS ON 1 MILE SPACING
SIGN LOCATION CHANNELIZING DEVICES ARROW PANEL
MOTORCYCLE SUPPLEMENTAL SIGNING

Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
ABRUPT
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P

200 35/64 ~ TANGENT (TYP.) DRAWN BY: ELENA BRUNSTEIN 100 35/64 ~ CURVE (TYP.) CHANNELIZING DEVICE (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 3 4 36 YELLOW TAPE STRIPE 4
36
YELLOW TRPM (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 5
NOTES 1. For long term projects conflicting pavement markings that are no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated. Temporary markings shall be used as necessary. For Hot Mixed Asphalt Pavement, a temporary striping tape shall be installed in conjunction with DO NOT PASS and "PASS WITH CARE" sign locations. Temporary roadside delineation with Channelization Devices is optional. The appropriate taper length shall be L/2. See Standard Plan K-24.20 for minimum taper length (L). For long term projects a channelization/pavement marking plan should be implemented. Temporary Raised Pavement Marker (TRPM) may be used on a pattern spacing 5 O.C. to simulate a solid line.
2.
HOT MIXED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
3.
TWO-LANE ROADWAY
4.
36
WHITE TAPE (OR PAINT) STRIPE
36
WHITE TRPM ~ SEE NOTE 5
5.
ONE-WAY TWO-LANE ROADWAY

S T A
36
36
YELLOW TRPM (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 5
YELLOW TAPE STRIPE
TEMPORARY CHANNELIZATION

TEMPORARY TURN ARROW (TYP.) SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Ken L. Smith
02-15-07
DATE
TWO-WAY TWO-LANE LEFT TURN ROADWAY
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL 6 TO 12

NOTES 1.
6 TO 12
For sign installation details, see Std. Plan G - series. In rural areas, the "V" Height can be a minimum of 7 feet for primary signs and 6 feet for the supplemental plaques for greater visibility, as directed by the engineer. The "V" height for signs, with an area of more than 50 square feet and two or more sign supports, is 7 feet in both rural and urban areas.
6 TO 12
SHOULDER
2 MIN. PRIMARY SIGN
2.
SHOULDER SIGN
SHOULDER
6 MIN.
3.
0" MIN. SIGN EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY 3" MAX. SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY EDGE OF SIGN SHALL NOT INTRUDE ON EDGE OF SIDEWALK
CURB FACE
CURB FACE SIDEWALK
CURB
CURB
SIGN INSTALLATION (FILL SECTION)
SIGN INSTALLATION (CURB SECTION)
SIGN INSTALLATION (SIDEWALK AND CURB SECTION) HEIGHT V

TO BOTTOM OF SIGN (NO SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE) RURAL URBAN
5 MINIMUM
TO BOTTOM OF SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE (WHEN REQUIRED)

4 MINIMUM
7 MINIMUM
6 MINIMUM
6 TO 12 6 TO 12
SHOULDER SHOULDER SHOULDER 6 MIN. 6 MIN. PRIMARY SIGN
6 MIN.
S T A
4 MIN. EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY
SIGN
SIGN EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY 0" MIN. 3" MAX. SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE
25335
NE E R
3 MIN.
FACE OF BARRIER OR GUARDRAIL
V V V
DITCH
CLASS A CONSTRUCTION SIGNING INSTALLATION

SIGN INSTALLATION (BEHIND TRAFFIC BARRIER)
SIGN WITH SUPPLEMENTAL PLAQUE INSTALLATION (FILL SECTION)
SIGN INSTALLATION (DITCH SECTION)
Ken L. Smith
02-21-07
DATE
6 TO 12
T H E O
T
NOTE:
R E I N A N O
F O R P

NOTES 1.
6" (TYP.) 2 - 6"
4 - 0" MIN. ~ 8 - 0" MAX. USE ATTACHMENT DETAIL OR ATTACHMENT DETAIL
A
6" (TYP.)
45^
All fasteners may be zinc plated, galvanized or stainless steel. All steel angle and tubular steel shall be hot-rolled, high carbon steel, painted or galvanized. Install one lightweight Type A Low-Intensity flashing warning light on the traffic side of the barricade. Install two Type A Low-Intensity flashing warning lights per barricade when the barricades are used to close a roadway. Attach the light to the barricade according to the light manufacturers recommendations or use the details shown on this plan. Stripes on barricade rails shall be alternating orange and white retroreflective stripes (sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees in the direction traffic is to pass). The Type 3 barricade design shown on this plan meets the crash test requirements of NCHRP 350. Alternative designs may be approved if they conform to the NCHRP 350 crash test criteria and the MUTCD. When a sign is mounted on the barricade, it shall be securely bolted to at least two plywood panels. The top of the sign shall not be higher than the top panel of the barricade. When sandbags are used in freezing weather, Urea fertilizer shall be mixed with the sand in a quantity to prevent the sand from freezing.
2.
(TYP.) 1 - 0" 5 - 0"
8" (TYP.)
TOP OF BARRICADE SUPPORT ANGLE
3.
1 - 0"
5 - 0"
5. ELEVATION WARNING LIGHT ATTACHMENT DETAIL SIDE
TYPE 3 BARRICADE
6.
WARNING LIGHT ATTACHMENT
6" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/8" STEEL ANGLE
STEEL ANGLE
1"
TOP OF BARRICADE SUPPORT ANGLE DRILL TWO 1/2" DIAM. HOLES THROUGH BARRICADE SUPPORT ANGLE 1"
SEE NOTE 2
FRONT OF BARRICADE 8" 2" 2" 1/8" TUBULAR STEEL
ll ll
DRILL THREE 1/2" DIAM. HOLES
(1) 3/8" - 16 1 3/4" STEEL HEX BOLT (2) 1" FLAT WASHERS (1) LOCKWASHER
(1) 3/8" - 16 1" STEEL HEX BOLT 2" (2) 1" FLAT WASHERS (1) 3/8" - 16 STEEL HEX NUT
ORANGE AND WHITE REFLECTIVE SHEETING ASTM D4956 - TYPE OR l V (SEE NOTE 3) ll ll
ANGLE RESTS ON TOP OF BOLT
(1) 3/8" - 16 3" STEEL HEX BOLT (2) 1" FLAT WASHERS
(1) 3/8" - 16 STEEL HEX NUT (TYP.)
1"
3/4" ACX PLYWOOD PANEL
ATTACHMENT DETAIL
A DETAIL C
S T A
WARNING LIGHT ATTACHMENT
1"
TOP OF BARRICADE SUPPORT ANGLE DRILL TWO 1/2" DIAM. HOLES THROUGH BARRICADE SUPPORT ANGLE 1"
1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/8" STEEL ANGLE 5 - 0" LONG (TYP.)
TYPE 3 BARRICADE STANDARD PLAN K-80.20-00

8" 2" 2" 1/8" TUBULAR STEEL SHEET 1 OF 2 SHEETS APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
(1) 3/8" - 16 3" STEEL HEX BOLT 2" (2) 1" FLAT WASHERS (1) 3/8" - 16 STEEL HEX NUT
ISOMETRIC VIEW
1/8 1/8 (TYP.)
Kevin J. Dayton
12-20-06
DATE
ATTACHMENT DETAIL
PORTATION.
6" 2" 2" 1/8" TUBULAR STEEL WITH PRE-DRILLED HOLES
SANDBAGS AS REQUIRED TO STABILIZE BASE ~ ALL LEGS
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/8" STEEL ANGLE 4 - 11" LONG (TYP.)
(1) 3/8" - 16 STEEL HEX NUT
NE E R
4.
1"
6" (T Y .) P
R E I N A N O
F O R P
WORK AREA
USEABLE TRAFFIC LANE
2 MIN.
AREA CLOSED TO TRAFFIC
10 - 0"
TYPE 3L BARRICADE
MIN.
TYPE 3R BARRICADE
TYPE 3L BARRICADE
STRIPES ON THE BARRICADES SHALL SLOPE DOWNWARD IN THE DIRECTION TRAFFIC IS TO PASS
ROAD CLOSURE AT INTERSECTION
AREA CLOSED TO TRAFFIC
2 MIN.
USEABLE TRAFFIC LANE
S T A
TYPE 3R BARRICADE
TYPE 3L BARRICADE
TYPE 3R BARRICADE
TYPE 3 BARRICADE STANDARD PLAN K-80.20-00

ROAD CLOSURE AT OTHER LOCATIONS
Kevin J. Dayton
12-20-06
DATE
BARRICADE PLACEMENT
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
WORK AREA
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTES
1/4" DRAFT
UNIT (SECTION) LENGTH = 12 - 6" 1/4" DRAFT
2" DIAM. PINNING HOLE (TYP.) ~ WHEN REQUIRED
2 # 4 (PAIR) (TYP.)
1.
The reinforcing steel details for the NARROW BASE barrier are the same as those shown for the 2 wide barrier except that the bars along the vertical face run vertically with a 1 1/2" clearance. The vertical dimensions for the slots and loop bar locations on the NARROW BASE barrier are the same as those shown on the END views of the 2 wide barrier.
9 1/2" 2 3/8" (TYP.) 4 7/8" 5/8" R (TYP.)
2 3/8" (TYP.) 4 7/8" (TYP.) 5/8" R
9 1/2" 1 1/4" R 1 1/4" R 1 # 4 (TYP.)
TOP
2"
2" 2" 2"
1"
1 1/2" (TYP.) 2 1 # 4 2 # 4 (PAIR) (TYP.)
2" (TYP.)
7"
1/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
2"
9 1/2" 5"
# 4 (PAIRS) ~ 6 SPACES @ 1 - 8 1/2"
9 1/2"
4" (TYP.)
2 - 0"
9 1/2"
2.
1/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
10
4"
2" 2" 2"
10"
2"
6"
3"
8"
1"
.)
1"
"R (TY P
TY R( 0"
P.)
3"
A SIDE
(TYP.)
(TYP.)
2 - 0" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
1 1/2" 5 1/2" CONTINUOUS KEYWAY
3"
3/4" DIAM. LOOP BAR (TYP.)
12"
~ ~ 3
- 7 1/2"
2 - 0" 3/4" CHAMFER (TYP.)
END
END
2" 35/64 1/8"
9 1/2" 2 3/8" 4 7/8" 5/8" R 1 1/4" CHAMFER (TYP.) 2 # 4 (TYP.) # 4 (PAIR) SIDE
1 1/2" C LR.
4 3/4" 2" CLR. 1 1/4" R 2 4" (TYP.)
TOP
6"
CONNECTING PIN ~ SEE STD. PLAN C-8

45^ 1/2"
S T A
2 - 9"
1 3 EQUAL SPACES
(TYP.)
3/4" DIAM. (ASTM A 36) HOT DIP GALVANIZE AFTER FABRICATION (ASTM A 123)
2 - 8"
10
50 33/64 (TYP.)
"R
3/4" DIAM. LOOP BAR
(TYP.)
10"
11"
SEE STD. PLAN C-8e FOR ANCHOR DETAILS
ALTERNATIVE TEMPORARY CONC. BARRIER (F-SHAPE)

TOP
4 1/2"

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
3"
END DETAIL
JOINING TWO BARRIER SEGMENTS
SECTION
B
2 1 - 4 3/4" 1 1/2" 5 1/2" CONTINUOUS KEYWAY
8" (TYP.)
Ken L. Smith
02-21-07
DATE
END
SECTION
NARROW BASE
NOTE:
PORTATION.
2" DIAM. PINNING HOLE (TYP.) ~ WHEN REQUIRED
2 - 1 1/2"
34042
ALTERNATIVE LOOP BAR
NE E R
3/4" DIAM. LOOP BAR
R I C H A
1/4" DRAFT (TYP.)
1"
8"
6"
2" 4" 2 - 8" 2 - 8" 1 - 2" 1 - 2" 2 - 8" 12" 1"
12"
1"
7"
(TYP.)
5"
10"
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

3" 1 1/2"
2" 1/

NOTES 1. Use Type 1 Anchors when the concrete pavement or bridge deck is 6" or thicker with 2 wide concrete barrier only. Use Type 2 Anchors (Standard Plan K-80.37) with narrow base barrier. Adjust the location of the Type 1 Anchors to avoid the main reinforcing in the deck when drilling holes. Use shims to properly fit the Type 1 Anchors to the barrier and roadway surfaces. Upon removal of the Type 1 Anchors, clean the bolt holes and fill them with grout according to Standard Specification 6.02.3(20). Remove the Type 3 Anchors by first driving the steel pins down through the barrier further into the pavement to allow lifting the barrier without interference, then remove the pins from the pavement.
3/4" EXPANSION BOLT
SHIM ~ SEE NOTE 3
3 M
13/16" DIAM. PL 3/8 3 0-5 1/2

4"
1/ .
IN
2"
13/16" DIAM. HOLE 3"
2.
13/16" DIAM. HOLE
55^
L 3 3 3/8 0-8 3"
3. 4.
4" 8" 1 3/4" 3/4" EXPANSION BOLT W/ HARDENED WASHER (TYP.) ~ 4 1/2" MIN. EMBEDMENT
4" 8" 1 3/4"
5.
PROTECTED WORK AREA TRAFFIC SIDE OR EDGE OF DECK

9" MIN.
TRAFFIC SIDE
TRAFFIC SIDE
1/2 SEGMENT LENGTH 2 - 1" (TYP.) 2 - 1" (TYP.)
ATTACHMENT "A" ~ SEE DETAIL
ATTACHMENT "A" ~ SEE DETAIL ATTACHMENT "B" ~ SEE DETAIL
ATTACHMENT "A" ~ SEE DETAIL
PCCP
PCCP
ATTACHMENT LOCATION (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 2
PLAN VIEW
PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER SECTION (TYP.)
TYPE 1 ANCHOR
SECTION VIEWS
(F-SHAPE SHOWN)
ATTACHMENT LOCATIONS
TYPE 1 ANCHOR
TYPE 1 ANCHOR
TEMPORARY INSTALLATION OF PRECAST CONC. BARRIER TYPE 2 (STD. PLAN C-8) AND TEMPORARY CONC. BARRIER (F-SHAPE) (STD. PLAN K-80.30) ON CEMENT CONC. PAVEMENT OR BRIDGE DECK
S T A
TRAFFIC SIDE
PROTECTED WORK AREA
TRAFFIC SIDE
TRAFFIC
2 - 0"
SIDE
PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER SECTION (TYP.)
1 - 0" HMA 11" MIN. (TYP.) HMA 1 - 0" PINNING HOLE (TYP.) ~ ONLY REQUIRED ON TRAFFIC SIDE(S) OF BARRIER 2 - 0"
TEMPORARY CONC. BARRIER ANCHORING
1" DIAM. 30" GALVANIZED STEEL PIN (TYP.)

.)
PLAN VIEW

TYPE 3 ANCHOR
TWO PINS REQUIRED PER TRAFFIC SIDE ~ FOUR PINS TOTAL, PER BARRIER SECTION
TWO PINS REQUIRED ON THE TRAFFIC SIDE ~ TWO PINS TOTAL, PER BARRIER SECTION
PIN LOCATIONS
SECTION VIEWS (F-SHAPE SHOWN)
TYPE 3 ANCHOR
TEMPORARY INSTALLATION OF PRECAST CONC. BARRIER TYPE 2 (STD. PLAN C-8) AND TEMPORARY CONC. BARRIER (F-SHAPE) (STD. PLAN K-80.30) ON HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT
Ken L. Smith
02-21-07
DATE
TYPE 3 ANCHOR
PIN LOCATIONS
NOTE:
2" DIAM. PINNING HOLE (TYP.)
50^ (TYP.)
PORTATION.
34042
1 - 0"
R I C H A
NE E R
ATTACHMENT "A" DETAIL
ATTACHMENT "B" DETAIL
6.
After removing the Type 3 Anchors, clean the pin holes and fill them with sealant according to Standard Specification 9-04.2.
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P
" 18 (T Y P

DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA 3/4" EXPANSION BOLT WITH HARDENED WASHER (TYP.) 3" SHIM ~ SEE NOTE 4 1 1/2"
1/ 2" 1

NOTES 1.
FOR CLASS 1: 1 1/16" DIAM. HOLE
FOR CLASS 1: PL 1/2 3 0-5 1/2 FOR CLASS 2: PL 3/8 3 0-5 1/2 FOR CLASS 1: 1 1/16" DIAM. HOLE
The intended use of this plan is for the temporary installation of Alternative Temporary Concrete Barrier (F-Shape), Narrow Base (see Standard Plan K-80.30) on cement concrete pavement or bridge deck. Use Class 1 when the concrete pavement or bridge deck is 9" or thicker; use Class 2 when it is 6" or thicker. Adjust the location of the anchors to avoid the main reinforcing in the deck when drilling holes. Use shims to properly fit the anchors to the barrier and roadway surfaces. Upon removal of the anchors, clean the bolt holes and fill them with grout according to Standard Specification 6.02.3(20).
3 M
13/16" DIAM.
4"
1/ .
IN
2"
FOR CLASS 2: 13/16" DIAM. HOLE
2.
3" 55^
3.
3"
FOR CLASS 2: 13/16" DIAM. HOLE
FOR CLASS 1: L 3 3 1/2 0-8 FOR CLASS 2: L 3 3 3/8 0-8
4. 5.
4" 8"
4" 8"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
ATTACHMENT "A" DETAIL
FOR CLASS 2: 3/4" EXPANSION BOLT WITH 4 1/2" MIN. EMBEDMENT
ATTACHMENT "B" DETAIL
SEGMENT LENGTH = L
L/6
L/3
L/3
L/6
PROTECTED TRAFFIC SIDE WORK AREA OR EDGE OF DECK

ATTACHMENT LOCATION (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 3 CLASS 1: 6" MIN. CLASS 2: 9" MIN. NARROW BASE, ALTERNATIVE TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER SEGMENT
PLAN VIEW
S T A
ATTACHMENT "A" ~ SEE DETAIL PCCP
ATTACHMENT "B" ~ SEE DETAIL SEGMENT LENGTH = L
L/8
L/4
L/4
L/4
L/8
SECTION VIEW
TEMPORARY CONC. BARRIER ANCHORING ~ NARROW

ATTACHMENT LOCATION (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 3 NARROW BASE, ALTERNATIVE TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER SEGMENT
TYPE 2 ANCHOR: CLASS 1 & 2


PLAN VIEW
TYPE 2 ANCHOR: CLASS 2

Ken L. Smith
02-21-07
DATE
PORTATION.
34042
NOTE:
TYPE 2 ANCHOR: CLASS 1
R I C H A
NARROW BASE, ALTERNATIVE TEMPORARY CONC. BARRIER
NE E R
FOR CLASS 1: 1" EXPANSION BOLT WITH 6" MIN. EMBEDMENT
N I B L A
N O T
F O R P

1000 MAX. TO PULL POST 2 STRAND BARBED WIRE 9 " WIRE CINCH STAY (TYP.) 1 5 " 14 - 0" MAX. 14 - 0" MAX. END, CORNER, OR GATE POST

NOTES 1. The bracing and pull post details for Wire Fence Type 2 are the same as for Type 1. 2. Attach the wire mesh to the posts using four fasteners. Three additional fasteners per post are required within and at the limits of sag conditions. Use additional fasteners on posts which mark the angle point of any sudden change in topography. 3. See Standard Specification 9-16.2(1) for wood post sizes. Wood anchors (for wood posts) shall be 24 lumber, 12" long minimum, and fastened with three 16d galvanized nails.
2 "
60^ MIN. WIRE MESH 832-6-12-1/2 LINE POST W/ ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) 18" SQUARE 6 " (TYP.) ( TYP. ) 65^ MAX.
2 -6 "
4 -4 "
7 "
BRACE (TYP.)
BRACE
12" ROUND (TYP.)
WIRE FENCE TYPE 1

(STEEL POSTS SHOWN)
1000 MAX. TO PULL POST 14 - 0" MAX. 4 " WIRE CINCH STAY (TYP.) 14 - 0" MAX. 2 STRAND BARBED WIRE (TYP.) ~ SPACED @ 12" 1 5 " 60^ MIN. 65^ MAX. 4 -6 " 60^ MIN. 65^ MAX. END, CORNER, OR GATE POST 60^ MIN. 65^ MAX.
CORNER POST
END POST
CORNER BRACING
2 -6 " (SHOWN FOR WIRE FENCE TYPE 1) 60^ MIN. 65^ MAX. LINE POST W/ ANCHOR PLATE (TYP.) 6 " (TYP.) ( TYP. ) 12" ROUND (TYP.) 14 - 0" MAX. ADDITIONAL FASTENERS BRACE (TYP.) 1 5 " ~ SEE NOTE 2 18" SQUARE
INTERSECTION BRACING
(SHOWN FOR WIRE FENCE TYPE 1)
WIRE FENCE TYPE 2

(STEEL POSTS SHOWN) PULL POST ~ SPACED @ 1000 MAX.
S T A
60^ MIN. 65^ MAX.
60^ MIN. 65^ MAX. DEADMAN GUY WIRE
INTERMEDIATE BRACING / PULL POST

(SHOWN FOR WIRE FENCE TYPE 1)
GRADE DEPRESSION (SAG) DETAIL

(STEEL POSTS SHOWN)
STEEL POSTS AND BRACES

3 1/2"
32350
POST AND RAIL SPECIFICATIONS
1 5/8"
WIRE FENCE TYPES 1 & 2

2 1 / 4 " 3 1 / 2 " 1 7 / 8 "
PIPE POST
ROLL FORMED
H - COLUMN
T-POST
AND WIRE GATES
NOM. SIZE (SCH. 40) I.D.
STANDARD PLAN L-10.10-01

SECTION
WEIGHT (lb/ft)
WEIGHT (lb/ft)
WEIGHT (lb/ft)
END, CORNER, OR PULL POST
2 1/2" DIAM.
5.10 FABRIC LOOP
FENCE LINE
1 5/8"
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
LINE OR BRACE POST
2" DIAM.
1.85
3.26
3.10
~ 2 SIDES
H - COLUMN
O T
NE E R
1 4 "
DOCUM ENT
S D N N
F O R P

8 - 0" END, CORNER, OR GATE POST ~ SEE NOTE 3 BRACE POST ~ SEE NOTE 3 WOOD BRACE 1 2 " 1 2 " ~ SEE NOTE 3 LINE POST SPACING @ 14 - 0" CENTERS BRACE POST ~ SEE NOTE 3 WOOD BRACE (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 3 8 - 0"

8 - 0" BRACE POST PULL POST ~ SPACED @ 1000 MAX. ~ SEE NOTE 3 ~ SEE NOTE 3 WOOD BRACE (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 3 CORNER POST ~ SEE NOTE 3 BRACE POST (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 3
4 -6 "
4 -6 " 7 -0 "
7 -1 0 "
6 "( TYP. )
3 -4 "
2 -6 "
6 "
6 "
BRACE WIRE 4 " WOOD ANCHOR (TYP.)
4 "
WOOD ANCHOR (TYP.) ~ SEE NOTE 3
BRACE WIRE (TYP.) BRACE WIRE (TYP.) BRACE POST
2 -6 "
1 2 "
1 2 "
4" (TYP.)
END BRACING
(WIRE FENCE TYPE 1 SHOWN)
INTERMEDIATE BRACING / PULL POST

(WIRE FENCE TYPE 1 SHOWN) WOOD BRACE ~ SEE NOTE 3 END POST ~ SEE NOTE 3
~ SEE NOTE 3
8 - 0" BRACE POST ~ SEE NOTE 3 1 2 " WOOD BRACE ~ SEE NOTE 3 2 -6 " GATE POST ~ SEE NOTE 3
CORNER BRACING
BRACE WIRE WOOD ANCHOR (TYP.)
GATE BRACING
DOCUM ENT
WOOD POSTS AND BRACES
INTERSECTION BRACING
S T A
SINGLE WIRE GATE 14 FT. WIDE ~ PAY LIMIT 14 - 0" BRACE (TYP.) ~ NPC 1" PIPE FRAME ~ NPC 1" PIPE
DOUBLE WIRE GATE 20 FT. WIDE ~ PAY LIMIT 10 - 0" FRAME (TYP.) ~ NPC 1" PIPE 10 - 0" BRACE (TYP.) ~ NPC 1" PIPE GATE POST (TYP.)
GATE POST (TYP.)
32350
BRACE (TYP.) 4 -0 " 4 -6 " 4 -0 " 4 -6 "
BRACE (TYP.)
WIRE FENCE TYPES 1 & 2 AND WIRE GATES
STANDARD PLAN L-10.10-01

SHEET 2 OF 2 SHEETS TRUSS ROD ~ 3/8" DIAM. TRUSS ROD (TYP.) ~ 3/8" DIAM. 12" SQUARE APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION
Pasco Bakotich III

SINGLE GATE
(STEEL POSTS SHOWN)
06-16-11
DATE
DOUBLE GATE
(STEEL POSTS SHOWN)
GATES
O T
NE E R
~ SEE NOTE 3
3 -4 "
WOOD ANCHOR (TYP.)
4 -6 "
1 2 "
2 -6 "
3 -4 "
3 -4 "
S D N N
F O R P


NOTE When Specified in the Contract Plans, the HOV Symbol Marking shall be installed with an offset of 1 foot max. from the lane centerline.
HOV LANE
2 - 6"
1 - 3"
2"
YP 8" (T
.)
S T A
MARKING AREA 11.40 SQ.FT.
HOV LANE SYMBOL
HIGH OCCUPANCY VEHICLE (HOV) LANE SYMBOL LAYOUT
STANDARD PLAN M-7.50-01

Ken L. Smith
LAYOUT
01-30-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
CITY STREET SPACING = 80 FEET MIN.
HIGHWAY SPACING = 1000 FEET MAX.
2"
6 - 0"
DIRECTION OF
TRAVEL
12 - 0"
R E I N A N O
F O R P


1 - 0"
2 - 8"
3 - 0"
6 - 0"
TRAFFIC
BICYCLE LANE
TOTAL MARKING AREA 10.27 SQ.FT.
S T A
GRID IS 1" SQUARE
6"
BIKE RIDER SYMBOL DETAIL KEY NOTES BIKE LANE ARROW DETAIL
BICYCLE LANE SYMBOL LAYOUT STANDARD PLAN M-9.50-01

SHEET 1 OF 1 SHEET
BICYCLE LANE SYMBOL LAYOUT
Bid Item "Bicycle Lane Symbol" includes Bike Lane Arrow and Bike Rider Symbol. GENERAL NOTE 2 x 6 White Bike Lane Arrow See contract for location and material requirements.
Ken L. Smith
01-30-07
DATE
Bike Rider Symbol
NOTE:
PORTATION.
EDGE OF BIKE LANE
3"
25335
WIDE LANE LINE
T H E O
. T R EJ E R P O A W D EO F S H I N G
T
NE E R
6 - 0"
6 - 0"
6 - 0"
6 - 0"
R E I N A N O
F O R P

4" 1 P.) (TY

8 - 0"
4" 1 P.) Y (T
GENERAL NOTE See contract for location and material requirements.
1 - 2" 7 - 0" 15 4 20 - 0" 15 4
STOP LINE 2
STOP LINE 2
MPH
25 30 35 40
50 Ft. 100 Ft. 150 Ft. 225 Ft. 300 Ft. 375 Ft. 1 450 Ft. 550 Ft. 650 Ft.
LANE
LANE 1 - 8" 20 20
45 50 55
4 - 0"
4 - 0"
60 65
SYMBOL DETAIL
6 - 0"
7 - 0"
*
16
~ ~ 30
~ ~ 30
T H E O
SEE CONTRACT. 23
S T A
1 - 8"
1 - 8"
GRID IS 1" SQUARE
"R" DETAIL SYMBOL DETAIL

EDGE LINE LANE LINE OR ROADWAY CENTERLINE 2 LANE LINE OR ROADWAY CENTERLINE 2 EDGE LINE
KEY NOTES LAYOUT

1 1 TOTAL MARKING AREA (PER 12 WIDE LANE) = 109.75 SQ.FT. 2
LAYOUT Bid Item "Railroad Crossing Symbol" includes "X" symbol, letters, and two 24" white transverse lines. 24" white transverse line W10-1 Advance Warning Sign (not included in RR Crossing Symbol Bid Item) Place Stop Line 15 from the nearest rail or approximately 8 feet from RR gate, if present.
RAILROAD CROSSING LAYOUT STANDARD PLAN M-11.10-01

TOTAL MARKING AREA (PER 12 WIDE LANE) = 111.59 SQ.FT.
STANDARD SYMBOL
ALTERNATIVE SYMBOL
Ken L. Smith
01-30-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
DIMENSIONS SHOWN * ARE APPROXIMATE.
T
NE E R
(SEE TABLE)
(SEE TABLE)
16
6 - 0"
23
20 - 0"
6 - 0"
R E I N A N O
F O R P


ROADWAY
SHOULDER AREA 1 1 WIDE FOR 4 SHOULDERS 2 WIDE FOR SHOULDERS OVER 4 WIDE INSTALL CROSSWALK LINES IN SHOULDER AREAS ONLY WHEN ADJACENT TO A SIDEWALK OR A SEPARATE WALKWAY (TYP.) 2 (TYP.) 1
LANE
CROSSWALK LINE SIDEWALK SIDEWALK MIN.
1 MIN.
STOP LINE
EDGE OF CONCRETE GUTTER
EDGE OF TRAVELED WAY LANE LANE
SHOULDER AREA SHOULDER SHOULDER
DETAIL
INSTALL CROSSWALK LINES PARALLEL TO THE ROADWAY
NOTES 1. 2. See the Contract Plans for locations of crosswalk centerlines. To the maximum extent possible, curb ramp centerline should be perpendicular to the crosswalk centerline. To the maximum extent possible, crosswalks should be perpendicular to the centerline of the traveled way.
3.
SIDEWALK
SIDEWALK
T H E O
S T A
T
SHOULDER
SHOULDER
25335
CROSSWALK LAYOUT STANDARD PLAN M-15.10-01

Ken L. Smith
02-06-07
DATE
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
NOTE:
NE E R
EDGE OF PAVEMENT, OR FACE OF CURB (WITHOUT GUTTER), OR EDGE OF GUTTER PAN (WHEN THERE IS CURB & GUTTER) (TYP.)
5 MAX. (TYP.)
R E I N A N O
F O R P

A
10 - 0" 4" 4" 23" 4" 23" 4" 23" 4" 23" 4" 4"
GENERAL NOTE See Standard Plan M-20.10 for pattern and color requirements.
4" 4" 23"
4"
23"
4"
23"
4"
TOP VIEW
B
TOP VIEW
B
PERSPECTIVE VIEW SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW
PROFILED PLASTIC
FOR:
CENTER LINE & LANE LINE ~ W = 4" NO-PASS LINE & TWO-WAY LEFT-TURN CENTER LINE ~ W = 4" REVERSIBLE LANE LINE ~ W = 4" WIDE BROKEN LANE LINE ~ W = 8"
A A
2 - 0" 3 - 0" 10" 4" 4" 20"
PROFILED PLASTIC
(SOLID LINE)
FOR:
NO-PASS LINE ~ W = 4"
DOUBLE CENTER LINE & DOUBLE LANE LINE ~ W = 4" EDGE LINE & SOLID LANE LINE ~ W = 4" WIDE LANE LINE & WIDE LINE ~ W = 8" DOUBLE WIDE LANE LINE ~ W = 8" BARRIER CENTER LINE ~ W = 20"
4" 4"
~ ~1" (TYP.)
100 TO 300 MILS
10"
4"
4" W 4" 160 MILS MIN. 15 TO 30 MILS

60
3 1/2"
90 MILS MIN.
TOP VIEW TOP VIEW

C DETAIL C B
TOP VIEW
B
500 MILS MIN.
SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW
SIDE VIEW
DETAIL B
7 1/2"
CENTER LINE & LANE LINE NO-PASS LINE & TWO-WAY LEFT-TURN CENTER LINE DOTTED EXTENSION LINE ~ W = 4" WIDE DOTTED LANE LINE ~ W = 8"
60 ~ ~ 33/
DROP LANE LINE ~ W = 8"

64
EMBOSSED PLASTIC
(SOLID OR BROKEN LINE)
FOR:
REVERSIBLE LANE LINE DOUBLE CENTER LINE & DOUBLE LANE LINE EDGE LINE & SOLID LANE LINE
500 MILS MIN.
(BROKEN LINE)
S T A
SECTION
23"
4"
NOT TO SCALE 160 MILS MIN. DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA 15 TO 30 MILS 1/4" 500 MILS MIN. 1/4"
TOP VIEW
160 MILS MIN. 100 TO 300 MILS 15 TO 30 MILS 1/4" 500 MILS MIN. 1/4"
PROFILED AND EMBOSSED PLASTIC LINES STANDARD PLAN M-20.20-01

SIDE VIEW
Ken L. Smith
01-30-07
DATE
PROFILED EMBOSSED PLASTIC

(SOLID OR BROKEN LINE)
FOR:
CENTER LINE & LANE LINE NO-PASS LINE TWO-WAY LEFT-TURN CENTER LINE
REVERSIBLE LANE LINE DOUBLE CENTER LINE & DOUBLE LANE LINE EDGE LINE & SOLID LANE LINE
PORTATION.
25335
NE E R
~ ~1"
~ ~1"
0" TO 2"
4"
0" TO 2"
~ ~1"
~ ~1"
~ ~1"
0" TO 2"
4"
NOTE:
T H E O
T
PROFILED PLASTIC
(BROKEN LINE)
TWO-WAY LEFT-TURN CENTER LINE ~ W = 4"
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTE
SYMBOL & LANE
SYMBOL & LANE
2 - 0"
1 - 10" 1 - 8"
Use the dimensions shown on this plan for each type Traffic Arrow being placed on roadways with a posted speed limit of 45 mph or higher.
4 - 4"
ELLIPSE "A"
1 - 8"
4 - 8"
CENTER POINT OF ELLIPSES
ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
2 - 8"
ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
ELLIPSE "B"
T H E O
S T A
6"
1 - 0"
TYPE 2R (RIGHT)
1 - 0" 1 - 8" 2 - 4" ELLIPSE "A" AXIS MIRROR IMAGE OF 1 - 4" ~ ELLIPSE "B" AXIS TYPE 2L TRAFFIC ARROW
TRAFFIC ARROW
TYPE 1 TRAFFIC ARROW TYPE 2L (LEFT) TRAFFIC ARROW
SYMBOL MARKINGS TRAFFIC ARROWS FOR HIGH SPEED ROADWAYS STANDARD PLAN M-24.20-01
Harold J. Peterfeso
05-31-06
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NE E R
GRID IS 4" SQUARE
NOTE:
3 - 4"
T
7 - 4"
12 - 0"
8 - 8"
12 - 0"
1 - 4"
5 - 8"
R E I N A N O
F O R P

SYMBOL & LANE DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA

2 - 0" 1 - 2" SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE 3 - 2"
2 - 6" 1 - 0" 1 - 6" 1 - 8"
SYMBOL & LANE
6 - 0"
4 - 4"
7 - 0"
ELLIPSE "A"
1 - 4"
2 - 0" 12 - 0"
1 - 8"
ELLIPSE "B"
20 - 0"
ELLIPSE "A" 4 - 4"
1 - 4"
CENTER POINT OF ELLIPSES 3 - 4" MARKING AREA 28.40 SQ.FT.
ELLIPSE "B" ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
S T A
8"
1 - 0"
2 - 0" ~ ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
1 - 8"
1 - 0" ~ ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
TYPE 4 TRAFFIC ARROW

3 - 4" 3 - 0" MARKING AREA 33.82 SQ.FT.
GRID IS 4" SQUARE
1 - 0"
1 - 0"
TYPE 3R (RIGHT) TRAFFIC ARROW
Harold J. Peterfeso
05-31-06
DATE
1 - 8"
2 - 4" MIRROR IMAGE OF ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
TYPE 3L (LEFT) TRAFFIC ARROW
TYPE 3L TRAFFIC ARROW
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
4 - 8"
T
5 - 8"
GRID IS 4" SQUARE
NE E R
1 - 8"
4 - 8"
1 - 8"
ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
2 - 8"
ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
5 - 8"
R E I N A N O
2 - 8"
F O R P


LANE
3 - 6"
1 - 6"
S B YM OL
~ ~ 3 - 1" (~ ~ 3.08)
" -0
6 - 0"
SYMBOL & LANE CENTERLINE
" -0
7 - 0"
2 - 0"
1 - 8"
20 33/64
1 - 4"
TYPE 6R (RIGHT) TRAFFIC ARROW

MIRROR IMAGE OF TYPE 6L ELLIPSE "A" ELLIPSE "A" AXIS (MIRRORED ABOUT LANE CENTERLINE) (SHOWN AT REDUCED SCALE)
ELLIPSE "B" 5 - 8"
S T A
3 - 0"
3 - 4"
MARKING AREA 45.17 SQ.FT. GRID IS 4" SQUARE MARKING AREA 35.88 SQ.FT.
SHEET 3 OF 3 SHEETS
1 - 0"
1 - 0"
" -0
TYPE 6L (LEFT)
2 - 4" ~ ELLIPSE "A" AXIS 1 - 8"
Harold J. Peterfeso
05-31-06
DATE
TRAFFIC ARROW
NOTE:
PORTATION.
25335
45 33/6
ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
T H E O
4 - 8"
T
NE E R
3 " -0 18 " -0
20 - 0"
4 - 4"
1 - 8"
9 " -0
R E I N A N O
2 - 8"
" -0
F O R P

SYMBOL & LANE

NOTE Use the dimensions shown on this plan for each type Traffic Arrow being placed on roadways with a posted speed limit of 40 mph or lower.
1 - 4" 1 - 0" SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE 2 - 4"
1 - 3"
1 - 2"
SYMBOL & LANE
SYMBOL & LANE
1 - 8" 8" 1 - 0" 2 - 8"
ELLIPSE "A"
5 - 0"
1 - 0"
8"
5 - 8"
MARKING AREA 7.73 SQ.FT. 4 - 1" 4 - 7" 8 - 0"
ELLIPSE "A" AXIS

PORTATION. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.
3 - 8"
TYPE 2SR (RIGHT) TRAFFIC ARROW

MIRROR IMAGE OF TYPE 2SL TRAFFIC ARROW (SHOWN AT REDUCED SCALE) 1 - 2" 1 - 4"
ELLIPSE "B"
MARKING AREA 12.86 SQ.FT. MARKING AREA 8.03 SQ.FT. 1 - 4"
CENTER POINT OF ELLIPSES 2 - 4"
1 - 2"
SYMBOL & LANE CENTERLINE ELLIPSE "A" 13 - 4" 2 - 8"
GRID IS 4" SQUARE
8"
TYPE 4S
2 - 8" 4" 8"
TRAFFIC ARROW
ELLIPSE "B"
1 - 6" ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
1 - 2"
ELLIPSE "A" 1 - 0" ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
8"
10" ~ ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
1 - 0"
ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
ELLIPSE "B"
ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
3 - 0"
TRAFFIC ARROW
3 - 8"
TYPE 1S
2 - 0"
S T A

MIRROR IMAGE OF TYPE 3SL TRAFFIC ARROW (SHOWN AT REDUCED SCALE)
GRID IS 4" SQUARE
25335
GRID IS 4" SQUARE DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA MARKING AREA 14.83 SQ.FT. 1 - 2" MARKING AREA 7.73 SQ.FT. 1 - 2" 1 - 6" ELLIPSE "A" AXIS 10" ~ ELLIPSE "B" AXIS 8" 10" ~ ELLIPSE "B" AXIS 1 - 6" ELLIPSE "A" AXIS 8" 8"
SYMBOL MARKINGS TRAFFIC ARROWS FOR LOW SPEED ROADWAYS STANDARD PLAN M-24.40-01
TYPE 3SL (LEFT) TRAFFIC ARROW
Harold J. Peterfeso
05-31-06
DATE
8 - 0"
3 - 8"
T H E O
ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
3 - 0"
T
NOTE:
NE E R
8"
2 - 0"
ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
8 - 0"
3 - 0"
2 - 0"
R E I N A N O
F O R P

SYMBOL & LANE

LANE
SY
4 - 8" 2 - 0" 4"
O MB L
~ ~ 2 - 5/8" ~ 2.05) (~
2 - 4"
1 - 0"
2 " -0
" -0
20 33/64 SYMBOL & LANE CENTERLINE 5 - 4"
4 - 1"
4 - 7"
8"
9 - 8"
1 - 4"
1 - 2"

MIRROR IMAGE OF TYPE 6SL (MIRRORED ABOUT LANE CENTERLINE) (SHOWN AT REDUCED SCALE)
1 - 0"
ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
ELLIPSE "A" ELLIPSE "B" ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
2 - 0"
60 33/6
2 - 4"
S T A
8"

8" 8"
1 - 6" DRAWN BY: MARK SUJKA MARKING AREA 19.58 SQ.FT. ELLIPSE "A" AXIS
1 - 2"
10" ~ ELLIPSE "B" AXIS
SYMBOL MARKINGS TRAFFIC ARROWS FOR LOW SPEED ROADWAYS


TYPE 7S TRAFFIC ARROW
Harold J. Peterfeso
05-31-06
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
GRID IS 4" SQUARE
NOTE:
8"
T H E O
T
NE E R
1 " -6 12 " -0
13 - 4"
2 - 8"
8"
23 - 4"
6 " -0
3 " -6
3 - 0"
3 - 8"
16 - 0"
R E I N A N O
F O R P

18 - 8" DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL
7 - 8" REVERSE CURVE ELLIPSES ARE SYMMETRICAL ABOUT
1 - 8"
5 - 0" 3 - 4" 1 - 4" 1 - 2"
4 - 7" 4 - 1" 3 - 0"
10"
3 - 4" 5 - 0" 1 - 2"
CENTER POINT OF ELLIPSES (TYP.)
~ ~5 - 6 7/8"
~ ~2 7/8"
1 - 4"
2 - 0" 3 - 0" 2 - 0" 2 - 8" 0

SCALE
~ ~ 6 - 5 1/8"
GRIDS ARE 4" SQUARE ASSUME POINTS NOT DIMENSIONED TO BE COINCIDENT WITH GRID LINES 1
DETAIL
L C T
J O
S T A
.N C I S B N W H S FA H O I N
E T
TYPE TC
18.56 SQ.FT.
TYPE LTC
24.19 SQ.FT.
TYPE TRC
23.07 SQ.FT.
TYPE LTRC
28.70 SQ.FT.
COMPONENT KEY
THE LABELED AREAS ABOVE CORRESPOND TO THE PORTIONS NEEDED FOR EACH TYPE OF ROUNDABOUT TRAFFIC ARROW.
29115
COMMON
TYPE T
15.07 SQ.FT.
TYPE LT
20.69 SQ.FT.
TYPE TR
19.58 SQ.FT.
TYPE LTR
25.20 SQ.FT.
FOR EXAMPLE: THE ROUNDABOUT TRAFFIC ARROW TYPE TRC REQUIRES THE "COMMON", "T", "R", AND "C" AREAS.
ROUNDABOUT TRAFFIC ARROWS STANDARD PLAN M-24.50-00

X/2
PAVEMENT MARKING ~ ROUNDABOUT TRAFFIC ARROW

X
C
LANE
R TYPE LC
18.07 SQ.FT.
COMMON
ROUNDABOUT TRAFFIC ARROW TYPE TRC

CENTER THE ARROW ON THE LANE CENTERLINE BETWEEN THE LATERAL EXTREMITIES OF THAT ARROW TYPE.
Pasco Bakotich III

06-16-11
DATE
NOTE:
NE E R
2 - 2"
1 - 6"
1 - 6"
6 - 0"
T E N O
F O R P


NOTES 1. See Standard Plan M-40.10 for Guide Post details. See plans for guide post requirements between interchanges. Guide posts shall be placed at 100 spacing on ramp tangents and tapers. "S" dimension shown on Standard Plan M-40.40 or 100, whichever is smaller. One half of "S" dimension shown on Standard Plan M-40.40 or 50, whichever is smaller. Two spaces at 100. Three equal spaces when R < 75, four equal spaces when R =75. Two equal spaces.
2. LEGEND 3. 4.
TYPE W NOTE 6 TYPE Y
5.
SEE TYPE DEFINITIONS, STD. PLAN M-40.10
6. 7. 8.
NO
TE
NOTE 7
NOTE 5 NOTE 4
NOTE 2
NOTE 1
NOTE 8 (TYP.)
NOTE 1
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 7 NOTE 4
BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PORTATION. THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT
NO
S T A
25335
GUIDE POST PLACEMENT INTERCHANGES STANDARD PLAN M-40.20-00

Pasco Bakotich III

10-12-07
DATE
NOTE:
NOTE 6
2 TE
T H E O
T
NE E R
Locate the initial Guide Post so that it does not hinder the visibility of the Bridge Delineator for approaching traffic. The distance between the bridge end and the initial Guide Post shall be 50 feet maximum.
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTE See Standard Plan M-40.10 for Guide Post details.
THREE EQUAL SPACES WHEN R < 75

Y
FOUR EQUAL SPACES WHEN R
= 75
X Y
100 DECELERATION TAPER

Y
40
60
100 (TYP.)
R
X
200 500
DIVIDED HIGHWAY
REFLECTIVE SHEETING APPLICATIONS

TYPE G1 TYPE G2
THREE EQUAL SPACES WHEN R < 75
FOUR EQUAL SPACES WHEN R
= 75
S T A
G1
G2 X Y R R G2 4" 4" 8" WHITE 4" 4" WHITE G1 Y BACK SIDE 3" FACING TRAFFIC 3" BACK SIDE 3"
LEGEND
FACING TRAFFIC 3"
TYPE W
TYPE WW
TYPE Y
8"
SEE TYPE DEFINITIONS, STD. PLAN M-40.10 4"
WHITE 4"
WHITE 4"
GUIDE POST PLACEMENT GRADE INTERSECTIONS

WHITE G1 G2
WHITE 4" 8"

8" GREEN
UNDIVIDED HIGHWAY
WITHOUT ILLUMINATION GREEN
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


S
GUIDE POST SPACING

(FEET)
S
NOTE 1
RADIUS
50 115 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 700
S
20 25
N O T E 3
30 35 40 50 55 65 70 75 PC PT
S
PT
PC
NOTES 1. The first guide post is positioned "S" distance from the beginning of curvature. If the last guide post beyond the curve is 1/2 "S" or more, no additional posts are required. If the last guide post beyond the curve is less than 1/2 "S", one additional post is required. See Standard Plan M-40.10 for Guide Post details.
900 1,000 1,200 1,700 2,300 2,900 3,700 4,500 5,500 6,500 7,600 8,800 10,000 R>10,000
85 90 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 300 NOTE 1
N O T
3.
TWO-WAY UNDIVIDED HIGHWAYS

S
4.
GUIDE POSTS ON OUTSIDE OF CURVE IN DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
LEGEND
TYPE W
TYPE WW
INTERPOLATE FROM THE TABLE FOR RADII NOT SHOWN
TYPE Y
SEE TYPE DEFINITIONS, STD. PLAN M-40.10 NOTE 1
1/
S
T H E O
NOTE 2
1/2 S
S T A
NOTE 3
S
TE
3
N O TE
PC NOTE 1
1/2
1/2 S
GUIDE POST PLACEMENT HORIZONTAL CURVES STANDARD PLAN M-40.40-00

1/2 S
MULTI-LANE DIVIDED HIGHWAYS

GUIDE POSTS ON INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF CURVE FOR EACH DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
1/2
T
PT
NE E R
800
80
2.
R E I N A N O
F O R P
SEE NOTE 1 (TYP.)
LEGEND
TYPE W
TYPE WW
TYPE Y
NOTES
100 (TYP.)
1.
Locate the initial Guide Post so that it does not hinder the visibility of the Bridge Delineator for approaching traffic. The distance between the bridge end and the initial Guide Post shall be 50 feet max. Locate the initial Guide Post so that its visibility is unhindered for traffic departing the bridge. The distance between the bridge end and the initial Guide Post shall be 50 feet max. See Standard Plan M-40.10 for Guide Post details.
DIVIDED HIGHWAY
2.
3.
100 (TYP.)
SEE NOTE 2 (TYP.)
S T A
GUIDE POST PLACEMENT BRIDGES

SEE NOTE 1 (TYP.)

Pasco Bakotich III
09-20-07
DATE
UNDIVIDED HIGHWAY
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
R E I N A N O
F O R P


NOTE See Standard Plan M-40.10 for Guide Post details.
CROSSOVER C L
100
100
100
100
100
100
TYPE W
TYPE Y
MEDIAN CROSSOVERS
S T A
100 (TYP.)
TAPER
LANE REDUCTIONS
GUIDE POST PLACEMENT MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD PLAN M-40.60-00

Pasco Bakotich III

09-20-07
DATE
PORTATION.
25335
NOTE:
T H E O
T
NE E R
LEGEND
R E I N A N O
F O R P

12" R. M AX .
5" 35/64 1/2"
12" ~ TYPES 2 AND 4 16" ~ TYPE 3
3/8"
3/8"
MILLED UNIT
UNIT SECTION ISOMETRIC VIEW
UNIT SECTION
TYPICAL SHOULDER INSTALLATION
SHOULDER
SHOULDER
S T A
E T
N G
EDGE LINE SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIP SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIP
SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIP TYPES 2, 3, AND 4 FOR UNDIVIDED HIGHWAYS

PERSPECTIVE VIEW

UNDIVIDED HIGHWAY
(TYPE 4 PATTERN SHOWN)
Pasco Bakotich III

06-27-11
DATE
PORTATION.
24557
NOTE:
EDGE LINE
B A K
T
NE E R
I I I O O N
F O R P

DRAWN BY: FERN LIDDELL 48 MILLED UNITS 12 OR 16 GAP 48 MILLED UNITS
EDGE OF PAVED SHOULDER ~ EPS
EDGE LINE MINOR ROAD TAPER
SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIPS
TAPER
EDGE LINE
TYPE 3
28 MILLED UNITS 12 GAP
~ 16 GAP AND 16" WIDE STRIP
MAJOR ROAD TERMINATE SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIPS 40 MINIMUM FROM THE BEGINNING OR END OF EACH RIGHT TURN RADIUS.
28 MILLED UNITS
12 GAP
28 MILLED UNITS
EDGE OF PAVED SHOULDER ~ EPS
EDGE LINE 40 MIN. 40 MIN.
SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIPS
RADIUS POINT OF RIGHT TURN RADIUS (TYP.)
EDGE LINE
TYPE 4
~ 12" WIDE STRIP
EPS
RUMBLE STRIP PLACEMENT AT INTERSECTIONS
1 SHOULDER
NECESSITATING A REDUCTION IN SHOULDER WIDTH
S T A
E T
N G
SHOULDER 1 100 MIN. RUMBLE STRIPS SHALL NOT BE PLACED ON BRIDGE APPROACH SLABS 60 MIN. 1
SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIP TYPES 2, 3, AND 4 FOR UNDIVIDED HIGHWAYS STANDARD PLAN M-60.20-02
NOT LESS THAN 4 ~ PROVIDE 5 WHEN BARRIER OR GUARDRAIL IS PLACED AT EDGE OF SHOULDER
Pasco Bakotich III
06-27-11
DATE
SHOULDER TAPER DETAIL
PORTATION.
SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIPS (TYP.)
24557
NOTE:
B A K
T
60 MIN.
STRUCTURE OR OTHER FEATURE
100 MIN.
NE E R
TYPE 2
EPS ~ 12 GAP AND 12" WIDE STRIP
TERMINATE SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIPS AT THE BEGINNING OR END OF EACH RIGHT TURN TAPER.
I I I O O N
F O R P

Standard Plans Manual 2011-2012

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Standard Plans Manual 2011-2012

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

Environmental and Engineering Programs

JUMP TO A SECTION IN THE TABLE OF CONTENTS: ABCDEFGHIJKLM

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Information

Title VI Notice to Public

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

_____________________________ Pasco Bakotich III State Design Engineer

Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

From: ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________

Date: ____________________ Phone: ____________________

Subject: Standard Plans Manual Comment

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

Preserve this original for future use Submit copies only

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTI VE: J ANUARY 7 , 2 0 0 8 TO AUGUST 3 , 2 0 0 8

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: JANUARY 7, 2008 TO AUGUST 3, 2008

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

EFFECTIVE: AUGUST 1, 2011 TO August 5, 2012

EFFECTI VE: AUGUST 1 , 2 0 1 1 TO Augus t5 , 2 0 1 2

Publication Approval Date

2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets 2 Sheets

Drainage Structures and Hydraulics

From:

Date: Phone: